Cataloging  Rules 


Cataloging  Rules 

with 
explanations  and  illustrations 


PREPARED  BY 

DORCAS  FELLOWS 

INSTRUCTOR  IN  ADVANCED  CATALOGING 
NEW  YORK  STATE  LIBRARY  SCHOOL 


SECOND  EDITION 
REVISED  AND  ENLARGED 


NEW  YORK 

THE  H.  W.  WILSON  COMPANY 

LONDON:  GRAFTON  6C  CO. 

1922 


Copyright  1922 

by 

THE  H.  W.  WILSON  COMPANY 

Published    March   1922 
Printed  In  the^United  States  of  America 


DEDICATED 

TO 

DR  MELVIL  DEWEY 
FOUNDER   OF   THE   FIRST    LIBRARY    SCHOOL 

AND 

THE  LEADER 

TO  WHOM 

ALL  LIBRARY  WORKERS 

ARE  UNDER  INFINITE  OBLIGATION 


SUMMARIZED    CONTENTS 


For  the  convenience  of  those 
ment  of  any  of  the  subjects  listed 
is  given  on  the  following  pages. 

PAGE 

Preface    l 

The    value   of    a   knowledge   of 

cataloging   5 

General  directions  and  sugges- 
tions     8 

Author  entries    I0 

Subject    entries    38 

Subject   references    47 

Title  entries    55 

Editors,  compilers  and  trans- 
lators     58 

Illustrators   etc 62 

General    secondary   entries    64 

Notes :    miscellaneous    67 

Joint  authors  69 

Name  references   78 

Compiler,  editor  or  translator  as 

author 82 

Series   notes    85 

Series  entries    87 

Contents    97 

Incomplete  works 106 

Pseudonyms  and  other  pen  names  no 

Anonymous    books    117 

Initials  120 

Partial  titles;  Binder's  titles, 
Cover  titles,  Half-titles,  and 
Running  titles;  Changed  titles, 
including     translations     under 

different    titles    131 


who  desire   an  outline  of  the   treat- 
below  an  analytic  table  of  contents 

PAGE 

Anonymous  classics  and  Sacred 

books    144 

Voluminous    authors    155 

Collections  under  title  159 

Analytics  164 

Independents   185 

Added    editions    192 

Indexes,  Keys,  Supplements,  At- 
lases  and   Portfolios    199 

Periodicals    202 

Almanacs  and  Yearbooks  231 

Directories    232 

Corporate    entries    233 

Government  documents   236 

Miscellaneous    printed     material  245 

Art  objects,  natural  history 
specimens  and  miscellaneous 
objects    260 

Appendixes 268 

App.i  Fiction       and       other 

forms  of  literature   268 

App.2  Biography    270 

App.3  Authority    list    273 

App.4  Guides  280 

App.5  Lists    of   articles   and 
abbreviations    289 

\  Index   293 


Vll 


ANALYTIC  CONTENTS 

For  a  bird's-eye  view  of  the  contents  sec  page  vii. 


SECTION'  PAGE 

Preface    i 

The    value    of    a    knowledge    of 

cataloging   5 

General  directions  and 

suggestions    ....  8 

1  Handwritten   cards    8 

a  Legibility 8 

b  Space  between  words 8 

c  Space  between  groups....  8 

d  Other    spacing    8 

2  Typewritten    cards    8 

c  Space  at  top  of  card  ....  8 
b  Cards     evenly    placed     on 

roller    8 

c  Position   with    relation    to 

vertical    rules    8 

d  Space  between  lines   8 

e  Clear  cut  impression    ....  8 
/  Spacing  in  person's   name 

when    inverted    8 

g  Space    before    distinguish- 
ing   marks    9 

h  Spacing   in   headings   with 

subdivisions    9 

i  Spacing    in    title    9 

/    Division  between  syllables  9 

k  Division  of  personal  names  9 
/   Separation      of      numeral 

from  abbreviation 10 

111  Space  in  imprint  and  colla- 
tion     10 

11  Contents    10 

o  Copyright  date 10 

p  Figure  1    10 

q  Fractions     10 

r  Exceptions  to  rules 10 

j  Neatness    1 

3  Capitalization 1 

4  Numerals     1 

5  Abbreviations     1 

a  In    headings     1 

b  In    titles    1 

6  Punctuation    I 

a  General  authorities    1 

b  Period    1 

c  Quotation   marks    12 

d  Brackets    12 

e  Marks  of  omission    12 

/  Alternative    title    12 

g  Subtitle    13 

h  Statement    of    edition    etc.  [3 

i    Tmprint    13 

j  Double  punctuation   13 


SECTION  PACE 

7  Extension    cards     14 

8  Class  work   14 

a  Routine    14 

b  Volumes    tied   together    ..  15 

c  Revision    15 

Author  entries 16 

9  Purpose  16 

10  Form    16 

11  Definitions    17 

12  Author  heading   18 

a  Form    18 

b  Titles  of   honor,  etc 18 

c  Incomplete  names 19 

d  Position     20 

13  Title    20 

c  Position   20 

b  Fulness  and  wording  ....  20 

c  Edition 21 

d  Omissions   22 

e  Initial    article    22 

( 1 )  Omission    22 

(2)  Article  in  curves 23 

(3)  Articles     in      various 
languages    23 

/  Author's  name    23 

g  Fulness  of  names 24 

h  Additions    24 

1  Misprints     or     errors      in 

spelling 24 

j  Modified  vowels 24 

k  Accents    24 

/    Numerals    24 

111  Capitals    and     punctuation  25 

14  Imprint    25 

a  Spacing    25 

b  Place  and  publisher    25 

(1)  Abbreviations           for 
places    of     publication  25 

(2)  Place-name     followed 

by    state    26 

(3)  Foreign  places   26 

(4)  Place  not  given 26 

(5)  Publisher's  name   ....  26 

(6)  More   than   one  place 
and  publisher    27 

(7)  Different    volumes    in 
different    places    27 

(S)   More    than    one   place 

for  the  same  publisher  27 

(9)    More    than    one    pub- 
lisher in  the  same  place  27 
c  Date    28 

(1)   Dales    other    than    of 

Christian   era    28 


IX 


CATALOGING  RULES 


SECTIOX  PAGE 

(2)  False    dates    28 

(3)  Different          volumes 
with  different  dates  . .  28 

(4)  Substitutes     for     im- 
print   date    28 

(5)  Copyright  date  differ- 
ing from  imprint  date  29 

15     Collation    29 

a  Language  and  arrangement  29 

b  Position  29 

c  Fulness 29 

d  Volumes   29 

e  Paging   30 

(1)  Last    numbered    page 

a   verso    30 

(2)  Last    numbered    page 

a  recto  30 

(3)  Misprint    30 

(4)  More    than    one    im- 
portant   group    30 

(5)  Inclusive 31 

(6)  Supplied  or  corrected 
page    numbers     31 

(7)  Leaves  31 

(8)  Columns   31 

(9)  Numbering  omitted  . .  31 
(10)  Volumes    paged    con- 
tinuously      31 

/  Illustrations    31 

(1)  Specifications  and  ar- 
rangement    31 

(2)  Definitions    32 

(3)  Mention  in   title    33 

(4)  Few  illustrations   ....  33 

(5)  Number    of     illustra- 
tions      33 

(6)  Colored   illustrations  33 

(7)  Music    33 

(8)  Fuller    specifications  33 
9  Size 34 

(1)  Variations  in  a  set  ..  34 

(2)  Atlases  and  portfolios  34 

(3)  Oversized  volumes   . .  34 
:6     Call  number 35 

a  Definition    35 

b  Position     3:5 

c  Color    35 

d  Letters  and  figures   35 

e  Variations  in  call  numbers 

for  a  set   35 

17  Accession  number 36 

18  Signature    37 


Subject    entries    . . 

19  Purpose  

20  Form    

21  Subject    heading     

a  Choice  of  headings 

b  Color    

c  Position   

d  Punctuation  and  spacing 

22  Author's  name    


38 

38 
38 
40 
40 
40 
41 
41 
42 


SECTION  PAGE 

a  Position  42 

b  Fulness    42 

23  Title 44 

o  Position     44 

b  Length  44 

c  Other  details   44 

24  Imprint,    collation    and    call 
number 44 

25  Tracing   44 

a  Definition    44 

b  Form    44 

c  Position  45 

d  Color    45 

Subject  references   ...  47 

26  Definition    47 

27  Purpose   47 

28  "See"  reference 47 

29  "See  also"  reference    47 

30  Form    47 

a  Specific   references    47 

( 1 )  Definition   47 

(2)  Position  and  color   . .  47 

(3)  Additional    references  48 

(4)  Arrangement 48 

b  General  references    50 

31  Color  in  references  52 

32  Fulness    of    forms    52 

33  Reference       from       subject 
heading  to  author  heading  . .  53 

34  Call  numbers  and  tracing  . .  53 

35  Filing   53 

Title  entries   55 

36  Purpose   55 

37  Form    55 

a  Position   of   title    55 

b  Length  of  title  55 

c  Marks  of  omission    55 

d  Editors,  translators  etc.  . .  56 

e  Imprint    56 

/  Collation    56 

g  Author's  name    56 

h  Call  number    56 

Editors,  compilers  and 

translators  58 

38  Definitions    58 

39  Names  of  editors  etc.  in  title  58 

40  Desirability  of  added  entries  58 

41  Two  or  more  editors,  com- 
pilers or  translators 58 

42  Form    58 

a  Heading  for  editor  etc...  58 

b  Author's  name   59 

c  Title    59 

d  Tmprint  and  collation  ....  59 

e  Call  number 59  ' 

Illustrators  etc 62 

43  Illustrators    62 

a  Main  entry  under  illustra- 
tor    62 


ANALYTIC   CONTENTS 


SECTION  PAGE 

b  Added   entry    under   illus- 
trator      62 

c  Importance    of    illustrator  62 

d  Form   for  illustrator  card  63 

44  Binders,  publishers,  reporters  63 

General  secondary  entries  64 

45  Definition    64 

46  Treatment    64 

Notes:  miscellaneous  ..  67 

47  Scope  and  order   67 

48  Where  given   67 

49  Form 67 

50  Sequels  and   supplements    . .  68 

51  Position 68 

52  Indention 68 

Joint  authors 69 

53  Definition    69 

54  Treatment 69 

a  Method    1     69 

(1)  Books  by  two  or  three 
authors 69 

(2)  Books   by   more   than 
three  authors 71 

(3)  Title  on  main  card  . .  71 

(4)  Title  on  added   entry 
joint  author  cards  ....  72 

(5)  Imprint  and  collation  72 

(6)  Subject,    title,    editor 
cards,  etc 72 

b  Method  2 73 

(1)  Heading      for      main 
card    73 

(2)  Title  on  main  card  . .  73 

(3)  Added  entry  joint  au- 
thor cards  73 

(4)  Imprint   and  collation  72, 
c  Method    3     75 

(1)  Main  entry 75 

(2)  Added  entry  joint  au- 
thor  cards    75 

(3)  Other  added  entries  . .  75 

55  Relative  advantages  and  dis- 
advantages of  different  meth- 
ods      76 

Name  references  ....  78 

56  When    made    78 

57  Fulness    78 

58  Color    78 

59  Examples    78 

Compiler,  editor  or  translator 

as  author 82 

60  Main  entry  82 

61  Treatment  of  name 82 

62  Title,    imprint,    collation    etc.  82 

63  Compiler  etc.  in  the  second- 
ary relation 82 


SECTION  PAGE 

64  Joint    compilers    etc.    as    au- 
thors       83 

Series  notes    85 

65  Definitions    85 

66  When  given  85 

67  Where  found 85 

68  Form    85 

69  Position  86 

Series  entries 87 

70  Definitions  of   series   entry  87 

71  When    made    87 

72  Form    87 

a  Heading    87 

(1)  Variations  in  name  of 
series    88 

(2)  Position  and  indention  89 

(3)  Editor's  name  includ- 
ed in   name   of    series  89 

(4)  Entry  under  editor's 
name •  89 

(5)  Series  consisting  of 
works  by  the  same 
author 89 

(6)  Abbreviations   90 

(7)  Wording 90 

(8)  Punctuation  90 

b  Entries  for  separate  works  90 

(1)  Items  included 90 

(2)  Position  of  entries 
and  number  of  lines  . .  91 

(3)  Indention    91 

(4)  Arrangement  of  items 

by  author 91 

(5)  Arrangement  of  items 

by  subject  91 

(6)  Examples  of  arrange- 
ment     92 

c  Editor   reference    92 

d  Tracing    ■.  93 

(1)  Series    entries    ......  93 

(2)  References  to  series 
cards 93 

c  Title-page    checks    93 

Contents  97 

72,     When    given    97 

74  Where  given    07 

75  Inclusion  and  form  97 

76  Arrangement    98 

77  Position  99 

7S     Indention 99 

79    Punctuation    99 

So    Substitutes  for  contents  ....  104 

a  In    title    104 

b  In  general  note  105 

c  Condensed 105 

Incomplete  works    . . .  106 

81  How    received    106 

82  Information  liable  to  change  106 


XI 


CATALOGING  RULES 


SECTION  PAGE 

a  First  and  last  volumes  both 

at    hand    106 

b  First  or  last  volume  want- 
ing    106 

c  Small   part   of   a   set    106 

d  Imprint      date      liable      to 

change    107 

83     Added    entries    107 

S4     Contents    107 

a  Alphabetic    contents    107 

b  Chronologic  contents 107 

c  Contents    on    both    author 

and   subject  cards    108 

Pseudonyms  and   other   pen 
names 

85  Definitions  of  pseudonym   .  . 

86  Entry 

a  Choice   of  heading    

b  Entry  under  pseudonym  . . 
c  Entry  under  real  name  . . . 
d  Both  real  name  and  pseud- 
onym on  title-page   

e  Double  entry 

87  Name  references   

88  Title  cards  

89  Pen  names  which  are  parts 

of  real  names   

a  Heading  and  reference   . . 

b  Name  in  title 

c  Title  cards    

90  Sobriquets,  nicknames  etc.  . . 

Anonymous  books   .  . . 

91  Definitions    

92  Treatment 

a  Author   known    

(1)  Identifying  phrases  .. 

(2)  Title   cards    

b  Author    unknown    

(1)  Alain  entry 

(2)  Added    entries    

(3)  Identifying  phrases  . . 

(4)  Author     found     after 
book  is  cataloged  .... 

(5)  Title  cards 

c  Anonymous  books — By  tin 

author    of     

d  Reference        from       well- 
known    titles    

Initials     


93 


Author's    name    known    .... 

a  Main  entry 

b  Added  entries  

c  Treatment    of    the    initials 

(1 )  Method  1  :  general 
secondary  entries   .... 

(2)  Method  2:  references 
from  initials  without 
book  title    


SECTION  PAGE 

(3)  Method  3:  references 
from  initials  with  book 
title   120 

94  Author's  name  unknown  ....    125 
a  Anonymous  treatment  ....    125 

(1)  General  secondary  en- 
tries  under   initials    . .    125 

(2)  Author's  name  found 
later    125 

b  Initials  etc.  used  as  author 
heading    127 

(1)  Treatment   of    initials 

in  title-page  order  ....  127 

(2)  Author's  name  found 
later    127 

(3)  Title  cards 128 

Partial  titles;  Binder's  titles, 
Cover  titles,  Half-titles  and 
Running  titles;  Changed  titles, 
including     translations     under 

different  titles 131 

95  Partial    title    131 

96  Binder's  titles,  Cover  titles, 
Half-titles  and  Running 
titles   132 

97  Changed   titles    133 

a  Varieties    133 

b  Treatment 133 

(1)  References  from  title 
not    in    library    137 

(a)  Author    reference  137 

(b)  Title  reference  . .    137 

(2)  When  references  are 
not  made  for  missing 
titles    138 

(a)  Title     138 

(b)  Subject   138 

(c)  Editor,    translator 

etc 138 

(3)  Notes 138 

(4)  Call    numbers     139 

(5)  Tracing 139 

98  Translations   under  different 

titles    139 

a  Alternative  method   141 

Anonymous  classics  and   Sacred 

books    144 

09     General    treatment    144 

a  Parts   of   anonymous  clas- 
sics      145 

b  Selected    list    of    headings  145 

c  Bible  146 

(1)  Bibles  in  two  lan- 
guages      147 

(2)  Old  Testament  and 
New  Testament  in 
heading    147 

(3)  References   147 

(4)  Form   entries    147 

(5)  Editor  and  translator 
cards     147 


Xll 


ANALYTIC   CONTEXTS 


SECTION*  PAGE 

(6)  Title  entries    148 

(7)  Series   cards    148 

(8)  Capitalization    148 

(9)  Arrangement 149 

(10)  Commentaries   140 

(11)  Paraphrases    150 

Voluminous   authors    .  .    155 

100  Definition    1 55 

101  Author    heading     155 

102  Title   entries    155 

103  Catch  title  in  author  item  on 
title  and  editor  cards   156 

104  Editor   card    in    series    form  156 

Collections  under  title  . .    159 

105  Main    entry    159 

106  Added  entries 159 

107  Author's     names    mentioned  159 

Analytics 164 

10S  Definitions    164 

109  Scope    t  64 

a  Author   analytics    164 

(1)  Author  of  the  part 
same  as  author  of  the 
work  as  a  whole   ....    165 

(2)  Author  of  the  part 
different   from   author 

of  the  work  as  a  whole  165 
(a)   Analytics  vs  joint 

authors 165 

(3)  Heading  for  main  en- 
try when  the  work  is 
one  calling  for  analytic 
treatment    166 

(4)  Names  of  authors  in 
title,   contents   or   note  166 

(5)  Author  of  analytic 
same  as  editor  of  the 
book    167 

b  Subject  analytics    167 

c  Title    analytics    16S 

d  Editor    analytics,    etc    ... 

e  Combinations   16S 

no  Method    of    treatment    

a  Division  by  plan  of  paging  16S 

b  Author's   name    

c  Title    inn 

d  Imprint    1 70 

1  illation    170 

/  Reference    to    main    work  170 

Form    of    analytic    entries  170 

h  Punctuation     and     spacing  170 

1  <  all  numbers 171 

;"  Tracing  171 

k  Continuous    paging    171 

/  Separate  paging 177 

;;/  Both   continuous  and  sep- 
arate  paging    170 

n    Analytic     within     an    ana- 
lytic      r8o 


SECTION*  PAGE 

0  Short  form  analytics   ....   181 
p  Alternative  methods 183 

Independents  185 

1 1 1  Definition    185 

112  Independents  vs  separately 
paged  analytics   1S5 

113  Treatment  of  independents  as 
distinguished   from   analytics  1S5 

a  Size 186 

b  Tracing  for  the  volume  as 

a    whole    186 

c  Tracing    of    added    entries 

for      independents      other 

than  the  first  1S6 

d  Note  of  contents  on  main 

card    186 

e  Note  of  contents  on  other 

cards     1S6 

114  Treatment  of  independents 
and  separately  paged  ana- 
lytics in  the  same  way iSS 

a  Treatment  of  all  as  inde- 
pendents       iSS 

b  Treatment  of  all  as  ana- 
lytics      1S9 

(1)  Title-pages     189 

(2)  Contents  189 

(3)  Cataloging   189 

Added  editions 192 

115  Definition   of   edition    192 

116  Definition    of    added   edition  193 

117  Treatment  of  added  editions  193 

a  Author's  name    194 

b  Title   194 

(1)  Titles  wholly  or  partly 
identical     194 

(2)  Longer  entries   added 

to    shorter    194 

(3)  More    than    two    edi- 
tions      I'M 

(4)  Different  editors    ....  195 

(5)  Slight     variations     in 
title 195 

c  Imprint,  collation  and 
series    note     i"1" 

d  Notes   105 

e  Treatment  of  author's 
name  and  of  title  on  main 
vs  secondary  cards    106 

/  Onli  r    i«i"    entries    

g  Call  numbers  196 

h  Accession  numbers   196 

Indexes,     Keys.     Supplements, 
Atlases    and    Portfolios      199 
n8  Treated   like  added  editions  199 

Periodicals     202 

mm  Definitions    

[20  General    treatment     202 

i_'i    Form  entry 202 


Xlll 


CATALOGING  RULES 


SECTION  PAGE 

122  Fulness   of    description    203 

1 23  Groups   203 

124  Complete   finished   sets    203 

a  Main  entry 203 

( 1 )  Position    203 

(2)  Title 204 

(a)  Frequency  of  pub- 
lication    204 

(b)  Editors    204 

(c)  Dates  covered  by 
volumes   204 

(d)  Abbreviations  for 
months  205 

(e)  Information    sup- 
plied    or     omitted  205 

(3)  Imprint   205 

(a)  Place  changed  . . .  205 

(b)  Publisher  changed  205 

(c)  Imprint  dates 205 

(4)  Collation 205 

(5)  Notes 206 

(a)  Order  of  arrange- 
ment     206 

(b)  Indention    206 

(c)  Items  combined  . .  206 

(6)  Indexes  207 

(7)  Supplements 207 

b  Added  entries  for  subjects, 

editors  etc 208 

( 1 )  Importance    208 

(2)  Position    20S 

(3)  Form    208 

(a)  Subject  cards  ....   208 

(b)  Editor  cards   208 

(c)  General  secondary 
cards  209 

125  Call  numbers  209 

126  Accession   numbers    209 

127  Capitalization  209 

128  Complete  current  sets 213 

a  Main    entry    213 

(1)  Title 213 

(a)   Dates   covered    . .  213 

(2)  Imprint 213 

(3)  Collation 214 

(4)  Notes     215 

(5)  Indexes 215 

b  Added  entries  for  subjects, 

editors  etc 215 

(1)  Importance    and    posi- 
tion       215 

(2)  Subject     215 

(3)  Editor   cards,    general 
secondary     cards    etc.  215 

r  Call    numbers    216 

d  Accession  numbers    216 

e  Periodical    no    longer    re- 
ceived      216 

129  Incomplete    sets    220 

a  Main  entry   220 

Ci)   Sets     slightly     incom- 
plete       220 


SECTION"  PACE 

(a)  Note   for  missing 
parts  220 

(b)  v.i    wanting    220 

(2)  Sets  decidedly  incom- 
plete      220 

(a)  Place     and     pub- 
lisher      221 

(b)  Illustrations     221 

(c)  Size 221 

(d)  "Library         has" 
statement 221 

(e)  Mi  seel-  notes 223 

(f)  Indexes 223 

(g)  Completion         of 
sets    223 

b  Added  entries  for  subjects, 
editors  etc 223 

(1)  Importance  and  posi- 
tion      223 

(2)  Subject    ...    224 

(3)  Editor   cards,    general 
secondary  cards  etc.  . .  224 

c  Call  numbers  and  accession 
numbers     224 

130  Added     entries     for    partial 
titles    226 

131  Changed  titles   227 

a  Decided   changes    227 

b  Slight  changes    227 

c  Editor  cards,  general  sec- 
ondary cards  etc 227 

132  "Merged     in"    or    "Incorpo- 
rated with"   228 

133  New      York      state      library 
method  229 

Almanacs  and  Yearbooks    231 

134  Treatment  231 

a  Place 231 

/>  Volumes    231 

Directories     232 

135  Treatment     232 

Corporate  entries 233 

136  Corporate    vs    personal    au- 
thors    233 

137  Definitions    233 

138  Form  of  entry    233 

139  Complete  works  vs  serials  ..   234 

140  Reports    234 

a  Complete  works 234 

b  Serials    234 

t  ir    \ntlinr  retained  in  title  ....   234 
T42  Publisher     234 

143  Spacing  in  headings 235 

144  Brackets    235 

a  Variation    from    title-page  235 
b  Matter  supplied 235 


Government  documents     236 
1  15  Government    documents    vs 

society  publications   236 


XIV 


ANALYTIC  CONTENTS 


SECTION  PAGE 

146  Change  in  author  or  title  . .  236 

147  Reference  list 236 

148  Author  heading    237 

a  Inverted      vs      uninvertcd 

forms    237 

149  Main   entry    238 

150  General  secondary  entries  . .  238 

151  References    239 

a  From    names    of    depart- 
ments   etc 239 

b  From    chiefs     of     depart- 
ments      239 

c  From    magistrates    240 

152  Subject  entry  vs  reference  . .  241 
- 153  "Library  has"  statement 241 

154  Indexed  sets    242 

155  Analytics     242 

156  Publisher    243 

157  Series    notes    244 

Miscellaneous    printed 

material    245 

158  Series    cards    for    addresses, 
bulletins,  society  publications, 

etc 245 

159  Extracts  and  separates    ....  246 

160  Selections     from     a     single 
work  of  an  author  247 

161  Criticism    249 

a  General    criticism     249 

b  Special  criticism  249 

c  Colored  cards   250 

162  Dramatizations,  parodies  etc.  251 

163  Attributed   author    252 

a  Doubtful    authorship    ....  252 

b  Mistaken    authorship    252 

c  Erroneously  listed 253 

d  Call   numbers   and   tracing  253 

164  Analytics  in   series  form    . .  253 

165  Pamphlets  254 

166  Clippings   255 

167  Maps 256 

168  Printed    forms    257 

Art     objects,     natural     history 
specimens    and    miscellaneous 

objects 260 

169  Purpose  of  the  chapter  ....  260 

170  Catalog     entries     260 

a  Main  entry 260 

b  Title    260 

c  Use    of    photography    ....   262 
d  Details    to   be   noted    ....  262 

171  Value  of  special  catalog  ....  263 

172  Inclusion  of  entries  in  main 
catalog  263 

173  Reading  lists   263 

174  Photograph  collection 263 

175  Lantern  slides  265 


SECTION"  PAGE 

176  Form  of  special  catalog 265 

177  Prints    and    Music    267 

Appendixes    268 

App.l  Fiction  and  other  forms 

of  literature  268 

App.2  Biography   270 

Autobiography 270 

Letters  271 

Life   and    letters    271 

Correspondence     272 

App.3  Authority  list  273 

Scope    273 

Purpose  273 

Value   273 

Form  of  entry    274 

a  Heading     for     either 
main  or  added  entry  . .  274 

b  Title  and  imprint 274 

c  Details  for  added  en- 
try slips  274 

d  Citations   275 

e  Reference  tracing 276 

/  Reference  slips  ......  276 

g  Societies,     institutions 

etc 276 

h  Anonymous       classics 

and  Sacred  books...  276 
i  Anonymous  book  (au- 
thor unknown)    276 

j  Series  headings 277 

k  Signature    277 

Corrections   and   additions  277 
Subject  headings  list   ....  278 

a  Color    278 

b  Form  of  entry   278 

c  Authority  citations    . .  279 

App.4  Guides 280 

Definition  and  purpose    . .  280 

Styles  of   guides    280 

Systems  of  guiding 281 

Printed    guides     . 283 

Guides  bearing  additional 
directions  and  informa- 
tion       284 

Protected   tabs    285 

Lettering  285 

Frequency  of   guides    ....   286 
Uses   other    than    for   dic- 
tionary   catalogs    286 

Labeling    trays    287 

App.5  Lists  of  articles  and  ab- 
breviations       289 

Articles  in  various  lan- 
guages       289 

Colon     abbreviations     for 

forenames   290 

Personal  titles  2or 

Places  of  publication    ....   29J 

Index    293 


XV 


CATALOGING   RULES 

PREFACE 

The  following  code  of  rules  is  a  revision  of  Library  School 
Bulletin  36,  issued  by  the  New  York  State  Library,  which  was 
in  turn  a  revision  of  the  stenciled  directions  used  in  conducting 
the  cataloging  course  in  the  New  York  State  Library  School, 
1911-1914.  These  directions  were  first  prepared  to  save  the  time 
previously  devoted  to  note-taking  in  class,  and  to  furnish  fuller 
information  than  could  be  given  in  class  or  otherwise  be  provided 
in  the  limited  time  devoted  to  the  course,  with  a  view  to  furnish- 
ing not  only  the  instructions  necessary  for  class  exercises  but  a 
compilation  useful  for  reference  in  later  work.  With  these  aims 
in  mind  the  attempt  was  made  to  answer  as  many  as  possible  of 
the  questions  which  had  arisen  in  the  author's  experience  in  the 
actual  work  of  cataloging  and  in  years  of  contact  with  library 
school  students.  As  a  result  numerous  details  were  included  which 
may  to  many  seem  petty  and  superfluous  but  which  had  shown 
themselves  to  be  very  substantial  stumbling  blocks  to  persons  first 
struggling  with  the  actual  problems. 

In  preparing  the  work  as  a  textbook  for  the  Library  School 
it  was  recognized  that  different  local  conditions  called  for  different 
treatment  and  an  attempt  was  accordingly  made,  by  explanatory 
statements  and  by  suggestions  of  alternative  methods,  to  give  a 
somewhat  broad  view  and  to  make  the  rules  adaptable  to  vary- 
ing needs.  That  feature  has  in  this  second  edition  received  still 
further  attention,  with  special  reference  to  the  smaller  libraries  and 
to  the  courses  in  summer  schools,  while  certain  minute  specifica- 
tions, originally  included  merely  for  the  author's  convenience  in 
class  work,  have  been  omitted.  In  the  case  of  alternative  methods 
an  individual  library  should  choose  the  one  which  seems  best  adapted 
to  its  needs,  allowing  variations  in  very  exceptional  instances  only. 

The  work  is  based  on  Catalog  rules,  author  and  title  entries, 
compiled  by  committees  of  the  American  Library  Association  and 
the  {British)  Library  Association;  American  edition,  T908  (cited 
for  convenience  as  . /.  L.  A.  rules),  to  which  (as  well  as  to  Cutter's 
Rules  for  a  dictionary  catalog;  .////  edition.  T904,  cited  as  Cutter 
and  to  the  Library  of  Congress  rules)   frequent  reference  is  made, 

1 


CATALOGING    RULES 

the  intention  being  not  to  take  the  place  of  the  A.  L.  A.  code,  but 
rather  to  serve  as  an  introduction  to  it  and  enable  catalogers  to  use 
it  with  a  better  understanding.  Many,  however,  of  the  most  im- 
portant of  the  A.  L.  A.  rules  and  definitions  have  been  quoted  in 
the  following  pages,  specially  for  the  purpose  of  facilitating  the 
work  in  summer  schools,  where  it  is  planned  to  give  the  most  pos- 
sible instruction  in  the  least  possible  time.  No  attempt  has  been 
made  to  take  up  all  the  rules  in  the  A.  L.  A.  code,  but  mainly  those 
topics  commonly  met  in  the  work  of  cataloging,  in  the  belief  that 
students  well  grounded  in  these  should,  through  the  very  full  pro- 
vision made  in  the  A.  L.  A.  rules,  be  able  to  adapt  themselves  to 
any  ordinary  conditions. 

The  few  variations  from  the  A.  L.  A.  rules  have  been  chiefly 
in  the  interests  of  simplification ;  first  in  the  belief  that  it  was  bet- 
ter that  library  school  students  should,  while  cataloging  fully  enough 
to  become  accustomed  to  noticing  details,  still  find  time  to  handle 
a  considerable  number  of  books  rather  than  a  smaller  number  with 
more  minute  specifications ;  and,  second,  with  a  view  to  presenting 
on  the  card  such  information  as  would  probably  be  of  reasonably 
general  interest  to  readers.  In  some  cases  also  a  modification  has 
been  adopted  with  a  special  view  to  manuscript  cataloging  in  dis- 
tinction from  printed  entries,  for  which  the  A.  L.  A.  recommenda- 
tion seemed  specially  designed.  Supplementing  the  A.  L.  A.  provi- 
sion for  author  and  title  entries  the  following  directions  take  up  also 
forms  for  the  subject  entries  and  subject  references  which  form 
so  important  a  part  of  a  dictionary  catalog. 

To  Miss  Corinne  Bacon,  formerly  instructor  in  the  New  York 
State  Library  School,  we  owe  an  inestimable  debt.  After  the  de- 
struction by  fire  in  March  1911,  of  all  the  Library  School  equip- 
ment, she  generously  lent  to  us  her  own  notes  on  the  courses  which 
she  had  previously  given,  and  those  notes  are  to  a  very  great  ex- 
tent incorporated  in  the  present  rules.  Others  to  whom  grateful 
acknowledgment  is  due  are  Mr.  J.  C.  M.  Hanson  and  Mr.  W.  W. 
Bishop,  the  past  and  present  chairmen  of  the  A.  L.  A.  committee  on 
catalog  rules,  Mr  Charles  Martel,  chief  of  the  catalog  division  of 
the  Library  of  Congress,  and  Miss  Mary  E.  Hazeltine,  preceptor 
of  the  Wisconsin  Library  School,  for  cordial  permission  to  make 
such  use  as  seemed  best  of  the  codes  of  rules  which  they  officially 
represent,  and  to  various  members  of  the  New  York  State  Library 
staff  and  Library  School  faculty,  specially  the  director,  Dr.  James 
I.  Wyer,  for  his  sympathetic  and  generally  helpful  attitude,  and 
Miss  Florence  Woodworth  and  Miss  Edna  M.  Sanderson,  for  their 


PREFACE 


ever-ready  counsel  and  encouragement,  also  Miss  Isabella  K. 
Rhodes,  the  present  instructor  in  cataloging  in  the  New  York  State 
Library  School,  for  invaluable  assistance  in  reconstructing  the  course 
after  the  fire,  as  well  as  for  numerous  later  suggestions,  to  Miss 
Katharine  Dame,  Miss  Jean  Hawkins  and  Miss  Mary  E.  Hyde, 
former  instructors  in  the  State  Library  School,  and  Miss  Caroline 
Wandell,  formerly  of  the  Syracuse  University  Library  School,  for 
helpful  suggestions  and  for  material  directly  contributed  to  the 
present  edition,  to  instructors  in  other  library  schools  for  scattered 
criticisms  and  suggestions,  and  by  no  means  least  to  Miss  Ada 
Alice  Jones,  to  whose  instruction  in  cataloging  the  author  owes  the 
chief  part  of  her  knowledge  of  the  subject. 

Thanks  should  likewise  be  specifically  rendered  to  Miss  Mary 
Ellis,  New  York  State  Library  indexer,  for  the  carefully  prepared 
index,  which  adds  so  greatly  to  the  usefulness  of  the  publication, 
and  to  Miss  Helen  W.  Tompkins,  head  classifier  of  the  New  York 
State  Library,  for  valuable  aid  in  both  the  earliest  and  the  latest 
stages  of  the  work ;  also  to  the  publisher,  Mr.  H.  W.  Wilson,  for  his 
cordial  cooperation  with  the  author's  endeavor  to  bring  about  the 
most  satisfactory  possible  results,  and  to  Miss  Edith  M.  Phelps, 
of  the  H.  W.  Wilson  Company,  for  her  interested  and  careful  super- 
vision of  the  work  as  it  passed  through  the  press. 

To  the  A.  L.  A.  Publishing  Board  also  thanks  are  extended  for 
permission  to  include  in  the  present  edition  material  appearing  in 
the  earlier  edition  but  afterward  covered  by  A.  L.  A.  copyright. 

The  primary  purpose  of  the  book,  namely  as  a  textbook  for 
courses  in  cataloging,  is  responsible  for  the  plan  of  arrangement, 
which  has  in  view  the  presentation  of  topics  in  such  order  as  will 
readily  lend  itself  to  graded  lists  of  illustrative  material  for  class 
work,  beginning  with  the  simplest  and  most  common  features,  and 
advancing  to  the  more  difficult  and  less  frequent  types.  In  many 
cases  the  sample  cards  have  been  adapted  from  printed  entries  with- 
out the  illustrative  book  at  hand  and  might,  on  comparison  with 
the  book,  be  found  to  differ  in  details  from  the  directions  in  the 
following  code,  but  the  examples  were  chosen  as  seeming  to  meet 
the  need  better  than  any  other  material  at  the  moment  available, 
and  if  due  allowance  is  made  in  view  of  this  explanation  it  will 
perhaps  prevent  misunderstanding. 

In  a  number  of  cases  the  directions  given  in  the  earlier  edition 
have  been  altered,  generally  for  the  purpose  of  conforming  to  the 
methods  used  on  Library  of  Congress  cards.  With  this  in  view 
the  Library  of  Congress  rules  have  been  carefully  consulted  and 

3 


CATALOGING    RULES 

frequently  adopted  exactly.  In  some  details,  however,  perhaps 
through  oversight,  or  heeause  the  methods  most  desirable  for  printed 
cards  do  not  seem  best  adapted  to  manuscript  or  typewritten  cards, 
or  to  secure  briefer  treatment,  the  present  rules  still  lack  consistency 
with  Library  of  Congress  usage.  Libraries  desiring  such  consis- 
tency should  obtain  a  copy  of  the  Library  of  Congress  rules  from 
the  card  division  of  the  Library  of  Congress.  Many  other  libraries, 
not  concerned  for  absolute  consistency,  would  still  find  many  of 
those  rules  of  great  value  in  their  character  of  a  supplement  to 
those  given  in  the  A.  L.  A.  code,  while  some  libraries  would  find 
helpful  suggestions  even  in  certain  of  the  rules  relating  distinctly  to 
the  Library  of  Congress  cataloging  routine.  Detailed  information 
in  regard  to  the  character  of  the  rules  and  their  price  is  given  in 
the  Library  of  Congress'  Handbook  of  card  distribution;  4th  edi- 
tion, 1918,  p.  87-89. 

Not  only  do  varying  conditions  develop  varying  needs  but 
human  nature  is  so  constituted  as  to  make  it  inevitable  that  different 
catalogers  should  differ  in  their  opinions  and  preferences,  even  to 
the  point  occasionally  of  holding  those  directly  opposite.  Con- 
sequently it  is  impossible  to  promise  that  every  suggestion  which 
may  be  made  will  be  adopted  in  a  later  edition,  but  all  criticisms 
will  be  gratefully  received  and  given  a  balanced  consideration,  in 
the  hope  of  combining  them  to  bring  about  the  utmost  possible  im- 
provement. Likewise  the  work  will  doubtless  be  found  in  many 
places  open  to  criticism  due  to  the  hurried  way  in  which  it  was 
prepared,  but  the  pressure  brought  to  bear  in  the  matter  of  issuing 
a  new  edition  was  so  great  that  it  seemed  inadvisable  to  delay  the 
work  to  the  extent  necessary  to  do  it  as  carefully  as  was  to  be 
desired.  It  is  hoped,  however,  that  explanatory  notes  have  been 
sufficiently  introduced  to  prevent  confusion. 

Dorcas  Fellows 
New  York  State  Library 
Albany,  X.    V  ~ 

January  28,  1922 


THE  VALUE  OF  A  KNOWLEDGE  OF  CATALOGING 

Among  those  of  us  who  are  largely  engaged  in  the  work  of 
cataloging  there  are  probably  very  few  who  look  upon  it  as  an  un- 
mixed joy.  Fortunate  we  are,  therefore,  if,  once  in  a  while,  we 
are  privileged  to  have  it  brought  home  to  us,  by  someone  whose 
opinion  we  hold  in  specially  high  regard,  that  our  work  with  all 
its  painstaking  detail  is  worth  the  doing,  primarily  for  the  readers 
to  be  thereby  served  but  none  the  less  truly  for  those  who  are 
trained  to  render  the  service. 

In  1915  the  students  of  the  New  York  State  Library  School 
were  thus  favored  in  the  opportunity  to  listen  to  a  most  inspiring 
address  from  Mr  William  Warner  Bishop.  From  this  address, 
entitled  "Cataloging  as  an  asset"1  a  few  extracts  are,  with 
the  author's  permission,  quoted  below.  The  author,  now  li- 
brarian of  the  University  of  Michigan  and  an  ex-president  of  the 
American  Library  Association,  was  at  the  time  of  the  address 
superintendent  of  the  reading  room  in  the  Library  of  Congress, 
and  spoke  from  the  point  of  view  of  one  who,  having  extended  ex- 
perience in  the  actual  work  of  cataloging  and  therefore  knowing 
its  difficulties  and  trials,  knew  also  its  relation  to  the  other  features 
of  library  administration  and  its  special  importance  as  a  factor  in 
the  ultimate  purpose  of  that  administration — service  to  the  public. 

"It  is  as  a  working  tool  that  I  would  have  you  consider  the 
catalog.  It  is  not  primarily  a  record — remember  that!  Libraries 
keep  some  sort  of  accessions  record  for  business  ends.  But  they 
make  catalogs  for  the  use  of  their  readers.  The  point  is  vital. 
Unless  you  think  of  the  catalog  as  an  instrument,  you  lose  entirely 
the  point  of  view  of  modern  cataloging  practice.  It  is  an  instrument 
whereby  one  can  find  out — if  he  knows  how — whether  the  library 
has  a  book  he  wants,  or  whether  it  has  any  books  on  some  topic 
he  is  interested  in.  It  may  be  used  for  scores  of  other  purposes, 
but  these  two  are  the  prime  reasons  for  its  existence. 

"I  might  go  on  to  show  that  in  almost  every  branch  of  library 
work  a  knowledge  of  cataloging  is  practically  essential.  From  the 
moment  a  book  is  suggested  for  purchase  until  it  lands  in  the  hands 
of  the  first  reader  there  are  a  number  of  processes  to  be  gone 
through,  as  you  of  course  know.  Almost  all  of  these  (save  the 
merely  mechanical)  call  for  an  acquaintance  with  rules  of  entry,  in- 
creasing with  the  size  of  the  library  and  the  complexity  of  its  con- 
tents. In  the  other  processes  of  administering  the  books  added  to 
the  collection  a  knowledge  of  cataloging  is  equally  important.     But 


1  Published  in   [Ql6  by  Williams  &  Wilkin-  Co..   Baltimore. 


CATALOGING    RULES 

it  is  in  reference  work  particularly  that  a  thorough  knowledge  of 
cataloging  counts.  I  can  not  state  too  strongly  the  need  for  ref- 
erence workers  who  are  trained  catalogers.  When  I  hear  anyone  in 
my  force  begin  to  say  'they  do  so  and  so'  in  speaking  of  the  catalog 
and  its  makers,  I  despair  of  him.  Unless  his  thought  (and  his 
word)  is  'the  rule  is  so  and  so,'  he  has  not  the  root  of  the  matter  in 
him  ...  A  reference  assistant  who  doesn't  know  how  to  use  his 
own  and  other  catalogs  is  practically  worthless. 

******** 

"Reference  librarians  must  know  well  cataloging  principles  and 
practice.  But  so  must  all  workers  who  have  to  do  with  library 
records  .  .  .  [Cataloging]  is  not  drudgery.  It  is  not  wasted  ef- 
fort. In  studying  cataloging  you  have  been  learning  the  grammar 
of  your  calling,  the  tools  of  your  trade,  which  will  be  taken  for 
granted  in  the  conduct  of  large  enterprises,  in  the  planning  of  suc- 
cessful librarianship. 

"If,  then,  a  knowledge  of  cataloging  is  a  very  practical  necessity 

for  a  trained  librarian — though  by  no  means   his   sole  necessary 

equipment,  I  hasten  to  add,  lest  we  fall  into  exaggeration— it  would 

seem  to  follow  naturally  that  the  courses  in  that  subject  in  library 

schools  should  prove  one  of  the  most  profitable  and  practical  parts 

of  the  curriculum 

******** 

"I  thmk  I  am  safe  in  saying  that  most  students  in  library  schools 
would  rather  do  anything  else  than  take  up  cataloging  on  graduation. 
They  are  all  for  administration,  for  reference  work,  for  the  charge 
of  branches  or  of  departments  ...  If  I  were  planning  for  the 
best  sort  of  experience  as  a  training  for  later  work,  I  would  urge 
most  library  school  students  on  graduation  to  spend  a  couple  of 
years  in  the  cataloging  department  of  some  good-sized  library.  I 
do  not  know  anything  more  valuable  in  the  way  of  training  in 
accuracy,  in  observation,  in  judgment,  and  in  general  library  skill 
than  such  practical  work  in  cataloging.  In  my  own  work  I  should 
prefer  graduates  with  such  experience  even  to  persons  of  the  same 
equipment  who  had  had  a  couple  of  years  practice  in  reference  work. 
And  I  am  sure  that  as  a  foundation  for  later  service  in  charge  of  a 
library  the  practical  benefit  would  be  very  great. 

"There  are  certain  indirect  results  of  the  study  and  practice  of 
cataloging  which  I  must  at  least  name.  The  extremely  difficult  task 
of  correctly  describing  a  book  or  a  document  becomes  from  repe- 
tition and  criticism  practically  a  habit.  The  work  breeds  a  truly 
accurate  habit  of  mind,  at  least  so  far  as  the  observation  and  noting 
of  certain  externals  go.  Likewise,  a  cataloger  is  not  ordinarily  at 
a  loss  in  an  effort  to  locate  a  book,  or  to  identify  a  citation. 


"There  is  a  certain  pathetic  element  of  transitoriness  and  insta- 
bility about  the  librarian's  calling.    His  work  is  for  the  day,  the  hour 


VALUE   OF   A   KNOWLEDGE   OF   CATALOGING 

...  In  cataloging  .  .  .  there  is  an  element  of  stability  and  per- 
manence which  carries  a  certain  inner  satisfaction  that  is  very  real. 
Non  omriis  moriar  can  be  said  of  each  cataiogers  work.  That  at 
least  is  an  asset  in  a  world  of  change. 

"Here  we  come  back  to  our  beginning,  to  your  aim  as  students 
of  library  science.  If  you  are  to  administer  libraries,  you  must  know 
libraries,  you  must  be  able  to  work  your  machine,  you  must  have 
practical  knowledge  of  its  parts.  Nothing  in  the  craft  should  be 
foreign  to  you,  least  of  all  the  art  of  cataloging." 


X-2f  CATALOGING    RULES 


GENERAL   DIRECTIONS  AND   SUGGESTIONS 

Under  this  heading  have  been  brought  together  a  few  notes 
which,  if  given  when  first  called  for  in  connection  with  the  cards, 
would  be  too  scattered  for  convenient  reference,  or  which  have 
no  immediate  connection  with  any  special  topic  as  taken  up. 

1  Handwritten  cards,  a  Legibility.  All  cards  should  be  writ- 
ten as  neatly  and  legibly  as  possible,  the  disjoined  hand  being  pref- 
erable, since  that  most  closely  resembles  print. 

A  catalog  on  cards,  while  the  only  practicable  form  for  being  kept 
even  approximately  to  date,  is  at  best  tedious  to  consult,  and  the 
reluctance  felt  by  many  readers  toward  its  use  will  be  immeasurably 
increased  if  the  cards  are  difficult  to  read  or  slovenly  in  appearance. 

b  Space  between  zvords.  Sufficient  space  should  be  left  between 
words  to  have  each  stand  as  a  unit,  but  not  enough  to  produce  a 
disconnected  or  straggling  effect. 

c  Space  between  groups.  Between  groups  (i.  e.  between  the 
title  and  the  imprint  and  between  the  collation  and  the  series  note) 
there  should  be  one  centimeter  space  (i.  e.  the  distance  between  the 
vertical  rules  on  the  catalog  cards,  or  four  typewriter  spaces),  unless 
the  space  would  come  at  the  beginning  of  a  line,  when  no  space 
should  be  left. 

d  Other  spacing.  For  space  between  items  in  imprint  and  col- 
lation follow  direction  for  "space  between  words,"  in  b  above. 
For  other  spacing  etc.  adapt  to  handwritten  work  the  directions 
given  for  typewritten  work  in  2f-n  below ;  see  also  2r. 

2  Typewritten  cards,  a  Space  at  top  of  card.  In  writing  the 
heading  on  cards  leave  such  space  at  the  top  as  would  result  from 
writing  on  a  line  one  centimeter  from  the  top  edge. 

b  Cards  evenly  placed  on  roller.  Be  sure  that  the  lines  run 
straight  across  the  card,  not  slanting. 

c  Position  with  relation  to  vertical  rules.  Place  the  card  in  the 
machine  so  that  the  first  letter  on  the  line  will  fall  just  to  the  right 
of  the  vertical  rule,  not  on  it. 

To  do  this  will  probably  require  some  experimenting  unless  the 
cataloger  is  familiar  with  the  special  machine  used. 

d  Space  between   lines.     Leave  single   space  between  lines. 

c  Clear  cut  impression.  A  quick  stroke  will  generally  prevent 
the  duplicate  impression  which  sometimes  results  from  letting  the 
fingers  rest  on  the  keys. 

/  Spacing  in  person's  name  when  inverted.  Leave  one  space 
after  the  comma  between  the  surname  and  the  given  name  or  initials, 

8 


GENERAL   DIRECTIONS  AND  SUGGESTIONS 


2f-k 


but  not  after  the  period  between  initials  except  when  space  is  left 
to  fill  in  a  name  if  found  later;  i.e.  in  headings  on  cards  for  authors, 
editors,  etc.  if  given  names  are  unknown  write,  for  example,  Smith, 
W.  H.  (leaving  eight  blank  spaces  for  the 

filling  in  of  the  names),  but  on  subject  or  title  cards  for  works  by 
the  same  person  write  Smith,  W.  H. 

g  Space  before  distinguishing  marks.  If.  in  a  heading,  the  per- 
son's name  is  followed  by  a  title,  e.  g.  bart,  earl  of,  etc.  or  by  dates 
of  birth  and  death,  or  other  distinguishing  marks,  or  by  such 
designations  as  ed.,  comp..  tr.,  etc.  such  items  are  separated  from 
the  name  and  from  each  other  by  four  spaces.  If  the  name  in  the 
heading  ends  in  an  initial  (representing  a  name  which  may  be  filled 
in  later)  the  four  spaces  here  specified  are  in  addition  to  the  eight 
spaces  for  the  filling  in  of  the  name. 

In  the  case  of  joint  authors,  if  more  than  one  is  used  in  head- 
ing (see  section  54a,  Joint  authors,  Method  1)  the  spaces  before 
distinguishing  marks  may  be  reduced  to  two. 

On  Library  of  Congress  cards  no  space  is  left,  but  the  difference 
between  the  name  and  the  later  items  is  brought  out  by  a  difference 
in  type. 

h  Spacing  in  headings  with  subdivisions.  If  subdivisions  in  a 
heading  are  separated  from  what  precedes  by  a  period,  this  should 
be  followed  by  one  space,  if  by  a  dash  this  should  be  both  preceded 
and  followed  by  a  space. 

i  Spacing  in  title.  In  the  title  generally  leave  one  space  after 
marks  of  punctuation  except  after  a  period  used  merely  to  end  an 
abbreviation  or  after  the   .  .  .   indicating  omission. 

j  Division  between  syllables.  In  dividing  a  word  at  the  end  of 
a  line  be  careful  to  divide  only  between  syllables.  Never  divide 
a  word  of  one  syllable,  even  if  it  ends  in  an  affix ;  e.  g.  print-ed,  but 
not  fill-eel :  similarly  with  words  of  more  than  one  syllable ;  e.  g. 
es-tablished  or  estab-lished,  but  not  establish-ed.  In  case  of  doubt 
as  to  correct  division  consult  some  authoritative  work.  Webster 
and  the  Standard  dictionary  show  the  correct  form  of  division. 

Do  not  divide  a  numeral  or  an  abbreviation;  e.  g.  do  not  write 
10,-000,  or  18-89,  or  il-lus. 

The  hyphen  between  syllables  and  also  when  used  between  inclusive 
dates  should  be  placed  on   the   first  line  rather  than  on   the  second. 

k  Division  of  personal  names.  When  initials  of  forenames  are 
used  in  the  title  do  not  put  part  on  one  line  and  part  on  the  next. 
If  there  is  not  room  for  all  on  the  first  line  carry  them  all  over 
to  the  second. 


2l-r  CATALOGING    RULES 

/  Separation  of  numeral  from  abbreviation.  Do  not  separate  a 
numeral  from  the  abbreviation  to  which  it  applies;  e.  g.  in  the 
case  of  pages,  volumes  or  size  do  not  write  the  number  at  the  end 
of  one  line  and  p.,  v.  or  cm.  at  the  beginning  of  the  next.  If  there 
is  not  room  for  the  abbreviation  on  the  upper  line  carry  the  numeral 
over  to  the  next. 

m  Space  in  imprint  and  collation.  Leave  four  spaces  between 
the  title  and  the  imprint,  and  between  the  collation  and  the  series 
note,  unless  the  space  would  come  at  the  beginning  of  a  line,  when 
no  space  should  be  left. 

Leave  one  space  between  the  different  items  of  the  imprint  and 
of  the  collation,  also  between  a  numeral  and  the  following  word  or 
abbreviation  to  which  it  belongs  if  the  abbreviation  consists  of  more 
than  two  letters;  if  the  abbreviation  consists  of  only  one  or  two  let- 
ters (e.  g.  p.,  v.,  pi.,  or  cm.)  leave  no  space  after  the  numeral;  e.  g. 
\  Bost.  Houghton,  1916  [c'07],  or  344p.  illus.  plates,  23^cm., 
or  2v.  in  1,  8pl.    2   maps,    12    facsim.    diagrs.    19cm. 

If  the  imprint  date  is  followed  by  a  copyright  date  in  brackets,  leave 
one  space  after  the  imprint  date,  but  if  instead  of  the  bracket  a  comma 
is  used  between  the  imprint  and  copyright  dates  (e.  g.  when  the  copy- 
right date  is  given  on  the  title-page,  or  in  simplified  cataloging)  do  not 
leave  a  space  after  the  comma. 

Whether  it  is  desirable  to  leave  a  space  before  or  after  a  bracket 
depends  upon  the  position  of  the  bracket  on  the  individual  machine. 
On  some  machines  a  half  space  is  possible  and  is  the  best  solution,  though 
even  on  these  a  better  result  is,  with  some  letters,  obtained  by  adjusting 
the  carriage  by  hand.  With  many  machines,  however,  it  is  so  difficult  to 
place  the  brackets  satisfactorily  that  it  is  better  to  put  them  in  by  pen. 

?/  Contents.  If  a  period  and  a  dash  are  used  to  separate  items 
in  contents  a  space  should  be  left  both  before  and  after  the  dash. 

o  Copyright  date.  If  the  machine  used  does  not  have  a  key  with 
the  superior  "c"  for  copyright,  the  same  effect  may  be  very  satis- 
factorily obtained  by  the  ordinary  "c",  placed  in  the  correct  posi- 
tion by  means  of  the  free  carriage. 

p  Figure  i.  For  the  arable  figure  1  use  lower  case  letter  1,  not 
capital  I,  which  would  be  the  roman  numeral. 

q  Fractions.  If  the  machine  does  not  have  the  common  frac- 
tion "j/>"  the  decimal  ".5"  may  be  used.  Do  not  use  the  full-sized 
figure  1.  the  slanting  line,  and  the  full-sized  2. 

r  Fxceptions  to  rides.  The  inflexibility  of  the  typewriter  some- 
times calls  for  exceptions  to  the  rules  for  spacing;  e.  g.  if  four 
spaces  between  groups  would  make  it  impossible  to  write  the  next 
item  on  the  line,  but  three  spaces  would  permit  it,  it  would  be  bet- 

10 


GENERAL  DIRECTIONS    AND  SUGGESTIONS  2r-6b 

ter  to  use  only  three  spaces  than  to  have  a  very  long  space  at  the 
end  of  the  line ;  or  sometimes  five  spaces  may  be  desirable  between 
groups  to  prevent  the  long  space  at  the  end  of  the  line.  Likewise 
in  titles  the  space  after  marks  of  punctuation  may  be  omitted,  if 
desirable  in  order  to  write  a  whole  word  or  a  syllable  on  the  line. 

.?  Neatness.  Try  to  make  the  appearance  of  the  cards  such  as 
to  be  satisfactory  for  filing  in  a  public  catalog.  On  some  machines 
the  writing  of  the  red  heading  is  accompanied  by  a  black  impres- 
sion a  line  above.  When  this  can  not  be  prevented  the  black  im- 
pression should  be  carefully  erased  after  the  cards  are  taken  from  the 
machine. 

3  Capitalization.     Follow  A.  L.  A.  rides,   TJ2. 

a  Alternative  title.  Example  of  alternative  title :  Twelfth 
night;  or,  What  you  will. 

4  Numerals.  In  general  use  arabic  figures,  but  use  roman 
numerals  in  headings  for  sovereigns  and  popes  (section  \2b,  first 
note,  last  paragraph)  ;  for  numerals  in  titles  see  section  13/. 

5  Abbreviations.  For  general  abbreviations,  follow  A.  L.  A. 
rules,  p.  62-64.  For  "introduction"  on  p.  63,  in  third  column  add 
"imprint." 

a  In  headings.  Abbreviations  should  be  used  in  the  heading 
on  the  face  of  the  card  only  in  exceptional  cases ;  e.  g.  U.  S.,  the 
name  of  the  state  in  which  the  library  is  located,  the  names  of 
other  states  when  following  the  names  of  places,  and  hereditary  and 
professional  titles  and  titles  of  honor. 

b  /;;  titles.  Notice  specially  that  words  in  the  title  proper  are 
not  to  be  abbreviated. 

By  "the  title  proper"  is  generally  meant  that  part  of  the  title  which 
precedes   the   statement  of  edition. 

6  Punctuation,  a  General  authorities.  For  general  authorities 
on  punctuation  the  A.  L.  A.  rules  recommend  De  Vinne's  Correct 
composition  and  lligelow's  Punctuation.  The  following  special 
rules  are  added  to  cover  distinctive  features  of  catalog  entries. 

b  Period.  Use  a  period  at  the  end  of  the  heading  (author,  sub- 
ject, editor  etc.),  title,  imprint,  collation  and  notes,  unless  some 
other  punctuation  is  specially  called  for;  also  after  an  abbreviation 
but  (in  accordance  with  the  modern  tendency  to  avoid  useless 
punctuation)  not  after  a  contraction,  namely,  a  shortened  form  end- 
ing with  the  last  letter  of  the  word,  e.  g.  Mr.  Mrs,  Dr  etc. 

11 


6c-f  CATALOGING    RULES 

c'  Quotation  marks.  Use  quotation  marks  when  given  on  the 
title-page. 

d  Brackets.  Use  very  small  brackets,  e.  g.  [  ]  to  indicate  in- 
formation supplied  in  the  heading1,  title,  imprint  or  collation,  except 
that  in  the  heading  they  are  not  used  for  general  titles2  (e.  g. 
Mrs,  baron  etc.)  nor  for  distinguishing  phrases"  (e.  g.  dates  of 
birth  and  death  or  descriptive  terms,  including  titles  of  nobility 
when  not  the  entry  word)  nor  for  changes  in  the  form  of  name 
(e.  g.  William  on  the  title-page,  Wilhelm  in  the  heading  used) 
nor  for  designations  showing  relation  to  the  book,  as  ed.,  comp.  etc., 
nor  for  corporate  headings,  anonymous  classics  and  sacred  books. 

i  Brackets  on  title-page.  Brackets  used  on  the  title-page  are  not  to 
lie  followed  on  cards,  as  brackets  on  cards  indicate  matter  supplied.  For 
brackets  on  the  title-page  parentheses  are  generally  the  best  substitute. 

2  Public  library  and  small  library  usage.  In  libraries  where  biblio- 
graphic exactness  is  not  of  prime  importance,  including  most  public  li- 
braries, the  use  of  brackets  is  not  advised  except  in  the  case  of  additions 
to  book  titles,  where  their  omission  would  presuppose  the  existence 
in  the  title  on  the  title-page  of  what  is  really  not  there,  and  in  the  collation 
when  the  paging  given  on  the  cards  differs  from  the  final  main  pagination  as 
the  publisher  has  given  it.  (For  definition  of  "final  main  pagination"  see 
note  under  section  15c.) 

c  Marks  of  omission.  Where  work  is  being  done  with  a  view 
to  bibliographic  exactness,  omissions  from  the  title  should  be  in- 
dicated by  three  dots   (namely,   .  .  . ) 

For  exceptions  see  section  13d  below.  The  .  .  .  take  the  place 
of  a  period,  comma,  colon  or  semicolon  which  would  otherwise  be 
used. 

For  summer  school  work  and  for  most  public  libraries  the  use  of  the 
...      is  not  advised. 

f  Alternative  title.  Tn  the  case  of  an  alternative  title  (for  den- 
nit  inn  see  section  11  below)  use  a  semicolon  after  the  first  title, 
and  a  comma  after  "or"  (or  its  equivalent)  before  the  following 
title;  e.  g.  Twelfth  night;  or,  JVIiat  you  will. 

Exception:    In  the  case  of  two  works  published  in  the  same  volume  with 


1  (  hi  Library  of  Congress  cards  the  brackets  are  not  now  used  in 
author  headings,  to  show  parts  of  name  supplied,  the  information  be- 
ing given  instead  by  including  in  the  title  the  author's  name  in  the 
exact   form  used   on    the    title-page. 

-  This  statement  is  not  to  he  construed  as  placing  general  titles 
ami  distinguishing  phrases  outside  the  brackets  if  tin-  name  itself  is 
bracketed,  e.  g.  for  anonymous  books  (author  known)  or  pseudonymous 
books  entered  under  real  name.  In  such  cases  the  entire  heading  should 
be  inclosed  in  the  brackets,  excepting  only  dates  of  birth  and  death  and 
such  designations  as  ed.,  comp.  etc. 

12 


GENERAL  DIRECTIONS    AND  SUGGESTIONS  6£-j 

a  common  title-page,  on  which  one  or  both  titles  have  alternative  titles, 
use  a  comma  before  "or,"  omit  the  comma  after  "or"  and  use  a  semicolon 
between  the  two  complete  titles;  e.  g.  Twelfth  night,  or  What  you  will;  All's 
ivell  that  ends  well. 

Similarly  in  other  places  it  is  sometimes  desirable  to  modify  the  regular 
rule  to  meet  unusual  conditions. 

g  Subtitle.  In  the  case  of  a  subtitle  (for  definition  see  section 
11  below)  a  colon  should  generally  be  used  to  separate  from  the 
main  title;  e.  g.  Talks  on  economics:  a  series  of  lectures  delivered  in 
Boston  iSp8-i8pp. 

A  subtille  (which  really  stands  in  apposition  with  the  main  title  in  its 
character  as  a  title)  should  be  carefully  distinguished  from  a  word  or 
phrase  in  apposition  with  a  name  or  other  term  in  its  individual  significance, 
which  takes  the  regular  comma  punctuation;  e.  g.  in  The  Master  of  Bal- 
lantrae:  a  winter's  tale,  we  have  as  the  second  phrase  a  subtitle,  explaining 
The  Master  of  Ballantrae  as  the  title  of  the  book;  in  Lamarck,  the  founder 
of  evolution  we  have  an  appositive  phrase  characterizing  Lamarck  as  an 
individual. 

h  Statement  of  edition  etc.  A  statement  regarding-  the  edition 
or  translation,  etc.  is  generally  best  separated  from  what  precedes 
by  a  semicolon,  even  though  the  use  of  brackets  results  in  double 
punctuation. 

i  Imprint.  In  the  imprint,  except  in  those  cases  where  it  would 
result  in  double  punctuation,  generally  use  a  comma  between  the 
name  of  the  place  and  the  publisher,  between  the  publisher  and  the 
date  and  between  the  imprint  date  and  the  copyright  date,  but  if 
two  places  are  given  they  are  (unless,  following  the  title-page,  they 
are  connected  by  a  conjunction  or  a  dash)  separated  by  a  comma 
and  followed  by  a  semicolon  (unless  the  second  place  is  abbreviated, 
in  which  case  the  period  ending  the  abbreviation,  together  with 
the  usual   space  between   items,  is   sufficient). 

;'  Double  punctuation.  Tn  general  avoid  double  punctuation  but 
use  when  necessary  for  clearness;  e.  g.  the  period  ending  an  ab- 
breviation may  sometimes  be  followed  by  a  comma  when  the  ab- 
breviation occurs  in  a  series  of  items.  The  period  ending  an  ab- 
breviation should  also  be  used  in  combination  with  a  question  mark, 
an  exclamation  point,  curves,  brackets  or  quotation  marks,  and  in 
connection  with  quotation  marks  the  period  should  be  used  at  the 
end  of  a  group.  The  comma  should  be  used  in  inverted  headings 
to  show  the  inversion,  even  if  followed  or  preceded  by  brackets; 
e.  g.  Shakespeare,1  [William]  or  [Craik],  Mrs  Dinah  Maria 
(Mulock).      When   a   name   ends    with   a   bracket    or    curve   and    is 


^or  the  sake  of  conforming  to  Library  of  Congress   usage,  tlic   longer 
spelling  is  here  adopted  in  place  of  the  "Shaksperc"  used  in  the  first  edition. 

13 


6j-8a  CATALOGING     RULES 

followed  by  some  title  or  explanatory  term  etc.  the  bracket  or  curve 
is  sufficient  without  the  comma;  e.  g.  Russell,  W[illiam]  HLenry] 
eel.  or  Brassey,  Annie  (Allnutt)  baroness.  In  headings  in  author 
form,  brackets  or  curves  used  in  a  heading  before  a  subhead  should 
be  followed  by  a  period;  e.  g.  New  York  (State).  Governor;  also 
a  bracket  or  curve  ending  an  author's  name  in  an  analytic  reference. 

7  Extension  cards.  When  an  entry  is  too  long  to  be  written 
on  a  single  card,  additional  cards  are  to  be  used  and  numbered  2,  3, 
etc.  at  the  top  edge  in  the  center  of  the  card.  Continue  the  entry 
on  the  top  line  of  the  additional  card,  indenting  as  though  con- 
tinuing on  the  previous  card. 

On  each  additional  card  give  in  the  regular  place  the  call  number 
of  the  previous  card.  If  there  is  more  than  one  call  number,  as 
in  the  case  of  added  editions,  give  on  the  additional  card  the  call 
number  of  the  special  entry  that  is  carried  over. 

Near  the  right  edge  of  the  card  from  which  the  entry  is  carried 
over,  write  or  stamp  on  the  next  to  the  bottom  line :  See  next  card. 

Tie  all  cards  of  the  entry  together. 

On  the  back  of  each  additional  card  in  the  lower  left  corner 
when  it  is  tipped  forward  as  for  tracing  (see  section  25  below), 
give  briefly  sufficient  of  the  beginning  of  the  entry  to  be  able  to 
restore  the  card  readily  if  it  becomes  untied  and  misplaced.  The 
tracing  for  added  entries,  the  accession  number  and  the  signature 
are  to  be  given  on  the  first  card,  not  on  the  additional  cards. 

It  is  better  to  write  even  on  the  last  line  of  the  card  if  by  so  doing  the 
use  of  an  additional  card  may  be  avoided. 

8  Class  work,  a  Routine.1  The  ease  and  accuracy  with  which 
the  work  is  done  will  be  increased  if  a  systematic  method  is  adopted, 
on  some  such  plan  as  the  following : 

Making  the  main  (usually  the  author)  card  first,  verify  it  care- 
full}-  by  the  book,  in  the  exact  order  of  items.  If  this  is  done, 
all  other  cards  may  be  made  directly  from  the  main  card,  without 
further  reference  to  the  book  itself  except  in  occasional  instances, 
e.  g.  when  a  longer  title  is  desirable  on  subject  cards,  or  when  on 
series  cards  the  editor's  name  should  be  added,  etc.  Making  the 
remaining  cards  and  slips  for  the  book  in  the  order  determined 
upon  (for  a  suggestion  as  to  such  order,  see  plan  of  work  given 
below)  verify  each  card  or  slip  as  finished  and  (that  the  set  may, 
for  the  convenience  of  the  reviser,  be  in  order  when  completed) 
turn  it  face  down  and  lay  on  it  the  succeeding  card  or  slip.     When 


1  Based  on  directions  given  by  Miss  Mary  E.  Hyde  in  class  instruction. 

14 


GENERAL  DIRECTIONS   AND   SUGGESTIONS  8a-C 

completed,  turn  the  pile  over  and  lay  the  main  card  on  top,  after 
making  sure  that  all  cards  bearing  the  call  number  are  traced  on 
the  back  of  the  main  card. 


Suggested  plan   of   work 

1  Author   card  4  Editor,      translator,      illustrator, 

Authority   slip  1  etc.  cards  (each  followed  by 

Ref.  card  its   own) 

Ref.   slip  Authority   slip 

Ref.  card 

2  Subject     cards     (each     followed  Ref.  slip 

by  its  own) 

Authority   slip  5  Title   card 
ist  "see  also"  ref.  card 

Ref.   slip  6  Partial  title  card 
2d  "see  also"  ref.  card 

Ref.   slip  7  Series    card 

(etc.)  Authority  slip 

ist   "see"   ref.    card  Ref.  card 

Ref.   slip  Ref.  slip 
2d  "see"  ref.   card 

Ref.  slip  8  Analytic   cards,    slips,    etc. 

(etc)  If     author     analytics     are     made, 

with    corresponding    subject    analyt- 

3  Joint  author  cards  (each  ics,  title  analytics,  etc.,  let  them  fol- 

followed   by  its   own)  low  the  plan  outlined  above  for  the 

Authority   slip  treatment   of  the  book  as  a  whole; 

Ref.   card  if  author  analytics  are  not  made,  let 

Ref.  slip  the   order   for  such  anrlytics  as  are 

made    follow   the   outline   above. 

b  Volumes  tied  together.  If  volumes  are  tied  together  they 
should,  for  class  work,  be  returned  to  the  classwork  shelves  in  the 
same  condition,  as  it  is  important  for  each  one  who  catalogs  the 
set  to  have  all  the  volumes. 

c  Revision.  The  following  printers'  marks  are  useful  in  revis- 
ing cards : 

4L  meaning  "more  space" 
3  meaning  "draw  together" 

|  or  |  meaning  "move  over  toward  the  open  face  of  the  bracket." 
It  is   not    advised   that   corrected    cards    generally   be    copied. 


1  See  Appendix  3. 

15 


g-io 


CATALOGING    RULES 


AUTHOR  ENTRIES 

As  the  author  is  naturally  thought  of  as  the  starting  point  of 
the  book,  so  the  author  entry  or  author  card  is  regularly  the  start- 
ing point  in  the  cataloging  and  is  regarded  in  most  cases  as  the  main 
entry. 

9  Purpose.  This  card  is  arranged  (or  filed)  in  the  catalog, 
alphabetically  by  the  author's  name,  for  the  use  of  the  reader  who 
is  looking  up  the  work  from  that  standpoint. 

10  Form.  The  author  entry  regularly  consists  of  author  head- 
ing, book  title,  imprint,  collation  and  call  number. 

Sample  of  author  card 

(This  and  following  samples  are  reduced   from   cards  7.5x12.5cm.) 


S2.1 

rYts24 


planjatory 

duo 

Crorte 


Sfoore,    Thomas,  1779-1853. 

Complete  poetical  works... with  ex- 
notes  and  biographioal  intro- 
tjion;  c standard  library  ed.3  N.Y. 

11  cc13953 
800p.  port.    30om. 


o 


Simplified  form 

For  summer  school  work  and  for  libraries  not  desirous  of  extreme  bib- 
liographic exactness  it  is  recommended  that  the  .  .  .  indicating  omission, 
the  brackets  (except  in  title,  and  in  the  collation  when  the  paging  as 
given  on  the  cards  differs  from  the  last  number  used  by  the  publisher  for 
the  main  pagination)  and  the  indication  of  size  be  disregarded,  as  in  the 
following  sample.  It  is  also  recommended  that  in  the  collation  "illus." 
(see  section  15/  below)  be  used  instead  of  the  more  specific  term  "plates," 
except  when  the  plates  are  a  distinct  feature  as  plates,  e.  g.  in  scientific  and 
art  books. 

16 


AUTHOR  ENTRIES 


IO-II 


82.\ 

M&2.4 


Moorje,   Thomas,  1779-1852. 

Complete  poetioal  works;   with  explan- 
atory notes  and  biographical   introduc- 
tion; c standard  library  ed.3  N.Y.   Cro- 
welli,    c1895. 

800p.   port. 


o 


11  Definitions.  In  considering  this  topic  the  following  technical 
terms  must  be  understood  and  their  definitions  are  therefore  here 
given,  according  to  the  A.  L.  A.  rules,  pref.  p.  13-16.  Other  defini- 
tions are  given  later,  as  called  for. 

Alternative  title:  A  subtitle  introduced  by  "or"  or  its  equivalent ; 
e.  g.  Hypatia ;  or,  New  foes  with  an  old  face. 

Author  entry:  An  entry  of  a  work  in  a  catalog  under  its  author's 
name  as  heading,  whether  this  be  a  main  or  an  added  heading.  The 
author  heading  may  consist  of  a  personal  or  a  corporate  name  or 
some  substitute  for  it,  e.  g.  initials,  pseudonym,  etc. 

Collation:  That  part  of  the  description  which  specifies  the 
volumes,  pages,  illustrations,  plates,  maps,  etc.  constituting  the 
book. 

Date:  1  Imprint  date:  The  year  of  publication  as  specified  on 
the  title-page. 

2  Copyright  date:  The  date  of  copyright  as  given  in  the  book, 
as  a  rule  on  the  back  of  the  title-page. 

3  Preface  date:  The  date  given  at  the  beginning  or  end  of  the 
preface. 

4  Colophon  date :   The  date  given  in  the  colophon. 

Entry:  The  record  of  a  book  in  a  catalog  or  list.  See  also 
.Main  entry. 

Heading:  The  word  (or  words)  by  which  the  alphabetic  place 
of  an  entry  in  the  catalog  is  determined,  generally  the  name  of  the 
author,  the  subject,  or  the  first  word,  not  an  article,  of  the  title. 

Imprint:  The  place,  publisher's  name,  and  date,  ordinarily  printed 
at  the  foot  of  the  title-page. 

17 


H-I2bl  CATALOGING    RULES 

Main  entry:  The  full  or  principal  entry,  as  a  rule  the  author 
entry.     (See  also  Added  entry,  section  19,  below.) 

In  a  card  catalog  the  main  entry  card  contains  (generally  on  the  back) 
a  record  of  all  the  other  entries  made  for  the  work  in  question. 

Printer:  The  person  who  prints  a  book,  as  distinguished  from 
the  publisher  and  bookseller  who  issue  and  sell  it. 

The  same  person  or  firm  may,  however,  be  printer,  publisher,  and  book- 
seller, or  printer  and  publisher,  or  publisher  and  bookseller. 

Publisher:    See  Printer. 

Subtitle:    A  secondary  or  subordinate  title,  usually  explanatory. 

Title:  1  In  the  broad  sense,  the  distinguishing  name  of  any  writ- 
ten production  as  given  on  the  title-page,  including  the  name  of  the 
author,  editor,  translator,  the  edition,  etc.,  but  excluding  the  imprint. 

2  In  the  narrow  sense  the  title  does  not  include  the  name  of  the 
author,  editor,  etc. 

See  also  Alternative  title  (above),  Binder's  title  (section  96a),  Cover 
title  (section  96a),  Half-title  (section  96a),  Running  title  (section  96a), 
Subtitle    (above). 

Ti tie-page:  The  page  at  the  beginning  of  a  book,  on  which  is 
printed  the  title  and  imprint.  (See  also  Half-title,  section  96a 
below.) 

12  Author  heading,  a  Form.  For  choice  of  heading  for  differ- 
ent classes  of  writers  specific  directions  are  given  in  the  A.  L.  A. 
rules,  but  for  a  large  proportion  of  books  the  author  heading  con- 
sists of  the  author's  surname,  followed  by  his  given  names.  The 
usual  form  of  entry  for  a  married  woman  is  her  husband's  sur- 
name, the  term  Mrs,  her  own  given  names,  and  in  curves  her  maiden 
name;  as,  Ward,  Mrs  Elizabeth  Stuart  (Phelps). 

For  scholarly  bibliographic  work  it  is  customary  to  use,  with  occasional 
exceptions,  the  most  complete  and  exact  form  of  name  which  can  be  found. 
For  libraries  which  lack  the  reference  material  or  the  time  to  furnish  such 
information  an  acceptable  practice  is  to  use  the  best  known  form  or  the 
fullest  form  familiar  or  easily  available,  a  policy  which  is  not  only  economy 
for  the  cataloger,  but  a  convenience  to  many  of  the  readers,  by  whom  the 
shorter  form  of  name  is  more  easily  recognized,  but  whatever  the  general 
policy  it  is  important  that  the  same  form  should  be  used  for  all  works  of 
the  same  author. 

b  Titles  of  honor,  etc.  For  the  use  of  titles  of  honor,  distinguish- 
ing designations,  etc.  see  A.  L.  A.  rules,  S5~S7- 

1  Titles.  The  following  list  shows  certain  of  the  most  used  titles 
(some  used  regularly,  others  when  needed  to  distinguish)  and  whether  pre- 
fixed or  affixed,  also  whether  written  with  capitals.  Titles  affixed  are 
separated  from  the  name  by  a  comma  (unless  the  name  ends  in  an  abbrevia- 
tion, calling  for  a  period,  or  unless  it  ends  with  a  bracket  or  curve)  and 
preferably  by  one  centimeter   space  in  handwriting  or  by   four  typewriter 

18 


AUTHOR  ENTRIES  I2bl-C 

spaces.1  Brackets  are  to  be  used  around  such  parts  of  the  actual  name  as 
do  not  appear  on  the  title-page,  but  not  around  these  titles,  considered  by 
themselves.   (See  also  section  dd  above.) 

Prefixed  in  headings  Affixed  in  headings 

Adm.  abbe 


abp 

bart    (and  all   hereditary  titles) 


Capt. 

Gen.  (for  all  military  officers  with  a 

title    including    General)  , 

Hon.  DX> 

Mme  ;  r 

Maj.  M.D. 

Mrs  pope 

Rabbi  pres.    U.     S.     (and    corresponding 

Rev.  titles  for  foreign  rulers) 

Sir  St 

For  the  use  and  position  of  the  titles  "Lady"  and  "Lord"  see  Cutter-, 
214  and  216.    When  used  as  affixes  they  are  not  to  be  capitalized. 

Roman  numerals  are  to  be  used  after  names  of  rulers  and  popes  in  head- 
ings. 

2  Dates  of  birth  and  death.  Dates  of  birth  and  death  are  affixed 
to  names  in  headings  when  needed  to  distinguish  persons  of  the  same 
name,  and  are  desirable  also  in  other  cases  if  easily  found.  Like  other 
affixed  designations  they  are  separated  from  what  precedes  by  a  comma 
(unless  the  preceding  matter  ends  in  an  abbreviation,  calling  for  a  period, 
or  unless  it  ends  with  a  bracket  or  curve)  and  preferably  by  a  centimeter 
space.  If  affixed  titles  of  honor  etc.  and  dates  arc  both  used  the  order  is : 
name,  title,  date. 

In  the  following  pages  the  dates  of  birth  and  death  have  generally, 
to  show  arrangement  and  spacing,  been  included  on  the  sample  cards  and 
in  examples  in  the  text,  but  occasionally  the  information  was  lacking  and 
such  cases  furnish  a  parallel  to  corresponding  cases  in  tbe  actual  catalog- 
ing of  a  library.  Whether  the  general  policy  of  the  library  be  to  use  or 
to  omit  the  dates,  nearly  every  library  will  sometimes  have  need  of  the 
other  method. 

c  Incomplete  names.  If  only  initials  for  the  given  names  are 
known  to  the  cataloger  a  space  of  two  centimeters  (or  eight  type- 
writer spaces)  should,  on  the  catalog  cards,  be  left  after  each  of 
these  initials,  to  allow  for  a  name  of  average  length  to  be  filled  in 
later  if  found. 

If  the  name  is  followed  by  some  distinguishing  mark,  as  a  title  of 
honor,  or  dates,  the  space  for  the  filling  in  of  the  name  should  be  in  addi- 


1  On  Library  of  Congress  cards  no  space  is  left  before  titles  of  honor 
etc.  or  dates,  but  a  different  face  of  type  from  that  used  for  personal  names 
serves  to  set  off  these  added  items  in  a  way  which  is  not  possible  in  type- 
writing, and  it  is  recommended  that  on  typewritten  and  manuscript  cards 
the  space  be  left,  even  though  the  catalog  consists  largely  of  the  printed 
cards. 

19 


CATALOGING    RULES 

tion   to  the  space  which  would   regularly  be  left  before   the  distinguishing 
mark. 

d  Position.  Write  the  author's  name  on  the  top  line  of  the 
catalog"  card,  beginning  at  the  outer  vertical  line.  If  the  name 
runs  over  the  line  begin  subsequent  lines  one-half  centimeter  (two 
typewriter  spaces)  to  the  right  of  the  inner  vertical  line. 

Indention  at  the  outer  vertical  line  is  sometimes  designated  as  outer  (or 
first)  indention;  that  at  the  inner  vertical  line  as  inner  (or  second)  indention. 

13  Title,  a  Position.  Begin  the  title  on  the  line  following  the 
author's  name,  indenting"  to  the  inner  vertical  line.  When  the  title 
runs  over  the  line  begin  subsequent  lines  at  the  outer  vertical  line. 

b  Fulness  and  wording-.  The  title  should  be  copied  exactly 
from  the  title-page,  except  for  the  omission  of  mottoes,  hereditary 
and  professional  titles  and  titles  of  honor  (unless,  in  the  case  of 
such  as  might  be  used  in  headings  on  cards,  these  lend  weight  to  the 
person's  connection  with  the  book,  as  author  or  editor,  etc.)  and  any 
other  matter  not  essential  because  it  is  either  unimportant  or  is  suf- 
ficiently accounted  for  elsewhere  on  the  card.1  The  title  as  given 
on  the  cards  should  always  begin  with  the  first  word  of  the  printed 
title,  except  that  the  serial  number  of  annual  reports  etc.,  frequently 
the  initial  article  and  generally  the  author's  name  (including  per- 
sonal titles)  may  be  omitted. 

For  a  fuller,  valuable  treatment  of  the  subject  see  Cutter,  221-223,  226, 
235-236,  239. 

1  Variations  in  different  volumes.  If  title-pages  of  different  volumes 
of  a  work  differ  follow  the  first  unless  much  the  larger  part  of  the  set  is 
under  another  title.  The  variations  when  important  should  be  specified 
on  the  cards,  in  the  form  of  notes  (see  sections  47-52  below),  and  often  ref- 
erences should  be  made  from  the  different  forms  of  title,  specially  if  the 
difference  is   so  great   as  to   suggest  a  different  work. 

2  More  than  one  title-page  or  titles  in  more  than  one  language.  For 
works  with  more  than  one  title-page  or  with  titles  in  more  than  one  lan- 
guage see  A.  L.  A.  rides,   111-146. 

3  Title-pages  in  foreign  languages.  It  is  obviously  desirable  that  the 
cataloger  of  a  book  in  a  foreign  language  should  be  able  to  read  the 
language,  at  least  to  the  extent  of  being  able  to  pick  out  the  title  by 
means  of  a  dictionary,  but  it  is  equally  obvious  that  such  extensive  and 
widespread  knowledge  is  out  of  the  question.  For  a  person  with  a  read- 
ing  knowledge   of   the   language   of   the   book   in    hand   the   same    rules    for 


1  In  the  first  part  of  the  cataloging  course  in  the  New  York  state  li- 
brary school  the  title-pages  are  marked  for  length  of  title  for  the  main  card 
and  the  subject  cards.  For  other  cards  students  are  to  use  their  own 
judgment.  Checks  on  the  title-page  arc  used  as  follows:  (  )  means 
"omit  from  the  title  on  all  cards";  1  1  means  "omit  from  the  title  on 
the  author  card  but  include  on  subject  cards." 

20 


AUTHOR   ENTRIES  I3D3-C4 

shortening  titles  would  apply  as  for  English  title-pages,  special  care  being 
taken  to  avoid  any  slip  in  grammatical  construction,  through  the  omission 
of  words.  For  the  person  whose  knowledge  of  the  language  is  insufficient 
to  insure  correct  shortening  of  the  title  the  only  safe  course  in  writing 
the  title  is  to  copy  the  title-page  exactly,  except  for  details  which  are 
clearly    (as  indicated  by  type  or  position)    not  a  part  of  the  title. 

4  Titles  of  rare  books.  Give  the  title  or  colophon  of  books  of  ex- 
ceptional rarity  or  curiosity  in  full,  reproducing  as  far  as  possible,  punctua- 
tion, capitalization,  and  typographical  peculiarities.  A.  L.  A.  rules,  137. 
(For  fuller  discussion  see  Cutter,  351.) 

c  Edition.  The  statement  of  edition  is  to  be  given  in  the  main 
entry  and  on  subject  cards  as  a  part  of  the  title,  preceded  by  a 
semicolon  (unless  there  is  special  reason  for  some  other  punctuation, 
e.  g.  three  dots)  and  is  to  be  written  as  on  the  title-page  except  that 
abbreviations  may  be  used  as  indicated  in  A.  L.  A.  rules,  p.  62-64, 
and  such  matter  omitted  as  is  indicated  in  the  general  rule  for  short- 
ening titles,  given  above  under  section  lob,  Title:  Fulness  and 
wording.  It  is  customary  to  omit  such  statements  of  reprinting  as 
"8th  thousand." 

For  fuller  discussion  see   Cutter,  254-256. 

1  Abbreviations.  It  is  sometimes  better  to  write  in  full  the  words  for 
which  abbreviations  are  given,  e.  g.  if  the  word  for  such  abbreviation  is 
coordinate  with  other  words  for  which  abbreviations  are  not  given,  if  it 
would  not  be  clear  to  the  reader  whether  the  abbreviation  represented  a 
noun  or  an  adjective,  or  if  it  is  the  last  word.  Also  confusing  combinations 
of  abbreviations  should  be  avoided;  e.  g.  instead  of  "American  ed.,  ed  by" 
it  would  be  better  to  write  "American  edition,  ed.  by." 

2  Brackets.  Brackets  should  be  used  if  the  statement  of  edition  is 
furnished  from  any  other  source  than  the  title-page  or  if  it  is  transposed 
from  the  title-page  arrangement,  e.  g.  in  cases  where  i*"  is  printed  at  the 
head   of   the   title-page. 

3  Inclusion  of  names  of  editors  and  translators.  For  fulness  of 
names   see  section   g  below. 

In  full  cataloging,  names  of  editors  and  translators  are  generally  in- 
cluded in  the  title  on  the  main  card  and  subject  cards.  In  small  libraries 
they  may  sometimes  lie  omitted,  specially  on  tlie  author  card,  but  should 
be  included  for  books  of  which  different  editions  are  likely  to  be  brought 
out  by  different  editors,  translators  etc.  In  small  libraries  the  editor  etc. 
might  often  be  omitted  from  the  author  card  when  a  book  is  not  likely 
to  appear  in  different  editions  by  different  editors  or  translators,  but 
even  in  such  cases  might  be  desirable  on  the  subject  card,  as  the  name 
of  an  editor  who  was  an  authority  on  a  subject  would  hud  weight  to 
a   book   when    the   author   might    he    comparatively    unknown. 

4  Different  editors  for  different  volumes.  When  editors  for  different 
volumes  of  a  set  differ,  their  names  should  be  given   in  a  note 

47-52),  or  in  contents  (sections  73-78)    for  the  respective  volumes,  and  the 

21 


l3C4-e(i)2  CATALOGING    RULES 

editor  card   (see  section  42)    should  specify  in  the  collation  and  call  num- 
ber  the   distinct  volume   or  volumes   covered. 

5  Different  editions  represented  in  the  same  set.  When  the  volumes 
in  a  set  are  of  different  editions,  specify  the  various  editions  in  a  note 
or  in  contents,  not  in  the  title.     A.  L.  A.  rules,  149. 

d  Omissions.  In  libraries  where  bibliographic  exactness  is 
desired,  on  the  main  card  and  on  subject  cards  (and  on  all  other 
cards  except  at  the  end  of  the  title)  omissions  should  be  indicated  by 
.  .  .  which  take  the  place  of  a  period,  comma,  colon  or  semicolon 
which  would  otherwise  be  used.  Do  not  use  .  .  .  for  the  omission 
of  the  initial  article,  the  serial  number  for  annual  reports  etc.,  the 
author's  name,  or  for  personal  titles  or  other  information  regarding 
authors,  editors,  translators  etc.  (i.  e.  those  concerned  in  the  making 
of  the  books). 

The  title  of  a  picture  on  the  title-page,  parts  of  seals,  coats  of 
arms,  etc.  are  not  parts  of  the  title  of  the  book  and  should  not  be 
represented  by  .    .    . 

In  the  most  exact  bibliographic  work,  the  .  .  .  are  used  to  indicate  all 
omissions  from  the  title.  In  many  libraries  where  bibliographic  exactness 
is  of  less  importance  than  is  economy  of  time,  the  indication  of  omis- 
sions is  entirely  disregarded,  and  this  policy  is  recommended  for  most 
public  libraries  and   for   summer  school  work. 

The  exceptions  noted  above  are  intended  to  provide  a  rule  easily 
applied,  for  omissions  too  slight  to  seem  worth  indicating  and  for  many 
oi  those  which  are  satisfactorily  accounted  for  elsewhere  on  the  card. 
Many  other  omissions  fall  under  this  last  specification,  e.  g.  the  word 
"illustrated,"  but  such  phrases  as  "with  numerous  illustrations,"  and  con- 
stantly varying  degrees  of  description  give  rise  to  so  many  questions  as  to 
whether  the  fact  is  sufficiently  accounted  for  elsewhere  that  it  lias  seemed 
best  to  limit  the  exceptions  to  those  specified  above,  about  which  there  is 
very  seldom  any  doubt. 

c  Initial  article.  (1)  Omission.  In  order  to  bring  into  promi- 
nence the  more  important  word,  omit  in  English  titles  the  initial 
article  (i.  e.  the  article  at  the  beginning  of  a  title)  unless  necessary 
for  sense  or  sound.  Never  omit  the  article  in  foreign  languages,  or 
at  the  beginning  of  an  alternative  title,  or  when  needed  to  balance 
the  article  belonging  to  a  later  noun,  as  The  rose  and  the  ring. 

1  "Sense  or  sound."  Whether  the  article  is  "necessary  for  sense" 
depends  on  whether  the  meaning  is  changed  by  its  omission ;  whether  it  is 
"necessary  for  sound"  may  be  decided  by  the  cataloger  on  the  basis  of 
whether  there  would  have  been  a  consciousness  of  something  lacking  if  the 
article  had  not  been  printed  on  the  title-page.  On  Library  of  Congress 
cards  greater  bibliographic  exactness  is  obtained  by  the  regular  retention  of 
the  initial  article. 

2  Article  in  the  midst  of  a  title.  In  libraries  using  ...  to  indicate 
omissions,  so  slight  an  omission  from  the  midst  of  a  title  as  "a"  or  "the" 

22 


AUTHOR  ENTRIES  I3e(l>2-f 

(with  the  consequent  substitution  of  the  .  .  . )  is  inadvisable.  In  libraries 
not  using  the  .  .  .  the  importance  of  retaining  the  article  in  the  midst  of 
the  title  depends  on  the  effect  of  its  omission  on   "sense  or   sound." 

(2)  Article  in  curves.  Even  if  the  initial  article  is  re- 
tained it  should  be  disregarded  in  alphabeting  and  as  an  indication 
of  this  treatment  it  may,  if  desired,  be  inclosed  in  (  )  on  all  cards 
where  the  title  is  likely  to  be  used  in  alphabeting  the  cards. 

This  rule  for  the  use  of  curves  around  the  initial  article  applies  to  author 
cards,  subject  cards,  title  cards  and  cards  for  editors,  translators  etc.,  and 
is  a  help  to  the  person  filing  the  cards,  specially  in  the  case  of  foreign  titles, 
where  the  article  might  not  be  recognized  as  such  by  a  person  unfamiliar 
with  the  language.  The  practice  is  also  useful  to  the  person  consulting 
the  catalog,  since  it  brings  into  greater  prominence  the  first  distinctive  word 
of  the  title  when  this  can  not  be  satisfactorily  done  by  omitting  the  article, 
as  directed  above.  The  rule  does  not  apply  to  titles  in  the  separate  entries 
on  series  cards,  or  in  contents,  in  series  notes,  in  miscellaneous  notes,  or 
inside  the  (  )  inclosing  an  analytic  reference,  as  in  these  cases  the  title 
does  not  affect  the  filing  of  the  card. 

(3)  Articles  in  various  languages.  The  following 
list  of  articles  to  be  disregarded  in  alphabeting,  when  appearing  at 
the  beginning  of  titles,  is  taken  from  the  Library  of  Congress  rules. 

English:  the,  a,  an 

Danish,  Norwegian,  Swedish:  den,  det,  de,  en,  et,  ett 

Dutch:  de,  het,  't,  een,  eene 

French:  le,  la,  1',  les,  un,  tine 

German:   der    (when    representing   the    masculine   nominative), 

die,  das,  ein,  eine 
Hungarian:  az,  a,  egy 

Italian:  il,  lo,  i,  gli,  gY  la,  le,  1',  uno,  un,  una,  un' 
Portuguese:  o,  a,  os,  as,  um,  tuna 
Spanish:  el,  lo,  la,  los,  las,  un,  una 

The  Arabic  article  al  (or  the  assimilated  forms  ad-,  ar-,  as-,  at-, 
az-,  if  used)  though  joined  by  a  hyphen  to  the  name  or  word  follow- 
ing (al-Ghazzali,  Al-mostatraf)  is  to  be  disregarded  in  alphabeting. 

Tn  Hebrew  disregard  ha,  he  (Ha-sefer,  He-harim)  ;  in  Yiddish. 
der,  di,  dos. 

Article  vs  numeral  adjective.  In  cases  where  the  form  of  the  article 
is  the  same  as  that  of  the  numeral  adjective  "one"  (e.  g.  the  French  "un" 
and  "une")  care  should  be  taken  to  distinguish  the  use,  as  the  numeral  ad- 
jective should  not  be  disregarded  in  alphabeting. 

f  Author's  name.  Generally  the  author's  name,  being  given  in 
the  author  heading,  may  be  omitted  from  the  title,  but  occasionally 
it  is  an  integral  part  of  the  latter  and  must  be  retained ;  e.  g.  Brozen- 

23 


13*-!  CATALOGING     RULES 

ing  treasure  book ;  From  day  to  day  with  Kipling;  Shakespeare  for 
recitation. 

g  Fulness  of  names.  When  names,  either  personal  or  corporate 
(authors,  editors,  translators,  etc.  or  subjects  of  individual  biogra- 
phies, personal  bibliographies  and  literary  criticism)  are  given  in 
the  title  on  the  cards,  use  the  form  which  is  printed  on  the  title- 
page.1  In  exceptional  cases,  e.  g.  when  the  name  used  in  the  head- 
ing is  repeated  in  the  title  or  when  the  person  referred  to  is  so  dis- 
tinguished that  the  use  of  his  forenames  is  unnecessary  for  his  recog- 
nition, these  may  be  omitted  and  .  .  .  used  instead,  but  this  method 
should  never  be  followed  for  names  retained  at  the  beginning  of  a 
title;  such  names  should  always  be  written  as  on  the  title-page. 

/;  Additions.  Additions  needed  to  make  the  title  clear  may,  if 
brief,  be  supplied  in  the  title  in  brackets.  Such  additions  should 
be  in  the  language  of  the  title.  Unless  brief,  any  additions  made 
are  preferably  given  in  notes. 

The  omission  of  the  author's  name  from  the  title  sometimes  requires  the 
supplying  of  the  corresponding  pronoun,  c.  g.  rhisj,  or  an  ambiguous  phrase 
may  need  explanation,  e.  g.   "the  last   ti.  e.  the   iSthj   century." 

i  Misprints  or  errors  in  spelling.  In  the  case  of  a  misprint,  or 
an  error  in  spelling,  the  form  on  the  title-page  should  be  retained 
on  the  cards,  the  mistake  being  indicated  by  three  dots  under  the 
incorrect  word  or  the  incorrect  letter  or  letters. 

j  Modified  vowels.  Write  the  German  modified  vowels  with  the 
umlaut  or  with  the  e,  as  given  on  the  title-page. 

k  Accents.  Supply  correct  accents  for  French  and  Greek  words 
when  omitted  from  the  title-page  but  if  incorrect  accents  are  printed 
treat  as  mistakes  in  spelling. 

/  Numerals.  For  numerals  occurring  in  the  title,  in  general  use 
arabic  figures;  but  for  cardinals  below  10,  and  for  either  cardinals 
or  ordinals  (adjective  numerals)  at  the  beginning  0f  the  title,  and 
for  the  designation   of  popes,   rulers   etc.   follow   the   form   on   the 


I  In  the  previous  edition  the  names  of  those  concerned  in  the  making  of 
the  book  (authors,  editors,  translators,  etc.)  were  in  the  case  of  a  single 
forename  written  as  on  the  title-page,  but  in  the  case  of  two  or  more  fore- 
names, only  the  initials  were  used,  e.  g.  the  Divine  comedy,  appearing  on  the 
title-page  as  "translated  by  Charles  Eliot  Norton"  would  appear  on  the 
cards  as  "tr.  by  C:  E.  Norton."  The  names  of  persons  used  as  subjects, 
however,  were  regularly  written  as  on  the  title-page,  e.  g.  a  title  given  on 
the  title-page  as  Life  of  Charles  Eliot  Norton  would  be  given  on  the  cards 
with  the  same  fulness  as  on  the  title-page.  The  present  rule  has  been 
adopted  with  a  view  to  obtaining  uniform  treatment  of  all  names,  as  well 
as  to  conform  to  Library  of  Congress  usage. 

24 


AUTHOR  ENTRIES 


13I-14M1) 


title-page.  When  arabic  figures  are  used  on  the  title-page  they 
should  be  retained  on  the  cards,  even  if  they  begin  the  title. 

m  Capitals  and  punctuation.  See  sections  3  and  6  above.  The 
title  is  preferably  written  in  a  single  phrase  or  series  of  phrases,  so 
punctuated  as  to  form  a  unit ;  i.  e.  final  punctuation,  generally  the 
period,  should  not,  except  for  abbreviations,  be  used  until  the  end 
of  the  title,  so  far  as  this  is  given  on  the  cards. 

As  on  many  title-pages  the  punctuation  is  wholly  or  largely  lacking  and 
must  be  supplied,  there  is  little  advantage  in  the  case  of  other  titles  in 
following  the  title-page  punctuation,  except  for  exact  bibliographic  work. 
A  more  uniform  result,  therefore,  is  obtained  by  giving  the  title  as  a  single- 
phrase  or  combination  of  phrases,  which  is  in  general  more  pleasing  than 
the  fragmentary  effect  likely  to  come  from  the  attempt  to  retain  in  solid 
paragraph  form  the  punctuation  originally  planned  for  the  ends  of  lines  in 
title-page  arrangement. 

14  Imprint.  The  imprint  forms  a  group,  consisting  on  the 
main  card  and  on  subject  cards,  of  place,  publisher  and  date,  writ- 
ten one  centimeter  (four  typewriter  spaces)  after  the  title.  On 
other  cards  use  for  the  imprint  only  the  date. 

a  Spacing.     See  section  2in  above. 

b  Place  and  publisher.  Write  the  names  of  the  place  of  publica- 
tion and  the  publisher  in  the  language  in  which  they  are  given  on 
the  title-page,  using  for  places  the  abbreviations  included  in  the  fol- 
lowing list. 

(1)  Abbreviations  for  places  of  publica- 
t  i  o  n.1  Use  the  fuller  forms  in  cataloging ;  the  shorter  forms  are 
given  only  for  use  in  accession  and  other  official  records.  Use  for 
all  languages  when  the  equivalent  name  contains  these  letters.  Use 
also  the  common  abbreviations  for  the  states. 


Albany 

Alb. 

England 

Eng. 

Amsterdam 

Amst. 

Firenze 

Fir. 

Baltimore 

Bait. 

Glasgow 

Glasg.  or  Gl 

Berlin 

Ber. 

Gottingen 

Got. 

Boston 

Bost.  or  B. 

Kjobenhavn 

Kjjzfo. 

Braunschweig 

Brns. 

Leipzig 

Lpz. 

Cambridge 

Camb.  or  Cb. 

Leyden 

Ley. 

Chicago 

Chic,  or  Ch. 

London 

Lond.  or  L. 

Cincinnati 

Cin. 

Lugduni  Bata- 

Copenhagen 

Copng. 

vorum 

Lug.   Bat. 

Dublin 

Dub. 

Milano 

Mil. 

Edinburgh 

Edin.  or  Ed. 

Milwaukee 

Milw 

1  Taken  chiefly  from  Library  School  rules. 

25 


i4b(i)-(5)i 

CATALOGING    RULES 

Miinchen 

Miin. 

St  Petersburg 

St  Pet.  or  St 

New  Orleans 

N.O. 

San  Francisco 

San  Fran,  or 

New  York 

N.Y. 

S.  F. 

Oxford 

Ox. 

Stuttgart 

Stut. 

Paris 

Par. 

or 

P. 

United  States 

u.  s. 

Philadelphia 

Phil. 

or 

Ph. 

Venice 

Ven.  or  V. 

St  Louis 

St  L 

Washington 

Wash,  or  W. 

(2 )  P  1  a  c  e-n  a  m  e  f  o  1 1  o  \v  e  d  b  y  state.  If  the  place  is  not 
well  known  or  if  in  the  case  of  several  places  having  the  same  name 
there  is  likely  to  be  uncertainty  as  to  which  is  meant,  add  the  abbre- 
viation for  the  state,  using  brackets  if  the  name  is  not  given  on  the 
title-page. 

(3)  Foreign  places.  On  foreign  title-pages  the  place  of 
publication  frequently  appears  in  an  oblique  case.  If  the  name  of  the 
place  is  included  in  the  foregoing  list  of  abbreviations,  the  abbrevia- 
tion there  given  may  be  used,  in  whatever  case  the  name  occurs  on 
the  title-page.  If  the  place  is  not  included  in  this  list  the  name  is 
best  written  in  the  exact  form  used  on  the  title-page,  such  other 
words  being  retained  as  are  necessary  to  account  for  any  oblique 
form  used. 

(4)  Place  not  given.  If  the  place  of  publication  is  un- 
known, write  :  No  place.  If  the  name  of  the  place  is  not  given  on  the 
title-page  but  is  known  from  some  other  source  give  the  name  in 
brackets. 

(5)  Publisher's  name.  For  well-known  firms  generally 
give  only  the  surname  (e.  g.  Harper),  but  give  two  surnames  if  they 
are  hyphenated  (e.  g.  Bobbs-Merrill)  or  in  the  case  of  firms  having 
a  very  common  surname  or  of  a  little-known  firm  having  the  same 
surname  as  the  author,  or  if  you  know  of  two  firms  having  the  same 
first  surname,  let  such  surname  be  preceded  by  the  initials  of  the 
given  names  (e.  g.  R.  Clarke,  and  W.  B.  Clarke)  or  followed  by  the 
initial  of  the  second  surname  (e.  g.  Scott,  F.  for  Scott,  Foresman  & 
co.  and  Scott,  G.  for  Scott,  Greenwood  &  co.)  For  impersonal  firms 
generally  give  the  full  name,  using  common  abbreviations  (e.  g. 
Railway  world  pub.  co.) 

i  Lists  of  publishers.  Suggestions  as  to  forms  for  abbreviations  for 
publishers  may  be  found  in  the  A.  L.  A.  catalog,  1904,  pt  1,  p.  13-21.  Ref- 
erences in  that  catalog  are  not  for  forms  to  1>e  used  in  cataloging,  but  for 
convenience  in  ordering;  e.  g.  with  the  references  "Clarendon,  see  Oxford 
university  press,"  and  "Westerman,  see  Lemcke  &  Buechner,"  the  books 
should  be  cataloged  with  Clarendon  and  Westerman  respectively  as  pub- 
lishers as  on  the  title-page,  but  orders  for  the  books  should  be  sent  to  the 

26 


AUTHOR  ENTRIES  I4b(5)l-(9) 

Oxford  university  press  and  to  Lemcke  &  Buechner.  Later  lists  are  given 
in  the  A.  L.  A.  catalog,  1904-1911,  and  in  the  United  States  catalog  and  its 
supplements. 

2  Foreign  publishers.  For  the  names  of  foreign  firms  which  contain 
a  personal  name,  the  surname  may  generally  be  used  alone  in  the  nomina- 
tive to  represent  the  firm,  if  the  nominative  form  is  known;  e.  g.  Pirola  for 
Casa  editrice  di  G.  Pirola,  or  Haeggstrom  for  Ivar  Haeggstroms  boktryckeii 
&  bokforlagsaktiebolag.  If  the  nominative  form  is  not  known,  the  firm 
name  should  be  given  in  the  form  used  on  the  title-page,  or  as  much  of  the 
firm  name  (including  the  personal  name)  as  is  necessary  to  justify  the 
oblique  case  in  the  personal  name. 

(6)  More  than  one  place  and  publisher.  If 
two  or  more  places  and  publishers  are  given  on  the  title-page,  use 
the  first,  unless  another  place  and  publisher  (generally  distinguished 
by  position  or  type1)  are  known  to  be  the  actual  ones,  in  which  case 
these  are  to  be  preferred.  If  two  are  given  on  the  title-page,  both 
may,  when  desired,  be  given  on  the  cards  in  title-page  order;  in 
the  case  of  more  than  two  on  the  title-page,  the  first  or,  if  desired, 
the  first  and  the  most  important  of  the  others  may  be  used. 

If  in  the  case  of  foreign  books  the  imprint  includes  also  an  Ameri- 
can place  of  publication,  with  American  publisher,  use  these  in  ad- 
dition to  the  foreign  place  and  publisher.  If  more  than  one  Ameri- 
can place  and  publisher  are  given,  use  the  ones  most  important  from 
the  standpoint  of  the  individual  library. 

For  illustrations  and  fuller  treatment  see  the  Library  of  Congress  sup- 
plementary rule  in  A.  L.  A.  rules,  p.  47-48. 

(7)  Different  volumes  in  different  places. 
When  different  volumes  of  a  long  set  are  published  in  many  dif- 
ferent places  write  in  the  imprint :  Various  places.  If  not  more 
than  two  or  three  places  are  mentioned  they  may  be  specified  in  the 
imprint;  as,  v.  1-3,  Bost.  Roberts,  1894;  v.  4,  N.Y.  Putnam,  1896; 
or  the  first  place  may  be  given  in  the  imprint  and  variations  men- 
tioned in  a  note. 

(8)  More  than  one  place  for  the  same  pub- 
lisher. If  more  than  one  place  is  given  for  the  same  publisher, 
either  the  first  alone  or  the  first  and  the  most  important  of  the 
others   may  be  given,   followed  by  the   publisher's   name. 

(9)  More  than  one  publisher  in  the  same  place. 
If  the  imprint  gives  more  than  one  publisher  in  the  same  place,  the 
name  of  the  place  may  be  followed  by  the  name  of  the  iir>t  publisher 


1  For   illustration    sec   A.    L.    A.    rides,   p.    47,    second    example    under 
Books  published  abroad." 

27 


I4b(9)-c(4)  CATALOGING    RULES 

or,  when  desired,  by  the  name  of  the  first  and  the  most  important  of 
the  others. 

c  Date.  After  the  publisher's  name  followed  by  a  comma  (un- 
less ending  in  an  abbreviation  or  unless  brackets  are  used),  give  the 
date  of  imprint.  Give  in  arabic  figures  the  date  found  on  the  title- 
page,  unless  the  form  of  that  date  is  characteristic  of  a  special  edition 
or  otherwise  worthy  of  note.  If  the  copyright  date  differs  from  the 
imprint  date  give  it  in  addition  to  the  imprint  date. 

(1)  Dates  other  than  of  Christian  era.  For  dates 
other  than  those  of  the  Christian  era  see  A.  L.  A.  rules,  155. 

(2)  F  a  1  s  e  dates.  When  a  date  is  given  falsely,  whether  in- 
tentionally or  by  a  typographical  error,  give  the  date  as  given  on  the 
title-page,  followed  in  brackets  by  the  true  date  of  publication,  if  it 
can  be  found,  preceded  by  "i.  e."  for  example:  N.  Y.  Horton,  1953 
[i.  e.  1853]. 

(3)  Different  volumes  with  different  dates. 
When  different  volumes  of  a  set  were  published  at  different  times, 
give  inclusive  dates,  using  for  the  second  only  the  last  two  figures, 
unless  the  century  changes;  e.  g.  1894-96,  but  1898-1901. 

If  the  date  of  v.  1  is  later  than  the  first  date,  this  fact  may,  if  thought 
desirable,  be  indicated  in  curves  after  the  inclusive  dates ;  e.  g.  1908-14 
(v-  1,  '14). 

(4)  Substitutes  for  imprint  d  a  t  e.  When  there  is  no 
imprint  date,  unless  the  date  of  publication  is  known  from  some 
other  source  give  the  copyright  date  (generally  found  on  the  back 
of  the  title-page),  preceded  by  a  superior  c,  and  (in  exact  work) 
bracketed  (except  in  the  few  cases  when  found  on  the  title-page). 
When  there  is  neither  imprint  nor  copyright  date  give  the  date  of 
preface  or  introduction  etc.  e.  g.  Lpref.  1898],  or  [introd,  1903],  using 
brackets  in  exact  work.  When  no  definite  date  is  found  use  an  ap- 
proximate date  if  possible;  e.  g.  [189-]  or  t19 — ,.  If  not  even  the 
century  is  certain,  use  n.  d.  (meaning  no  date),  unless  the  work  was 
clcaiiv  published  so  near  the  beginning  of  the  century  that  an  ap- 
proximate date  can  be  assigned.  If  a  date,  either  exact  or  ap- 
proximate, is  merely  probable  and  not  certain  use  a  question  mark; 
e.  g.  t1903?]  or  L190-?].  In  the  case  of  uncertain  inclusive  dates, 
show  whether  both  or  only  one  is  uncertain;  e.  g.  [1903?-?05],  both 
being  uncertain;  t1903?r05,  only  the  first  being  uncertain;  1903- 
[P05],  only  the  second  being  uncertain. 

Such  phrases  as  "Entered  in  the  clerk's  office  for  the  southern  district 

28 


AUTHOR   ENTRIES  I4c(4)-*5d(2) 

of  New  York"  have  the  same  significance  as  the  present   copyright   state- 
ment and  should  receive  the  same  treatment. 

When  no  copyright  date  is  given  but  a  statement  is  made  of  the  original 
date  of  publication  or  the  date  of  the  first  edition,  this  may  be  given  in  a 
note  corresponding  to  the  statement  in  the  book,  but  should  not  be  treated 
as  the  equivalent  of  copyright. 

( 5 )  Copyright  date  differing"  from  imprint 
date.  W'lien  the  copyright  date  differs  from  the  imprint  date 
and  is  therefore  given  in  addition  to  the  imprint  date,  unless  it  is 
of  a  different  century  from  the  imprint  date  give  it  in  abbreviated 
form  as  shown  below.  If  there  is  more  than  one  copyright  date 
give  the  extreme  dates,  connected  by  a  dash  and  writing  the  last 
in  full  only  if  the  century  changes. 

Examples:        1006  [ei894-1  1905    ^1893-19013 

1906  f'oS)  1902-04  ^'02-033 

1905  ^'oi-oSj       1897-1903    (v.    1,    '03)    ^'1895-19003 
Notice  that  the  apostrophe  is  not  used  after  the  dash  in  inclusive  dates. 

15  Collation,  a  Language  and  arrangement.  Give  all  items  of 
collation  in  English  and  in  the  following  order:  1st,  volumes  or 
pages;  2d,  illustrations;  3d,  size.    A.  L.  A.  rules,  158. 

b  Position,  The  collation,  constituting  a  separate  group,  is  writ- 
ten on  the  line  after  the  imprint,  indented  to  the  inner  vertical  line. 
If  the  collation  runs  over  the  line,  begin  subsequent  lines  at  the 
outer  vertical  line. 

c  Fulness.  Give  full  collation  on  only  the  main  card  and  the 
subject  cards.  On  other  cards  give  as  collation  only  the  number 
of  volumes  when  more  than  one. 

d  Volumes.     (1)   Definition    of    volume,     (a)  A  book 
distinguished  from  other  books  or  from  other  parts  of  the  same  work 
by  having  its  own  title-page  and  usually  independent  paging. 
Whatever  is  contained  in  one  binding.    A.  L.  .1.  rules,  pref.  p.  16. 

(2)  Number.  Give  in  arabic  figures  the  number  of  volumes, 
in  all  entries  where  more  than  one;  volume  is  included.  If  the  num- 
ber of  volumes  as  given  by  the  publisher  differs  from  the  number  as 
bound  give  first  the  publisher's  number  followed  by  the  number 
of  bound  pieces;  e.  g.  2v.  in  1  ;  3v.  in  2;  3v.  in  6.  t  hi  the  main  card 
and  all  subject  cards  follow  this  method,  but  on  other  cards  the  item 
may,  if  preferred,  be  given  only  when  the  hound  work  contains  more 
than  one  piece.  When  given,  give  as  on  the  main  card.  (See  also 
second  note  under  e{  4)  below  . ) 

29 


I5e-e(4)  CATALOGING    RULES 

e  Paging.  For  works  in  one  volume  generally  give,  using  arabic 
figures,  the  final  main  pagination  as  the  publisher  has  given  it. 

By  "final  main  pagination"  is  meant  the  last  page  number  used  by  the 
publisher  in  the  continuous  numbering  of  the  principal  group  of  pages. 
This  generally  includes  the  index.  The  main  pagination  is  a  valuable  item, 
as  it  gives  the  reader  an  approximate  idea  of  the  size  of  the  book,  thus  in- 
dicating in  some  measure  the  fulness  of  treatment. 

For  a  more  detailed  and  exact  method  of  recording  the  paging  see 
A.  L.  A.  rules,  160,  and  on  p.  51  of  that  code  the  Library  of  Congress 
supplementary  rule. 

(1)  Last  numbered  page  a  verso.  If  the  last  num- 
bered page  is  a  verso  (i.  e.  the  lefthand  page)  and  there  is  printing 
on  the  following  recto  (righthand  page)  which  is  clearly  a  con- 
tinuation of  the  preceding  or  if  in  the  case  of  a  separate  list,  table 
of  contents,  etc.  (frequent  in  French  books)  there  is  strong  evidence 
that  if  the  pages  had  been  numbered  they  would  have  continued  the 
previous  paging,  add  to  the  publisher's  final  paging  the  number  of 
pages  which  you  think  would  have  been  included  in  the  continuous 
paging  if  they  had  been  numbered,  and  give  the  figures  for  the 
total  in  brackets,  e.  g.  t423]p.  (See  (6)  below.) 

(2)  Last  numbered  page  a  recto.  If  the  pub- 
lisher's last  numbered  page  is  a  recto  and  there  is  merely  a  printed 
verso  accept  the  publisher's  paging  unless  the  verso  contains  matter 
to  which  it  is  desirable  to  refer  by  page  number  in  a  note  or  in  the 
contents.  In  this  case  the  page  number  of  the  verso  should  be 
included  in  the  pagination  given  in  the  collation,  in  the  form  pre- 
scribed for  the  treatment  of  an  unnumbered  recto,  in  (\)  above;  in 
other  cases  the  page  number  of  the  recto  is  sufficient,  as  the  verso 
could  not  be  lost  without  losing  the  recto. 

(3)  Misprint.  If  there  is  obviously  a  misprint  the  situation 
may  be  met  either  by  (a)  giving  in  the  collation  the  paging  given 
in  the  book,  followed  in  brackets  by  the  correct  paging  (  e.  g.  269 
[i.  e.  296]  p.)  or  (b)  by  giving  the  correct  paging  in  the  collation,  in 
brackets,  with  the  incorrect  paging  specified  in  a  note,  e.  g.  In  book 
last  page  incorrectly  given  as  269. 

The   second   method  is   recommended  as  being  clearer  to  the   reader. 

(4)  More  than  one  important  group.  If  a  book 
is  made  up  of  two  or  three  groups  of  paging  (not  preface,  index  or 
appendix  paging)  which  seem  to  be  about  equally  important,  give 
each  final  pagination,  separating  the  groups  by  a  comma,  e.  g.  232, 
250,  193p.     If  there  arc  more  than  three  such  groups,  (a)  give  the 

30 


AUTHOR  ENTRIES  IS^MC1) 

total  in  brackets,  adding  as  a  note:  Various  pagings ;  or  (b)  write 
in  the  collation,  v. p.  meaning  Various  pagings. 

In  some  libraries  a  plus  sign  is  used  between  groups,  in  preference 
to   the  comma. 

If  the  groups  are  designated  by  the  publisher  as  volumes  I,  2,  etc.  or 
as  parts  i,  2,  etc.  or  simply  numbered  without  any  such  term  as  volumes  or 
parts,  regard  as  a  case  of  2v.  in  i,  3v.in  i,  etc.     (See  section  d  above.) 

(5)  Inclusive.  If  the  publication  in  hand  is  only  part  of 
a  work,  being  either  leaves  taken  out  of  the  original  work  or  a  re- 
print of  some  part,  retaining  the  original  paging,  give  the  inclusive 
paging,  as  p.  127-153. 

In  giving  inclusive  paging  the  Library  of  Congress  prints  both  parts 
in  full.  Many  libraries  give  only  the  last  two  figures  for  the  second 
part  except  when  the  hundreds  change;  e.  g.  p.  127-53,  but  p.  186-214. 

(6)  Supplied  or  corrected  page  numbers.  In 
cases  where  a  page  number  (either  for  inclusive  or  final  pagination) 
used  on  the  card  is  not  given  on  the  page  in  the  book  it  should  be 
bracketed. 

While  it  is  advised  that  even  libraries  not  doing  minute  bibliographic  work 
should  bracket  "corrected"  page  numbers,  where  misunderstanding  might 
otherwise  result,  it  is  not  important  that  in  inclusive  paging  they  bracket 
"supplied"  numbers,  if  the  facts  are  obvious. 

(7)  Leaves.  If  leaves  instead  of  pages  are  numbered  write 
f.  (for  folios)  instead  of  p. 

On  Library  of  Congress  cards,  1.  (for  leaves)  is  used,  but  this  seems 
undesirable  for  typewritten  work,  where  the  letter  1  and  the  figure  1  are 
identical,  unless  the  cataloger  chooses  to  change,  by  pen  and  ink,  the  type- 
written 1  into  the  script  1. 

(8)  Columns.  If  columns  instead  of  pages  are  numbered 
give  the  number  of  columns,  and  in  brackets  the  number  of  pages, 
e.  g.  388  col.  [194P., 

(9)  N  u  m  b  e  ring  omitte  d.  If  page  numbering  is  omitted 
in  the  book,  write  Unp.  (meaning  unpaged)  in  the  place  for  pages, 
except  that  for  very  thin  or  for  very  rare  and  valuable  books,  the 
pages  may  be  counted  and  the  actual  number  given  in  brackets. 

(10)  Volumes  paged  continuous  ly.  I  f  a  work  in 
more  than  one  volume  is  paged  continuously  the  final  paging  may, 
if  desired,  be  given  in  addition  to  the  number  of  volumes  (e.  g.  2v. 
560p.)  and  a  note  added:     Paged  continuously. 

f  Illustrations.  (1)  Specifications    and    a  r  r  a  n  g  e- 

31 


l5f(0-(2)  CATALOGING    RULES 

m  e  n  t.      Use    in    the    order   given   below    the    following    terms    in 
describing  the  illustrations  of  a  book: 

1  front.,  fronts.  ::  port.,  ports.  '"  tab.,  tables 
illus.                              4  map,  maps  5  diagr.,  diagrs. 

2  pi.,  plates  "'  plan,  plans  G  forms 
1  phot.,  photos.               facsim.,  facsims. 

(2)  Definitions.  The  following  definitions  (except  those 
for  illustrations  and  plates,  which  are  from  the  A.  L.  A.  rules, 
pref.  p.  15)  are  from  the  Century  dictionary. 

Diagram:  An  illustrative  figure  giving  only  the  outlines  or  a 
general  scheme  (not  an  exact  representation)  of  the  object;  a  figure 
for  ascertaining  or  exhibiting  certain  relations  between  objects 
under  discussion  by  means  of  analogous  relations  between  the  parts 
of  the  figure. 

Facsimile:  An  exact  copy  or  counterpart;  an  imitation  of  an 
original  in  all  its  proportions,  qualities  and  peculiarities. 

Form:  A  blank  or  schedule  to  be  filled  out  by  the  insertion  of 
details ;  a  sample  or  specimen  document  calculated  to  serve  as  a 
guide  in  framing  others  in  like  cases. 

Illustrations:  Pictorial  and  other  representations  (plates, 
photographs,  portraits,  maps,  plans,  facsimiles,  tables,  diagrams) 
placed  in  a  book  or  other  publication,  usually  to  elucidate  the  text. 

In  a  narrow  sense  the  term  stands  for  illustrations  in  the  text. 

Map:  A  drawing  upon  a  plane  surface  representing  a  part  or 
the  whole  of  the  earth's  surface  or  of  the  heavens,  every  point 
of  the  drawing  corresponding  to  some  geographical  or  celestial 
position,  according  to  some  law  of  perspective  etc.  which  is  called 
the  projection  or,  better,  the  map-projection. 


1  Not   advised    except   for   exact   bibliographic  work. 

-For  most  public  libraries  and  for  summer  school  work  it  is  advised  that 
what  are  technically  "plates"  but  are  to  the  average  reader  merely  "illustra- 
tions'' be  not  separately  specified  as  "plates,"  but  included  under  "illus.," 
using  tlie  distinct  specification  "plates"  only  for  books  where  the  plates  are  a 
feature  as  plates,  e.  g.  as  in  some  scientific  and  art  books. 

3Mention  a  single  portrait  if  it  is  of  the  subject  of  a  biography,  and 
in  other  cases  when  it  is  so  related  to  the  subject  of  the  book  as  to  add 
to  the  value  of  the  collation,  also  a  single  portrait  when  it  is  of  the  author 
and  is  contained  in  a  book  to  the  subject  of  which  a  portrait  would  not 
naturally  be  related,  so  that  its  relation  to  the  author  may  he  inferred,  as 
in  collected  writings  or  in   separate   works  in   literature. 

4  Specify  maps,  either  in  the  text  or  separate,  in  histories  and  all  other 
books  where  they  have  any  significance.  When  a  map  is  not  bound  in,  but 
F  in  a  pocket  inside  the  book  cover,  add  a  note;   a-,   Map  in  pocket. 

5  Do  not  mention  plans,  tables  or  diagrams  except  when  numerous  or 
important. 

c  For  forms  in  books  on  bookkeeping,  business  etc. 

32 


AUTHOR  ENTRIES  l5*(2)-(8) 

Plan:  The  representation  of  anything  drawn  on  a  plane,  as  a 
map  or  chart;  specifically,  the  representation  of  a  building  or  other 
structure  in  horizontal  section,  as  it  stands  or  is  intended  to  stand 
on  the  ground,  showing  its  extent  and  the  division  and  distribution 
of  its  area  into  apartments,  rooms,  passages  etc.  or  its  method  of 
construction  and  the  relation  of  its  parts. 

Plate:  A  full  page  illustration  usually  printed  on  special 
(heavy)  paper,  one  side  of  the  leaf  being  blank.  Plates  are  not 
as  a  rule  included  in  the  paging. 

Plates  are  occasionally  found  with  a  legend  or  brief  description  printed 
on  the  verso  or  with  engravings  on  both  sides. 

Portrait:  A  picture  of  a  person,  drawn  from  life,  especially  a 
picture  or  representation  of  the  face. 

Table:  (a)  An  arrangement  of  written  words,  numbers  or  signs, 
or  of  combinations  of  them,  in  a  series  of  separate  lines  or  columns; 
a  formation  of  details  in  relation  to  any  subject,  arranged  in 
horizontal,  perpendicular  or  some  other  definite  order,  in  such  man- 
ner that  the  several  particulars  are  distinctly  exhibited  to  the  eye, 
each  by  itself,  (b)  A  synoptical  statement  or  series  of  statements; 
a  concise  presentation  of  the  details  of  a  subject;  a  list  of  items  or 
particulars. 

(3)  Mention  in  title.  Specially  notable  illustrations  may 
sometimes  be  mentioned  in  the  title,  the  name  of  the  illustrator  be- 
ing given,  but  they  should  also  be  noted  in  the  collation,  where  the 
record  would  regularly  be  expected. 

(4)  Few  illustrations.  Do  not  say  illus.  or  plates,  when 
a  book  has  only  a  frontispiece  or  two  or  three  unimportant  pictures. 

(5)  Number  of  illustrations.  Give  the  number  of 
plates,  maps  etc.  when  easily  ascertained.  When  the  number  is 
given  the  plural  form  need  not  be  used  for  the  special  kind  of  illus- 
tration, if  an  abbreviation  for  it  is  included  in  the  foregoing  list; 
e.  g.  18pl,  but  7  maps. 

(6)  Colored  illustrations.  When  the  coloring  of  illus- 
trations distinctly  adds  to  their  value,  prefix  col.  to  the  other  specifi- 
cation of  the  illustrations. 

(7)  M  u  sic.  When  music  is  printed  in  the  text  and  there  are 
no  other  illustrations,  write  in  collation:  illus.  (music);  similarly 
if  music  is  printed  on  plates  in  the  book  and  there  arc  no  other 
plates,  write  in  the  collation:  plates  (music).  When  the  hook  con- 
tains musical  and  other  illustrations  in  the  text,  or  musical  and  other 
plates,  or  both,  write  in  the  collation  respectively  :  illus.  { inch  music  | 
or  plates  (inch  music)  or  illus.  (inch  music)  p1ates  (inch  music). 

(  8  )  F  it  11  e  r  s  p  e  c  i  f  ica  tio  n  s.  For  more  detailed  specifica- 
tions see  Library  of  Congress  supplementary  ride,  in  ./.  /..  .'.  rules, 
p.  52-53. 

33 


*5g  CATALOGING    RULES 

g  Size.  Give  the  height  of  the  book  in  centimeters,  exact  to 
one-half  centimeter.  When  books  are  "narrow'',  "square",  "oblong" 
or  otherwise  of  unusual  shape,  give  both  dimensions;  as,  13x16cm. 
(height  first,  width  second).  Measure  the  width  from  the  hinge 
to  the  edge,  not  including  the  round.  A  book  is  "narrow''  if  the 
width  is  less  than  three-fifths  the  height;  "square"  if  the  width  is 
more  than  three-fourths  the  height;  "oblong"  if  the  width  is  more 
than  the  height.  Proportions  are  most  easily  determined  by  the 
use  of  the  Cole  size  card,  obtainable  from  the  Library  Bureau. 

For  illustrations  and  more  detailed  directions  see  A.  L.  A.  rules, 
164,  and  on  p.  53-54  of  that  code  the  Library  of  Congress  supple- 
mentary rule. 

Omission  of  size.  For  most  public  libraries  and  for  summer  school 
work  the  size  specification  is  not  advised.  To  very  few  readers  do  any 
of  the  methods  of  indicating  size  convey  a  definite  idea,  and  of  those  few 
very  few  would  ever  be  influenced  in  their  selection  of  a  book  of  the 
ordinary  character  by  its  size.  It  seems  better,  therefore,  that,  instead 
of  the  cataloger's  taking  the  time  to  measure  every  book,  only  the  com- 
paratively few  books  should  be  measured  which  are  too  large  to  go  on 
the  regular  shelves  and  for  which  some  indication  of  this  should  appear 
in  the  call  number  (the  measuring  in  such  cases  being  done  by  the  shelf- 
lister)  or  the  still  fewer  books  which  are  interestingly  small,  the  feature 
being  in  such  cases  brought  out  on  the  catalog  cards  by  a  note  com- 
prehensible to  the  average  reader. 

(1)  Variations  in  a  set.  When  the  volumes  of  a  set 
differ  in  size,  if  a  large  part  of  the  volumes  are  of  the  same  size  give 
this  as  the  size  of  the  set,  specifying  in  curves  the  exceptions ;  as,  7v. 
illus.  plates,  25cm.  (v.6,  24cm.)  ;  but  if  a  large  proportion  of  the 
volumes  vary,  specify  for  the  distinct  volumes ;  as,  7v.  illus.  plates ; 
v.1-2  and  6,  24cm.;  v. 3-5  and  7,  25cm.  If  there  are  so  many 
variations  that  a  detailed  statement  would  be  undesirably  compli- 
cated give  only  the  extremes  of  the  sizes ;  as,  30v.  ports.  22-25cm., 
unless  the  difference  in  size  is  so  great  as  to  divide  the  set  on  the 
shelves,  in  which  case  a  more  specific  statement  should  be  made ;  as, 
25v.  plates,  maps,  24-30cm.    (v. 16  and  21-25,  26-30cm.) 

(2)  Atlases  and  portfolios.  If  volumes  of  a  set 
are  accompanied  by  an  atlas  or  portfolio  of  the  same  size,  give  e.  g. 
76p.  illus.  and  portfolio  of  45pl.  35cm. ;  but  if  it  is  of  a  different  size, 
give  e.  g.  2v.  illus.  plates,  26cm.  and  atlas,  29x27cm. 

For  an  alternative  treatment,  on  the  plan  of  supplements,  see  section 
118  below. 

(3)  Oversized  "volumes.  For  treatment  when  the 
difference  in  size  necessitates  separation  on  the  shelves  see  also 
16tf  below. 

34 


AUTHOR  ENTRIES  l6a-e 

16  Call  number,  a  Definition.  The  description  of  the  book  as 
called  for  above  is  for  the  publication  as  issued  from  the  press. 
The  call  number,  i.  e.  the  number  by  which  the  book  is  called  for, 
is  the  connecting  link  between  the  entry  on  the  catalog  card,  and 
the  book  as  shelved  in  the  library.  In  most  libraries  it  consists  of 
the  class  number,  showing  the  class  or  subject  of  the  book,  and 
the  book  number,  i.  e.  the  number  assigned  to  the  individual  book- 
within  the  class.  Thus  for  Fiske's  History  of  the  United  States 
the  call  number  is  973,  the  subject  (United  States  history)  being 

F54 
indicated  by  973,  which  is  the  Decimal  classification  number  for 
that  subject,  while  the  individual  book  in  the  class  is  distinguished 
by  F54,  a  combination  representing  Fiske,  taken  from  the  Cutter- 
Sanborn  author  table. 

b  Position.  Write  the  call  number  close  to  the  left  edge  of  the 
card,  the  class  number  on  the  top  line  and  the  book  number  directly 
under  it  and,  on  manuscript  cards,  as  close  to  it  as  can  be  done  with- 
out making  it  look  crowded,  in  order  that  the  two  together  may  ap- 
pear as  a  unit.  On  typewritten  cards  any  change  from  the  ordinary 
single  space  is  impracticable. 

In  fiction  it  is  the  custom  of  many  libraries  to  omit  the  class  number, 
the  book  number  alone  constituting  the  call  number.  In  these  cases  give 
the  book  number  on  the  top  line,  in  the  place  generally  occupied  by  the 
class  number. 

c  Color.  Call  numbers  may  be  written  in  black,  or  in  red  or 
some  other  distinctive  color. 

d  Letters  and  figures.  It  is  better  that  call  numbers  be  put  on 
by  pen  rather  than  by  typewriter,  since  by  the  former  method,  in 
the  case  of  a  long  number,  the  size  of  the  characters  can  be  adapted 
to  the  space  available,  which  is  not  possible  on  the  typewriter.  Also, 
call  numbers  can  be  made  more  conspicuous  if  put  on  by  pen. 

All  letters  should  be  printed  except  k  (to  distinguish  from  capital 
EC)  and  1  and  q  (to  distinguish  from  the  figures  1  and  9).  These 
should  be  in  script. 

Taking  the  ordinary  lower  case  letter  as  the  height  of  measure- 
ment, the  capitals  and  the  lower  case  b.  d,  f.  h,  k  and  1  should  bo 
two  spaces  high,  figures  and  lower  case  t  should  be  one  and  one-half 
spaces  high,  and  other  lower  case  letters  one  space  high,  except  g,  j, 
p,  (j  and  y,  which  extend  one  space  below  the  line. 

e  Variations  in  call  numbers  for  a  set.  When  part  of  the  volumes 
of  a  set,  or  an  atlas  or  a  portfolio  so  differs  in  size  as  to  be  shelved 
apart  from  the  rest  of  the  set  give  in  its  regular  place  the  call 

35 


l6e-I7  CATALOGING     RULES 

number  for  the  first  or  principal  part  of  the  set  and  in  a  note  the 
exceptional  volumes  with  their  own  call  number;  e.  g.  supposing 
the    main    call    number    for   the   book   to   be    920,    with    v. 16    and 

M45 
21-25  oversized,  give  in  a  note:  Call  no.  for  v.  16  and  21-25:  920, 

qM4 
or  in  the  case  of  a  set  with  the  call  number  759,  with  an   over- 

R24 
sized  portfolio,  giye  as  a  note:  Call  no.  for  portfolio:  759 

qR2 

If  a  distinctive  color  of  ink  is  used  for  the  call  number  in  the  note, 
the  colon  may  be  omitted  before  the  call  number. 

For  an  alternative  treatment  of  atlases  and  portfolios,  on  the  plan 
of  supplements,  see  section  118  below. 

17  Accession  number.  The  accession  number  is  the  number 
given  to  a  book  in  the  order  of  its  addition  to  a  library  and  is  the 
key  to  the  chronologic  record  of  additions.1  As  a  connecting  link 
between  records  it  is  convenient  to  have  it  noted  on  the  main  card 
for  each  book,  but  being  only  for  official  use  it  should  be  given  on 
the  back  of  the  card. 

All  records  on  the  back  of  the  card  should  be  so  written  as  to  be  easily 
read  by  tipping  the  card  forward  when  locked  into  the  drawer.  For  the 
accession  number  turn  the  card  forward  from  the  top  and  write  the  number 
across  the  end,  in  what  is  then  the  lower  left  corner  (for  illustration  see  first 
sample  card  under  section  25  below)  or  if  tracing  is  put  on  by  type- 
writer, the  accession  number  may  (to  avoid  changing  the  position  of  the 
card  in  the  typewriter)  be  typed  on  the  back  of  the  card  in  the  lower  left 
corner,  in  the  same  left-to-right  direction  as  the  tracing  (see  second  sample 
card  under  same  section). 

a  More  than  one  zolitmc  or  copy.  "When  the  work  is  in  more 
than  one  volume  or  the  library  has  more  than  one  copy,  accession 
numbers  should  be  given  in  the  following  form : 


5360  v.l 

14614  cop.l 

5361  v.2 

14615   "  2 

(or) 

(or) 

5360-61  v.l -2 

14614-15  cop.1-2 

It  is  necessary  to  use  the  first  of  these  forms  when  the  accession  num- 
bers are  not  consecutive,  and  that  form  is  preferable  even  when  not  neces- 
sary, as  it  facilitates  a  change  in  the  record  if  a  book  is  lost  or  withdrawn 
from  the  library. 


1  In    the    New    York   state    library    it    is    stamped    at    the    bottom    of    the 
first  recto  after  the  title-page. 

36 


AUTHOR  ENTRIES  I8 

18  Signature.  In  the  cataloging  of  a  library,  as  a  clue  to 
responsibility  the  main  card  and  (if  authority  slips  are  made1)  all 
authority  slips  which  carry  a  record  of  sources  of  information, 
should  bear  the  cataloger's  signature,  either  in  full  or  in  abbreviated 
form.  For  class  work,  all  cards  and  slips  should,  for  the  convenience 
of  the  reviser,  bear  the  signature.  On  cards,  since  they  are  for  the 
use  of  the  public,  the  signature  should  be  on  the  back,  directly  under 
the  hole  when  the  card  is  tipped  forward  (see  sample  under  section 
25).  On  authority  slips,  which  are  for  official  use  only,  the  signa- 
ture may  be  more  conveniently  both  written  and  found,  if  given  on 
the  face  of  the  card,  in  the  upper  right  corner. 


1  See  Appendix  3 


37 


ig-20 


CATALOGING    RULES 


SUBJECT  ENTRIES 


19  Purpose.  Some  books,  generally  complete  or  partial  col- 
lections of  an  author's  writings,  need  only  an  author  card,  but  as 
readers  are  quite  as  likely  to  be  looking  for  material  on  a  special 
subject  as  for  the  works  of  a  special  writer,  those  books  which 
treat  of  a  special  subject  should  also  have  an  added  entry  (which 
is  defined  in  the  A.  L.  A.  rules,  pref.  p.  13,  as  "A  secondary  entry, 
i.  e.  any  other  than  the  main  entry")  filed  under  the  word  or  phrase 
indicating  the  subject.  Such  cards  are  called  subject  cards  or  sub- 
ject entries,  and  the  words  or  phrases  under  which  they  are  filed  are 
called  subject  headings. 

More  than  one  subject.  When  a  book  is  valuable  for  its  treatment 
of  more  than  one  subject,  a  separate  subject  card  should  be  made  for 
each. 

20  Form.  The  subject  cards  are  in  most  respects  like  the 
author  cards,  the  chief  differences  being  in  the  addition  of  the  sub- 
ject heading  and  in  the  fulness  of  the  author's  name. 

Sample  cards 
Author  card 


373.3 


TreVelyan,    Sir  George  Otto, 
1338- 

American  revolution;   new  ed... 
Longmans,    1905  cc1398-19053 

3v.    maps,    21cin. 


bart, 


N.Y. 


o 


38 


SUBJECT  ENTRIES 
Subject  card 


20 


97  3. 3 


U.S.  -  HISTORY  -  REVOLUTION,    1775- 
1783, 
jvelyan,    Sir  G:0:  bart,  1338- 

American  revolution;   new  ed. . .        N.Y. 
Longmans,    1905  cc1898-19053 
3v,    maps,    31cm. 


o 


SIMPLIFIED  FORM 

Omitting  ....  brackets  and  size  mark. 

Author  card 


97  3.3 


Trev 


elyan,    Sir  George  Otto, 

1838- 
American  revolution;  new  ed. 
Longjmans,    1905,  c1898-1905. 
3v.    maps. 


bart, 


N.Y, 


O 


39 


20-2lb 


CATALOGING     RULES 
Subject  card 


913.2 

U.S.    -  HISTORY  -  REVOLUTION,    1775- 

T8\ 

1783. 

Trevelyan,    Sir  G:0:          bart,          1838- 

American  revolution;   new  ed.           N.Y. 

1 

Long 

mans,    1905, c1898-1905. 
3v.    map  8. 

o 

21  Subject  heading,  a  Choice  of  headings.  Subject  headings 
should  be  chosen  in  accordance  with  the  following  briefly  stated 
principles,  taken  largely  from  Cutter,  where  a  very  full  discus'sion 
of  the  topic  may  be  found.  An  extended  treatment  of  principles 
and  practice,  constituting  the  first  entire  book  devoted  to  the  sub- 
ject, is  now  (July  1921)  being  prepared  for  publication  by  Alary  E. 
Hyde,  instructor  in  the  New  York  state  library  school,  while  chap- 
ters on  the  subject  are  also  to  be  found  in  Practical  handbook  of 
modem  library  cataloging,  by  William  Warner  Bishop,  and  Cata- 
loging for  small  libraries,  by  Theresa  Hitch'er. 

That  term  should  be  used  as  the  subject  heading  for  a  book 
which  most  clearly  and  specifically  expresses  the  contents  of  the 
book,  as  determined  by  a  study  of  the  title-page,  preface,  introduc- 
tion, table  of  contents,  or  the  book  itself. 

In  choosing  between  synonymous  headings  preference  should  be 
given  to  the  term  (1)  most  familiar  to  the  users  of  the  library, 
(2)  most  used  in  other  catalogs,  (3)  with  fewest  meanings  other 
than  the  sense  in  which  it  is  to  be  employed,  (4)  which  brings  the 
subject  into  the  neighborhood  of  other  related  subjects. 

Lists  of  headings.  The  A.  L.  A.  list  of  subject  headings,  issued  in 
i ' j i  r  by  the  A.  L.  A.  publishing  hoard,  Chicago,  is  designed  as  a  guide 
for  general  use,  while  the  list  of  subject  headings  published  by  the  Li- 
brary of  Congress  and  indicating  the  usage  of  that  library  is  more  extensive 
and  detailed  (being,  tlierefore,  specially  adapted  to  very  large  collections) 
and  contains  also  the   more  recent  topics. 

b  Color.  In  many  libraries  the  distinction  between  subject  and 
other  cards  in  the  catalog  is  brought  out  prominently  by  the  use 
of  red  ink  for  subject  headings.    Red  ink  is.  however,  unfortunately 

40 


SUBJECT  ENTRIES  2ib-d(3> 

liable  to  fade,  and  specially  the  red  ink  used  on  typewriter  ribbons, 
which  sometimes  becomes  almost  invisible.  For  this  reason  the  Li- 
brary of  Congress,  in  its  Handbook  of  card  distribution;  ./th  edition, 
p.  84-85,  recommends  for  typewritten  headings  that  they  he  writ- 
ten in  black,  but,  in  order  to  maintain  a  distinguishing  feature, 
entirely  in  capitals.  This  use  of  capitals,  however,  would  not  be 
practicable  for  handwritten  headings,  and  in  order  to  show  the 
proper  capitalization  for  such  work  the  use  of  nil  ink  headings  in 
capitals  and  lower  case  is  assumed  in  the  text  throughout  the  follow- 
ing pages,  the  use  of  red  ink  being  shown  by  small  capitals  in  the 
place  of  the  lower  case  letters  which  would  actually  be  used.  On  the 
facsimile  sample  cards  the  subject  headings  are  given  in  black 
capitals. 

For  the  sake  of  brevity  the  phrase  "subject  style"  has,  in  the  following 
pages,  been  adopted  to  cover  the  use  of  either  red  ink  or  black  capitals  for 
subject  headings,  while,  in  distinction,  the  usual  combination  of  black 
capitals  and  lower  case  used  in  author  headings   is  termed  "author  style." 

c  Position.  Write  the  subject  heading  on  the  top  line,  beginning 
at  the  second  indention  ;  i.  e.  the  inner  vertical  line.  If  the  head- 
ing runs  over  the  line  indent  subsequent  lines  one-half  centimeter 
(two  typewriter  spaces)   further  to  the  right. 

d  Punctuation  and  spacing.  (1)  When  a  subject  heading  of 
a  kind  which  could  be  used  in  the  subject  relation  only  consists  of 
a  main  heading  and  one  or  more  subheads,  the  subheads  are  sepa- 
rated from  the  main  heading  and  from  each  other  by  a  dash,  pre- 
ceded and  followed  by  one  typewriter  space. 

In  some  libraries  the  subheads  are  separated  from  what  precedes  by 
a  period,  followed  by  one  typewriter  space. 

(2)  When  the  heading  consists  of  a  personal  name,  it  should 
take  the  same  fulness,  punctuation  and  spacing  that  it  would  take 
if  it  were  being  used  in  the  author  relation,  except  that  if  it  is  fol- 
lowed by  a  subdivision  distinctly  of  a  subject  character,  the  latter 
should  be  separated  from  the  personal  part  of  the  heading  by  the 
dash,  preceded  and  followed  by  one  typewriter  space,  while  the 
centimeter  space  which  would  ordinarily  precede  distinguishing 
marks  (e.  g.  titles  of  honor  and  dates  of  birth  and  death)  should 
be  omitted  in  order  to  make  the  personal  designation  appear  more 
as  a  unit ;  e.  g. 

Washington,  George,  pres.  U.  S.  1732-1799 — Bibliography. 

(3)  When  the  heading  represents  a  corporate  body  it  takes 
in  the  subject  relation  the  same  punctuation  and  spacing  as  when 
used  in  the  author  relation,  but  (as  in  the  case  of  personal  names) 

41 


2id(3)-22bl  CATALOGING    RULES 

a  subhead  of  an  exclusively  subject  character  is  separated  from 
what  goes  before  by  a  dash,  preceded  and  followed  by  one  type- 
writer space,  e.g.  New  York  (City).     Fire  dept — History. 

Exceptions.  To  this  rule  for  the  punctuation  of  corporate  headings 
the  Library  of  Congress  makes  two  exceptions,  i.  e.  Army  and  Navy,  when 
used  as  subheads  under  the  names  of  countries  and  states.  In  author 
headings  these  subbeads  are  separated  from  the  name  of  the  country  or 
state  by  a  period,  in  subject  headings  by  a  dash;  e.  g. 

Author  heading:  Canada.     Army 

Subject  "  Canada — Army 

Author  "  Great  Britain.     Navy 

Subject  "  Great   Britain — Navy 

22  Author's  name,  a  Position.  On  the  line  below  the  subject 
heading  write  the  author's  name,  using  the  same  indention  as  on 
author  cards. 

b  Fulness  of  author's  name.  On  the  author  card  the  author's 
name  is  the  first  consideration  and  either  the  full  form  or  the  fullest 
well-known  form  is  desirable,  for  purposes  of  identification,  chiefly 
with  a  view  to  distinguishing  authors  of  the  same  surname. 

On  the  subject  card  the  subject  heading  is  the  first  consideration, 
and  the  author  is  secondary.  Consequently  a  shorter  form  of  name 
may  often  be  used,  thereby  saving,  in  the  sum  total,  a  very  con- 
siderable amount  of  time,  with  little  if  any  loss  in  the  usefulness  of 
the  cards.1 

The  form  used  on  subject  cards  is  commonly  designated  as  be- 
ing of  "secondary  fulness"  or  "subject  fulness."  This  generally 
consists  of  the  author's  surname  (as  on  the  author  card)  followed 
by  the  forename  written  in  full  when  the  author  has  only  one,  but 
by  the  initials  of  the  forenames  when  the  author  has  more  than  one. 
Titles  of  honor,  dates  of  birth  and  death,  etc.  are  used  as  on  the 
author  card  (see  \2b  above). 

i  Different  degrees  for  secondary  fulness.  The  form  used  on  the 
subject  card  should  always  correspond  to  the  form  on  the  author  card. 
The  forms  specified  above  are  those  commonly  used  for  secondary  fulness, 
but  for  a  small  library  it  would  generally  be  practicable  to  use  only  the 
initial  wben  the  author  has  but  one  forename,  or  even  in  a  very  small 
library  to  use  for  secondary  fulness  only  the  surname. 


1  Since  all  the  Library  of  Congress  cards  for  a  book  are  originally 
exactly  alike,  and  subject  cards  and  other  added  entries  are  made  by  adding 
the  necessary  headings  to  the  original  form,  there  is  no  difference  in  the 
fulness  of  the  author's  name  on  the  various  cards,  but  there  need  be  no 
confusion  through  the  combination  with  these  in  the  catalog,  of  manuscript 
or  typewritten  cards,  where  secondary  fulness  is  used  as  a  measure  of 
economy. 

42 


SUBJECT  ENTRIES 


22D2-4 


2  Dates  of  birth  and  death.  Dates  of  birth  and  death  are  often  quite 
as  important  on  the  subject  cards  as  on  the  author  cards,  since  the  value 
of  many  books  (e.  g.  those  in  history,  travel,  science  and  industrial  arts) 
would   be   materially   affected   by  the   period   in   which   the   writer    lived. 

3  Colon  abbreviations  for  forenames.  The  forms  listed  below,  taken 
from  Cutter,  p.  161,  and  known  as  "colon  abbreviations",  are  sometimes  used 
in  catalogs,  both  those  on  cards  and  those  in  book  form,  (examples  of  the 
latter  being  the  A.  L.  A.  catalog,  1904,  and  the  United  States  catalog)  and 
are  heartily  recommended  to  the  attention  of  catalogers  on  the  score  of  the 
very  considerable  information  given,  at  a  minimum  expenditure  of  time  and 
space.  It  should  be  remembered,  however,  that  while  to  those  who  know 
them  they  convey  as  much  meaning  as  the  names  for  which  they  stand,  the 
great  majority  of  the  public  do  not  know  their  significance  and  therefore 
in  records  to  be  consulted  by  the  public  they  should  be  used  only  inhere 
initials  would  otherwise  be  used.  In  the  following  pages  they  have  for  the 
purpose  of  illustrating  their  use,  been  given,  when  applicable,  in  place  of 
the  initial  with  the  period.  In  Mr  Cutter's  original  list  M :  and  U :  indi- 
cated Mark  and  Ulrich,  and  in  various  places  where  the  abbreviations  are 
used  they  have  been  retained  for  those  names. 


Men 

IVomen 

A. :     Augustus 

A.. 

Anna 

B:     Benjamin 

B.. 

Beatrice 

C :     Charles 

C. 

Charlotte 

D :     David 

D.. 

Delia 

E :     Edward 

E.. 

Elizabeth 

F :     Frederick, 

Frederic 

F.. 

Fanny,    Fannie 

G :     George 

G.. 

Grace 

H :     Henry 

H.. 

Helen 

I :       Isaac 

I.. 

Isabella 

J :       John 

J.. 

Jane 

K :     Karl 

K.. 

Katharine,  Kate 

L:      Louis,   Lewis 

L.. 

Louise,  Louisa 

M :     Matthew 

M.. 

Mary 

N :     Nicholas 

0 :     Otto 

N  .. 
0.. 

Nancy 
Olivia 

P :     Peter 

R :     Richard 

P. . 

Pauline 

S :     Samuel 

R.. 

Rebecca 

T :     Thomas 

S.. 

Sarah 

U :     Uriah 

T.. 

Theresa 

V :     Victor 

U.. 

Ursula 

\V:    William 

v.. 

Victoria 

X :     Xavier 

\\\. 

Wilhelmina 

Z :     Zachary 

Z.. 

Zcnobia 

Where    :    and    . .    are   u 

;ed    for 

English 

forms    of    the    names,    for    the 

Germans  form 

■;  the  ;  and  . , 

may  be 

used,  and  '  ami  ,  fur  the  French;  • 

J:   John,  J;  Jo 

Iiann,  J.   '  Jean. 

4  Family  names.     The 

maiden 

name 

of    a    woman    who    is   entered 

under  her  married  name  is 

(where 

ler  name  is  given  the  author  position) 

written  in   full 

on   all  cards 

and  inc 

losed  in    (     ).     Also  all   surnames  ac- 

43 


22b4-25b  CATALOGING    RULES 

quired  by  marriage  and  the  family  names  of  noblemen  who  are  entered 
under  title  are  (where  the  names  are  given  the  author  position)  written 
in  full  on  all  cards. 

5  Examples  of  author  vs  secondary  fulness. 

Author  fulness  Secondary    (or  subject)    fulness 

Washington,  George,       pres.  U.S.  Same 

Allen,  James  Lane  Allen,  J.  L. 

Beaconsfield,  Benjamin  Disraeli,  Same 

1st   earl   of 

Macaulay,   Thomas   Babington  Macaulay,  T:  B.  Macaulay, 

Macaulay,            1st  baron  ist  baron 

Cooke,  Airs  Rose   (Terry)  Same 

Oliphant,     Mrs     Margaret     Oliphant  Oliphant,    Mrs    M.    O.    (Wilson) 

(Wilson) 

Parsons,  -Mrs  Frances  Theodora  Parsons,  Mrs  F.  T.    (Smith)   Dana 

(Smith)   Dana 

23  Title,  a  Position.  Begin  the  title  on  the  line  following  the 
author's  name,  indenting  as  on  the  author  card. 

b  Length.  The  title  on  subject  cards  may  vary  in  length  from 
that  given  on  the  author  card ;  usually  in  case  of  difference  it  will 
he  longer.1  The  title  may  vary  in  length  on  different  subject 
cards.  It  should  always  retain  the  information  which  is  of  value 
in  connection  with  the  special  heading  under  which  it  is  filed. 

c  Oilier  details.     Follow  the  rules  for  title  on  the  author  card. 

24  Imprint,  collation  and  call  number.  Give  as  on  the  author 
card. 

25  Tracing,  a  Definition.  Tracing  is  the  term  used  to  cover 
the  indication  of  entries  made  for  a  book.  In  its  most  common 
application  it  refers  to  the  abbreviations  or  signs  given  on  the 
main  card  to  show  the  added  entries  (i.  e.  those  additional  cards 
which  bear  a  call  number)  in  order  that  all  the  cards  for  a  book 
may  he  readily  found  if  it  becomes  desirable  to  remove  them  from 
the   catalog  for  correction  or  any   other  pnrpose. 

b  Form.  The  clearest  form  consists  of  the  entry  word  or 
phrase  i  i.  e.  the  word  or  phrase  used  as  a  heading)  or  of  some 
term  referring  to  the  kind  of  card.  For  the  subject  entries,  both 
the  main  heading  and  the  subheads  should,  to  insure  c;isv  find- 
ing of  the  cards,  he  given  in  the  exact  form  which  appears  in  the 
headings  on  the  face  of  the  subject  cards,  except  that  perfectly 
obvious  abbreviations  may  he  used.  For  other  added  entry  cards 
(specially  title,  editor,  compiler,  translator,  illustrator,  joint  author- 

1  For  title-page  checks   see  section   136,  footnote 

44 


SUBJECT  ENTRIES  25b-d 

and  series  cards)  an  indication  of  the  kind  of  card  (e.  g.  t  for 
title  card,  ed  for  editor  card,  etc.)  is  often  quite  as  clear  and 
at  the  same  time  shorter  than  the  entry  words,  but  the  latter  should 
always  be  used  when  necessary  to  make  clear  the  heading  des- 
ignated. If  the  names  of  editors,  translators,  etc.  appear  on  the 
face  of  the  card  with  sufficient  fulness  so  that  the  corresponding 
entries  will  be  easily  found  in  the  catalog  and  their  relation  to 
the  book  is  clearly  shown  in  the  title  given  on  the  cards,  the  ab- 
breviations, ed,  tr,  etc.  are  in  themselves  sufficient  for  tracing,  but 
if  the  names  are  not  given  with  sufficieni  fulness  or  their  relation 
to  the  book  is  not  sufficiently  clear  to  insure  their  being  easily  found, 
the  surname,  with  either  given  names  or  initials,  should  be  used 
for  tracing,  followed  in  (  )  by  the  appropriate  abbreviation,  i.  e. 
ed,  tr,  etc.  If  cards  are  to  be  made  for  two  or  three  editors  or 
translators,  etc.  the  tracing  for  the  cards  of  the  same  kind  may 
often  be  combined,  e.  g.  2  ed. 

Some   of   the  most  common   abbreviations   indicating   kinds   of 


cards  are : 

an 

(for 

analytic) 

jt  an 

ith 

(for 

joint  author) 

comp 

(    " 

compiler) 

pt  t 

(   " 

partial  title) 

ed 

(   " 

editor) 

ser 

i    " 

series) 

gen  2dary 

(   " 

general  sec- 

t 

(   " 

title) 

ondary) 

tr 

(   " 

translator) 

illus 

(   " 

illustrator) 

c  Position.  On  manuscript  or  typewritten  cards,  trace  added 
entries  on  the  back  of  the  main  card.  Tip  the  card  forward  so 
that  the  hole  for  the  rod  to  run  through  will  be  at  the  top  of  the 
card.  Write  the  tracing  for  other  cards  toward  what  will  then  be 
the  lower  right  corner.  Calculate  the  space  so  that  each  entry  shall 
stand  out  distinctly  on  a  separate  line,  the  lowest  coming  close 
to  the  bottom  of  the  card.  (For  the  tracing  of  several  added  en- 
tries, see  the  samples  below.) 

On  Library  of  Congress  cards,  where  the  added  entries  are  indicated 
on  the  face  of  the  card,  near  the  bottom,  the  tracing  is  most  easily  done  by 
placing  a  dot  or  line  under  the  first  letter  of  such  indication,  whether  it 
be  the  exact  heading  to  be  used,  or,  e.  g.,  the  word  "Title'';  or  in  the 
case  of  title,  partial  title,  series  cards,  etc.  the  dot  or  line  may  be  placed 
in  the  body  of  the  entry  under  the  word  by  which  the  added  entry  card 
would  be  filed.  Added  entries  not  conveniently  indicated  in  the  printed 
matter  on  the  face  of  the  card  should  be  added  on  the  back,  a^  for 
manuscript  and  typewritten  cards. 

d  Color.  Some  catalogers  trace  subject  headings  in  red  and 
other   added    entries    in    black,   but    it    is   questionable    whether    the 

45 


25d  CATALOGING    RULES 

distinction  is  of  value  in  this  record  which  is  for  official  use  only 
(to  provide  for  the  ready  finding  of  the  added  entry  cards)  and 
of  which  the  users  are  presumably  of  sufficient  intelligence  to  enable 
them  to  find  the  cards  without  being  told  whether  the  heading  is 
in  red  or  black. 

Sample  of  back  of  card 
Manuscript  tracing 


o 


i  *  t 

2  ^  HoA3L,  VTrv.  Co-*iK  ^) 


Typewritten  tracing 


o 

Stn 

U.S. —  Hist.  —  War  of 

1813 

Sea  power 

jt  auth 

ed 

Brown,  T:L:  (gen  2dary) 

t 

pt  t 

6237  v.l 

aer 

6338  v.3 

Hall,  J.U:  (auth  an) 

46 


SUBJECT  REFERENCES  26-30a(2> 


SUBJECT  REFERENCES 

26  Definition.  A  "reference,"  as  defined  by  the  A.  L.  A.  rules, 
pref.  p.  15,  is  "a  direction  from  one  heading"  to  another,"  and  is 
to  be  distinguished  from  an  "entry,"  which  is  "the  record  of  a  book 
in  a  catalog  or  list." 

27  Purpose.  References  are  designed  to  serve  as  connecting 
links  between  synonymous  or  related  terms,  and  are  of  two  kinds, 
"see"  and  "see  also"  references. 

Either  form  may  properly  be  made  from  a  heading,  even  when  there 
are  no  entries  under  that  heading,  but  references  should  never  be  made 
to  a  heading  under  which  no  card  will  be  found. 

28  "See"  reference.  A  reference  from  a  term  under  which  a 
reader  might  look,  but  which  the  cataloger  does  not  intend  ever 
to  use  as  a  heading,  to  the  term  which  has  been  chosen  to  cover 
books  on  that  topic;  e.  g.  Political  economy,  see  Economics. 

i  The  "see"  reference  is  generally  used  for  synonymous  terms,  or  for 
terms  so  nearly  synonymous  that  it  is  undesirable  to  try  to  separate  the 
material. 

2  For  an  alternative  form  see  note  2  under  29  below. 

29  "See  also"  reference.  A  reference  from  a  term  which  the 
cataloger  has  used,  or  expects  to  use  when  the  library  has  material 
to  which  it  applies;  e.  g.  Economics,  see  also  Banks  and  bank- 
ing ;  Factory  system  ;  Manufactures. 

1  "See  also"  references  are  made  from  general  subjects  to  their  sub- 
ordinate subjects,  but  not  to  their  own  subheads;  e.  g.  Economics,  see  also 
Banks  and  banking;  but  not  Economics,  see  also  Economics — Periodicals; 
they  are  also  made  from  subjects  to  related  coordinate  subjects;  e.  g. 
Lyric  poetky,  see  also  Songs. 

2  The  "see"  and  "see  also"  references  are  the  forms  in  general  use, 
but  the  Wisconsin  library  school  has  adopted  forms  which,  by  a  fuller 
wording,  as  shown  in  the  samples  below,  probably  convey  the  idea  to  the 
public  more  clearly. 

30  Form,  a  Specific  references.  (1)  Definition.  By  a 
specific  reference  is  meant  a  direct  reference  to  a  distinctly  specified 
subject. 

The  same  reference  need  not  be  made  more  than  once,  as  duplicate  cards 
for  the  catalog  are  unnecessary. 

(2)  Position  and  color.  On  the  top  line  of  the  card, 
beginning  at  the  second  vertical  line,  write  the  heading  from  which 
reference  is  to  be  made,  punctuating  with  a  comma  at  the  end  unless 
the  heading  ends  with  an  abbreviation.   At  the  distance  of  one  centi- 

47 


3oa(2)-(4) 


CATALOGING     RULES 


meter  (four  typewriter  spaces)  write  in  black  cither  "see"  or  "see 
also"  and  on  the  following  line  the  heading  referred  to,  beginning 
at  the  outer  vertical  line.  If  either  the  heading  referred  from  or  the 
heading  referred  to  occupies  more  than  one  line  begin  the  addi- 
tional line  one-half  centimeter  (two  typewriter  spaces)  to  the  right 
of  the  inner  vertical  line.     (See  also  section  31  below.) 

(3)  Additional  references.  Additional  topics  should, 
instead  of  taking  new  cards,  be  added  to  cards  already  made,  as 
occasion  arises,  thus  bringing  together  in  a  single  place  all 
references  from  one  subject;  but  general  references  (see  b  below) 
may  usually  to  advantage  be  kept  separate  from  references  to 
specific  topics. 

(4)  A  r  r  a  n  g  e  m  e  n  t.  In  specific  references  in  a  card  catalog 
topics  referred  to  should  be  arranged  in  a  column,  additional  topics 
being  added  at  need. 

The  column  arrangement  is  the  clearest  for  a  card  catalog  but  an  alter- 
native is  the  paragraph  form,  in  which  one  topic  follows  another  on  the 
same  line,  separated  by  a  semicolon.  The  latter  form  is  generally  used  in 
book  catalogs,  for  its  economy  of  space  with  corresponding  economy  in 
cost  of  printing,  while  the  alphabetic  order  generally  there  followed  makes 
consultation  easier  than  would  be  the  case  with  cards,  where  it  is  im- 
practicable to  maintain  alphabetic  order,  owing  to  the  need  of  making 
additions. 

Samples  of  reference  cards 

(For   the   sake    of   compactness,   in   subsequent  samples  only  so   much  of  the  card  will 
be  given  as  is  needed  to  illustrate  the  form.) 

Usual  form  of  a  "see"  reference 


ORNITHOLOGY, 


BIRDS 


see 


Alternative  form  used  by  the  Wisconsin  library  school 


BIRDS 


ORNITHOLOGY. 

To  be  found  in  this  catalog  under 


48 


SUBJECT  REFERENCES 


3oa(4) 


For  the  general  part  of  the  statement  on  this  and  on  the  Wisconsin 
form  given  below,  rubber  stamps  may  be  used  or,  better,  in  a  library  large 
enough  to  warrant  it,  the  phrases  may  be  printed  on  cards,  in  the  proper 
position,  leaving  space  to  write  in  the  subject  words  above  and  below. 


Usual  form  for  a  "see  also"  reference,  for  a  card  catalog 


LEGENDS, 
MYTHOLOGY 
FAIRY   TALES 
FABLJES 
FOLKLORE 
ANIMAL  LORE 


see  also 


Alternative  form  for  a  book  catalog 


LEGENDS,  see  also 

ANIMAL   LORE;    FABLES;    FAIRY  TALES;    FOLK- 
LORE1;   MYTHOLOGY 


Form   used  by   Wisconsin  library  school 


LEGENDS. 

Material  on  this  subject  will  also  be 
found  under 


MYTHOLOGY 
FAIRY  TALES 
FABLES 
FOLKLORE 
ANIMAL  LORE 


49 


3ob 


CATALOGING     RULES 


b  General  references.  Frequently  when  the  list  of  specific  topics 
to  which  references  should  be  made  would  be  long  and  a  general 
direction  will  cover  it,  the  general  reference  (i.  e.  a  reference  in 
general  terms  to  a  certain  kind  of  headings)   is  preferable;  e.  g. 


HISTORY. 

For  history  of  a  special  country  or 
other  locality  see  name  of  the  locality, 
subhead  HISTORY;  e.g.  GREAT  BRITAIN—  HIS- 
TORY.  For  history  of  any  subject  see 
name  of  that  subject,  subhead  HISTORY; 
e.g.  EDUCATION—  HISTORY. 

For  subjects  on  which  the  library  has 
few  [books  the  subhead  HISTORY  may  be 
omitted. 


General  references  should  be  so  worded  as  to  make  the  mean- 
ing clear  and  to  unite  the  various  parts  grammatically  and  smoothly, 
as  well  as  to  combine  satisfactorily  with  any  introductory  state- 
ment regarding  the  scope  of  the  heading. 

Suggestions  for  forms  of  wording  for  general  references 

(For  indention  see  sample  above.) 

Bibliography. 

For  bibliography  of  a  person  or  other  subject  see  name 
of  that  subject,  subhead  Bibliography,  as  Washington,  George, 
pres.  U.S.  1732-1799 — Bibliography;  or  History — Bibliography. 

Biography. 

This  heading  is  used  for  very  general  works  only;  e.  g. 
works  about  the  writing  of  biography,  or  biographic  collections  not 
limited  to  any  special  class  of  persons  or  to  any  special  locality.  For 
biography  of  a  special  class  of  persons  see  name  of  that  class,  as 
Artists  ;  for  biography  limited  to  a  special  locality  see  name  of 
that  locality,  subhead  Biography,  as  Ohio — Biography  ;  or  Bos- 
ton— Biography;  for  biography  of  an  individual  see  name  of  that 
individual,  as  Longfellow,  Henry  Wadsworth,  1807-1882. 

Composers. 

For  lives  of  individual  composers  see  names  of  the  com- 
posers, as  Grieg,  Edvard  Hagerup,  1843-1907. 

50 


subject  references  3<>b 

Genealogy. 

For  genealogy  of  a  special  locality  see  name  of  that  locality, 
subhead  Genealogy,  as  New  England — Genealogy  ;  for  genealogy 
of  a  special  family  see  name  of  that  family,  as  Allen  family. 

Manners  and  customs. 

For  manners  and  customs  of  any  special  locality  see  name  of 
that  locality,  subhead  Social  life  and  customs,  as  Spain — Social 
life  and  customs. 

Public  schools. 

For  works  on  the  public  schools  of  cities,  towns  etc.  see  name 
of  the  place,  subhead  Public  schools,  as  Chicago — Public 
schools. 

Teaching. 

For  methods  of  teaching  any  special  subject  see  name  of 
that  subject,  subhead  Study  and  teaching;  as,  Arithmetic — 
Study  and  teaching. 

Language. 

For  works  on  any  special  language  see  name  of  that  language 
under  its  local  adjective,  as  English  language. 

Dictionaries. 

For  dictionaries  of  any  language  or  other  special  subject  see 
name  of  that  subject,  subhead  Dictionaries,  as  Italian  language — 
Dictionaries  ;  or  Architecture — Dictionaries. 

Readers. 

For  reading  books  for  learning  a  language  see  name  of  that 
language  under  its  local  adjective,  subhead  Readers,  as  French 
language — Readers.  For  selections  suitable  for  exhibitions  etc.  see 
heading  Recitations  and  readings. 

Literature. 

For  literature  of  a  special  locality  see  name  of  the  literature 
under  the  local  adjective,  as  French  literature;  or  the  name  of 
the  locality,  subhead  Literature,  as  Southern  states — Liter- 
ature. For  works  of  an  individual  writer  see  name  of  that  writer, 
as  Ruskin,  John,  1819-1900. 

Poetry. 

For  poetry  of  a  special  locality  see  name  of  that  poetry 
under  its  local  adjective,  as  English  poetry;  or  the  name  of  the 

51 


3ob-32  CATALOGING    RULES 

locality,  subhead  Poetry,  as  Western  states — Poetry.  For  works 
of  an  individual  poet  see  name  of  that  poet,  as  Arnold,  Matthew, 
1822-1888. 

English  poetry. 

For  works  of  an  individual  poet,  see  name  of  that  poet,  as 

Arnold,    .Matthew,    1822-1888. 

American  poetry. 

For  works  and  collections  covering  both  American  and 
English  poetry  see  entries  under  heading  English  poetry.  For 
works  of  an  individual  poet  see  name  of  that  poet,  as  Lowell, 
James  Russell,  1819-1891. 

31  Color  in  references.  In  all  references,  terms  (whether  re- 
ferred from  or  to)  which  by  their  nature  could  be  used  only  for 
subjects  (as,  Painting)  or  forms  of  literature  (as,  Essays)  should 
be  written  in  "subject  style"  (see  note  under  21b),  but  headings 
which  might  be  used  for  authors  should  be  written  in  "author  style." 

As  a  matter  of  convenience  all  personal  names  should  be  included  under 
the  rule  for  authors,  even  though  in  a  few  cases  it  may  seem  certain  that 
they   will  never  be   used  as   author   headings. 

This  rule  for  the  use  of  "author  style"  applies  merely  to  headings  in 
references.  The  heading  for  the  entry  of  a  hook  should  he  in  either  "author 
style"  or  "subject  style"  according  to  the  relation  of  the  person  to  the  hook: 
i.  e.  the  name  of  the  person  should  be  written  in  "author  style"  when  that 
person  is  the  author  of  the  book  cataloged,  but  in  "subject  style"  when  he  is 
the  subject,  as  of  a  biography  or  criticism.  The  name  of  a  person  referred 
to,  should,  however,  be  in  "subject  style"  when  he  is  referred  to  strictly  in 
the  subject  relation  as  shown  in  the  sample  card  for  Biography,  but  in 
"author  style"  when  referred  to  as  author,  as  in  the  sample  for  Poetry. 

32  Fulness  of  forms.  Personal  names  used  as  subject  headings 
take  the  same  fulness  as  for  author  headings,  and  when  referred 
to  in  a  reference  should  be  given  the  exact  full  form  used  in  the 
heading. 

I  leadings  referred  to  in  references  should  be  general  in  form  if 
their  relation  to  the  heading  referred  from  is  general;  e.  g.  supposing 
that  a  book  with  the  subject  heading  U.S. — History — Revolution, 
1775-1783,  was  the  first  book  in  the  library  with  a  subject  card 
for  United  States,  it  should  take  at  least  three  references,  (1) 
North  America,  see  also  United  States  (because  all  books  on 
the  United  States,  whatever  their  subheads,  would  have  a  relation 
to  North  America)  ;  (2)  American  history,  see  U.  S. — History 
(because  the  term  American  history  is  used  as  synonymous  with 

52 


SUBJECT  REFERENCES  32*35 

United  States  history  as  a  whole)  ;  (3)  American  revolution,  see 
U.  S. — History — Revolution,  1775-1783  (because  in  this  case  the 
heading  referred  from  relates  distinctly  to  the  heading  carried  down 
to  the  period  division). 

33  Reference  from  subject  heading  to  author  heading.  Occa- 
sionally reference  may  be  made  from  a  subject  to  an  author  head- 
ing; e.  g.  Agriculture — U.  S.  see  also  U.  S.  Agriculture  dept ;  or. 
Great  Britain — History — Victoria,  1837-1901,  see  also  Victoria, 
queen  of  Great  Britain,  1819-1901. 

34  Call  numbers  and  tracing.  Call  numbers  should  not  be 
given  on  reference  cards  nor  should  the  references  be  traced  on  the 
catalog  cards,  as  they  refer  to  the  subject  in  the  abstract  and  not 
to  any  special  book. 

An  official  list  of  subject  headings  used  and  references  made  should  be 
kept  in  some  form.  It  may  generally  be  done  by  checking  and  annotating 
the  A.  L.  A.  list  of  subject  headings  or  the  list  of  the  Library  of  Congress, 
but  if  the  practice  of  the  individual  library  varies  widely  from  the  printed 
list  a  separate  record  on  cards  will  be  more  convenient.  A  fuller  treat- 
ment of  this  topic  is  given  in  Appendix  3. 

35  Filing.  The  question  in  regard  to  the  filing  of  reference 
cards  is  so  often  asked  that,  while  it  is  not  a  part  of  the  cataloging 
itself,  it  has  been  thought  well  to  include  a  statement  on  the  sub- 
ject. 

On  the  principle  that  general  or  broad  treatment  takes  precedence 
over  special  topics,  general  references  should  precede  the  specific. 

There  is  a  difference  of  opinion  as  to  whether  it  is  better  to  file 
references  before  or  after  those  entries  which  are  filed  under  the 
same  heading.  If  references  arc  filed  after  the  entries  the  reader  finds 
what  material  the  library  has  on  that  subject,  before  being  referred 
away  from  it  to  headings  covering  subordinate  or  allied  subjects. 
On  the  other  hand  (as  argued  by  those  who  advocate  filing  ref- 
erences before  the  entries)  many  readers  consult  first  a  heading  not 
used  for  just  the  material  which  they  desire  (e.  g.  a  general  head- 
ing instead  of  a  specific)  and  these  readers  must,  if  the  references  are 
filed  at  the  end,  look  through  the  entries  under  that  heading  before 
being  referred  to  the  heading  under  which  the  desired  material 
is  to  be  found.  Since  both  classes  of  readers  can  not  be  equally 
well  served  by  cither  one  or  the  other  method,  it  seems  only  fair 
that  those  who  have  the  most  knowledge  of  the  catalog  and  the 
judgment  to  turn  to  the  heading  which  applies  to  their  own  sub- 
ject should  be  given  the  first  consideration  and  that  arrangement 
of  references  after  entries  is  therefore  to  be  preferred. 

53 


35  CATALOGING  RULES 

Assuming  that  references  are  filed  after  entries,  a  minor  point  is 
the  position  of  the  reference  from  a  main  heading  alone,  with  re- 
lation to  that  heading  combined  with  subheads.  It  is  the  common 
practice  to  file  a  reference  from  the  main  heading  alone,  immediately 
after  the  entries  under  the  main  heading  alone,  before  the  entries  for 
any  of  the  subheads,  but  in  some  libraries  the  references  from  the 
main  heading  alone  are  filed  after  all  the  subheads.  The  latter 
method  has  the  advantage  of  giving  to  the  reader  all  the  material 
on  the  subject  (including  its  various  subdivisions)  before  referring 
him  to  a  different  heading.  References  from  a  main  heading  com- 
bined with  a  subhead  are,  however,  filed  immediately  after  the  en- 
tries  for  that  subhead. 

Example 
Texas1 

Texas — Description  and  travel 

Texas — Description  and  travel,  see  also 

Texas — History 

Texas — Occupations 

Texas — Social  conditions 

Texas — Social  conditions,         .    see  also 

Texas — Statistics 

Texas,  see  also 


1  In  author  style  if  an  author  heading,  in  subject  style  if  a  subject 


54 


TITLE   ENTRIES  36-37C 


TITLE  ENTRIES 

36  Purpose.  Along  with  those  books  which  require  only  the 
author  card  and  those,  which,  treating  of  definite  subjects,  need 
also  subject  cards,  come  many  books  which  are  likely  to  be  known 
and  asked  for  by  title.  For  such  a  book  a  "title  card"  or  "title  entry" 
(defined  in  the  A.  L.  A.  rules  as  "The  record  of  a  book  in  the 
catalog  under  some  word  of  the  title,  generally  the  first  word  not 
an  article")  should  be  made.  This  class  of  books  consists  mainly 
of  novels,  dramas  and  poems,  and  other  works  with  specially  memo- 
rable titles. 

Although  title  cards  are  often  made  in  addition  to  subject  cards  they 
should  be  so  made  only  when  the  title  is  sufficiently  different  from  the 
subject  heading  to  answer  a  separate  need.  If  in  doubt  whether  a  title 
card  or  a  subject  card  should  be  made  give  the  preference  to  the  subject 
card. 

37  Form,  a  Position  of  title.  Begin  the  title  on  the  top  line, 
at  the  inner  vertical  ruling.  If  the  title  runs  over  the  line  indent 
all  subsequent  lines  before  the  author's  name  one-half  centimeter 
(two  typewriter  spaces)  further  to  the  right,  to  give  distinctness  to 
the  beginning  of  both  the  title  and  the  author's  name. 

b  Length  of  title.  The  title  on  the  title  card  is  often  shorter 
than  on  the  author  card,  but  a  short  subtitle  or  alternative  title  may 
generally  be  included  to  advantage,  specially  in  the  case  of  a  very 
short  main  title,  where  the  danger  of  confusion  with  another  similar 
title  is  greatest. 

If  the  title  of  a  translation  is  identical  with  the  title  of  the 
original,  so  that  the  main  title  does  not  show  the  language  of  the 
edition  in  hand,  this  fact  should  be  made  clear,  either  by  informa- 
tion retained  in  the  title  or  by  a  note. 

c  Marks  of  omission.  Where  full  and  exact  cataloging  is 
desired,  the  .  .  .  should  be  used  to  indicate  omissions  at  the  be- 
ginning or  in  the  midst  of  the  title,  as  on  the  main  card,  but  are 
unnecessary  at  the  end,  as  the  title  card  is  used  simply  as  the 
means  of  learning  whether  a  specific  book  is  in  the  library,  and  the 
same  degree  of  bibliographic  exactness  as  given  on  the  main  card 
is  not  important. 

The  title  as  given  on  the  cards  should  always  begin  with  the  first  words 
of  the  printed  title  (except  in  the  case  of  partial  titles,  to  be  taken  up 
later)  except  that  the  serial  number  for  annual  reports  etc.,  often  the 
initial  article  and  generally  the  author's  name  (including  titles  of  honor, 
positions,  etc.)  may  be  omitted,  as  on  the  author  card,  and  these  omis- 
sions need  not  be  indicated  by  .  .  . 

55 


37d-h 


CATALOGING    RULES 


d  Editors,  translators  etc.  The  names  of  editors,  translators, 
etc.  are  generally  omitted  from  title  cards,  but  for  books  likely  to 
appear  in  different  editions  or  translations  by  different  editors  or 
translators  there  is  an  advantage  in  retaining  the  editor's  or  trans- 
lator's name,  as  an  aid  to  the  reader  in  case  of  preference. 

e  Imprint.  One  centimeter  (four  typewriter  spaces)  after  the 
title  give  simply  the  imprint  date,  or  if  there  is  no  imprint  date 
give  whatever  is  substituted  for  it  on  the  main  card.  Do  not  give 
the  copyright  date  in  addition  to  the  imprint  date.  If  different 
volumes  of  a  set  have  different  imprint  dates  give  inclusive  dates ; 
as,  1897-1904. 

If  v.l  is  dated  later  than  the  first  imprint  date  no  mention  need,  on 
the  title  card,  be  made  of  this  fact,  even  if  given  on  the  main  card. 

f  Collation.  One  centimeter  (four  typewriter  spaces)  after  the 
date  give  merely  the  number  of  volumes  if  more  than  one.  For 
works  bound  in  a  greater  or  less  number  of  volumes  than  the  num- 
bering of  the  publisher  see  section  15^(2)   above. 

On  full-entry  cards  (i.  e.  author  and  subject  cards)  the  collation  is 
written  on  the  line  below  the  imprint,  but  on  the  short-entry  cards  (which 
include  all  cards  except  author  and  subject)  the  imprint  and  collation 
consist  of  merely  the  date  and  number  of  volumes,  and  it  seems  undesirable 
to  give  to  the  latter  a  separate  line. 

g  Author's  name.  On  the  line  after  the  title  etc.  write  the 
author's  name,  in  secondary  fulness,  using  the  same  indention  as 
on  the  author  card. 

Here,  and  on  all  other  added  entry  cards,  the  author's  name  is  a  second- 
ary consideration  (as  explained  in  connection  with  the  subject  card)  and  a 
shortened  form  may  therefore  be  used.  On  short-entry  cards,  however, 
hereditary  and  other  personal  titles  should  be  used,  as  on  the  author  and 
subject  cards,  but  dates  of  birth  and  death  are  less  important  than  on 
those  cards  and  their  use  on  short-entry  cards  is  not  advised. 

//   Call  11  umber.     Give  call  number  in  the  regular  place. 


Sample  cards 
Author  card 


Tbtbv 


Thao|keray,    William  Makepeace,  1311- 

1863. 
(The)   Virginians:    a  tale   of   the    last 
Le.the   18tha    oenturyj   with.  ..  Illustra- 
tions by  the  author...  Boat,    Houghton, 

1898,cc,89j 

2v,    illus.    20-jjcm. 


56 


TITLE   ENTRIES 


37 


On  the  back  of  the  main  card  should  be  written  the  accession  numbers, 
and  t  to  trace  the  title  card. 

If  typewriters  lack  the  character  l/2,  the  decimal  .5  may  be  used  instead. 

Title  card 


T363v 


(The)  Virginians:  a  tale  of  the  last 
ci.e.the  18th 3  century.     1896. 
2v. 

rhaokeray,  W:M. 


SIMPLIFIED  FORM 

Omitting  .  .  .  ,  brackets  (except  in  title)  and  size  mark. 

Author  card 


T3<b3v      fThao 


i.  e. 


1811- 


keray,  William  Makepeace, 
1363. 

(The)  Virginians:  a  tale  of  the  last 

the  13th3  century;  with  illustra- 
tions by  the  author.    Bost.  Houghton, 
189Q, c'39. 

'3v.  illus. 


On  the  back  of  the  main  card  should  be  written  the  accession  numbers, 
and  t  to  trace  the  title  card. 

Title-card 

Same    form   as    for    full    cataloging   given    above. 

In  the  samples  above  and  in  certain  others  on  later  pages,  works 
of  fiction  are  given  the  same  fulness  of  treatment  as  are  other  books. 
This  policy,  however,  is  not  regarded  as  desirable  for  most  public 
libraries,  for  which  another  method  is  recommended  in  Appendix  1. 


57 


38-42a  CATALOGING    RULES 


EDITORS,   COMPILERS   AND   TRANSLATORS 

38  Definitions.  The  definitions  of  editor  and  compiler,  as 
given  in  the  A.  L.  A.  rules,  pref.  p.  14,  are  as  follows: 

Editor:  One  who  prepares  for  publication  a  work  or  collection 
of  works  not  his  own.  The  editorial  labor  may  be  limited  to  the 
preparation  of  the  matter  for  the  printer,  or  it  may  include  supervi- 
sion of  the  printing,  revision  (restitution)  or  elucidation  of  the  text, 
and  the  addition  of  introductions,  notes  and  other  critical  matter. 

Compiler:  One  who  produces  a  work  by  collecting  and  putting 
together  written  or  printed  matter  from  various  sources. 

39  Names  of  editors  etc.  in  title.  For  the  inclusion  of  the 
names  of  editors  etc.  in  the  title  on  the  main  card  and  subject  cards 
see  section  13c,  note  3,  above.   For  fulness  of  names  see  section  I3g. 

40  Desirability  of  added  entries.  Added  entry  cards  for 
editors,  compilers  and  translators  may  be  made  very  freely  in  a  large 
library,  where  there  is  likelihood  of  call  for  all  the  literary  work  of 
a  man  in  whatever  capacity.  In  a  small  library  they  may  generally 
be  omitted  except  when  the  editor,  compiler  or  translator  is  a  person 
of  special  importance  (from  either  the  general  or  the  local  stand- 
point) or  the  book  in  hand  is  likely  to  be  looked  for  under  his 
name.  Of  the  three  classes  the  translator  cards  are  the  most  likely 
to  be  important. 

A  somewhat  extended  discussion  of  the  subject  is  given  in  Cutter,  ill. 

41  Two  or  more  editors,  compilers  or  translators.  In  the 
case  of  two  or  more  editors,  compilers  or  translators  for  a  book,  a 
separate  card  is  made  for  each  without  reference  to  the  others. 

This  rule  applies  to  editors  etc.  when  another  person  is  treated  as  author. 
For  two  or  more  editors  etc.  as  authors  see  section  64. 

42  Form,  a  Heading  for  editor  etc.  Give  the  name  of  the  editor, 
compiler  or  translator  on  the  top  line,  in  author  fulness,  including 
hereditary  and  other  personal  titles,  with  dates  of  birth  and  death, 
as  in  author  headings,  since  the  form  of  name  should  be  uniform 
on  all  cards  to  be  filed  under  the  name  of  a  single  person.  After 
one  centimeter  (four  typewriter  spaces)  write  the  abbreviation  ed., 
comp.  or  tr.  Begin  the  heading  at  the  inner  vertical  ruling.  If  it 
runs  over  the  line  indent  subsequent  lines  one-half  centimeter  (two 
typewriter  spaces)    further  to  the  right. 

If  the  same  person  compiles  and  edits  a  work,  the  work  of  compiling  is 
so  far  covered  by  the  editorial  work  that  it  need  not  be  separately  recognized 
in  the  heading,  but  the  work  of  compiling  and  of  translating  or  translating 
and  editing  are  sufficiently  distinct  so  that  when  both  are  done  by  the  same 

58 


EDITORS,   COMPILERS  AND  TRANSLATORS 


42a-e 


person  a  single  added  entry  card  should  be  made  for  him,  in  the  heading  of 
which  both  branches  of  his  -work  should  be  recognized  (see  sample  for 
Wall,  below). 

b  Author's  name.  On  the  line  below  the  heading  give  the 
author's  name,  in  secondary  fulness,  including  hereditary  and  other 
personal  titles,  indenting  as  on  the  author  card. 

The  dates  of  the  author's  birth  and  death  are  seldom  important  except 
on  author  and  subject  cards  and  need  not  be  given  for  the  other  entries. 

c  Title.  Write  the  title  on  the  line  after  the  author's  name, 
beginning  at  the  inner  vertical  ruling  but  coming  back  to  the  outer 
indention  for  subsequent  lines.  A  short  title  may  generally  be 
used  and  the  name  of  the  editor,  translator  or  compiler  may  be 
omitted  from  the  title,  since  the  heading  shows  his  relation  to  the 
book,  but  the  first  words  of  the  title  should  be  retained,  allowing  for 
the  same  exceptions  as  on  title  cards  (see  note  under  section  37c), 
also  as  on  title  cards,  omissions  should,  in  libraries  doing  exact 
cataloging,  be  indicated  by  the  .  .  .  when  occurring  at  the  begin- 
ning or  in  the  midst  of  the  title  but  not  at  the  end ;  in  other  li- 
braries no  indication  of  the  omissions  need  be  given. 

d  Imprint  and  collation.  For  spacing  and  for  fulness  of  imprint 
and  collation  follow  the  same  rules  as  for  title  cards,  37e-f  above. 

e  Call  number.    Give  the  call  number  in  the  usual  place. 


Sample  cards 
Author  card 


531.342.  fornix 
W5& 


,    Gilbert,  1720-1793. 

Natural  history  and  antiquities  of 
Selborne;   ed.  ..by  L.C.Miall  and  W.Warde 
Fowller.  N.Y.   Putnam,    1901. 

386p.    faosims.    19-^om. 


Editor  cards 


531.342. 
W5fc 


Miall,    Ltouisj   Ctprnpton,  1843- 

ed. 
White,    Gilbert. 

Natural  history  and  antiquities  of 
Selborne.  1901. 


59 


42 


CATALOGING    RULES 


531.342 
W58 


Fowler,    Wrilliamj   Warde,  1347- 

ed. 
White,    Gilbert. 

Natural  history  and  antiquities  of 
Selborne.  1901. 


Author  card 


E42. 
WH2. 


!£oli|ere,   Jean  Baotiste  Poquelin,  1622- 

1673. 

Dramatio   works; tr. into  English  prose, 
irith. .  .notes,   by  Charles  Heron  Wall... 
Lond.    Bell,    1876-77. 

3v.   port.    19om. 


Translator  and  editor  card 

Space  left  for  dates  if  found  later.  If  library  does  not  use  dates  of 
birth  and  death  only  one  centimeter  (four  typewriter  spaces)  should  be 
left  after  name. 


842. 

Mia 


Wall,   Charles  Heron, 
tr.and  ed. 
olljere,   J.'B.P. 

Dramatio   works.  1876-77. 


3v. 


SIMPLIFIED   FORMS 
Author  card 

Omitting  the  .    .    .    (with  the  consequent  substitution  of  a  period  at  the 
end  of  the  abbreviation)   and  omitting  the  size  mark. 


531.94-2.  ffhitb,    Gilbert,  1720-1793. 

W58  Natural  history  and  antiquities  of 

Selbbrne;   ed.by  L.C.Miall  and  W. Warde 
Fowl'er.  N.Y.   Putnam,    1901. 

386p.  faosims. 


60 


EDITORS,  COMPILERS  AND  TRANSLATORS 


42 


Editor  cards 

Omitting  the  brackets  around  parts  of  the  names  supplied  in  the  head- 
ings, with  the  consequent  substitution  of  the  comma  after  the  name  in  the 
heading  for  the  first  editor. 


591.942.  iMiall,    Louie   Cosipton, 

W58  ed. 

White,  Gilbert. 

Natural  hietory  and  antiquities  of 

Selqorne.    1901. 


551.342 
W5S 

1 — ■ 

Fowler,    William  Warde,           1347- 
ed. 

White,    Gilbert. 

Selb 

Natural   hietory  and  antiquities  of 
orne.           1901. 

Author  card 
Omitting  the  .  .  .  and  the  size  mark. 


8>4£ 


tfoliere,   Jean  Baptiste  Poquelin,  1622- 

1673. 

Dramatio   worksjtr. into  English  prose, 
with  notes,    by  Charles  Heron  Wall. 
Lond|.    Bell,    1376-77. 

3v.    port. 

1 

Translator  and  editor  card 
Same  form  as   for  full  cataloging  given  above. 


61 


43-43C  CATALOGING   RULES 


ILLUSTRATORS  ETC. 

43  Illustrators.  Enter  books  consisting  solely  ol  illustrations, 
or  illustrated  works  of  which  the  illustrations  are  the  chief  feature, 
under  the  illustrator  or  designer.  In  the  latter  case  make  added 
entry"  under  the  author  of  the  text.  If  the  illustrations  are  second- 
ary in  importance  to  the  text,  the  book  is  to  be  entered  under  the 
name  of  the  author,  with  added  entry  under  the  name  of  the  illus- 
trator. In  doubtful  cases  enter  under  the  author  of  the  text,  with 
added  entry  under  the  illustrator.     A.  L.  A.  rules,  4. 

a  'Main  entry  under  illustrator.  Books  covered  by  the  first 
part  of  this  rule,  i.  e.  "books  consisting  solely  of  illustrations,  or 
illustrated  works  of  which  the  illustrations  are  the  chief  feature", 
are  comparatively  rare,  and  when  encountered  the  main  card  (made 
under  the  name  of  the  illustrator)  does  not  differ  in  its  form  from 
the  ordinary  author  card,  e.  g. 


74-1 


Gibalon,  Charles  Dana,    1867- 

Gibson  new  cartoons...    N.Y.  Scrib- 
ner,|  1916. 

8pl.  31cm. 


b  Added  entry  under  illustrator.  Books  covered  by  the  second 
part  of  the  rule,  i.  e.  those  in  which  "the  illustrations  are  secondary 
in  importance  to  the  text"',  constitute  a  vastly  larger  proportion  of 
published  works,  and  for  these  as  stated  in  the  rule  given  above, 
the  main  entry  is  made  under  the  author  of  the  text,  with  added 
entry  for  the  illustrator,  and  it  is  with  reference  to  these  added  en- 
tries that  the  term  "illustrator  card"  is  generally  used. 

c  Importance  of  illustrator.  Illustrator  cards  are  used  much 
less  freely  than  editor  and  translator  cards,  being  made  only  when 
the  illustrator  himself  or  the  illustrations  of  the  book  in  hand  are 
considered  specially  important.  Except  when  important  the  name 
of  the  illustrator  need  not  be  included  in  the  title  on  the  main  card, 
even  though  it  is  on  the  title-page,  but  when  included  it  should  fol- 
low the  same  rules  as  for  editors,  \3g. 


1  In  the   form   of   a   "general   secondary"    entry,   described   below   under 
section  46. 


62 


ILLUSTRATORS    ETC. 


43d-44 


d  Form  for  illustrator  card.  Follow  the  rules  for  editor  cards, 
except  for  the  substitution  of  illus.  one  centimeter  after  the  name, 
in  place  of  ed.  in  the  heading. 


Main  entry  under  author  of  text 


DIG 


Davis,  Richard  Harding,    1864-1916. 

About  Paris;  illustrated  by  Charle3 
Danai  Gibson,    N.Y.  Harper,  1395. 

pi9p.    28pl.    18-Jcra. 


Added  entry  under  illustrator  (i.  e.  "illustrator  card") 


*>\4A^€>    bibson,  Charles  Dana,    1867- 
D*6        illus. 
Davis,  R:H. 

Aoout  Paris.  1895. 


44  Binders,  publishers,  reporters.  Occasionally  a  library  may 
wish  to  make  an  added  entry  for  a  book  under  the  name  of  a  famous 
binder,  a  publisher  by  whose  name  the  book  is  known,  or  for  the 
reporter  of  a  trial.  In  such  a  case  the  added  entry  may  be  made  in 
the  form  of  an  editor  card,  by  substituting  for  the  abbreviation  ed. 
the  applicable  term,  i.  e.  binder,  pub.,  or  reporter. 


63 


45-46  CATALOGING  RULES 


GENERAL   SECONDARY   ENTRIES 

45  Definition.  Entries  made  for  individuals,  societies,  govern- 
ment departments,  etc.,  having  some  kind  of  author  connection  with 
tlie  book,  important  enough  to  warrant  recognition,  yet  not  really 
that  of  author  nor  such  as  can  be  readily  defined  by  a  single  word, 
as  "editor,"  "translator",  etc. 

A  general  secondary  may  be  made,  for  example,  for  a  society  or  de- 
partment to  which  a  report  is  made  or  which  authorizes  a  publication,  or 
for  an  individual  on  whose  writings  the  work  in  hand  is  based,  as  in  the 
case  ot  material  rewritten  or  adapted  (see  sample  below).1  This  must 
not  be  confused  with  an  abridgment,  in  which  the  author's  own  words  are 
retained,  the  alteration  consisting  chiefly  in  omissions.  For  an  abridgment 
the  author  heading  should  be  the  same  as  for  the  original  work,  the  abridger 
being  regarded  as  an  editor. 

A  general  secondary  card  is  of  special  value  in  case  of  doubt  as  to  which 
of  two  headings  should  be  used  for  the  main  entry.  With  Library  of 
Congress  cards,  general  secondary  entries  are  used  very  freely,  when  the 
name  under  which  the  added  entry  is  made  appears  in  the  title,  even  to  the 
extent  of  applying  the  method  to  material  which,  strictly  speaking,  is  ana- 
lytic in  nature  (e.  g.  prefaces  and  introductions)  when  the  object  of  the 
entry  is  merely  to  represent  the  work  of  that  writer,  rather  than  to  catalog 
that  distinct  part  of  the  book. 

46  Treatment.  Same  -plan  as  for  editor  cards  (section  42), 
except  that  no  term  corresponding  to  "ed."  is  used  in  the  heading 
and  since  the  relation  of  the  party  named  in  the  heading  is  not 
thus  defino  1,  sufficient  information  to  justify  entry  under  the  head- 
ing should  be  included  either  in  the  title  or  in  a  note. 

Tracing.  In  the  case  of  editors,  translators,  etc.  the  facts  are  usually 
evident  from  the  face  of  the  card,  so  that  the  abbreviations  ed.,  tr.,  etc. 
are  sufficient  for  tracing,  but  "general  secondary"  is  from  its  very  scope 
an  indefinite  phrase  and  it  is  therefore-  best  to  trace  entries  of  this  kind 
by  writing  on  the  back  of  the  card  the  heading  for  the  entry  (or  as  much 
of  it  as  is  necessary  for  ready  identification)  and  after  it  in  curves  the 
abbreviation  gen    2dary;  e.  g.  for  the  case  below: 

.   J.  L;    K  2dary) 

W;   K. 

i '. 

Ingle  work  rewritten  or  adapted  will  be  tal 
with    dramatizations,    section    [i 

64 


GENERAL    SECONDARY    ENTRIES 


46 


Sample  cards 
Author  card 


Bvfc 


Baldwin,   James,  1841- 

Fairy  reader;   adapted  from  Grimm  and 
Andersen.  N.Y.   Amer.bk  co.  cc19053 

190p.    illus.    19om. 


General  secondary  card 


BtS 


[Jrimm, c Jakob  Ludwig  Karl3  1785- 

1863. 
Baldjwin,   James. 

Fairy  reader;   adapted  from  Grimm  and 
Andepsen.         cc19053 


(Corresponding   card    for    [Grimm,    Wilhelm    Karlj    1786-1859,    and    for 

Andersen,   [Han-   Christian-,    1805-1875) 


SIMPLIFIED   FORMS 
Author  card 

Omitting  brackets  in  imprint,  with  consequent  substitution  of  period  at 
end  of  imprint,  and  omitting  size  mark  from  the  collation. 


Baldwin,   James,  1841- 

Fairy  reader;   adapted  from  Grimm  and 
Andersen.  N.Y.    Amer.bk  00.    c1905. 

190p.    illus. 


65 


46 


CATALOGING  RULES 
General  secondary  card 


Omitting  brackets  in  heading  and  imprint,  with  consequent  substitution 
of  comma  after  name  in  heading  (or  of  period,  if  dates  are  not  used)  and 
of  period  at  end  of  imprint. 


33  S. 2 
Blfc 


arimm,  Jakob  Ludwig  Karl,  1785- 

1363. 
Baldwin,   James. 

Fairy  reader;   adapted  from  Grimm  and 
Andersen.  c1905. 


It  is  hoped  that  sufficient  samples  have  now  been  given  to  show  that 
the  variations  from  full  cataloging  which  are  recommended  for  simpler 
cataloging  consist  mainly  of  the  omission  of  brackets  everywhere  except  in 
title  (or  in  collation  if  the  paging  as  given  on  the  cards  differs  from  the 
publisher's  final  main  pagination)  the  omission  of  the  .  .  .  and  the  omis- 
sion of  the  size  mark.  It  is  recommended  also  that  "illus"  be  substituted 
for  the  more  specific  "pi."  (except  when  the  plates  are  a  distinct  feature 
as  plates;  e.  g.  in  some  scientific  and  art  books)  and  occasionally  a  shorter 
title  may  be  used.  From  this  time,  therefore,  simplified  forms  will  not  be 
given,  unless  in  some  case  bringing  out  a  special  point. 


66 


notes:  miscellaneous  47-49 

NOTES:  MISCELLANEOUS 

For  series  notes  see  sections  65-69. 

47  Scope  and  order.  Add  notes  when  necessary  to  explain 
the  title1  or  to  correct  any  misapprehension  to  which  it  might  lead, 
and  also  to  supply  essential  information  about  the  author  and  bib- 
liographical details  not  given  in  the  title,  imprint  or  collation.  Notes 
are  to  be  in  English,  except  quotations  from  foreign  sources,  which 
are  to  be  given  preferably  in  the  original.  The  source  of  the 
quotation  is  always  to  be  specified,  and  the  original  punctuation, 
spelling,  etc.  to  be  preserved,  even  if  it  conflicts  with  other  ruling. 
Notes  may  be  used  to  cover  the  following  points :  bibliographies, 
authorities,  etc.,  pseudonyms  and  anonyms,  sequels,  variations 
in  title,  editors  and  translators,  editions,  various  places,  publishers 
or  dates,  reprints,  languages  of  the  text,  source  of  the  book  if  first 
published  serially,  no  more  published,  imperfections  in  copy,  bound 
with  something  else.    A.  L.  A.  rules,  168. 

For  order  of  notes  generally  used  on  Library  of  Congress  cards  see 
A.  L.  A.  rules,  p.  56. 

48  Where  given.  Notes  should  be  given  on  the  cards  where 
most  useful ;  e.  g.  notes  regarding  the  author  should  be  given  on 
the  author  card ;  bibliographies  which,  as  is  generally  the  case,  con- 
cern the  subject  should  be  given  on  the  subject  card;  notes  showing 
the  language  of  a  book,  when  not  indicated  by  the  title,  should  be 
given  on  author,  subject  and  title  cards;  notes  of  imperfections 
should  be  given  on  all  cards. 

49  Form.  Notes  should  be  definite  and  concise,  and  those 
concerning  the  contents  of  a  book  (e.  g.  a  biographical  sketch  or 
a  bibliography)  should  when  practicable  include  the  page  references ; 
as,  Bibliography,  p.  436-453 ;  or,  Biographical  sketch  of  the  author, 
pref.  p.  [l]-27. 

Page  references  are,  for  ease  in  reading,  preferably  given  in  arabic, 
even  when  roman  numerals  are  used  in  the  book;  e.  g.  pref.  p.  34-77,  rather 
than  p.  xxxiv-lxxvii.  Chapter  headings  for  bibliographies  etc.  are  generally 
to  be  preferred,  but  when  there  is  no  chapter  heading  or  when  it  does  not 
cover  the  situation  satisfactorily,  occasionally  a  general  term  or  other  sup- 
plied phrase  may  be  used  to  advantage. 

For  sample  cards  containing  notes  see  sections  under  later  topics. 


1  Notes  indicating  the  dates  covered  by  works  of  history  or  travel  are, 
when  the  information  is  not  given  elsewhere  on  the  card,  specially  valuable; 
also  notes  furnishing  for  a  translation  the  title  of  the  original  work,  when 
this  is  not  obvious  from  the  title  of  the  translation. 

67 


50-52  CATALOGING  RULES 

50  Sequels  and  supplements.  Notes  of  sequels  should  refer 
both  to  earlier  and  later  volumes  in  the  sequence,  making  the  order 
clear.  When  any  work  is  followed  by  a  supplement  which  calls 
for  a  separate  main  entry ;  e.  g.  a  continuation  under  a  different 
author  (see  A.  L.  A.  rules,  14)  or  one  in  periodical  form,  connect- 
ing notes  should  be  given  on  the  cards  tor  both  the  original  work 
and  the  supplement. 

51  Position.  In  general  omit  one  line  after  the  regular  entry, 
before  miscellaneous  notes,  if  there  is  room  to  do  so  without  carry- 
ing the  writing  too  far  down  on  the  card  or  necessitating  the  use 
of  an  extra  card. 

52  Indention.  Begin  each  note  at  the  inner  indention,  but 
use  outer  indention  for  subsequent  lines. 


68 


JOINT  AUTHORS 


JOINT  AUTHORS 

53  Definition.  A  person  who  writes  a  book  in  collabora- 
tion with  one  or  more  associates,  the  portion  written  by  each  not 
usually  being  specified.     A.  L.  A.  rules,  pref.  p.  15. 

54  Treatment.  Three  important  methods  in  somewhat 
general  use  are  shown  below.  Method  1  is  a  slight  amplification 
of  A.  L.  A.  rules,  2,  while  Method  3  is  the  one  most  easily  ap- 
plied in  connection  with  the  use  of  Library  of  Congress  cards.  The 
relative  advantages  of  the  various  methods  are  discussed  in  sec- 
tion 55. 

a  Method  i.  (1)  Books  by  two  or  three  authors. 
For  a  book  written  jointly  by  two  or  three  authors  (including  cor- 
respondence) make  the  main  entry  under  the  name  of  the  one  first 
mentioned  on  the  title-page,  followed  by  the  name  of  the  second  or 
the  names  of  the  second  and  third.  Make  added  entries  in  which 
each  of  the  additional  authors  is  given  the  first  place  on  the  card, 
and  the  author  given  first  on  the  main  card  is  given  the  second 
place.  Use  the  inverted  form  for  each  name  included  in  the  head- 
ing. For  the  name  used  first  in  each  heading  give  author  fulness 
with  personal  titles  (and  dates  of  birth  and  death,  if  it  is  the  prac- 
tice of  the  library  to  use  them)  ;  for  the  other  names  use  secondary 
fulness  with  personal  titles,  but  not  dates  of  birth  and  death.  Be- 
gin each  joint  author  heading  at  the  outer  indention  ;  if  the  head- 
ing runs  over  the  line  indent  subsequent  lines  one-half  centimeter 
(two  typewriter  spaces)  to  the  right  of  the  second  vertical  line. 
Use  brackets  according  to  previous  rules. 

Examples:  Stevenson,  Robert  Louis,  and  Osbourne,  Lloyd. 

Osbourne,  Lloyd,  and  Stevenson,  R.  L : 

Cheston,  Henry  Clifford],  Gibson,  J.   S.  and  Tim- 
merman,  C:   E. 

Gibson,  J.  Stewart,   Cheston,  11:1'   and  Tim- 

merman,  C :  E. 
Timmerman,   Charles    E.,  Cheston,    H:C.   and 

Gibson,  J.  S. 

(  examples   with    dales  ) 

Stevenson,  Robert  Louis,    1850-1894,    and  Osbourne, 

Lloyd. 
Osbourne,  Lloyd,     l£  and  Stevenson,  R.L: 

69 


54a(i)i-3a 


CATALOGING  RULES 


i  Number  of  authors  in  heading.  Provision  is  made  in  the  direction 
above  for  the  use  of  three  names  in  the  heading,  in  order  that  the  form 
for  any  number  of  names  may  be  understood,  but  unless  a  library  has 
already  adopted  the  use  of  three  or  more  names  it  is  recommended  that 
the  A.  L.  A.  rule  for  two  names  only  in  the  heading  be  followed,  except  in 
a  case  where  another  author  is  of  special  importance. 

2  Punctuation.  Notice  that  to  distinguish  clearly  the  different  authors, 
the  comma  is  needed  between  the  names  of  joint  authors  not  connected  by 
"and,"  even  though  the  preceding  name  ends  with  a  period,  bracket  or 
curve;  also  that  the  comma  is  used  before  the  "and"  unless  the  preceding 
name  ends  with  a  period,  bracket  or  curve,  when  the  appearance  seems 
to  justify  its  omission. 

3  Exceptions,  a  When  two  authors  always  write  jointly,  reference 
may  be  made  from  the  second  to  the  first,  instead  of  an  added  entry  be- 
ing made  for  each  book;  as, 


Chatrian,  Alexandre,   1826-1890,   and 
Erckmann,  Emile,    see 
Erckjmann,  rimile,   1823-1899,   and  Chatri- 
an, Alexandre 


(or) 


this 
E*mi 


Chatrian,   Alexandre,  1826-1890. 

Books  by  this  author  will  be  found  in 

catalog  under  the  heading:   Erokmann, 

e,    1822-1899,    and  Chatrian,   Alexandre. 


Similar  references  may  be  made  in  any  instance  of  joint  authorship,  but 
if  this  is  done,  in  case  the  second  form  is  used  and  the  author  from  whom 
reference  is  made  appears  in  one  book  as  second  to  one  author  and  in 
another  book  second  to  another,  the  headings  to  which  reference  is  made 
should  be  listed  one  under  another.  The  reference  method,  however,  re- 
quires every  reader  who  looks  under  the  author  given  second  on  the  title- 
page  to  look  in  two  places  before  finding  the  book  and  therefore  the  treat- 
ment by  added  entry  for  the  second  author  is  in  most  cases  preferable. 

For  the  second  of  these  forms  it  is  recommended  that  a  card  be  used 
on  which  is  printed  the  phrase,  "Books  by  this  author  will  be  found  in  this 
catalog  under  the  heading".  This  phrase  should  be  printed  far  enough  down 
on  the  card  to  allow  for  the  name  referred  from  to  be  written  in  above, 
and  it  is  also  recommended  that  for  the  printed  phrase  the  third  and  second 
indentions  be  used  and  that  the  name  referred  to  be  written  below,  begin- 
ning at  the  first  indention,  with  third  indention   for   subsequent  lines  when 


70 


JOINT  AUTHORS  54a(i)3a-(3> 

needed.  If  more  than  one  heading  is  referred  to  the  letter  "s"  should  be 
added  by  pen  to   the  word  "heading". 

If  the  second  form  is  used  and  the  writer  referred  from  has,  besides 
his  secondary  joint  author  work,  other  work  for  which  the  main  entry  is 
made  under  his  name  (either  alone  or  as  the  first  of  two  or  more  joint 
authors)  the  word  "also"  should  be  inserted  in  the  reference  phrase,  so  that 
this  will  read  "will  also  be  found".  If  the  library  has,  at  the  time  of 
making  the  reference,  no  such  main  entry,  it  is  recommended  (contrary 
to  the  custom  with  "see  also"  subject  references)  that  the  "also"  be  not 
inserted  till  the  library  actually  has  such  main  entry,  leaving  it  to  the 
person  who  files  the  cards  to  note  when  this  should  be  done;  such  main 
entry  work  might  come  into  existence  later. 

b  For  joint  authorship  of  corporate  bodies,  e.  g.  societies  or  govern- 
ment departments,  Method  2  given  below  is  to  be  preferred,  to  avoid  the 
complicated   headings   likely   to   result   otherwise. 

(2)  Books  by  more  than  three  authors.  For  a  book 
written  jointly  by  more  than  three  authors  make  the  main  entry 
under  the  name  of  the  first,  followed  by  the  phrase  "and  others", 
e.  g.  Grant,  Russell  Andrew,  and  others.  Added  entry  may  be  made 
for  each  additional  author  but,  unless  a  library  is  trying  to  keep  a 
complete  record  of  its  material  by  all  authors,  is  important  only  in 
exceptional  cases,  e.  g.  when  the  additional  author  is  of  special  im- 
portance from  either  the  general  or  the  local  standpoint  or  for 
some  other  reason  is  specially  likely  to  be  looked  for.  If  an  added 
entry  is  made  it  would  take  the  form :  Storrs,  Martin  Lee,  Grant, 
R.  A.  and  others,  giving  the  names  of  only  the  author  for  whom 
the  entry  is  being  made  and  of  the  author  given  on  the  main  card. 

If  in  the  case  of  a  book  by  more  than  three  joint  authors  only  two  or 
three  are  named  treat  as  in  the  case  of  two  or  three  joint  authors  except 
for  the  use  of  the  phrase  "and  others"  after  the  names. 

Brackets  are  not  used  around  the  phrase  "and  others"  in  the  heading. 

If  the  A.  L.  A.  rule  (naming  in  the  heading  not  more  than  two  authors) 
is  in  general  followed,  the  rule  given  above  may  be  made  to  apply  by 
changing  "three"  to  "two",  only  that  if  in  an  exceptional  case  it  is  desired 
to  specify  three  authors  the  form  used  should  then  follow  that  given 
under   (i). 

(3)  Title  on  main  card.  The  title  on  the  main  card 
follows  the  rules  previously  given  for  main  cards.  When  the  names 
of  all  the  authors  are  given  in  the  heading  they  need  be  repeated 
in  the  title  only  in  unusual  cases,  according  to  the  principle  for  writ- 
ing titles  under  single  authors.  When  the  authors  are  not  all  men- 
tioned in  the  heading  (as  in  the  case  of  more  than  three)  their 
names  may,  if  thought  advisable,  be  included  in  the  title  (without 
inversion,  in  title-page  fulness)  or  in  a  note  or  contents,  the  advisa- 
bility of  this  being  determined  by  the  number  of  the  authors  and 
their  importance. 

71 


54a(3)i-(6)  CATALOGING  RULES 

1  When  there  are  too  many  authors  to  warrant  a  complete  list,  give  the 
name  of  only  the  first  or  the  name  of  the  first  and  a  selection  of  the  most 
important  of  the  others,  accounting  for  the  remainder  by  adding  at  the 
end  of  the  names  mentioned,  the  phrase  "and  others",  using  brackets  for 
this  phrase  if  the  information  is  given  in  the  title  on  the  cards  and  the 
phrase  is  not  on  the  title-page.  The  author  heading  often  covers  the  case 
sufficiently  to  make  any  accounting  in  the  title  unnecessary. 

2  When  the  authors'  names  are  not  all  included  in  the  heading  and  are 
omitted  either  wholly  or  in  part  from  the  title,  in  exact  cataloging  such 
omissions  should  be  indicated  in  the  title  on  the  cards  by  .  .  .  for  each 
omission,  whether  of  a  single  name  or  of  two  or  more  consecutive  names. 

1 4 1  Title  on  added  entry  joint  author  cards. 
The  title  on  added  entry  joint  author  cards  (i.  e.  entries  for  second 
and  third  authors)  should  be  given  briefly,  following  rules  for  added 
entry  editor  cards   (section  42c). 

(5)  Imprint  and  collatio  n.    The  imprint  and  collation 
are  given  on  the  main  card  as  on  other  main  cards ;  on  added  entry 
joint   author   cards   they    follow   the   rules    for   added   entry   editor 
cards   (section  A2d  I . 

(6)  Subject,      title,   editor    c  a  r  d  s,    e  t  c.      These  bear 
the  same  relation  to  the  main  card  as  in  the  case  of  a  single  author. 


Samples  of  Method  1 

( The  following  entries  for  a  book  for  whose  authors  the  dates  were 
not  available  will  serve  as  samples  of  forms  used  in  libraries  which  do 
not  make  a  practice  of  giving  dates.  Libraries  which  do  make  a  prac- 
tice of  giving  dates  should  leave  space  for  the  dates  after  the  name  of 
the  author  written  first  on  each  author  card  (including  added  entry  joint 
author  cards)    and   subject  card,   but  not  on   other   cards.) 

Main  card 


^15    Allen,  Thomas  Gaskell,  and  3achtleben, 

A43         W:L: 

Aoroes  Asia  on  a  bioyole:  the  journey 
of  tlwo  American  students  from  Constanti- 
nople to  Peking.    N.Y.  Century,  1903 


cc1894r, 


234p.    illua.    port.    19jom. 


72 


JOINT    AUTHORS 
Subject  card 


54a-b(4) 


&\5 

A4S 


ASIA—  DESCRIPTION  AND  TRAVEL. 
Allen,  T:G.  arid  Saohtleben,  W:L: 

Across  Asia  on  a  bicycle:  the  journey 
of  two  American  students  from  Constanti- 
nople to  Peking.    N.Y.  Century,  1903 
ci8S)4: 

234p.  illus.  port.  19-^cm. 

Added  entry  joint  author  card 


M2> 


Sachftleben,  William  Lewis,  and  Allen, 
T:G. 
Across  Asia  on  a  bicycle.    1903. 


Title  card 


*\5 
A*3 


Across  Asia  on  a  bicyole.  1903. 

Allejn,    T:G.    and  Saohtleben,    W:L: 


Briefer  cataloging.  The  only  changes  to  be  made  in  the  cards 
above,  to  adapt  them  to  the  briefer  cataloging,  are  the  omission  on  the  main 
author  and  on  the  subject  card,  of  the  brackets  around  the  copyright  date 
(substituting  a  comma  for  the  first  bracket  and  a  period  for  the  second)  and 
the  omission  of  the  indication  of  size. 

b  Method  2.  (1)  Heading  for  main  card.  Make  the 
main  entry  for  the  book  under  the  name  of  the  author  first  men- 
tioned on  the  title-page,  giving  his  name  only  in  the  heading,  with 
author  fulness  and  such  distinguishing  marks  (i.  e.  titles  and  dates) 
as  are  regularly  used  in  author  headings. 

(2)  Title  on  main  card.  Under  this  method  include  in 
the  title  ('without  inversion,  in  title-page  fulness)  the  names  of  the 
authors  if  not  more  than  three.  For  more  than  three  authors  fol- 
low  for  title  the   rule   under    .Method    1. 

(3)  Added  entry  joint  author  cards.  For  the  added 
entry  joint  author  cards  give  as  the  heading  I  ,  itli  dis- 
tinguishing marks)  of  only  the  additional  am'  !,  in- 
cluding the  authors'  names  in  the  titl< 

I  m  pri  nt   a  ml    coll  a  t  ion. 


73 


54b 


CATALOGING  RULES 


Samples  of  Method  2 
Main  card 


3\5 
A4b 


of 
nop 

and 

Cen 


lletn,    Thomas  Gaskell. 

Across  Asia  on  a  bicycle:    the  journey 
two  American   students  from  Constanti- 
le  to  Peking;   by  Thomas  Gaskell  Allen 

William  Lewis  Saohtleben.  N.Y. 

tury,    1903  cci8943 

334p.    illus.   port.    19iom. 


Subject  card 


S15 

A43 


ASIA  -  DESCRIPTION  AND  TRAVEL. 
Allen,   T:G. 

Aoross  Asia  on  a  bicycle:    the  journey 
of  t|wo  American  students  from  Constanti- 
nople to  Peking;   by  Thomas  Gaskell  Allen 
and  William  Lewis  Sachtleben.  N.Y. 

Centaury,    1903  cc18943 

234p.    illus.   port.    19-J-cm. 


(or  as  in  Method   i) 
(See  note  preceding  card  on  p.  72) 


A43 


ASIA— DESCRIPTION  AND  TRAVEL. 
Allejn,  T:G.  and  Sachtleben,  W:L: 

Aoross  Asia  on  a  bicycle:  the  journey 
of  t!wo  American  students  from  Constant i- 
noplle  to  Peking.    N.Y.  Century,  1903 


!1894, 


234p.    illus.    port.    19-^cm. 


3\5 

A4S 


Added  entry  joint  author  card 


Sacbjtleben,    William  Lewis. 

'Across  Asia  on  a  bicycle... by  Thomas 
Gaskell  Allen  and  7/illiam  Lewis  Sachtle- 
ben.] 1903. 


74 


JOINT  AUTHORS 

Title  card 


54b-c(3) 


A43 


Across  Asia  on  a  "bicycle. .  .by  Thomas 
Gaskell  Allen  and  William  Lewis 
Sachtleben.     1903. 


Allen.  T:G. 


(or  J 


A43 


Across  Asia  on  a  bicycle. 
Alle|n,  T:G. 

Across  Asia  on  a  bicycle... by  Thomas 
Gaskell  Allen  and  William  Lewis  Sachtle- 
ben.    1903. 


(or  as  in  Method  i) 


3V5 

A45 


Across  Asia  on  a  bicycle.    1903. 
Allejn,  T:G.  and  Sachtleben,  W:L: 


Briefer  cataloging.  To  adapt  these  forms  to  the  briefer  cataloging, 
omit  on  the  main  author  card  and  on  the  subject  card  the  brackets  around 
the  copyright  date  (substituting  a  comma  for  the  first  bracket  and  a  period 
for  the  second)  and  omit  the  indication  of  size;  on  the  added  entry  joint 
author  card  and  the  title  card  substitute  a  comma  for  the  three  dots  in  the 
title. 

c  Method  3.  (1)  Main  entry.  Make  the  main  entry  under 
the  name  of  the  first  author,  as  in  Method  2,  following  the  same 
rules  for  title,  imprint  and  collation. 

(2)  Added  entry  joint  author  cards.  Make  the 
added  entry  joint  author  cards  according-  to  the  rules  for  added  entry 
editor  cards  (section  42),  except  that  "joint  author"  is  substituted 
in  the  heading  for  the  abbreviation  "ed." 

(3)  O  t  h  e  r  added  entries.  As  indicated  by  samples 
for  Method  2. 

75 


54C-55b(2)(b)  CATALOGING   RULES 


Sample  of  Method  3 


(Main  card,  subject  card  and  title  card  as  in  Method  2) 

Added  entry  joint  author  card 

(See  note  preceding  card  on  p.  72) 


315 
A43 


Sachtleben,   William  Lewis,  joint 

author. 
Alleb,    T:G. 

Across  Asia  on  a  bicycle.  1903. 


55  Relative  advantages  and  disadvantages  of  different 
methods,  a  Method  1.  (1)  Advantages,  (a)  Represents  in 
the  heading  the  authorship  as  it  appears  on  the  title-page. 

(b)  Avoids  the  necessity  for  repeating  the  authors'  names  in 
the  title. 

(2)  Disadvantages,  (a)  Produces  a  complication  in 
alphabeting.  Headings  in  which  more  names  than  one  appear  may 
either  be  arranged  in  a  separate  alphabetic  group  after  the  entries 
in  which  the  first  author's  name  is  given  alone,  e.  g.  the  cards  for 
Besant,  Sir  Walter,  and  Rice.  James,  after  the  works  of  Besant, 
Sir  Walter,  alone;  or  the  works  by  joint  authors  ma}1  be  alphabeted 
in  with  the  works  of  the  author  alone ;  e.  g.  Besant,  Sir  Walter, 
and  Rice,  James.  Chaplain  of  the  Fleet,  between  Besant,  Sir  Walter. 
Captain  Cook,  and  Besant,  Sir  Walter.  Children  of  Gibeon. 

By  the  former  arrangement  the  reader  may  look  for  the  book  in  the 
first  series  of  titles  and  overlook  the  fact  that  there  is  a  second;  by  the 
latter  arrangement  the  reader  who  is  accustomed  to  finding  the  joint  authors 
arranged  after  the  single  authors  may  think,  on  seeing  a  joint  author  card, 
that  he  has  reached  the  end  of  the  works  hy  the  single  author.  Of  the  two 
arrangements  confusion  seems  less  likely  to  result  from   the  second. 

(&)Makes  spacing  difficult  in  the  case  of  affixed  titles  and  dates 
of  birth  and  death. 

b  Method  2.  (1)  A  d  v  a  n  ta  ge.     Simplifies  the  alphabeting  and 
illg. 

I  v  a  11  t  a  g  e  s.     I  a)  If  only  one  name  is  given  in  the 
the  book-  is   not   so   readily  identified  by   the   reader   who 
-  it  by  the  na  or  three  authors. 

ry  card,  if  the  joint  autho  to  be  represented, 

I  the  author-  must  cither  be  included  in  the  title,  which 
nucli  re]  >e  for  added  entry  cards  the  catal 

76 


JOINT  AUTHORS  55M2)(b)-c(2)  (c) 

must  revert  to  Method  1,  and  represent  the  joint  authorship  on  the 
author  line. 

c  Method  3.  (1)  A  d  vantages,     (a)  Simplifies  the  alphabet- 
ing  and  spacing. 

(b)   Is  best  adapted  to  printed  cards,  where  all  cards  are  origi- 
nally exactly  alike. 

(2)   Disadvantages,     (a)   Represents  all  the  authors  ex- 
cept the  first  in  a  subordinate  relation,  like  editors,  translators  etc. 

(b)  Results  in  the  arrangement  of  the  added  entry  joint  author 
cards  in  a  second  series  of  titles  among  the  works  of  those  authors 
as  editors,  translators  etc.  where  the  cards  are  likely  to  be  entirely 
overlooked  by  the  reader  who  looks  for  the  book  under  the  name 
of  a  second  or  third  author, 
(c)  Also  as  in  b{2). 


77 


56-59e  CATALOGING   RULES 


NAME  REFERENCES 

56  When  made.  References  should  be  made  to  the  exact  form 
chosen  for  entry,  from  any  other  form  under  which  the  reader  is 
likely  to  look,  unless  the  difference  is  so  slight  as  to  be  unlikely 
to  affect  the  place  of  the  card  in  the  catalog.  Some  of  the  most 
important  classes  of  references  are  noted  below,  but  many  others 
will  come  up  from  time  to  time,  to  which  the  general  principle  will 
apply. 

57  Fulness.  The  form  referred  to  should  be  in  author  fulness, 
including  personal  titles,  and  dates  of  birth  and  death  (if  used  in 
author  headings)  but  excluding  such  terms  as  ed.,  tr.  etc.  which 
have  nothing  to  do  with  the  person  considered  by  himself  but  merely 
show  his  relation  to  a  special  book.  Brackets  should  not  be  used  in 
references  except  in  very  unusual  cases,  e.  g.  a  corporate  entry  in 
which  some  explanatory  term  has  been  introduced ;  as,  Albany, 
N.  Y.  St  Peter's  [Episcopal]  church. 

Forms  referred  from  need  not  include  dates  if  these  are  given 
in  the  forms  referred  to,  except  when  needed  to  distinguish. 

58  Color.     Use  "author  style"  for  all  name  references. 

59  Examples,  a  Noblemen  entered  under  title ;  e.  g.  Avebury, 
John  Lubbock.  1st  baron,  with  reference  from  Lubbock,  John,  1st 
baron  Avebury   {A.  L.  A.  rules,  S3) 

b  Noblemen  entered  under  family  name ;  e.  g.  Walpole,  Horace, 
4th  earl  of  Orford,  with  reference  from  Orford,  Horace  Walpole, 
4th  earl  of  (A.  L.  A.  rules,  Jj) 

c  Married  women  who  are  entered  under  the  married  name  but 
have  also  published  books  under  either  the  maiden  name,  e.  g. 
Ward,  Mrs  Elizabeth  Stuart  (Phelps),  with  reference  from  Phelps, 
Elizabeth  Stuart ;  or  under  an  earlier  married  name,  e.  g.  Parsons, 
Mrs  Frances  Theodora  (Smith)  Dana,  with  reference  from  Dana, 
Airs  Frances  Theodora  (Smith),  also  from  Dana,  Mrs  William 
Starr,  and  from  Parsons,  Mrs  James  Russell,  jr  (A.  L.  A.  rules,  41) 

d  Married  women  whose  books  are  regularly  published  under  an 
earlier  form,  either  the  maiden  name,  e.  g.  Potter,  Margaret  Horton, 
with  reference  from  Black,  Mrs  John  Donald;  or  an  earlier  married 
name,  e.  g.  Wiggin,  Mrs  Kate  Douglas  (Smith),  with  reference 
from  Riggs,  Mrs  George  Christopher  {A.  L.  A.  rules,  41) 

e  Compound  surnames,  which  are  generally  to  be  entered  under 
the  first  part  with  reference  from  the  second;  e.  g.  Watts-Dunton, 

78 


NAME  REFERENCES 


59e-J 


Theodore,  with  reference  from  Dunton,  Theodore  Watts-  (A.  L.  A. 
rules,  25) 

In  many  libraries  and  reference  books  the  opposite  practice  prevails. 

/  Unused  forenames;  e.  g.  Conradi,  Bruno,  with  reference  from 
Conradi,  Karl  Paul  Bruno  (A.  L.  A.  rules,  28) 

g  Full  name  with  reference  from  familiar  shorter  form;  e.  g. 
Matthews,  James  Brander,  with  reference  from  Matthews,  Brander 

h  Changed  names;  e.  g.  Stretton,  Hesba,  with  reference  from 
her  original  name,  Smith,  Hannah  (A.  L.  A.  rules,  40) 

i  Variant  spellings  of  either  forenames  or  surnames ;  e.  g.  Karl, 
or  Carl;  Turgenev,  or  Tourgueneff. 

Names  pronounced  alike  but  differently  spelled  by  their  owners 
should  be   connected  by   "see   also"   references   under   each    spell- 


Braun,    see  also 
Brown,  and  Browne 


Brown,    see  also 
BraUn,  and  Browne 


Browne,    see  also 
Brau|n,  and  Brown 


;  Modified  vowels  {A.  L.  A.  rules,  131) 

For  the  modified  vowels  a  general  reference  is  sometimes  used;  e.  g. 


Ba 

Names 

beginning 

Ba 

and 

Bae 

are 

arranged 

to- 

gether  as  Bae. 

79 


593-k 


CATALOGING   RULES 


While  this  method  is  recognized  as  a  possibility  it  is  not  advised,  as  a 
reader  who  was  looking  for  Barmann  would  not  be  likely  to  see  a  reference 
under  Ba,  which  would  be  filed  at  the  beginning  of  the  Ba's.  A  specific 
reference  from  each  name  will  be  found  much  more  satisfactory. 

k  Surnames  with  prefixes  {A.L.A.  rules,  26) 
Under  very  common  prefixes  a  general  reference  may  be  made;  e.  g. 


De 

Foreign    names 

beginnin 

g    with 

this 

prefix 

will 

be 

font 

d  in  this  catalog 

under  the 

latter  part  of  the  name. 

This  suggestion  is,  however,  open  to  the  same  criticism  as  that  for  the 
modified  vowels  above. 


Sample  references 

Instead  of  the  following  "see"  references  the  same  form  may  be  used 
as  suggested  for  "see"  subject  references  under  section  30,  or  for  pseudonyms 
in  section  87. 


Lubbock,  John, 
see 
Avetjury,  John  Lubbock, 
1834-1913 


1st  baron  Avebury, 
1st  baron, 


Orford,  Horace  Walpole,    4th  earl 
of,    see 
Walpole,  Horace,    4th  earl  of  Orford, 
1717-1797 


Phelps,   Elizabeth  Stuart,  see 

Ward,    Mrs  Elizabeth  Stuart    (Phelps) 
1344-1911 


80 


NAME  REFERENCES 


59 


Blaok,   Mr3  John  Donald,  see 

Potter,   Margaret  Horton,  1881- 


Gbthe, 

iGoethe 


see 


(or) 


Go the,   Johann  Wolfgang  von,  see 

Goethe,   Johann  Wolfgang  von,  1749- 

1332 


duller. 

See  this  name  arranged  as  though 
written  Mueller 


(JO) 


Miiller,  Friedrich  Max. 

See  this  name  arranged  as  though 
writlten  Mueller,  Friedrioh  Max 


References  from  modified  vowels  are  to  be  arranged  with  the  same 
vowels  unmodified,  while  in  headings  for  entries  a,  6  and  ii  are  arranged  as 
though  written  ae,  oe   and  ue.     (See  Cutter,  299.) 

The  possibility  that  a  name  with  a  modified  vowel  may  be  used  in  the 
two  forms  for  different  persons  may  be  recognized  on  a  guide  card,  having 
both  names  given  at  the  top,  e.  g. 

Mueller  or  Muller 


81 


60-63  CATALOGING    RULES 


COMPILER,  EDITOR  OR  TRANSLATOR  AS  AUTHOR 

60  Main  entry.  Enter  composite  works  and  collections  of 
independent  works,  essays,  etc.  by  various  authors  under  the  com- 
piler, editor  or  translator,  individual  or  corporate. 

1  Based  on  A.  L.  A.  rides,  126;  for  examples  and  more  detailed  direc- 
tions see  also  that  rule  and  its  accompanying  fine  print. 

2  Under  this  principle  are  generally  included  bibliographies,  cyclopedias, 
dictionaries,  genealogies,  and  collections  of  poems,  essays,  stories  etc.  by 
numerous  writers,  when  some  known  individual  is  evidently  responsible  for 
the  book  as  a  whole. 

3  For  the  distinction  between  compiler  and  editor  see  definitions,  sec- 
tion 38.  See  also  definition  of  author  in  Cutter,  p.  14.  Generally  compiler  is 
used  for  makers  of  bibliographies,  dictionaries  and  genealogies;  editor 
for  cyclopedias;  either  compiler  or  editor  for  collections  of  poetry  or 
prose,  according  to  whether  the  work  has  been  merely  collecting  or  has 
included  also  editorial  work  in  the  way  of  notes,  important  introductions 
etc.  Translator  is  used  where  the  maker  of  a  collection  has  also  translated 
it  into  a  different  language.  While  these  suggestions  cover  in  a  general 
way  the  use  of  the  terms  it  is  usually  best  in  choosing  to  be  guided  by 
the  phraseology  of  the  title-page  unless  there  is  strong  reason  to  the  con- 
trary, but  remembering  that  the  maker  of  such  works  as  indicated  above 
is  generally  regarded  as  something  else  than  an  author,  even  though  not 
specifically  designated  on  the  title-page. 

61  Treatment  of  name.  When  the  main  entry  is  made  under 
the  name  of  a  compiler,  editor  or  translator,  this  name  is  treated 
on  all  cards,  in  every  respect  (i.  e.  indention,  fulness  etc.)  as  though 
it  were  the  name  of  the  author  of  the  book,  except  that  in  the  case 
of  persons  (but  not  of  corporate  bodies)  it  is  followed  after  one 
centimeter  space  by  the  abbreviation  comp.,  ed.  or  tr.  as  the  case 
requires.  (See  A.  L.  A.  rules,  57.) 

Except  in  some  name  references,  all  names  used  in  headings  on  the  cards, 
(except  the  second  and  third  authors  in  a  joint  author  heading)  whether 
representing  author,  compiler,  editor,  illustrator,  translator,  general  second- 
ary or  subject,  are  written  in  author  fulness,  including  personal  titles  (and 
dates  of  birth  and  death,  if  used  on  author  cards),  in  order  that  the  form 
may  be  identical  with  that  used  for  the  same  person  if  he  appears  as  author. 

62  Title,  imprint,  collation  etc.  For  both  main  and  added 
entry  cards,  follow  the  same  directions  as  for  books  of  simple 
authorship. 

63  Compiler  etc.  in  the  secondary  relation.  For  treatment 
in  the  secondary  relation,  in  contrast  with  the  treatment  as  author 
described  above,  see  sections  38-42. 

82 


COMPILER,  EDITOR  OR  TRANSLATOR   AS  AUTHOR 


60-64 


64  Joint  compilers  etc.  as  authors.  Treat  as  in  the  case  of 
joint  authors  except  for  the  use  of  the  abbreviation  comp.,  ed.  or 
tr.  at  the  end  of  the  heading.  If  more  than  one  name  is  used  in 
the  heading  (Method  1  for  joint  authors)  write  the  abbreviation 
one  centimeter  after  the  combination  of  names ;  not  after  the  first 
alone. 

Notice  the  difference  in  treatment  between  two  or  more  compilers  or 
editors  etc.  as  authors  (in  which  case  they  follow  whatever  method  is  used 
for  joint  authors)  and  two  or  more  editors  etc.  in  the  secondary  relation 
(section  41),  where  they  are  regularly  treated  separately. 

Sample  cards 
Main  card,  showing  use  of  hereditary  title  and  date  of  birth 


8>2\.0& 

Doug 

laSj  Sir  George [Brisbane  Scottj 

DT3 

bart-,    1856-        ed. 
Book  of  Scottish  poetry;  being  an 

anthology  of  the  beat  Scottish  verse 

from 

the  earliest  times  to  the  present. 

Lond 

.  Unwin,  1911. 

929p.  19om. 

Corresponding  subject  card 


B2\.0fc 

! 1 

SCOTTISH  POETRY—  COLLECTIONS. 

D73 

Doug 

las,  Sir  G:CB.S.3    bart,   1856- 

ed. 
Book  of  Scottish  poetry;  being  an 

anth 

ology  of  the  best  Scottish  verse 

from 

the  earliest  times  to  the  present. 

Lond 

.  Unwin,  1911. 
929p.  19cm. 

83 


60-64 


CATALOGING    RULES 


Main  card  for  joint  compilers,  treated  according  to  Method  1  for 

joint  authors 

When    Method   2   or  Method  3    for  joint   authors   is   used,    instances   of 
joint  compilers  etc.  as  authors  should  conform  to  the  same  method. 

f ■ 


Ml4 


MoFajdden,   Elizabeth  A#thorpj      1875- 
and  Davie,    L.E.  comp. 

(Selected  list  of  plays  for  amateurs 
and  Students  of  dramatic   expression   in 
schools  and  colleges...  Cin.   E.A.Mc- 

Faddjen,    1908. 

96p.    23jcm. 


Corresponding  subject  card 


0\<o.822 
M14- 


RAMA  —  BIBLIOGRAPHY. 
LioFajdden,   E..A.      1875-  and  Davis, 

L.E,  oomp. 

elected  list  of  plays  for  amateurs 
and  students  of  dramatio   expression  in 
schools  and  colleges...  Cin.    E.A.Uc- 

Fadden,    1908. 
96p.    22-^cm, 


Joint  compiler  (as  author)  card 

Space  left  for  name  and  dates  to  be  filled  in 


JMG.S2.2. Davis,  Lilian  E.  and 

M\4-         MoFadden,  E..A.    oomp. 

Selected  list  of  plays  for  amateurs 

and  students  of  dramatic  expression. 

1903. 


84 


SERIES    NOTES  65-68 


SERIES  NOTES 

65  Definitions  Scries:  A  number  of  volumes,  usually  related 
to  one  another  in  subject  or  otherwise,  issued  successively  by  a  pub- 
lisher, as  a  rule  in  uniform  style,  with  a  collective  title  which 
generally  appears  at  the  head  of  the  title-page,  on  the  half-title, 
or  on  the  cover.    A.  L.  A.  rules,  pref.  p.  16. 

Series  note:  A  note  stating  the  name  of  a  series  to  which  a 
book  belongs.  The  series  note  ordinarily  follows  the  collation. 
A.  L.  A.  rules,  pref.  p.  16. 

66  When  given.  Series  notes  should  be  given  for  all  series 
falling  under  the  definition  quoted  above.  These  may  be  designated 
in  the  publisher's  language,  by  the  word  "series",  as  "Pitt  press 
series";  by  the  word  "library",  as  "Seaside  library";  or  by  some 
similar  word ;  or  a  name  may  be  given  to  the  series  without  in- 
cluding any  general  term  of  this  nature,  as  "Heroes  of  the  na- 
tions." 

67  Where  found.  In  addition  to  the  places  mentioned  in  the 
definition  (namely  at  the  head  of  the  title-page,  on  the  half-title 
or  on  the  cover)  the  name  of  the  series  may  appear  at  the  head  of 
an  advertising  page  but  in  such  cases  should  be  used  with  cau- 
tion, i.  e.  it  should  be  carefully  considered  whether  the  phrase  used 
is  really  a  definite  name  for  a  series  or  simply  a  general  descrip- 
tive term ;  as,  Historical  publications,  Stories  of  adventure.  If  such 
a  list  appears  with  a  title  slightly  differing  from  the  title-page  head- 
ing, half-title  or  cover  use  one  of  these  three;  if  the  first  words 
of  the  title-page  heading  differ  from  the  half-title  use  the  best- 
known  form  if  that  is  clear,  otherwise  generallv  use  the  form  given 
as  the  half-title,  since  this  is  more  likely  to  furnish  the  full  informa- 
tion desirable  on  the  series  card.  Give  the  preference  to  a  half- 
title  or  title-page  heading  over  a  title  on  the  cover,  as  the  latter 
would  probably  be  lost  in  a  rebinding. 

68  Form.  The  form  of  name  for  the  scries  in  the  series  note 
should  correspond  to  the  heading  used  on  the  series  card  as  de- 
scribed below  (section  72),  except  that  the  form  is  often  shortened 
for  the  series  note,  specially  in  respect  to  the  name  of  the  editor, 
which  is  regularly  given  on  the  series  card  but  omitted  from  the 
series  note  except  in  the  rare  cases  where  the  scries  is  generally 
known  by  the  editor's  name.  In  shortening  for  the  scries  note  do 
not  omit  the  first  words  or  the  significant  part  of  the  title.  If 
volumes   of   a    series    are    numbered    the    volume    number    may   he 

85 


68-6g  CATALOGING   RULES 

included  at  the  end  of  the  series  note,  but  is  not  generally  important.1 
Omissions  in  a  series  note  need  not  be  indicated  by  .  Do  not 

use  brackets  even  if  the  name  of  the  series  does  not  occur  on  the 
title-page.  Use  abbreviation  ser.  for  series  in  the  series  note  unless 
the  word  occurs  at  the  beginning  of  the  name,  or  for  some  other 
reason  is  specially  prominent. 

For  more  detailed  specifications  and  treatment  see  the  Library  of  Con- 
gress supplementary  rule,  in  A.  L.  A.  rules,  p.  54. 

69  Position.  Write  the  name  of  the  series  in  (  )  one  centi- 
meter after  the  collation  on  the  main  card  and  subject  cards.  Omit 
on  other  cards. 


1  The  inclusion  or  omission  of  the  volume  number  should  correspond  in 
the  scries  note  and  on  the  series  card. 


86 


SERIES  ENTRIES  7072a 


SERIES  ENTRIES 

70  Definitions  of  series  entry.  A  brief  entry  of  the  several 
works  in  the  library  which  belong  to  a  series,  under  the  name  of  that 
series  as  heading.    A.  L.  A.  rules,  pref.  p.  16. 

An  entry  using  as  heading  the  first  word  of  the  name  of  a  series, 
or  its  collector  and  title,  followed  by  a  list  of  the  books  in  the  li- 
brary belonging  to  the  series.     Cutter,  p.  22. 

71  When  made.  While  the  series  note  is  used  for  all  series, 
make  a  series  entry  only  for  important  series,  which  are  generally 
limited  to  some  specific  subject;  e.  g.  Bell's  cathedral  series,  Eng- 
lish men  of  action,  Story  of  the  nations,  etc.  Do  not  make  series 
cards  for  publishers'  miscellaneous  series,  such  as  Everyman's  li- 
brary, Morley's  universal  library. 

72  Form.  Enter  a  series  under  its  title,  unless  it  is  univer- 
sally known  under  the  name  of  the  editor  or  publisher,  and  make 
added  entry  or  reference  under  the  editor.  Include  in  the  series 
entry  a  list  of  the  works  in  the  library  which  belong  to  the  series, 
giving  author's  name,  brief  title,  and  date  of  publication  of  each 
item.    A.  L.  A.  rules,  128,  1st  paragraph. 

The  numerical  and  the  alphabetic  arrangement  of  items  recommended 
in  the  second  paragraph  of  this  rule  are  obviously  well  adapted  to  a 
printed  catalog  but  in  a  manuscript  or  typewritten  catalog  it  is  imprac- 
ticable to  maintain  them  because  of  the  continual  rewriting  which  would 
be  involved;  for  this  reason  it  is  inadvisable  to  begin  in  that  way,  as  a 
reader,  finding  a  considerable  number  of  entries  systematically  arranged, 
would  probably  overlook  a  miscellaneous  group  at  the  end,  which  might 
contain  the  work  desired.  Occasionally,  however,  a  series  (generally  in 
history  or  fiction)  has  sufficient  unity  through  the  chronologic  sequence 
of  its  volumes,  to  make  it  desirable  that  this  sequence  be  preserved,  and 
in  such  cases  space  for  missing  volumes  should  be  left  between  entries, 
but  ordinarily  volumes  are  simply  added  to  a  series  card  in  the  order  in 
which  they  come  into  the  library. 

a  Heading.  Enter  a  series  of  which  the  editor  is  unknown  under 
the  name  of  the  series ;  e.  g.  International  scientific  series. 


87 


72a-a(i) 


CATALOGING    RULES 


Usually  enter  a  series  of  which  the  editor  is  known,  in  the  same 
way,  with  reference  from  the  editor,  e.  g.  American  common- 
wealths; ed.  by  Horace  E.  Scudder;  with  a  "see  also"  reference 
from  Scudder,  Horace  Elisha ;  e.  g. 


Scudder,  Horaoe  Elisha, 
ed.    see  also 
American  commonwealths 


1838-1903, 


(or,  better) 


Scudder,  Horace  Elisha, 
ed. 
American  commonwealths. 


1838-1902, 


Books  in  this   series  will  be  found  in 
this-  catalog  under   the  heading:    American 
oomnonwealths. 


Though  contrary  to  the  general  rule  that  headings  on  reference  cards 
take  second  indention,  it  is  more  satisfactory  for  references  from  author 
and  title  combined  to  use  ordinary  author  and  title  indention,  in  order 
that  the  card  may  be  filed  among  the  other  titles  of  the  same  author. 

Xotice  that  the  editor's  name  is  given  with  the  name  of  the  series  in 
the  heading  for  the  series  card  (see  samples  6  and  8  below,  following  72e), 
but  is  omitted  in  the  name  of  the  series  on  the  reference  card,  which  is 
an  exception  to  the  general  rule  for  reference  to  the  full  form  used  in  head- 
ings. 

( 1 )  Variations  in  name  of  series.  When  variations 
occur  in  the  title  of  a  series  the  heading  should  be  selected  as  sug- 
gested for  series  notes  (section  67)  and  a  "see"  reference  made 
from  any  other  title  of  the  series  if  it  would  alphabet  in  a  different 
place ;  e.  g. 


Crowell's   library  of   economics  and 
politics,  see 

Library  of  economios  and  politics 


SERIES  ENTRIES 

(or,  better) 


72a(i)-(5) 


Crowell's  library  of  economics  and 
politics. 

Books  in  this  series  will  be  found  in 
thia   catalog  under   the  heading:   Library 
of  eoonomios  and  politics. 

This  direction  covers  variations  in  the  title  appearing  in  the  book  itself, 
and  different  titles  for  the  same  series,  issned,  for  example,  by  both  Eng- 
lish and  American  publishers;  as,  the  Progressive  science  series,  published 
in  England,  which  appears  in  America  under  the  title  Science  series. 

(2)  Position  and  indention.  Enter  the  name  of  the 
series  on  the  top  line,  beginning  at  the  outer  vertical  line.  If  the 
heading-  occupies  more  than  one  line  indent  subsequent  lines  one- 
half  centimeter  to  the  right  of  the  inner  vertical  line. 

(3)  Editor's  name  included  in  name  of  series. 
Include  the  editor's  name  when  known  (without  inverting),  in  the 
form  given  in  the  first  book  cataloged  in  the  series.  Do  not  supply 
in  this  entry  any  extra  information  which  may  be  used  on  the  card 
to  be  filed  under  the  name  of  the  editor  himself;  e.  g.  if  the  title 
reads  "English  men  of  letters;  ed.  by  John  Morley"  use  this  form 
and  not  the  information  gained  from  other  sources  "John  Morley, 
1st  viscount  Morley  of  Blackburn."  Use,  however,  such  personal 
titles  as  are  given  in  the  book,  if  they  would  be  used  in  an  author 
heading  and  if  they  lend  value  to  the  editor's  connection  with  the 
series. 

(4)  Entry  under  editor's  name.  In  very  rare  cases 
a  series  is  better  known  by  its  editor's  name  than  by  its  title.  When 
so,  make  the  entry  under  the  editor,  giving  his  name  on  the  top 
line,  outer  indention,  author  fulness,  with  personal  titles  (and  dates 
of  birth  and  death,  if  these  are  used  on  author  cards),  followed 
after  one  centimeter  space  by  the  abbreviation  ed.  On  the  follow- 
ing line  begin  the  title  of  the  series  at  the  second  indention,  carry- 
ing it  back  to  the  outer  indention  if  it  runs  over  the  line. 

If  a  series  is  entered  under  the  editor's  name  reference  should  be  made 
to  this  name  from  the  title  of  the  series. 

(5)  Series  consisting  of  works  by  the  same 
author.  Occasionally  a  series  is  issued  in  which  all  the  books 
are  the  work  of  the  same  person,  either  as  author  or  in  the  re- 
lation of  compiler  or  editor  as  author.  In  such  cases  the  name  of 
the  person  responsible  should  be  included  in  the  series  heading,  as 

89 


72a(5)-b(l)  CATALOGING  RULES 

for  editors  of  other  series,  and  a  reference  made  from  the  personal 
name  to  the  name  of  the  series,  the  form  recommended  for  such 
a  reference  being  suggested  by  sample  card  10,  below. 

For  a  series  in  which  all  the  books  are  the  work  of  the  same  author  the 
series  card  is  sometimes  made  under  the  name  of  the  author,  his  name 
being  given  on  the  top  line  with  author  indention  and  author  fulness,  in- 
cluding personal  titles  (and  dates  if  these  are  regularly  used  on  author 
cards),  followed  on  the  next  line  by  the  title  of  the  series,  with  ordinary 
title  indention.  The  individual  books  are  then  entered  as  usual  on  a  series 
card  (72b)  except  for  the  omission  of  the  author's  name.  With  this 
treatment  a  reference  should  be  made  from  the  title  of  the  series  to  the 
author's  name,  followed  by  the  title  of  the  series.  The  disadvantage  of 
this  method  is  the  double  entry  under  the  same  heading,  (1)  the  full  entry 
for  each  book  under  the  author's  name,  (2)  the  short  entry  on  the  series 
card,  under  the  same  name;  while  the  title  of  the  series  is  found  directly 
only  on  a  card  referring  to  the  author's  name. 

Still  a  different  method  is  the  omission  of  the  series  card,  with  a  refer- 
ence from  the  title  of  the  series  to  the  name  of  the  author,  under  which 
the  full  entries  for  the  individual  books  are  to  be  found.  The  disadvantages 
in  this  case  are  (1)  the  necessity  of  selecting  from  all  the  works  given 
under  the  author's  name  those  which  belong  to  the  special  series,  as  shown 
by  the  series  note,  and  (2)  the  greater  difficulty  in  determining  the  proper 
sequence  of  the  books,  when  this  is  desirable. 

(6)  Abbreviations.  Do  not  abbreviate  the  word  "series" 
in  the  heading  on  the  series  card,  even  if  abbreviated  in  the  series 
note. 

(7)  Wording.  Follow  the  phraseology  of  the  book;  e.  g. 
"Cambridge  Bible  for  schools  and  colleges ;  general  editors,  A.  F. 
Kirkpatrick,  D.  D.,  R.  St  John  Parry,  D.  D."  If  a  case  occurs 
where  the  arrangement  of  the  lines  is  the  only  indication  of  the 
relation  of  the  person  to  the  series,  supply  in  brackets  the  phrase 
"ed.  by"  or  whatever  else  seems  most  suitable.  Include  names  of 
from  one  to  three  editors ;  if  more  than  three  give  the  name  of 
the  first  "and  others."  If  variations  in  the  wording  appear  after 
the  series  card  is  written,  make  alterations  only  when  important; 
e.  g.  an  additional  editor.  In  case  of  different  editors  ar  different 
times  give  on  the  series  card  as  though  editing  at  the  same  time. 

(8)  Punctuation.  Use  a  semicolon  after  the  name  of  the 
series  before  the  statement  regarding  the  editor.  Brackets  and 
marks  of  omission  in  the  heading  on  the  series  cards  are  not  to  be 
used  because  of  the  occasional  variations  in  different  volumes,  ex- 
cept when,  as  noted  in  (7)  a  phrase  is  introduced  which  is  not 
known  to  be  on  any  of  the  volumes. 

b  Entries  for  separate  works.  (1)  Items  included.  The 
entry  for  each  work  entered  on  the  series  card  consists  of  its  call 

90 


SERIES  ENTRIES  72b(l)-(5)  (a) 

number,  author's  name,  brief  title,  imprint  date  (or  its  substitute 
as  on  other  short-entry  cards)  and  number  of  volumes  when  more 
than  one. 

If  volumes  of  a  series  are  numbered  this  volume  number  may  also 
be  given,  but  for  a  series  to  be  continued  indefinitely,  in  which  the  volume 
numbers  have  no  significance  except  the  order  of  publication,  it  has  little 
practical  value. 

If  all  the  volumes  of  a  series  are  the  work  of  the  same  author  (see 
section  720(5)  above)  his  name  may  be  omitted  from  the  entries  for  the 
separate  works. 

(2)  Position  of  entries  and  number  of  lines. 
Begin  the  first  entry  on  the  line  after  the  series  heading,  unless 
that  heading  consists  of  only  one  line,  in  which  case  one  line  is 
to  be  left  blank.  Even  if  the  entries  are  so  short  as  to  occupy 
(except  for  the  call  number)  only  one  line,  allow  two  lines  each 
on  manuscript  cards,  three  lines  on  typewritten  cards,  to  provide 
sufficient  room  to  keep  the  call  numbers  distinct,  except  that  for 
fiction,  if  no  class  number  is  used,  two  lines  are  sufficient  on  type- 
written as  well  as  on  manuscript  cards. 

Do  not  leave  space  for  missing  volumes  of  a  series  except  as  indicated 
in  the  note  under  the  first  paragraph  in  72,  for  certain  classes  of  series, 
where  there  is  a  practical  advantage  in  retaining  the  original  sequence. 

(3)  Indention.  Begin  the  entry  for  each  separate  work 
on  the  series  card  at  the  second  vertical  line,  placing  each  call 
number  at  the  left  edge  of  the  card  opposite  its  own  entry,  and  the 
volume  number  of  the  series,  if  given,  between  the  vertical  lines ; 
for  subsequent  lines  indent  one-half  centimeter  to  the  right  of  the 
second  vertical  line. 

(4)  Arrangement  of  items  by  author.  Except 
when  some  other  arrangement  is  clearly  of  practical  advantage  and 
can  be  easily  carried  out  it  is  well  to  arrange  (a)  author's  name,  in- 
verted, in  secondary  fulness,  with  personal  titles  (but  without  dates 
of  birth  and  death);  (b)  short  title;  (c)  imprint  date  or  its  sub- 
stitute;  ( d)   number  of  volumes  when  more  than  one. 

On  the  series  card  half  a  centimeter  space  is  better  than  the  full  centi- 
meter between  the  author's  name  and  affixed  personal  titles,  to  make  this 
separation   less   than   that  between   the   items. 

(5)  Arrangement  of  items  by  subject,  (a)  In 
series  of  individual  biographies  and  in  some  other  series,  generally 
those  of  a  definite  local  nature,  when  the  title  is  substantially  the 
same  as  the  subject,  it  is  often  better  to  arrange  by  subject  as 
represented  on  the  title-page.  In  such  cases  the  best  form  would 
be:  (/■)  name  of  the  subject,  followed  by  a  semicolon  and  "by" 
(with  the  name  of  the  author,  not  inverted,  in  secondary  fulness. 

91 


72b(5)(a)-C  CATALOGING   RULES 

without  personal  titles);    (2)    imprint  date   or  its  substitute;    (3) 
number  of  volumes  when  more  than  one. 

For  subjects  of  biographies  the  subject  name  may  be  given  in  either 
secondary  or  title-page  fulness  (inverted  form)  or  the  surname  alone  may 
be  used,  according  to  whether  additional  value  will  be  added  to  the  entry 
by  an  indication  of  the  given  names.  This  decision  may  be  influenced  by 
various  considerations;  e.  g.  (1)  the  familiarity  of  the  given  names,  as  in 
the  case  of  writers,  whose  given  names  are  commonly  known,  as  contrasted 
with  musicians  or  artists  almost  universally  known  by  the  surname;  or  (2) 
by  the  necessity  of  distinguishing  between  different  men  of  the  same  sur- 
name. 

(b)  Perfect  uniformity  in  the  system  is  not  essential  even 
throughout  the  same  series.  If  the  title  of  the  book  begins  with 
the  subject  word  and  contains  in  addition  other  information  of 
interest  or  value  it  might  be  written,  for  example:  Froebel  and 
education  by  self-activity  ;  by  II.  C.  Bowen.  If  in  a  series  which 
was  arranged  by  subject  a  book  appeared  whose  title  did  not  lend 
itself  readily  to  the  treatment,  the  subject  word  might  be  supplied 
followed  by  a  colon  and  the  actual  title  of  the  book,  with  the 
name  of  the  author,  but  subject  treatment  should  not  be  adopted 
for  series  in  which  there  was  likelihood  of  uncertainty  as  to  the 
subject  word,  as  would  often  be  the  case  with  series  in  science, 
sociology  etc. 

Probably  subject  arrangement  would  seldom  be  advisable  except  when 
the  entry  word  was  regularly  the  name  of  a  person  or  place. 

If  any  information  is  actually  supplied  it  should  be  bracketed  but 
brackets  need  not  be  used  to  indicate  rearrangement  of  words  (e.  g.  the 
inversion  of  a  subject  name)  and  .  .  .  need  not  be  used  to  indicate  omis- 
sion of  the  series  name,  when  given  on  the  title-page,  or  of  omissions  at 
the  end  of  the  title.  Even  when  the  arrangement  is  by  subject  the  entry  word 
is  regarded  as  title   (even  if  supplied)   and  is  written  in  "author  style." 

(6)  E  x  a  m  p  1  e  s  0  f  arrange  m  e  n  t.  For  excellent  sug- 
gestive examples  of  arrangement  see  in  A.  L.  A.  catalog,  1904: 

American   commonwealths 

American  history  series 

American   philanthropy  of  the   19th  century 

Bell's  cathedral  series 

English   men   of  action 

Heroes  of  the  nations 

Story  of  the  nations 
but  for  punctuation  and  for  details  to  be  included  follow  directions 
above. 

c  Editor  reference.  See  sample  cards  under  72a.  If  a  scries 
has  more  than  one  editor  make  a  separate  and  independent  refer- 
ence for  each. 

92 


SERIES  ENTRIES  72de 

</  Tracing.  (1)  Series  entries.  While  a  separate  card 
is  not  made  for  each  series  entry  it  should  be  remembered  that 
the  entry  of  a  book  on  a  series  card  constitutes  an  added  entry  for 
that  book,  and  that  if  the  book  were  withdrawn  from  the  library 
the  series  entry  should  be  canceled  and  should  therefore  be  traced 
as  evidence  that  it  has  been  made.  For  this  tracing  the  abbrevia- 
tion ser.  on  the  back  of  the  card  is  generally  sufficient  (see  sample 
card  under  section  25). 

(2)  References  to  series  cards.  Contrary  to  the 
general  rule  that  reference  cards  are  not  traced  on  catalog  cards, 
since  the  editor  reference  is  to  a  special  series  card  it  is  best  to  trace 
these  references  on  the  back  of  the  series  cards,  prefixing  an  s  (or 
some  other  distinguishing  mark)  to  show  that  a  reference  has  been 
made  instead  of  an  entry.  Similarly  references  should  be  traced 
from  the  title  to  the  editor  of  a  series  when  the  series  card  is  made 
under  the  personal  name,  also  references  from  one  form  of  title  to 
another. 

If  authority  slips  arc  made  (see  Appendix  3)  the  references  are  traced 
on   those   instead   of   on   the   catalog  cards. 

e  Title-page  checks.  (  ),  meaning  to  be  omitted  from  the  title 
on  all  cards,  are  to  be  disregarded  for  the  author's  name  on  series 
cards  arranged  by  subject,  where  the  author's  name  in  the  title 
takes  the  place  of  the  author  heading. 


Sample  cards 
I  Main  card  for  one  of  a  series 

(Volume    number    retained    in   series    note,    to   show    the   form,   but   not   advised    for   most 

series) 


L\T 


Glb.T      ^agrkrige,   Fernand,  1846- 

Phyaiology  of  bodily  exeroise.        N.Y. 
ppljeton,    1905. 

395p.    19jom.  (International   scien- 


I 


0  ser.   v.66) 


93 


72 


CATALOGING    RULES 


2  Series  card,  without  editor 
In   separate   entries,   author   given   first 

(Shows  position  of  volume  numbers.  Because  of  the  two-figure  volume  number  the 
author's  name  has,  for  the  sake  of  distinctness,  been  set  one  extra  space  to  the 
right,  and  .subsequent  lines,  to  correspond  to  the  usual  two-space  indention  under  a 
heading,  arc  indented  three  spaces  beyond  the  second  vertical  line) 


523.7 

£\3.7 
L\7 

5SI 

H52 


International  scientific  series. 

Young,    C:A:  The   sun.  1893. 


ir.  34 


v.66|  Lagrange,    Fernand. 
bodily  exercise. 


Physiology  of 
1905. 


Henslow,    George.  Origin  of  flo- 

ral structures.  1888. 


B 

F83\r 


3  Main  card  for  one  of  a  series 


ijna,   Edward,  1863- 

Benjamin  Franklin,  printer,    states- 
,   philosopher  and'practioal  citizen, 
1709-1790.  N.Y.   Putnam,    1898. 

354p.   plates,  ports.,   faosims.    20cm. 
(Amdrican  men  of  energy) 


4  Series  card,  without  editor 
In   separate    entries,   subject   given   first 


Amer 

ican  men  of  energy. 

B 

Franklin,  Benjamin;  by  Edward  Robins. 
1898. 

B 

Knox,  Henry;  by  Noah  Brooks.    1900. 

B 

Putnam,  Israel;  by  W:F. Livingston. 
1901. 

94 


SERIES  ENTRIES 


'/2 


5  Main  card  for  one  of  a  series 


R37 


Reinsch,   Paul  Scamuel2  1869- 

.. World  politics  at   the  end  of  the 
L9th]  century,    as  influenced  by  the  orien- 
tal  situation...  N.Y.   Macmillan,    1900. 

366p.   map,    19^om.  (Citizen's  li- 

brary of  economics,  politics  and  sociol- 
ogy) 


6  Series  card,  with  editor 
In   separate   entries,   author   given   first 

(The  .  .  .  used  at  the  beginning  of  the  title  on  the  main  card,  indicating  the  name 
of  the  series  as  given  at  the  head  of  the  title-page,  are  omitted  from  the  series 
card,  since  the  name  of  the  series  is  there  used  as  the  heading) 


30<3.% 
R37 

332 .4372 
B33 

342.434 
VTT 

330 
E52 


litiizen'a  library  of  eoonoaics,  politics 
and  sociology j   ed. by  Richard  T.Ely, 

Reinsch,   P.S:  World  politics  at 

the  end  of  the  19th  century. 
1900. 

Bullock,  C:J.  Essays  on  the  mone- 
tary history  of  the  United  States, 
1900. 

Vincent,   J:M.  Government  in  Swit- 

zerland. 1900. 


Ely,  R:T. 
1901, 


Outlines  of  economios. 
See  next  card 


(For  samples  of  editor  reference  see  under  72a) 


7  Main  card  for  one  of  a  series 


575.5 
C77 


Sooke,   John  Eaten, 
, ,  .Virginia. . . 
4cc«833 
523p.    map,    18om. 
weal the) 


1830-ie86. 

Bo st.    Houghton, 

(American  oommon- 


95 


72 


CATALOGING    RULES 


8  Series  card,  with  editor 

In   separate   entries,    subject  given   first 
(See  note  on  card  6  above  ) 


915.5 

Gil 

814.7 

B<b4 
911A 


Ameijican  commonwealths;   ed.by  Horace  E, 
Scudder. 
Virginia;   by  J :E. Cooke.  1884. 


New  York;   by  E.H:Roberte.  1904. 

2v. 

Michigan;   by  T:M.Cooley,  1890. 

(For  samples  of  editor  reference  see  under  72a) 


9  Series  entry  for  works  all  by  the  same  author,  a  separate  main  card 
being  made  for  each  work 


Our 

own  land  series;  by  Everett  T.Tomlin- 
son. 

T65Sy 

Four  boys   in   the  Yellowstone. 
cc19063 

T£>5?>c 

Four  boys   in   the   land  of   cotton. 

TG5°>f 

Four  boys  and  a  fortune.          cc1910j 

T<o53p 

Four  boys   on  Pike's  Peak.          cc19123 

10  Reference  from  name  of  author  to  title  of  series 


Toralinson,    Everett   Titsworth,        1859- 
nur  own   land  series. 

Bocks  in   this   series  will  be  found  in 
this'catalog  voider   tfco   heading,:    Our   or.n 

■  _'  i  e  _• . 


96 


(  ONTENTS  73-75 


CONTENTS 


73  When  given.  Give  contents  of  books  containing  several 
works  by  the  same  author,  or  works  by  several  authors,  or  works 
on  several  subjects,  or  a  single  work  on  a  number  of  distinct  sub- 
jects, especially  if  the  collective  title  does  not  sufficiently  describe 
them.     A.  L.  A.   rules,   i6j. 

74  Where  given.  When  brief,  give  on  the  main  card  and  all 
subject  cards;  in  other  cases  give  on  the  cards  where  most  useful. 
When  not  given  on  both  main  card  and  subject  cards  refer  from 
the  cards  where  the  contents  are  not  given  to  the  card  or  cards 
where  they  arc' ;  e.  g.  if  given  on  the  author  card,  say  on  the  sub- 
ject card  "For  contents  see  entry  under  author's  name."  If  con- 
tents are  given  on  only  the  subject  cards,  say.  for  example,  on 
the  author  card  "For  contents  see  entry  under  subject  heading 
Charities — Collections  or  So<  [ology — Collections"  (adding,  in 
"subject  style",  to  the  general  part  of  the  direction,  the  specific 
headings  under  which   the  contents  are  given). 

Rubber  stamps  for  "Contents"  and  \<<v  these  general  references  may 
be  used    for  the   sake  of  distinctness.      (See  Cutter,  348.) 

75  Inclusion  and  form.  Generally  omit  a  preface  or  an  intro- 
ductor)  chapter  unless  for  some  reason  specially  important.  Con- 
tents may  be  taken  from  the  title-page,  table  of  contents,  or  chapter 
headings.  The  wording  max  be  shortened  by  the  omission  of  un- 
important phrases,  even  at  beginning  of  chapter  titles.  Do  not 
use  .  .  .  for  omissions.  Usually  omit  personal  titles  in  contents, 
but  use  Mrs,  as  the  names  or  initials  following  are  sometimes  those 
01*  the  writer's  husband,  nol  of  the  writer  herself.  Sometimes  also 
it  is  better  to  use  other  titles  (such  as  would  be  given  in  author 
headings)  if  they  add  weight  to  the  authority,  e.  g.  chapters  on 
military  or  naval  subject-  by  generals,  admirals  etc.  Titles  of 
nobilin    are  often   to  be  given   when   they   precede   the  name. 

The  form  of  personal  names  should  be  the  one  given  in  that 
part  of  the  book  from  which  the  contents  are  taken,  but  may  often 
be  shortened;  e.g.  for  sub  nuts  of  chapters  the  Full  form  (if  given 
it;  the  book)  may  be  used,  or  secondary  fulness,  or,  in  the  case 
of  persons  so  well  known  that  there  would  be  no  question  as  to 
identity,  the  surname  only.  For  authors  of  chapters  generally 
use  secondary  fulness  on  the  basis  of  the  form  in  the  book,  except 
that  for  married  women  it  is  better  to  treat  the  maiden  name  like 
given  names;  i.  e.  use  the  initial  without  (  ),  in  order  to  obtain 
uniformity  of  treatment   without  the  necessity  of  looking  up  the 

97 


75-76 


CATALOGING   RULES 


names,  which  would  require  an  expenditure  of  time  not  warranted 
for  names  where  the  filing  of  cards  and  serious  questions  of 
identity  were  not  involved. 

Spacing.  When  the  author's  name  precedes  the  title  of  the  chapter 
leave  one-half  centimeter  between  unless  the  author's  name  is  followed 
by  a  personal  title,  in  which  case  one-half  centimeter  should  be  left  be- 
tween the  name  and  personal  title  and  a  centimeter  before  the  title  of 
the  chapter. 

76  Arrangement.  The  paragraph  arrangement  recommended 
by  the  A.  L.  A.  rules  has  the  advantage  of  compactness,  but  the 
advantage  of  distinctness  is  on  the  side  of  arrangement  in  columns, 
this  advantage  often  being  increased  by  an  alphabetic  arrangement 
by  authors,  by  subjects,  or  by  titles  when  distinctive  (as  in  a 
volume  of  short  stories).  Even  when  the  order  of  chapters  in  the 
book  is  followed  and  the  contents  are  arranged  by  title  the  result 
is  much  clearer  if  a  separate  line  is  given  to  each  title  when  at  all 
distinctive.  The  column  arrangement  is  therefore  in  general  to 
be  preferred,  specially  for  manuscript  or  typewritten  work.  It  is 
particularly  valuable  for  sets  of  works  like  Shakespeare  or  Scott, 
when  covering  many  volumes,  as,  by  alphabetic  arrangement,  it 
enables  the  reader  to  find  readily  any  desired  title  with  the  number 
of  the  volume  in  which  it  is  published,  e.  g. 


622.33 
J 


Shakespeare,   William,  1564-1616. 

Works;   ed.by  William  Aldis  Wright j 
-the  Cambridge  Shakespeare^         N.Y.   Mac- 
Imillan,    1394-95. 

9v.  23-^cm. 


7.3 
v.  8 

v.l 
v.6 
v.8 


Contents: 


All's  well  that  ends  well. 

Antony  and  Cleopatra. 

As  you  like  it. 

Comedy  of  errors. 

Coriolanus. 

Cymbeline. 


o 


See  next  card 


For  paragraph  arrangement  for  the  same  set  see  A.  L.  A. 
catalog,  1904,  pt  1,  p.  221,  where,  in  order  to  find  "Antony  and 
Cleopatra",  it  is  necessary  to  look  through  11  lines  of  fine  print, 
while  by  column  arrangement  any  title  may  be  found  at  once  by 
looking  in  its  alphabetic  place. 

98 


CONTENTS  76-79 

Uniformity  in  method  is  not  essential,  even  in  the  same  library. 
Some  books  are  best  treated  through  the  paragraph  arrangement, 
with  items  given  in  the  order  of  the  book,  others  through  the 
column  arrangement,  sometimes  in  the  order  of  the  book,  some- 
times alphabetic. 

77  Position.  Generally  omitting  one  line  after  the  collation 
or  series  note,  but  on  the  line  following  any  miscellaneous  notes 
which  may  be  given,  write  or  stamp  the  word  Contents,  at  the 
second  indention.  If  the  word  is  written,  either  by  pen  or  on  the 
typewriter,  it  is  better  to  underline  it,  for  the  sake  of  distinctness. 

If  column  arrangement  is  used,  begin  the  statement  of  the  con- 
tents on  the  line  following  the  word,  but  with  paragraph  arrange- 
ment begin  it  on  the  same  line. 

If  the  omission  of  a  line  would  necessitate  the  use  of  a  second 
card  for  contents  which  might  otherwise  be  wholly  entered  on  the 
first  card,  the  word  Contents  should  preferably  be  given  on  the 
line  immediately  following  the  collation  or  series  note. 

78  Indention.  When  paragraph  arrangement  is  used  begin 
at  the  second  indention,  coming  back  to  the  first  indention  for  sub- 
sequent lines. 

When  column  arrangement  is  used  begin  each  item  of  the  con- 
tents at  the  second  indention.  For  subsequent  lines  indent  one- 
half  centimeter  further,  to  make  the  beginning  of  each  item  stand 
out  more  clearly. 

In  paragraph  arrangement  the  volume  numbers  etc.  are  included 
as  a  part  of  the  paragraph ;  in  column  arrangement  they  are  written 
between  the  vertical  lines.  An  intermediate  treatment  is  to  regard 
the  contents  of  each  volume  as  a  single  item,  placing  the  volume 
number  between  the  vertical  lines  and  keeping  the  contents  of  that 
volume  at  the  inner  ruling.  With  this  treatment  the  further  one- 
half  centimeter  indention  is  not  of  value,  as  the  volume  number 
is  the  feature  of  the  division. 

79  Punctuation.  For  illustrations  of  punctuation  see  the  fol- 
lowing samples. 


99 


73-79 


CATALOGING    RULES 


Sample  cards 

i   Work  by  a  single  author  in  one  volume;  alphabeted  by  title  in  a 

column 


D2G3e 

Davi 

a,   Richard  Harding;,          1864-1916. 
(The)    exiles,    and  other   stories. . . 

N.Y. 

Harper,    1903  cc1894j 
231p.    16pl.    port.    20cm. 

Contents: 

An  anonymous   letter. 

The  boy  orator  of  Zepata  City. 

The  exiles. 

His  bad  angel. 

The  right  of  way. 

The  romance   in  the   life  of  Hefty 

Burke. 

The   writlngfj  on  the   wall. 

2  Same;  paragraph  arrangement  in  the  order  of  the  book 


D2G3e 


DaviB,  Richard  Harding,    1864-1916. 

(The)  exiles,  and  other  stories... 
M.Y.!  Harper,  1903  cc18943 

231p.  16pl.  port.  30om. 

Contents.  —  The  exiles.  —  The  writing 
on  the  wall.  -  The  right  of  way.  —  His 
bad  angel.  —  The  boy  orator  of  Zepata 
City.  —  The  romance  in  the  life  of  Hefty 
Burke.  —  An  anonymous  letter. 


100 


CONTENTS 


73-79 


3  Work  by  a  single  author,  in  two  volumes;  column  arrangement, 
regarding  the  contents  of  each  volume  as  a  single  item 


301 

S93 


k 


7.1 


v. 2 


0CI0L0GY. 
Ptuckenberg,   J:K:W.  1835-1903. 

Sociology,    the   science  of  human  sooi- 
y.  N.Y.   Putnam,    1903. 

2v.    33cm. 

Contents: 

Definition.  —  Relation  of  sociology 
to  the  special  social  sciences.  —  Na- 
ture of  society.  —  Social  evolution. 
Three  great  eras  of  social  evolu- 
tion. —  Sociological  ethics. 


4  Same    work;    paragraph   arrangement 


30\ 

S33 


0CI0L0GY. 
Stuckenberg,    J:H:W.  1835-1903. 

ociology,    the   science  of  human   sooi- 

N.Y.    Putnam,    1903. 
v.    22o m. 

ontents.  —  v. 1:   Definition;   Relation 
Df   sociology  to   the  special   social   sci- 
enceis;   Nature  of  sooiety;   Social  evolu- 
tiorij.  —  v.  2:   Three  great   eras  of  social 
evolution;    Sociological  ethics. 


101 


73-79 


CATALOGING    RULES 


5  Work  in  one  volume  by  more  than  one  author;  column 
arrangement;  alphabeted  by  authors 


PHILOSOPHY—   ADDRESSES,    ESSAYS,    LEC- 
TURES. 
Sturlt,    H:rC.3  1863-  ed. 

Personal  idealism:  philosophical  es- 

by  eight  members  of  the  University 
pcford.  Lond.    Lfacmillan,    1903. 

393p.    23om. 

Contents: 

Bussell,  F.W.  The  future  of  ethiC3? 
effort  or  abstention? 

Gibson,  W.R.B,  The  problem  of  free- 
dom in  itsjrelation   to  psychology. 

^ — /  See  next  carl 


04- 
$33 


Marett,  R.R.  Origin  and  validity  in 
ethios. 

Rashdall,  Hastings.   Personality, 
human  and  divine. 

Schiller,  F.C.S.  Axioms  as  postu- 
lates. 

Stout,  G.F.  Error. 

Sturt,    Henry.      Art  and  personality. 

Underbill,    G.E.     The  limits  of  evo- 
lution. 


102 


CONTENTS 


73-79 


6  Same  work;  paragraph  arrangement  in  the  order  of  the  book 


104 
533 


PHILOSOPHY—  ADDRESSES,  ESSAYS,  LEC- 
TURES. 
Stuijt,  H:cC.3    1863-        ed. 

Personal  idealism:  philosophical  es- 
says by  eight  members  of  the  University 
of  Oxford*    Lond.  Maomillan,  1903. 

39 3p.    33cm. 


Ax 

ler, 

re 

son. 


lat 


Contents.  —  Error,   by  G.F. Stout.  — 


iofens  as  postulates,   by  F.C.S.Sohil- 

—  The  problem  of  freedom  in  its 
;ion  to  psychology,   by  W. R. B.Gib- 

—  The  limitgLof  evolution,   by 


U 


See  next  card 


\04         3.  E.  Under  hill.  -  Origin  and  validity  in 
b9S        sthibs,   by  R.R.Marett.  —  Art   and  person- 
ality,  by  Henry  Sturt.  —  The   future  of 
athiss:    effort  or  abstention?  by  F.W.Bus- 
|aellL  —  Personality,   human  and  divine,    by 
Hastings  Rashdall. 

7  Work  in  more  than  one  volume  by  more  than  one  author;  column 

arrangement 


537 
J37 

i 

Jard 
Edin 

v.l 
vr.3 

FISHES. 

ine,  Sir  William,    7th  bart, 

1800-1874,    ed. 
Naturalist's  library:  iohthyology. . . 
.  Liaars,  1835-43. 
6v.  illus.  ool. plates,  6  port.  18om. 

Contents: 

Jardine,  Sir  William,   vtn  Dart. 
The  perch  family. 

Bushnan,  J:S.   Nature,  structure  and 
economical  uses  of  fishes. 

V )                  See  next  card 

103 


8oa 


CATALOGING    RULES 


537 
037 


v.3  ISchomburgk,    Sir  R.H.      Fishes  of  Gui- 
lana,  pt   1. 

v.  4  Hamilton,  Robert.   British  fishes, 
v.l. 

r.5  Schomburgk,  Sir  R.H.   Fishes  of  Gui- 
ana, pt  2* 

v.  6  Hamilton,  Robert.   British  fishes, 
V.2. 


Same  work;  paragraph  arrangement 


537 
J31 


JardJine,    Sir  William,  7th  bart, 

1800-1874,  ed. 

Naturalist's   library:    ichthyology... 
Edin.    Lizars,    1835-43. 

3v,    illus.    ool. plates,    6  port.    13om. 


Contents.  —  v.i:    The  perch  family,    by 


o. 

(pt  U 

ish 

v.5: 

R.H. 

v.3, 


Sir  William  Jardine.  —  v. 2:  Nature, struc- 
ture and  economical  uses  of  fishes,  by 
JrS.Bushnan.  —  v.3:  Fishes  of  Guiana, 

by  Sir  R.H. Schomburgk.  —  v. 4:  Brit- 
fishes,  v.l,  by  Robert  Hamilton.  — 

Fishes  of  f~~\  Guiana,  pt  2,  by  Sir 
Schomburgk.  V_y~  v.  6:  3rltish  fi3hes, 
by  Robert  Hamilton. 


80  Substitutes  for  contents,    a  In  title.     If  contents  are  given 
on  the  title-page  as  a  part  of  the  title  and  are  not  too  long  they 
may  often  be  given  in  the  same  way  on  the  cards  instead  of  as  a 
rate  item  :  e.  g. 


304 

Cr54 


Gladjden,    Washington,  1836-1918. 

Social   facts   and  forces:    the  factory, 
the   labor  union,    the  corporation,    the 
railway,    the   city,    the   church.  N.Y. 

Puthjam,    1897. 

235p.    19 Jem. 


104 


COX  TENTS  8ob-c 

b  In  general  note.  When  authors  are  well  known  but  chapter 
headings  do  not  add  materially  to  the  knowledge  concerning  the 
contents  of  the  book,  the  important  part  of  the  information  may 
be  given  in  a  note,  in  some  such  form  as :  With  chapters  by  Charles 
Darwin,  John  Fiske  and  T:  II:  Huxley. 

When  there  are  too  many  authors  to  be  named,  a  selection  of  the  most 
important  "and  others"  may  be  given. 

c  Condensed.  Another  method  of  condensing  contents  in  a 
note  may  be  illustrated  by  Carlyle's  Heroes  and  hero-worship, 
where  the  chapter  headings  begin  with  the  same  phrase,  e.  g.  The 
hero  as  divinity :  Odin ;  The  hero  as  prophet :  Mahomet ;  The  hero 
as  poet :  Dante,  Shakspeare ;  etc.  This  may  be  given  in  a  note ;  as, 
Six  lectures  delivered  in  1840,  treating  of  the  hero  as  divinity 
(Odin),  prophet   (Mahomet),  poet   (Dante.  Shakspeare),  etc. 


105 


8I-82C  CATALOGING   RULES 


INCOMPLETE  WORKS 

81  How  received.  Incomplete  works  may  come  into  a  library 
in  various  ways,  sometimes  through  the  gift  of  sets  of  which  one 
or  more  volumes  are  lacking,  most  frequently  through  the  publica- 
tion of  a  work  in  volumes  or  parts  issued  at  more  or  less  regular 
intervals. 

Periodicals  and  similar  publications,  which  are  planned  to  continue  in- 
definitely, will  be  taken  up  later,  the  present  treatment  being  only  for  books 
which  have  certain  definite  limits. 

82  Information  liable  to  change.  The  distinctive  feature  in 
the  treatment  of  incomplete  works  is  the  use  of  pencil  in  recording 
any  information  liable  to  change,  such  changes  occurring  most 
frequently  in  imprint  date  and  statement  of  volumes. 

a  First  and  last  volumes  both  at  hand.  If  the  library  has  the 
larger  part  of  a  set,  including  the  first  and  last  volumes,  it  is 
generally  best  to  catalog  the  set  as  though  complete,  adding  a  note 
in  pencil  of  the  missing  volumes,  e.  g.  for  a  set  of  17  volumes,  of 
which  v.  3-4,  8  and  11  are  lacking,  give  17v.  in  the  collation  and 
add  in  a  pencil  note,  Wanting:  v.  3-4,  8,  11.  Such  notes  should 
always  be  in  pencil,  in  order  that  they  may  be  easily  erased  when 
no  longer  needed. 

b  First  or  last  volume  wanting.  If  either  the  first  or  last  volume 
is  wanting  it  is  better  to  give  in  the  collation  in  pencil  an  exact 
statement  of  the  volumes  at  hand,  using  pencil  in  the  imprint  date 
for  either  the  first  or  last  date  or  for  both,  according  to  whether 
the  first  or  last  volume  or  both  are  wanting,  e.  g.  if  in  a  set  of  17 
volumes  v.  3-4  and  17  are  wanting,  it  is  better  to  give  in  the  col- 
lation in  pencil,  m  the  volume  place,  v.  1-2,  5-16,  using  pencil  also 
for  the  last  imprint  date,  as  the  date  of  the  last  volume  when  pub- 
lished may  differ. 

When  either  the  first  or  last  volume  is  wanting  this  second  method  is 
generally  preferable,  as  the  imprint  dates  for  the  volumes  in  hand,  fol- 
lowed in  the  collation  by  the  number  of  volumes  in  the  complete  set,  would 
imply  that  all  the  volumes  of  the  set  were  published  within  those  dates, 
which  might  not  be  true. 

For  a  work  in  process  of  publication  it  is  well  to  give  in  a  pencil  note 
the  number  of  volumes  which  is  expected  to  constitute  the  entire  set;  as, 
Designed  to  be  complete  in  8v. 

c  Small  part  of  a  set.  If  the  library  has  only  a  small  part  of 
a  set  it  is  better  to  give  in  pencil  in  the  collation  the  exact  state- 
ment of  volumes  at  hand,  as  there  is  an  absurdity  in  saying  first 
that  the  library  has  the  set    (as  indicated  by  the   full  number  of 

106 


INCOMPLETE    WORKS  82C-84b 

volumes)  and  then  adding  in  a  note  the  statement  that  most  of 
the  volumes  are  wanting. 

d  Imprint  date  liable  to  change.  If  all  the  volumes  in  the  li- 
brary at  the  time  of  cataloging  have  the  same  imprint  date,  suf- 
ficient space  should  be  left  after  this  date  on  the  card  to  allow 
for  an  additional  date  if  necessary.  If  the  first  volume  of  the  set 
is  lacking,  the  first  imprint  date  or  the  last  one  or  two  figures  of 
this  date  should  be  in  pencil  unless  it  is  known  that  v.  1  was  pub- 
lished in  that  year,  similar  treatment  being  followed  for  the  last 
date  when  the  last  volume  is  lacking. 

If  both  the  first  and  last  volumes  are  at  hand  it  is  generally  satisfac- 
tory to  give  the  imprint  dates  in  ink,  even  if  in  the  collation  the  volume 
statement  is  given  in  pencil,  as  specified  in  c. 

83  Added  entries.  On  added  entry  cards  the  use  of  pencil 
should  correspond  to  that  on  the  main  card,  for  imprint  date  and 
volume  numbers.  Also  the  pencil  note  should  be  given  for  missing 
volumes  if  the  set  is  cataloged  as  though  complete. 

84  Contents.  Contents  in  incomplete  works  are  more  often 
important  that  in  complete;  e.  g.  if  a  cyclopedia  in  process  of 
publication  has  appeared  only  as  far  as  M  it  is  convenient  for  the 
reader  who  wants  something  in  R  to  have  the  facts  given  him  on 
the  card.  In  such  a  case  the  simplest  form  is  a  pencil  note,  e.  g. 
Vi  ]_45  A-M.  In  such  a  work  as  Murray's  New  English  dictionary, 
which  came  out  in  irregular  parts  as  they  were  finished,  a  more 
detailed  statement  was  necessary,  e.  g.  in  the  collation,  in  pencil, 
v.  1-5;  v.  6,  pt  1-4;  v.  7,  pt  1-2;  v.  8,  pt  1  ;  with  a  pencil  note  in 
the  form  of  contents  : 

v.  1-5     A-K. 
v.  6,  pt  1-4     L-Lock. 
v.  7,  pt  1-2     O-Outing. 
v.  S,  pt  1     Q. 

a  Alphabetic  contents.  In  works  arranged  alphabetically  such 
notes  may  generally  be  given  in  pencil  since  they  will  seldom  be 
needed  after  the  set  is  finished,  but  occasionally  a  set  ceases  publica- 
tion before  completion  and  in  such  cases  the  facts  should  be  given 
in  ink,  e.  g.  for  Sabin's  Dictionary  of  books  relating  to  America, 
the  collation  in  ink  would  give,  v.  1-19;  v.  20.  p.  1-196;  with  a 
note  in  ink:  Ends  with  Henry  Smith. 

b  Chronologic  contents.  With  histories  and  other  books 
arranged  chronologically  the  period  covered  by  the  different 
volumes  is  more  apt  to  be  of  permanent  value  than  an  alphabetic 

107 


84b-c 


CATALOGING    RULES 


section  of  a  cyclopedia,  and  therefore  the  contents  may  often,  to 
advantage,  be  given  in  ink,  separately  for  each  volume  unless  these 
are  too  numerous,  leaving  space  for  missing  volumes,  but  if  the 
volumes  are  numerous  and  are  coming  out  in  regular  order  the  con- 
tents may  be  condensed  and  given  as  a  note  on  the  plan  suggested 
above  for  cyclopedias;  e.  g.  in  the  case  of  Evans's  American  bib- 
liography the  volume  statement  in  the  collation  should  be  given  in 
pencil  as  v.  1-8.  The  contents  may  be  given  in  ink  for  each  volume 
as 


.Contents 


v.    1 

1639-1729. 

v.  7     1786-1789. 

v.  2 

1730-1750. 

v.  8     1790-1792. 

v.  3 

1751-1764. 

v.  4 

1765-1773. 

v.  5 

1774-1778. 

v.  6 

1779-1785. 

or  it  may  be  given  in  pencil 

as 

a  note,  e.  g. 

v.  1-S     1639-1792. 

c  Contents  on  both  author  and  subject  cards.  In  incomplete 
works  the  contents  are  more  likely  than  in  complete  works  to  be 
of  equal  value  on  both  the  author  and  the  subject  cards,  as  the 
reader  may  be  looking  under  the  author's  name  for  the  special 
book  or  under  the  subject  heading  to  see  just  what  the  library  has 
on  the  subject. 

Sample  cards 

i  Main  card;  v.i  missing 

(In   this   and   following   cards,   script    indicates   the   use   of   pencil.) 


&2S 


Wordsworth,    William,  1770-1850. 

Prose  works. .. ed. . .by  Alexander  B. 
Groajart. . .  Lond.    Hoxon,    1876. 

v.  2.-3.     32-£om% 


v.2 
v.3 


Contents: 


Aesthetioal   and  literary. 
Critioal  and  ethical. 


108 


INCOMPLETE    WORKS 


82-84 


a  Editor  card  for  same 


S2£ 


Grosart,    Alexander  B,alloohj 
1899,  ed. 

ordaworth,   William. 

Prose  works.  187&.  v.  2.-3. 

3  Main  card;  v.2  missing 


1827- 


82S 

W326 


Wordlsworth,   William,  1770-1850. 

JProse  works. .. ed. ..  by  Alexander  B, 
Grosart...  Lond.    Hoxon,    1875-76. 

3v.    22-|om, 


•di 


fv.l 

V.  2. 

|v.  3 


Contents: 


Political  and  ethical. 
Critioal^and  ethical. 


4  Editor  card  for  same 


82S 

WS2G 


Grosart,    Alexander   Bcallochj 
1899,  ed. 

rdsworth,    William. 

Prose  works.  1875-76.  3v. 


1827- 


U.  2.  WOrniA/VLO 


3" 


109 


85-86C  CATALOGING   RULES 


PSEUDONYMS  AND  OTHER  PEN  NAMES 

85  Definitions  of  pseudonym.  An  assumed  name  under  which 
a  person  writes.    A.  L.  A.  rules,  pref.  p.  15. 

A  fictitious  name  assumed  by  an  author  to  conceal  his  identity. 
Cutter,  p.  21. 

86  Entry.1  a  Choice  of  heading.  Enter  under  the  best  known 
form,  whether  pseudonym  or  real  name.  In  case  of  doubt  use  real 
name,  as  it  will  probably  tend  to  become  more  familiar. 

b  Entry  under  pseudonym.  If  the  entry  is  made  under  the 
pseudonym  write  the  name  according  to  the  rules  for  entry  under 
an  author's  real  name,  except  that  all  personal  titles  used  in  the 
pseudonym  should  be  included  on  the  cards,  even  though  they  are 
such  as  would  not  ordinarily  be  used  in  author  headings.  One 
centimeter  (four  typewriter  spaces)  after  the  name  and  any  per- 
sonal titles  which  may  be  used  write  the  abbreviation  "pseud." 

Real  name  in  heading  or  on  guide  card.  Do  not  give  the  real  name 
in  the  heading,  as  it  seems  doubtful  whether  to  the  person  who  looks  under 
the  pseudonym  the  real  name  is  of  sufficient  interest  to  justify  the  extra 
work  of  writing  it  on  all  cards.  For  a  writer  of  whose  works  the  library  is 
likely  to  have  a  large  number,  and  in  other  cases  when  convenient,  a  guide 
card  giving  the  facts  may  well  be  used  at  the  beginning  of  the  works,  e.  g. 
Craddock,    Charles    Egbert,  pseud,    of    Mary    Noailles    Murfree, 

1850-.     As  the  guide  card  is  written  only  once   both  pseudonym  and   real 
name  should  be  written  in  full. 

Probably  to  readers  looking  under  the  pseudonym  the  real  name  would 
be  of  less  value  than  to  the  users  of  the  other  cards  for  the  same  book, 
and  if  in  any  library  it  is  found  that  on  any  of  the  cards  the  real  name 
is  of  value  it  should  regularly  be  added  on  all.  cards  for  that  author,  using 
for  the  real  name  the  secondary  fulness,  not  inverted,  with  personal  titles 
(adding  dates,  where  customarily  used)  ;  e.  g.  on  the  main  card: 

Craddock  Charles   Egbert,        pseud,   of   M..N.   Murfree,  1S50- 

on  title  card: 

(The)   storm  centre:   a  novel.         1905. 
Craddock,    C:    E.         pseud,    of    M. .  N.    Murfree. 

Probably,  however,  if  the  real  name  was  well  enough  known  to  add  to 
the  value  of  the  cards  the  entry  would  be  made  under  the  real  name  instead 
of  under  the  pseudonym. 

c  Entry  under  real  name.  When  a  book  published  under  a  pseu- 
donym is  entered  under  the  real  name  do  not  add  the  pseudonym 
in  the  heading  but  give  it  as  a  part  of  the  title,  not  inverted,  using 


1  An  extended  discussion  of  the  treatment  of  pseudonymous  works   is 
given  in  Cutter,  7,  97,  204-205. 

110 


PSEUDONYMS   AND  OTHER  TEX    NAMES  86c-e 

the  same  fulness  as  on  the  title-page,  with  personal  titles,  retain- 
ing even  those  which  would  not  be  used  in  headings  for  real  names. 
Add  [pseud.]  in  the  book  title,  after  the  name  with  its  personal 
titles,  to  explain  the  relation  to  the  author  heading. 

The  objection  to  adding  the  pseudonym  in  the  heading  is  that  while  the 
headings  for  all  the  books  of  an  author  should  be  uniform,  sometimes  the 
same  author  publishes  some  books  under  one  pseudonym,  some  books  under 
another  and  some  books  under  his  own  name ;  e.  g.  different  works  by 
Washington  Irving  appeared  variously  under  the  pseudonyms  "Jonathan 
Oldstyle",  "Diedrich  Knickerbocker"  and  "Geoffrey  Crayon."  The  inclusion, 
in  the  title,  of  a  pseudonym  used  on  the  title-page  of  that  special  book  or 
edition  represents  the  facts  more  exactly. 

d  Both  real  name  and  pseudonym  on  title-page.  Sometimes  both 
the  real  name  and  the  pseudonym  are  given  on  the  title-page.  In 
such  cases  enter  under  the  real  name.  Include  the  pseudonym  in 
the  title  if  it  is  given  conspicuously  on  the  title-page  but  not  if 
it  is  given  in  small  type,  subordinate  to  the  real  name  and  merely 
intended  to  identify  the  author  with  the  writer  of  other  books 
published  under  the  pseudonym. 

e  Double  entry.  A  possible  treatment  for  all  authors  or  for  very 
prominent  authors  is  to  make  double  entry;  i.  e.  main  entry  under 
the  real  name,  with  a  brief  entry  under  the  pseudonym,  with  re- 
sults resembling  a  series  card ;  e.  g.  main  entries  for  George  Sand's 
books  might  be  made  under  her  real  name,  Dudevant,  Mine 
Amantine  Lucile  Aurore  (Dupin)  1804-1876,  with  brief  added 
entries  under  the  pseudonym ;  e.  g. 


D£45m 
D&4-5b 
DS4-5S 


Sanq,    George.  paeud.  of  lime  A.L.A, 

(Dupin)    Dudevant. 
Mauprat,  1898. 

The  bagpipes.  1900. 

The   enow  man.         cc  1870-9 83 


Contrary  to  the  direction  given  in  the  note  under  866,  the  rial  name  is, 
in  this  sample,  given  m  the  heading  in  addition  to  the  pseudonym,  as  other- 
wise the  form  under  which  the  main  entries  are  made  would  not  he  repre- 
sented. 

Since  this  card  is  on  the  plan  of  a  series  card,  if  the  heading  had  occu- 
pied only  one  line  a  blank  line  would  have  been  left  before  the  first  entry 
for  an  individual  book. 

Ill 


87"89a  CATALOGING   RULES 

87  Name  references.  Whether  the  entry  is  made  under  the 
pseudonym  or  under  the  real  name,  a  reference  should  he  made 
from  the  unused  form  to  the  form  used ;  e.  g. 

Murfree,  Mary  Noailles,  1850- 

Craddock,  Charles  Egbert,         pseud. 

Twain,  Mark,  pseud.  see 

Clemens,  Samuel  Langhorne,  1835-1910. 

if  a  pseudonym  is  likely  to  be  looked  for  under  the  first  as  well 
as  under  the  last  part,  a  reference  from  the  former  also  should 
be  made;  e.  g.  it  might  be  thought  desirable  to  say  in  addition  to 
the  reference  above : 

Mark  Twain,  pseud.  see 

Clemens,  Samuel  Langhorne,  1835-1910. 

If  preferred,  a  longer  form,  corresponding  to  the  alternative  for 
"see"  subject  references,  may  be  used;  as, 

Murfree,  Mary  Noailles,  1850-  see 

Books  by  this  author  will  be  found  in  this  catalog  under  the 
heading :    Craddock,  Charles  Egbert,  pseud. 
For  indention  sec  sample  card  /,  below. 

88  Title  cards.  Title  cards  should  regularly  be  made  for 
books  published  under  pseudonyms,  i.  e.  those  books  in  which  the 
pseudonym  alone  represents  the  author  on  the  title-page,  or  those 
books  in  which  both  pseudonym  and  real  name  are  given  but  the 
pseudonym  is  more  prominent.  This  rule  includes  books  of  which 
the  titles  are  not  distinctive  and  for  which  title  cards  would  not 
ordinarily  be  made,  but  the  following  classes  may  be  excepted: 

a  Individual  biographies  whose  titles  begin  with  either  the  sur- 
name or  the  forenames  of  the  biographee,  the  subject  card  for  the 
biographee  being  sufficient. 

b  Other  books  where  the  first  word  of  the  title  would  be  the 
entry  word  of  the  subject  heading,  unless  this  word  would  introduce 
so  many  entries  that  the  title  as  such  would  be  likely  to  be  over- 
looked. 

c  Other  books  whose  titles  begin  with  a  personal  name  under 
which  some  other  added  entry  is  made,  e.  g.  the  name  of  an  editor; 
as.  I Tood fall's  Junius. 

89  Pen  names  which  are  parts  of  real  names,  a  Heading 
and  reference.  If  a  writer  publishes  his  books  under  a  part  of  his 
real  name  it  can  not  properly  be  called  a  fictitious  name  and  there- 
fore should  not  be  labeled  "pseud."  but  reference  should  be  made 
as  in  the  case  of  pseudonyms  from  the  form  not  used  for  entry  to 

112 


PSEUDONYMS   AND  OTIIEK   PEN    NAMES 


8ga-9o 


the  one  preferred,  the  entry  generally  being  under  the  full  name. 

b  Xame  in  title.  If  the  pen  name  appears  as  a  part  of  the  author 
heading  it  is  unnecessary  to  repeat  it  in  the  title  of  the  book. 

c  Title  cards.  Title  cards  should  be  made  as  in  the  case  of 
pseudonymous  books. 

90  Sobriquets,  nicknames  etc.  In  a  few  cases,  chiefly  names 
of  artists,  a  universally  used  sobriquet  or  nickname  is  to  be  selected 
as  entry  word,  provided  it  is  not  one  of  the  forenames  of  the  per- 
son in  question.     A.  L.  A.  rules,  59. 

For  additional  examples  see  A.  L.  A.  rules,  39,  and  Cutter,  24a. 


Sample  cards 
1  Author  card  for  book  entered  under  pseudonym,  real  name  not  known 

(Quotation  marks   used   on  the   title-page) 


2)40.44 
FG2. 


"Fli 
19181 


ajht",  pseud. 

(The)    flying  Yankee. . . 


N.Y.   Dodd, 


348p.   plates,    19£om. 


2  Subject  card  for  same 


340.44 
F62. 


"Fli 
0.918 


EUROPEAN  WAR,    1914- 

ERATIONS. 
ghtn,         paeud. 
(The)   flying  Yankee... 


AERIAL  OP- 
N.Y.   Dodd, 


248p.   plates,    19-jcm. 

3  Title  card  for  same 


340.44 
F62. 


(The)    flying  Yankee. 
nFlijghtn,  pseud. 


1918. 


4  Author  card  for  book  published  under  pseudonym  but  entered  under 

real   name 


8\7 
CGZ5t 


£le4eri8,  Samuel   Langhornej  1835-1910. 

(A)    tramp   abroad,    by  Mark  Twain 
pae\id.3...  N.Y.    Harper  cc1879-99j 

2v.  in   1,   6pl.    30iom. 


113 


86-go 


CATALOGING    RULES 

5  Title  card  for  same 


BVT 
CGZ5t 


(A)    troop  abroad. 
Sv.in  1. 

rCle^ens,    S:L.3 


,?1879-993 


6  Reference  card 


Twain,  Mark,    pseud.    see 
Cleans,  Samuel  Langhorne,    1835-1910 


(or)  7 


Twain,    Mark,  pseud. 

Books  by  this  author  will  be  found  in 
this  catalog  under  the  heading:   Clemens, 
Samubl  Langhorne,    1835-1910. 


8  Author   card  for  book   entered  under   pseudonym,   real  name   known 


HfcfcZr 


Hobbes,   John  Oliver,         pseud. 

Robert  Orange.  N.Y.    Stokes  cc18993 

341p.    19cm. 


9  Title  card  for  same 


H<oS2r 


Robert  Orange.         tpl8993 
jHobbjes,   J:0.         pseud. 


114 


PSEUDONYMS  AND  OTHER   PEN    NAMES 
10  Reference  from  real  name 


86-90 


Sraigie,   Mrs  Pearl  Mary  Teresa  (Rioh- 
ards)  1867-1906,  see 

Hobbtea,   John  Oliver,         pseud. 


(or)    11 


Craigie,   Mrs  Pearl  Mary  Teresa  (Rich- 
ards) 1867-1906. 

Books  by  this  author  will  be  found  in 
this  catalog  under  the  heading:   Hobbes, 
John  Oliver,  pseud. 


12  Main  card  for  book  entered  under  sobriquet 


Sorrbggio, cAntonio  Allegri3  known  as, 

1494-1534. 

Oeuvres  completes  du  Correge,   et 
3hoix  du  Parmesan.         Par.    Didot  c1864j 

19p.    133pl.    3lJom.  (Galerie  des 

peintres  les  plus  celebres) 


13  Subject  card  for  same 

(Secondary  fulness  same  as  author  fulness,  "Allegri"  being  the  family  name, 

and  "Antonio"  the  single  given  name) 


T53.5 

a.C?>2 


PAINTINGS  -  REPRODUCTIONS. 
Correggio, cAntonio  Allegri3  known  as, 

1494-1534. 

Oeuvres  completes  du  Correge,   et 
choijx  du  Parmesan.  Par.    Didot  c18643 

19p.    123pl.    31-Jom.  (Galerie  des 

peirjtres  les  plus  celebres) 


115 


86-90 


CATALOGING   RULES 
14  Reference  from  family  name 


Allegri,   Antonio,  see 

Corrjeggio,   Antonio  Allegri, 
1494-1534 


(or)  15 


known  as, 


Allegri,    Antonio. 

fforks  by  this  artist  will  be  found  in 
this   catalog  under  the  heading:    Correg- 
gio,    Antonio  Allegri,    known  as,    1494-1534 


116 


ANONYMOUS    BOOKS  91-923(2) 


ANONYMOUS  BOOKS 

91  Definitions.  A  book  is  considered  anonymous  if  the 
author's  name  does  not  appear  in  the  book  itself.  A.  L.  A.  rules, 
pref.  p.  13. 

Published  without  the  author's  name.  Strictly  a  book  is  not 
anonymous  if  the  author's  name  appears  anywhere  in  it,  but  it  is 
safest  to  treat  it  as  anonymous  if  the  author's  name  does  not  ap- 
pear in  the  title.  Even  when  the  author's  name  is  given  in  the 
second  or  a  later  volume  the  work  is  to  be  treated  as  anonymous  if 
the  first  volume  does  not  give  the  author's  name.  Note  that  the 
words  are  "in  the  title,"  not  "on  the  title-page."  Sometimes  in 
government  publications  the  author's  name  and  the  title  of  his  work 
do  not  appear  on  the  title-page  but  on  a  page  immediately  follow- 
ing.    Such  works  are  not  to  be  treated  as  anonymous.  Cutter,  p.  13. 

92  Treatment.  Anonymous  books  fall  into  two  classes:  (a) 
those  of  which  the  authors  are  known,  and  (b)  those  of  which 
the  authors  are  unknown. 

The  general  treatment  of  anonymous  books  is  described  below. 
For  titles  changed  in  successive  volumes,  see  A.  L.  A.  rules,  us; 
for  different  spellings  of  the  first  word  of  the  title  (e.  g.  "inquiry" 
and  "enquiry"),  for  related  anonymous  works  and  for  translations 
of  anonymous  works,  see  A.  L.  A.  rules,  116-118. 

a  Author  known.  The  treatment  of  an  anonymous  book  whose 
author  is  known  does  not  differ  in  the  form  of  the  cards  from  the 
treatment  of  books  as  previously  considered,  the  main  entry  being 
made  under  the  author's  name  and  (in  exact  work)  such  parts  of 
the  name  bracketed  as  are  not  given  in  the  title  of  the  book,  in  the 
case  of  anonymous  books  the  brackets  being  placed  around  the 
entire  name. 

Exception:  For  sacred  books,  anonymous  classics  and  corporate 
headings,  to  be  treated  later,  brackets  are  not  used  to  show  that  the 
name  is  not  given   in   the  title  of  the  book. 

(1)  Identifying  phrases.  Phrases  in  the  title  of  the 
book,  identifying  the  author,  may  be  included  in  or  omitted  from 
the  title  on  the  cards  for  books  of  which  the  author  is  known,  ac- 
cording to  the  cataloger's  judgment  as  to  their  importance. 
Although  these  phrases  represent  the  author's  name  and  informa- 
tion about  the  author,  it  is  better  (in  exact  work)  to  use  ...  to 
indicate  their  omission  either  wholly  or  in  part. 

(2)  Title     card  s.     Title  cards  should  be  made  in  all  cases. 
When  the  author's  name  is  not  in  the  title  of  the  first  volume  of  a  set, 

but  is  in  that  of  one  of  the  other  volumes,  make  both  author  and  title  entries 
but  do  not  inclose  the  author's  name  in  brackets. 

117 


92b(l)-C  CATALOGING    RULES 

b  Author  unknown.  (1)  Main  entry.  The  treatment  of 
anonymous  books  of  which  the  author  is  not  known  does  not  differ 
in  principle  from  that  in  previous  work.  Since  the  author's  name 
is  unknown  it  is  obviously  impossible  to  make  the  main  entry  under 
his  name,  but  the  top  line,  being  the  regular  place  for  his  name,  is 
left  blank  (except  for  the  call  number)  in  order  that  the  name  may 
be  filled  in  later  if  found.  The  title  is  written  in  its  regular  place 
on  the  second  line,  beginning  at  the  second  indention,  and  as  this  is 
the  main  card,  the  regular  rules  for  title,  imprint  and  collation  for 
main  cards  are  followed,  accession  numbers  and  tracing  being  given 
on  the  back. 

(2)  Added  entries.  Added  entry  cards ;  i.  e.  for  subjects, 
editors  etc.  are  made  as  usual,  leaving  a  blank  line  in  the  regular 
place  for  the  author's  name,  except  on  series  cards  and  inside  the 
(      )  in  analytics  (to  be  taken  up  later). 

(3)  Identifying  phrases.  Phrases  in  the  title  of  the 
book,  furnishing  a  clue  to  the  author's  identity,  should  be  included  on 
the  cards  for  books  of  which  the  author  is  not  found;  e.  g.  "by  a 

member  of  Congress",  "by  the  author  of ".     If  several  books 

are  mentioned  as  the  work  of  the  author,  only  the  first  or  the  best 
known  need  be  given  on  the  cards,  the  other  titles  being  represented 
(in  exact  work)  by  .  .  . 

(4)  Author  found  after  book  is  cataloged.  If 
the  anonymous  book  is  first  cataloged  without  the  author's  name 
and  the  name  is  afterwards  found,  this  name  should  be  filled  in, 
in  its  regular  place  on  all  cards,  following  the  regular  rules  for 
author  and  secondary  fulness. 

(5)  Title  cards.  As  the  main  card  for  an  anonymous  book 
with  the  author  not  found  is  filed  under  its  title,  no  other  title  card 
is  necessary  but  if  the  author  is  later  found  and  filled  in,  a  new 
card  in  the  regular  form  for  a  title  card  should  be  made. 

When  this  new  card  is  made,  its  tracing  on  the  back  of  the  main  card 
should   not  be   forgotten. 

c  Anonymous  books — By  the  author  of.  When  an  anonymous 
work  of  undiscovered  authorship  bears  on  its  title-page  such  a 
phrase  as  "by  the  author  of",  enter  it  under  its  title  with  an  added 
entry  under  the  title  quoted,  followed  by  the  words  "Author  of". 
If  different  titles  are  thus  used  by  an  author  at  various  times,  make 
the  added  entry  under  the  title  most  frequently  referred  to,  or,  in 
case  of  doubt,  under  one  of  his  best  known  or  earlier  works.  Refer 
from  the  title  of  each  work  to  the  title  thus  chosen.  A.L.  A.  rules, 
114. 

118 


ANONYMOUS  BOOKS 


g2c-d 


The  added  entries  under  the  title  referred  to  should  be  on  the 
plan  of  a  series  card,  as  suggested  for  pseudonyms  under  section 
S6e;  e.  g.  supposing  that  the  author  of  Elizabeth  and  her  German 
garden  was  unknown,  the  added  entries  would  take  the  following 
form : 


E45p 
E43e 
E43a 
E43pr 


lizjabeth  and  her  German  garden, 
thor  of. 
Pious  pilgrimage.    1S01. 


Au- 


Elizabeth  and  her  German  garden. 

1900. 
Adventures  of  Elizabeth  in  Rugon. 

1904. 
Priaoese  Priscilla's  fortnight. 

1905. 


the  main  entry  for  each  book  being  made  under  its  own  title,  with 

the  note: 

For  other  works  by  the  same  author  see 
Elizabeth  and  her  German  garden,  Author  of 

While  the  added  entry  is  to  be  made  in  each  case  for  books  falling  under 
this  rule  the  note  should  not  be  given  until  other  books  are  listed  under 
the  same  added  entry  heading. 

If  in  the  sample  above,  which  resembles  a  series  card,  the  author  heading 
had  occupied  only  one  line,  a  blank  line  would  have  been  left  before  the 
first  title,  as  on  regular  series  cards. 

d  Reference  from  well-known  titles.  Occasionally  in  the  case  of 
authors  who  have  been  identified  but  who  have  published  many  of 
their  books  under  a  phrase  identifying  them  with  a  special  title  a 
reference  from  this  title  may  be  convenient,  if  the  book  itself  is  not 
in  the  library;  as, 


Schonberg-Cotta    family, 
see 
Charles,  Mrs  Elizabeth  (Rundle) 


Author  of, 
1828-1896 


119 


93  CATALOGING   RULES 


INITIALS 


Books  are  occasionally  published,  not  under  the  author's  name 
hut  under  initials,  asterisks  or  some  other  slight  representation  of 
his  name.  These  books,  like  anonymous  and  pseudonymous  books, 
fall  into  two  classes:  (1)  those  of  which  the  author  is  known;  (2) 
those  of  which  he  is  still  unknown. 

93  Author's  name  known,  a  Main  entry.  When,  for  a  book 
published  under  initials  or  other  slight  representation  of  the 
author's  name,  the  author's  name  is  known,  the  main  entry  is,  as 
usual,  made  under  his  name,  the  supplied  parts  of  the  name  being 
bracketed  in  exact  work. 

b  Added  entries.  The  usual  added  entries  should  be  made,  but 
title  cards  should  be  made  with  the  same  liberality  (in  accordance 
with  the  same  rules,  but  subject  to  the  same  exceptions)  as  for 
pseudonymous  works  (section  88). 

c  Treatment  of  the  initials.  Aside  from  the  usual  added  entries 
the  publication  of  the  initials  on  the  title-page  introduces  a  special 
feature.  Since  the  initials  are  employed  to  represent  the  author's 
name  they  are  similar  in  nature  to  a  pseudonym  and  call  for  some 
form  of  recognition  in  the  catalog.  This  recognition  may  be 
covered  by  any  one  of  three  methods  of  treatment,  two  cards  be- 
ing called  for  in  each  case,  one  under  the  initials  with  the  one  given 
last  on  the  title-page  given  first  on  the  cards  (corresponding  to  the 
usual  inversion  of  the  author's  name  in  author  headings,  and  there- 
fore designated  in  the  following  pages  as  "initials  inverted")  and 
the  other  under  the  initials  in  title-page  order. 

(1)  Method  1:  general  secondary  entries. 
Two  general  secondary  entries  may  be  made,  one  under  the  initials 
inverted  and  one  under  the  initials  in  title-page  order  (see  samples 
4-5  below),  the  initials  being  retained  in  the  title  (or  mentioned 
in  a  note)   to  justify  the  entry. 

(2)  Method  2:  references  from  initials  with- 
out book  title.  Two  references  to  the  author's  name 
( in  the  full  form  for  an  author  heading)  may  be  made,  one  from 
the  initials  inverted  and  one  from  the  initials  in  title-page  order 
(see  samples  6-9  below). 

(3)  Method  3 :  references  from  initials  with 
book  title.  Two  references  to  the  author's  name  (in  the  full 
form  for  an  author  heading)  may  be  made,  one  from  the  initials 
inverted  and  one  from  the  initials  in  title-page  order,  the  initials 

120 


INITIALS  53 

being  followed  in  each  case  by  the  title  of  the  book  i  beginning, 
on  the  line  below  the  initials,  at  the  second  indention,  with  first 
indention  for  subsequent  lines)  and,  at  intervals  of  one  centimeter, 
the  imprint  date  (or  its  substitute)  and  the  number  of  volumes  if 
more  than  one  (see  samples  10-13  below).  Since  these  references 
are  for  a  special  book  they  should  also  carry  the  call  number, 
which  makes  them  in  effect  added  entries,  involving  the  necessity 
for  their  being  traced  on  the  main  card. 

Although  the  reference  character  of  these  cards  would  serve  to  justify 
second  indention  for  the  initials  and  third  indention  for  the  title,  it  is  better 
to  use  regular  author  and  title  indention,  in  order  to  conform  to  the 
indention  desirable  when  the  reference  is  from  the  author's  full  name  with 
title  (see  Changed  titles,  section  97&(l)  (o)  below),  where  the  reference 
cards  should  be  alphabeted   in   with   the   full   entries   for  the  author. 

Relative  advantages.  The  first  of  these  methods  seems  for  the 
majority  of  cases  the  most  satisfactory,  since  it  gives  to  the  reader  at  once 
the  main  facts,  including  the  call  number,  thereby  preventing  the  annoyance 
so  often  felt  at  being  told  to  look  elsewhere,  while  at  the  same  time  it  oc- 
casions the  cataloger  very  little  more  work,  when  only  a  single  book  is 
involved.  Even  if  several  books  by  the  same  author  are  published  under 
his  initials  the  convenience  of  the  reader  would  still  seem  more  than  an 
offset  to  the  slight  extra  work  on  the  part  of  the  cataloger,  and  this  method 
has  a  special  advantage  over  Method  2,  in  cases  where  the  same  initials 
have  been  used  by  different  authors.  Another  very  important  advantage 
is  that  of  uniformity  with  the  most  satisfactory  treatment  of  books  pub- 
lished under  initials  and  cataloged  while  the  author  is  still  unknown,  where 
the  anonymous  method   (section  94a  below)    is  followed. 

When,  however,  many  books  are  known  to  have  been  published  under 
a  combination  of  initials  representing  a  certain  author,  e.  g.  A.  L.  O.  E. ' 
(even  though  they  are  not  largely  represented  in  the  library)  it  is  recom- 
mended that  Method  2  (i.  e.  reference  from  initials  to  author's  name)  be 
used,  as  in  the  case  of  pseudonyms,  ff  at  any  time,  having  started  with 
Method  1,  it  seems  best  to  abandon  it  for  Method  2,  this  may  be  done  by 
removing  from  the  catalog  the  general  secondary  entries  and  substituting 
the  reference  cards,  being  careful  to  remove  also  or  cancel  the  tracing  for 
the  general  secondary  entries,  on  the  main  cards. 

Method  3  is  a  combination  of  Methods  1  and  2,  resulting  in  the  form  of 
a  reference  card,  but  with  the  same  information  as  a  general  secondary 
card,  and  the  statements  given  above  as  to  the  relation  of  Method  I  to 
Method  2  would  apply  equally  to  Method  3,  including  the  statement  regard- 
ing the  substitution  of  Method  2,  if   at  any  time  desired. 


1  In  this  case  the  letters  used  represent  not  the  initials  of  the  author's 
actual  name,  "Charlotte  Maria  Tucker",  but  a  descriptive  phrase,  "A  lady 
of  England".  The  same  principle,  however,  would  apply  when  the  letters 
used  were  really  the  initials  of  the  author's  name. 

121 


93 


CATALOGING    RULES 


Sample  cards 
i  Main  card  for  book  published  under  initials,  name  found 


3Q>5        JMtevillj,    Lord  William,   Bceauchamp, 
N52  1860- 

Penal  servitude;   by  W.B.N... 
Putnam,    1903. 

308p.    19£cra. 


N.Y. 


2  Corresponding  subject  card 


3G5 
N5^ 


PRISONS. 
fyevUlj,    Lord  W:B.  1860- 

Penal  servitude ;   by  W.B.N... 
Putnam,    1903. 

308p.    19£ora. 


N.Y, 


3  Corresponding  title  card 


30,5 
N52 


Penal   servitude, 
Ncevllllj  ,    Lord  W:B. 


1903, 


4-5  General  secondary  entries 
4  Under  initials  inverted 


3G5 
N57. 


Icev 


N.,    W.B. 
113,   Lord  W:3. 
Penal   servitude;   by  W.B.N. 


1903. 


5  Under  initials  in  title-page  order 


3Q>5 
N5Z 


W.B.N. 
^cQv{ll3,    Lord  W:B. 

Penal   servitude;   by  W.B.N, 


1903. 


122 


INITIALS 


93 


(or)  6-9  References  from  initials  without  book  title 

6-7  From  initials  inverted 

6 


N.,   W.3.  see 

fevllll,    Lord  William  Beauchamp, 


1860- 


(or)  7 


N.,  W.B. 

Books  by  this  author  will  be  found  in 
thia  oatalog  under  the  heading:  Nevill, 
Lord]  William  Beauchamp,  1860- 


(also)  S-9  From  initials  in  title-page  order 


W.B.N.    see 
Nevib.1,  Lord  William  Beauchamp,    1860- 


(or)  9 


W.B.N. 

Books  by  this  author  will   be  found  in 
thiaj  catalog  under  the  heading:   Nevill, 
Lord]  William  Beauchamp,    1860- 


123 


93 


CATALOGING    RULES 


(or)   10-13  References  from  initials  with  book  title;  call  number 

given 

iq-ii  From  initials  inverted 


10 


(When,  as  in  the  forms  used  in  samples  10  and  12,  the  book  title  is  in- 
cluded in  the  part  referred  from,  the  word  "see"  is  written  on  the  line 
below  the  title  (with  its  date  and  number  of  volumes  when  more  than 
one)  according  to  Library  of  Congress  usage.) 


3G5 
N52. 


n.t  iw.b. 

Penal  servitude.  1903, 

see 
fevilll,    Lord  William  Beauchamp, 


1860- 


(or)    11 


3G5 
N5Z 


M5Z 


5G5 
N52- 


».* 


W.B. 

Penal  servitude.     1903, 


Full  entry  to  be  found  in  this  cata- 
log under  the  heading:  Nevill,  Lord  Wil- 
li axq  Beauchamp,    1860- 


(also)  12-13  From  initials  in  title-page  order 
12 


P.B.I 

enal  servitude.    1903, 

Mevijll,  Lord  William  Beaucnamp, 


(or)  13 


1860- 


W.B. 


N. 

Penal  servitude.    1903, 


Full  entry  to  be  found  in  this  cata- 
log under  the  heading:  Nevill,  Lord  Wil- 
liam Beauchamp,  1860- 

124 


INITIALS  94-943 

94  Author's  name  unknown.  For  books  published  under 
initials  or  other  slight  representations  of  an  unidentified  author's 
name  two  methods  of  treatment  are  presented:  (a)  on  the  plan 
of  anonymous  books,  A.  L.  A.  rules;  and  (b)  by  the  use  of  the 
initials  etc.  as  author  heading,  Cutter. 

a  Anonymous  treatment.  Enter  under  title  books  in  which 
initials,  asterisks,  or  other  typographical  devices,  not  identified,  are 
used  in  place  of  the  author's  name.  Make  added  entry  or  reference 
under  the  initials  (both  first  and  last  letters),  asterisks,  etc.  A.  L.  A. 
rules,   iifj. 

For   illustrative   examples   of    such   books   see  A.   L.    A.    rules,   115. 

As  shown  in  the  following  samples,  on  all  cards  a  line  is  left 
blank  for  the  author's  name  to  be  filled  in  later  if  found,  as  pre- 
viously in  the  case  of  an  anonymous  book.  In  the  title  the  initials 
are  included,  as  on  the  title-page,  since  they  are  what  the  author 
has  chosen  to  represent  him  and  since,  not  being  given  author 
treatment  under  this  method,  they  would  not,  in  most  cases,  other- 
wise appear  on  the  cards.  When,  as  frequently  happens,  the  ini- 
tials do  not  appear  on  the  title-page  but  are  signed  to  the  preface, 
to  the  dedication  or  to  letters  (of  which  the  book  may  consist)  they 
should  be  accounted  for  on  all  cards  by  a  note,  e.  g.  Preface  (or 
Dedication,  or  Letters,  as  the  case  may  be)  signed  "L.  M.  T." 

( 1 )  General  secondary  entries  under  initials. 
The  chief  feature  distinguishing  the  treatment  of  these  books  from 
that  of  really  anonymous  books  consists  in  the  general  secondary 
entries  made  under  initials  (both  inverted  and  in  title-page  order). 
In  the  initials  we  have  on  the  title-page  what  represents  the  anther's 
name  and  yet  is  not  on  the  cards  given  author  treatment.  These 
initials  may  therefore  be  regarded  as  coming  under  the  definition 
for  general  secondaries  (section  45),  i.  c.  "entries  made  for  indi- 
viduals .  .  .  etc.  having  some  kind  of  author  connection  with  the 
book  .  .  .  yet  not  really  that  of  author  ..."  and  by  making  the 
entries  in  the  form  of  general  secondaries  they  conform  in  appear- 
ance to  the  other  added  entries  for  the  same  book. 

(2)  Author'-  name  found  later.  A.S  in  the  case  of 
really  anonymous  books  (section  926  (4)  above),  if  the  author's  name 
i«  found  after  the  book  is  cataloged,  it  should  be  filled  in,  in  its 
regular  place  on  the  cards  already  made,  following  the  regular  rules 
for  author  and  secondary  fulness;  and,  again  as  in  the  case  of 
a.ionymous  hooks  (  section  (  L7>  (  5  )  above),  a  new  title  card  should  be 
made  in  the  regular  form  for  a  title  card,  such  card  having  been 
unnecessary  while  the  main  card   was  filed  under  the  title. 

125 


94a 


CATALOGING    RULES 


If,  after  the  author  is  identified,  references  are  preferred  to  general 
secondary  entries  for  the  initials,  the  substitution  may  be  made  at  this 
time,  as  suggested  for  the  substitution  of  Method  2  for  Method  I,  in 
the  note  under  93c,  care  being  taken  to  remove  the  tracing  for  the  general 
secondaries,   from  the  main  card. 

14-18  Author  unidentified;  main  entry  under  title 

14  Main  entry 


340.481 
-65 


er, 

Boat 


Letters  of  a  Canadian   stretcher   bear* 
by  R.A.L.;    ed.by  Anna  Chapin  Ray. 
.    Little.    1918. 
288p.    19£cm. 


15  Corresponding  subject  card 


340481 
LG5 


er, 

P  0  S  u 


EUROPEAN  WAR,    1914- 
NARRATIVES. 


-  PERSONAL 


Letters  of  a  Canadian   stretcher   bear- 
by  R.A.L. ;    ed.by  Anna  Chapin  Ray. 
.    Little.    1918. 
388p.    19 Jem. 


16  Editor  card 


$40,481 
LG5 


Ray,   Anna  Chapin, 


1865- 


ed, 


Letters  of  a  Canadian   stretcher  bear- 
er,  (by  R.A.L.  1918. 


17  General  secondary  under  initials  inverted 


340.48! 

L.G5 


er, 


L.,    R.A. 

Letters  of  a  Canadian   stretcher  bear- 
by  R.A.L.  1918. 


126 


INITIALS  94a-b 

18  General  secondary  under  initials  in   title-page   order 


LG5 


er, 


3.  A.  L. 

Letters  of  a  Canadian   stretcher   bear- 
by  R.A.L.  1918. 


b  Initials  etc.  used  as  author  heading.  In  Cutter  96,  is  found 
the  direction  to  enter  under  "part  of  the  author's  name  when  only 
a  part  is  known  .  .  .  initials  are  to  be  used  whether  they  are  in 
the  title  or  only  signed  to  a  preface  or  to  the  text  or  are  other- 
wise known." 

When  this  thoroughly  logical  system  is  adopted  the  main  entry 
for  the  book  is  made  under  the  initials  inverted  (i.  e.  with  the  initial 
given  last  on  the  title-page  given  first  on  the  card),  correspond- 
ing to  the  customary  inversion  of  the  author's  name.  On  added 
entry  cards  the  author  item  holds  the  same  relation  to  the  head- 
ing used  for  the  main  entry  as  in  the  case  of  books  where  the 
author's  name  is  known,  a  space  being  left  after  any  initial  on  any 
card  (whether  main  or  added  entry)  where  the  name  would  be  writ- 
ten out  if  known,  on  the  principle  observed  in  leaving  space  on 
cards,  where  for  an  author's  forenames  only  the  initials  are  known 
(see  sample  cards  19-28  below). 

While  space  should  be  left  in  the  heading  on  the  main  card  for  the 
filling  in  after  initials  if  the  name  is  found  later,  on  the  curds  which  are 
to  be  permanently  filed  under  initials  alone  (as  indicated  in  (1)  and  (2) 
below)  no  such  space  should  be  left  between  initials  referred  from,  since 
there  the  names  arc  not  to  be  filled  in  (see  samples  23-27  below,  and  4-13 
above). 

(1)  Treatment  of  initials  in  titl  e-p  age  order. 
Since,  when  following  this  method,  the  main  entry  is  made  under 
the  initials  inverted,  no  extra  card  is  needed  for  that  arrangement 
of  the  initials  as  long  as  the  author's  name  is  unknown,  but  the 
initials  in  title-page  order  should  be  recognized,  and  for  this  pur- 
pose the  general  secondary  treatment  is  recommended,  as  for  cases 
where  the  author's  name  is  known  (section  93),  though  either  of 
the  methods  of  reference  there  suggested  (i.  e.  reference  from  the 
initials  alone  or  from  the  initials  with  book  title)  may  be  used  if 
preferred  (see  samples  23-27  below). 

(2)  A  uthor's  name  f  o  u  n d  late  r.  1  f .  after  the  book 
has  been  cataloged  under  initials,  the  author's  name  is  found,  it 
should  be  filled  in  on  the  cards  already  made,  according  to  the 

127 


94b 


CATALOGING    RULES 


regular  rules  for  author  and  secondary  fulness.  An  extra  card 
should  then  be  made  for  the  initials  inverted,  which  would  be  filed 
at  the  beginning  of  the  entries  under  the  entry  initial,  and  there- 
fore be  separated  from  the  main  author  entry.  This  extra  card 
should  be  in  the  form  of  a  general  secondary  or  of  a  reference  card, 
according  to  the  treatment  previously  chosen  for  the  initials  in  title- 
page  order,  which  should  in  turn  be  influenced  by  the  policy  adopted 
for  books  published  under  initials,  but  whose  author  has  been 
identified  at  the  time  of  cataloging  (section  93). 

(3)  Title  cards.  Title  cards  should  be  made  for  books 
entered  under  initials,  asterisks  etc.  according  to  the  directions  for 
pseudonymous  books,  section  88. 

19-27   Author   unidentified;   main   entry   under   initials   inverted 

(Same  book  used  for  illustration  as  in  samples  14-18.  In  the  previous 
samples  the  book  number  "L65"  was  assigned  from  the  Cutter  tables  for 
the  entry  word  "Letters";  in  the  following  samples  the  letter  "L"  stand- 
ing alone  represents  the  initial  of  the  author's  name,  the  remainder  of 
which  is  unknown.) 

19  Main  entry 


L  ^  A 

Letters  of  a  Canadian   3tretcaer   bear- 
er,   by  R.A.L.J    ed.by  Anna  Chapin  Ray. 
3ost.    Little,    1918. 

283p.    19£cm. 

20  Corresponding  subject  card 


340481 
L 


L., 


er, 

Boat 


EUROPEAN  TCAR,    1914-  —  PERSONAL 

NARRATIVES. 
R.A. 
Letters   of  a  Canadian   stretcher   bear- 
by  R.A.L.;    ed.by  Anna  Chapin  Ray. 


Little.    1918. 


283p.    19^om 


21  Editor  card 


340481 
L 


er. 


Ray,   Anna  Chapin,  1865-  ed, 

R.A. 
Letters  of  a  Canadian   stretcher   bear- 
1918. 


28 


INITIALS 

22  Title  card 


94b 


54-0.48l[    Letters  of  a  Canadian  stretcher  bear- 
er.   1918. 
L. ,        R.A. 

23  General  secondary;  initials  in  title-page  order 


34-0.481 
L 


L. , 

er, 


R.A.L. 

R.A. 
Letters  of  a  Canadian  stretcher  bear- 
by  R.A.L.    1918. 


(or)   24-25  Reference  from  initials  in  title-page  order,  without  booh 

title 

24 


I*;, 


R.A.L.  see 

R.  A. 


(or)     25 


this 

R. 

R.A.L. 

Books  by  this  author  will  bo  found  in 
catalog  under  the  heading:  L. , 
A. 

129 


94b 


CATALOGING    RULES 


{or)  26-27  Reference  from  initials  in  title-page  order,  with  book  title;  call 

number  given 

26 

(For  position  of  word  "see",  consult  statement  accompanying  sample   10, 

above) 


S40.481 

P..  A. 

I*. 

L 

Letters  of  a  Canadian  stretcher  bsar- 

er. 

1918, 
see 

L., 

R.                   A. 

(or)     27 


^40.48\R.A.L. 

L_         Letters  of  a  Canadian  stretoher  bear- 
er.   1919. 

Full  entry  to  be  found  in  this  cata- 
log under  the  heading:  L. , 
R.        A. 


28   Author  unidentified;   initials  combined  with  asterisks;   entered 
under  initials  inverted:  main  entry 


P 


Ja  u,  ri» 

Sketches  of   the  character  and  writ- 
ings  of  eminent   living  surgeons  and  phy- 
sicians of  Paris;   tr.from  the  French  by 
Elislha  Sartlett.  Bost.    Carter,    1831. 

131p.    2  port.    19om. 


130 


PARTIAL    TITLES,    BINDER'S    TITLES,    ETC.  95a"t> 


PARTIAL  TITLES 

BINDER'S  TITLES,  COVER  TITLES,  HALF-TITLES 

AND  RUNNING  TITLES 

CHANGED  TITLES,  INCLUDING 

TRANSLATIONS  UNDER  DIFFERENT  TITLES 

Title  cards  under  any  of  these  specifications  should  be  made 
either  in  place  of  or  in  addition  to  usual  title  cards,  when  sufficiently 
different  from  the  title-page  title,  if  the  extra  titles  are  such  as 
are  likely  to  be  remembered  and  looked  for,  except  when,  as  in  the 
case  of  ordinary  titles,  a  subject  entry  answers  the  need. 

95  Partial  title,  a  Definition.  A  catch  title  consisting  of  only  a 
part  of  the  title  as  given  on  the  title-page,  but  applied  only  when 
the  shortening  consists  in  the  omission  of  words  which  would  be 
retained  on  a  regular  title  card  if  made. 

Occasionally  the  partial  title  is  a  shortened  form  beginning  like  the  full 
title  (e.  g.  partial  title  Saints'  rest,  full  title  Saints'  everlasting  rest)  but 
more  often  it  is  a  phrase  which  omits  the  first  words  of  the  full  title;  it 
may  or  may  not  be  a  subtitle  or  alternative  title. 

b  Form  of  entry.  The  entry  consists  of  the  call  number  in  irs 
usual  place;  the  partial  title  on  the  top  line  (written  without  .  .  . 
and  without  the  date  or  number  of  volumes)  beginning  at  the 
second  indention  but  indented  one-half  centimeter  further  if  it  runs 
over  the  line ;  the  author's  name  on  the  next  line,  in  secondary 
fulness,  as  on  ordinary  title  cards,  beginning  at  the  outer  indention 
but  for  subsequent  lines  indented  one-half  centimeter  to  the  right  of 
the  second  vertical  line ;  the  title  as  given  on  the  title-page  on  the 
next  line,  second  indention,  taking  outer  indention  for  subsequent 
lines,  and  followed  at  intervals  of  one  centimeter  by  the  imprint 
date  (or  its  substitute)  and  the  number  of  volumes  if  more  than 
one.  For  the  fuller  title  given  after  the  author's  name  the  .  .  . 
are  to  be  used  as  on  ordinary  title  or  editor  cards.  A  short  title 
may  be  used  but  it  should  be  long  enough  to  include  the  partial 
title. 

Sample  cards 


D314- 


Robinson  Crusoe. 
Defoe,  Daniel. 

Llf3  and  surprising  adventures  of 
obinson  Crusoe.     1903. 


131 


95b-g6b 


CATALOGING     RULES 


A5CT< 


Andr 

ters 
1905h 


(The)  seven  little  sisters  prove 

their  sisterhood, 
ews,  Jane. 

Each  and  all:  the  seven  little  sis- 
prove  their  sisterhood.    cc1877- 


K\4-t 


Ten  weeks  with  a  circus. 
cKal^ra,  J.O. 

Toby  Tyler;  or,  Ten  weeks  with  a  oir- 
cc18813 


For  class  work  it  is  recommended  that  the  full  form  of  partial  title  card 
be  used,  but  in  libraries  which  do  not  aim  at  bibliographic  exactness  it  will 
often  be  sufficient  to  make  a  card  with  the  appearance  of  a  regular  title 
card,  giving  the  call  number,  catch  title  with  the  date,  number  of  volumes 
when  more  than  one,  and  author's  name,  omitting  the  fuller  title,  but  this 
method  should  not  be  used  for  the  other  title  modifications  treated  below. 

c  Tracing.  As  the  partial  titles  are  added  entries,  they  should 
he  traced  on  the  main  cards,  the  abbreviation  "pt  t"  being  used. 
The  word  under  which  the  entry  is  made  should  be  added  in  curves 
when  the  catch  phrase  is  not  perfectly  obvious. 

96  Binder's  titles,  Cover  titles,  Half-titles  and  Running  titles. 
a  Definitions.  The  following  definitions  are  taken  from  the  A.  L.  A. 
rules,  pref.  p.  13-16. 

Binder'  s  title:  The  title  lettered  on  the  back  of  a  book 
by  the  binder,  as  distinguished  from  the  title  on  the  publisher's 
original  binding  or  cover,  (cf.  Cover  title) 

Cover  title:  The  title  printed  on  the  original  covers  of  a 
book  or  lettered  on  the  publisher's  binding,  as  distinguished  from 
the  title  lettered  on  the  back  of  a  particular  copy  of  the  book  by 
the  binder,  (cf  Binder's  title) 

Half-title:  A  brief  title,  usually  without  author's  name  or 
imprint,  printed  on  a  leaf  preceding  the  main  title-page ;  called  also 
bastard  title. 

Running  title:  The  title  repeated  at  the  top  of  each  page 
of  the  book  or  of  a  section. 

b  Form  of  entry.  When  any  of  these  forms  is  merely  a  shorten- 
ing of  the  title  given  on  the  title-page,  the  partial  title  form  is 
generally  to  be  preferred,  as  it  is  slightly  simpler  and  would  remain 
true  (which  would  not  always  be  the  case  with  binder's  or  cover 
titles)    when    hooks    were   rebound.     When    special    titles   can    not 


132 


PARTIAL    TITLES,    BINDER  S    TITLES,    ETC. 


96D-97D 


properly  be  regarded  as  partial  titles  they  should  be  noted  on  the 
main  card  and  subject  cards  and  should,  in  the  heading  on  the 
special  title  cards,  be  followed  by  a  comma  and,  at  a  distance  of 
one  centimeter,  by  the  phrase  "binder's  title  of",  "cover  title  of", 
"half-title  of",  or  "running  title  of",  the  remainder  of  the  card  be- 
ing like  that  for  the  partial  title;  e.  g. 


i  Main  card 


S73.2.4  Freeman,   Frederick, 


FS5 


1799- j.83: 


(Civilization  and  barbarism..    :illuatra- 
jted  jby  especial  refez.-en.oe   to  Metaoomot 
and  the   extinction  of  his  race.  Cambo 

cMas|s.3  Printed  for   the  author,    1373. 

186p.    22om. 


after 


Cover  title:    The  aborigines,    1620  a,nd 


2  Cover  title 


373.24 
-85 


(The)  aborigines,  1620  and  after, 
cover  title  of 
Freeman,  Frederick. 

Civilization  and  barbarism,  illustra- 
ted by  especial  reference  to  Metacomet 
and  the  extinction  of  his  race.    1878o 


As  in  the  case  of  partial  title  cards,  the  .  .  .  and  date  and 
number  of  volumes  when  more  than  one  are  not  used  with  the 
special  title  but  are  used  with  the  real  title  as  taken  from  the  title- 
page,  according  to  the  rules  for  added  short-entry  cards. 

97  Changed  titles,    a  Varieties.    Changed  titles  may  include: 

(1)  Books  reprinted  with  no  change  except  in  the  title 

(2)  Revised  editions  under  different  titles,  including  books  re- 
written by  the  author 

(3)  Abridgments  under  different  titles 

(4)  Different  translations  of  the  same  work  under  different  titles 
b  Treatment.     Same  work  published  under  different  titles:     If 

a  book  has  been  published  under  two  or  more  titles,  make  full  entry 


133 


97b 


CATALOGING    RULES 


for  each  of  the  editions  in  the  library  and  give  in  a  note  under  each 
entry  the  other  title  or  titles  under  which  the  book  has  appeared. 
If  the  library  has  but  one  of  the  editions,  make  full  entry  under 
this  title  and  refer  from  the  others.     A.  L.  A.  rules,  143. 


Sample  of  treatment,  three  titles  in  the  library 


H<b44s  JHlldjreth,   Richard3  1807-1865. 

(The)    slave;   or,   Memoir 8  of  Archy 
Sioore  cpseud.3  . . .  3d  ed. . .  Boat.   Massa- 

chusetts anti-slavery  soo.    1840. 

3v.ln  1,    18cm. 


Republished  under  titles:  The  white 
ave  (call  no.  H644w)  and  Archy  Moore 
aiPL  no,  H644a) 


HQ>44w 


Hildreth,  Richard3    1807-1865. 

(The)  white  slave;  or,  Memoirs  of  a 
fugitive...     Bost.  Tappan,  1852. 

408p.  plates,  19om. 

Originally  published  under  title:  The 
elave;  or,  Memoirs  of  Archy  Moore  (call 
no.  H644s) ;  republished  under  title: 
Archy  Moore  (call  no.  H644a) 


HQ>44a 


Hildreth,   Richard,  1807-1865. 

Archy  Moore,   the  white  slave;  or, 
irs  of  a  fugitive...  N.Y.  Miller, 


^emo 
1855 


408p.  plates,  19 cm. 


Originally  published  under  title:  The 
slave  (call  no.  H644s) ;  also  published 
under  title:  The  white  slave  (call  no. 
H644w) 


In  such  cases  the  regular  title  cards  should  be  made  as  usual  ex- 
cept for  the  addition  of  the  note.  In  this  special  case,  also,  a  pseu- 
donym reference  should  be  made  for  the  earliest  form,  i.  e.  from 
Moore,  Archy,  pseud,  to  Hildreth,  Richard. 

134 


CHANGED   TITLES 


97b 


When  the  call  number  for  a  book  is  given  in  a  note  on  the 
cards  for  another  book,  these  cards  (in  addition  to  their  relation 
to  their  own  book)  become  in  effect  added  entries  for  the  former, 
since  the  note  should  be  changed  if  the  book  noted  was  lost  or  its 
call  number  altered.  Consequently  the  note  should  be  traced  (for 
every  card  on  which  it  appears)  on  the  main  card  for  the  book  thus 
noted ;  e.  g.  on  the  back  of  the  main  card  for  Hildreth's  The  slave : 

Noted  on  auth  and  t  cards  for  Hildreth's  The  white  slave  and 
his  Archy  Moore. 

Treatment  of  same  book;  two  titles  only  in  library 

Earlier  title 


HG44-S 


-Hildjreth,   Richardj  1807-1865. 

(The)    slave;   or,   Memoirs  of  Archy 
tfoore  cpseud.;, . . .  3d  ed. . .  Bost.    Massa- 

chusetts anti-slavery  soo.    1840, 

2v, in  1,  18cm. 


(call 


Republished  under  titles:  Arohy  Moore 
no.  H644a)  and  The  white  slave. 


HG44s 


(The)    slave;   or,   Memoirs  of  Arohy 
Moore.  1840.  2v. in  1. 

jiildreth,    Richard3 

Republished  under  titles:   Arohy  Moore 
(oall  no.    H644a)   and  The  white   slave. 


Moore,   Arohy, 
.d|reth,  Richard, 

(or) 


pseud.  see 

1807-1865 


Moore,    Archy,         pseud. 

Books  by  this  author  will  be  found  in 
this  catalog  under-  the  heading:  Hildreth, 
Richard,    1807-1865. 


135 


97b 


CATALOGING   RULES 


Later  title 


H Q>44 a  Hildr 


i  lave 


s 

undelr 


eth,  Richard,    1807-1365. 

Arohy  Moore,  the  white  slave;  or, 
Memciirs  of  a  fugitive...    N.Y.  Miller, 
1855. 

408p.  plates,  19cm. 


Originally  published  under  title:  The 
(call  no.  H644s) ;  also  published 
title:  The  white  slave. 


RC44a 


Archy  Moore,  the  white  slave;  or, 
Memoirs  of  a  fugitive.     1855. 
Hildireth,  Richard. 


dave 


s 
undelr 


Originally  published  under  title:  The 
(call  no.  HS44s) ;  also  published 
title:  The  white  slave. 


References  from  the  third  titte,  not  in  library 
(The  directions  for  making  the  references  follow  these  two  cards.) 


H644s 
HG44a 


Hildireth,  Richard,    1807-1865. 

(The)  white  slave;  or,  Memoirs  of  a 
fugitive, 

see  his 
(The)  slave;  or,  Memoirs  of  Arohy 
lioorje.    1840.    2v.  in  1; 
or  his 
Archy  Moore,  the  white  slave.    1855. 

Sams  work  published  under  different 
titles. 


136 


CHANGED  TITLES 


97b-b(i)(b) 


HG44a 


(The)  white  slave;  or,  Memoirs  of  a 
fugitive, 
ildlreth,  Richard, 
see  his 
(The)  slave;  or,  Memoirs  of  Archy 
>rje.    1840.    3v.  in  1; 
or  his 
Archy  Moore,  the  white  slave.    1855. 

Same  work  published  under  different 
titles. 


(Notice  that  in  the  samples  above,  a  comma  is  used  after  the  phrase 
preceding  "see  his",  and  a  semicolon  after  the  phrase  preceding  "or  his", 
but  a  period  at  the  end  of  the  complete  reference,  in  this  case  after  the 
"1855".) 

(1)  References  from  title  not  in  library. 
(See  samples  above.) 

(0)  Author  reference.  Write  the  author's  name  and  the  book 
title  from  Avhich  reference  is  to  be  made,  in  the  position  and  fulness 
regularly  used  for  an  author  entry.  (As  there  is  no  special  copy  of 
the  work  in  the  library,  to  be  described,  there  is  nothing  to  be  given 
in  the  way  of  imprint  or  collation.) 

On  the  line  below  the  title,  beginning  at  the  third  indention,  write 
the  words  "see  his"  and  on  the  following  line  (using  regular  title 
indention,  i.  e.  beginning  at  the  second  indention  and  coming  back 
to  first-  indention  for  subsequent  lines)  write  the  title  referred  to, 
followed  at  intervals  of  one  centimeter  by  the  imprint  date  (or  its 
substitute)  and  the  number  of  volumes  if  more  than  one.  Opposite 
the  title  referred  to,  at  the  left  edge  of  the  card,  give  the  correspond- 
ing call  number.  If  the  call  number  consists  of  both  class  number 
and  book  number,  write  them  on  the  same  line,  with  one  space  be- 
tween. 

If  reference  is  to  be  made  to  a  second  title  (i.  e.  if  the  library  has 
the  same  work  under  two  titles  other  than  the  one  referred  from) 
write  the  words  ''or  his"  on  the  line  below  the  first  title  (with  its 
short  imprint  and  collation),  at  the  third  indention,  and  on  the  fol- 
lowing line  the  second  title  referred  to,  following  the  same  rules  as 
for  the  first  title  referred  to,  given  above. 

(b)  Title  reference.  For  the  reference  made  primarily  from 
title,  write  the  title  from  which  reference  is  to  be  made  on  the  top 
line,  beginning  at  the  second  indention  and  using  third  indention  for 

137 


97b(i)(b)-(3)  CATALOGING   RULES 

subsequent  lines,  as  on  ordinary  title  cards.  (As  in  the  case  of 
author  reference,  there  is  no  imprint  or  collation.)  On  the  line  be- 
low the  title  write  the  author's  name,  in  the  position  and  fulness  reg- 
ularly used  on  title  cards.  On  the  following  line,  at  the  third  in- 
dention, write  the  words  "see  his",  and  on  the  line  below  (using 
regular  title  indention,  i.  e.  beginning  at  the  second  indention  and 
coming  back  to  first  indention  for  subsequent  lines)  give  the  title 
referred  to  followed  at  intervals  of  one  centimeter  by  the  imprint 
date  (or  its  substitute)  and  the  number  of  volumes  if  more  than 
one.  Opposite  the  title  referred  to,  at  the  left  edge  of  the  card,  give 
the  corresponding  call  number,  as  for  the  author  reference. 

If  there  is  a  second  title  to  be  referred  to,  write  the  words  '"or 
his"'  on  the  line  below  the  first  title  (with  its  short  imprint  and  col- 
lation), at  the  third  indention,  and  on  the  following  line  the  second 
title  referred  to,  applying  the  same  rules  as  for  the  first  title  re- 
ferred to,  given  above. 

In  this  treatment  of  references,  the  part  referred  from,  i.  e.  (for  the 
author  reference)  the  author  and  title,  or  (for  the  title  reference)  the  title 
and  author,  takes  exactly  the  same  form  for  the  two  items  included  (i.  e. 
the  author  and  title)  as  on  regular  author  and  title  cards.  Beginning  with 
the  reference  part  of  the  card  (i.  e.  the  words  "see  his")  the  forms  on  the 
author  reference  and  the  title  reference  are  exactly  alike. 

(2)  When  references  are  not  made  for  miss- 
ing titles,  (a)  Title.  Reference  should  regularly  be  made 
from  the  author  with  the  missing  title,  but  reference  should  not  be 
made  primarily  from  the  missing  title  unless  a  title  card  would  be 
made  for  the  book  if  in  the  library. 

(b)  Subject.  If  the  book  cataloged  is  one  which  calls  for  a  sub- 
ject card  this  should  include  the  note  regarding  other  titles  but  no 
extra  subject  card  for  a  title  not  in  the  library  should  be  made. 

(c)  Editor,  translator,  etc.  If  a  card  is  made  for  an  editor  or 
translator  it  should  not  include  the  note,  nor  should  an  extra  card 
for  a  title  not  in  the  library  be  made  under  editor  or  translator 
unless  (applying  to  both  these  points)  the  work  under  the  missing 
title  is  that  of  the  same  editor  or  translator. 

(3)  Notes.  Generally  the  information  regarding  the  different 
titles  is  best  given  in  a  note,  but  if  it  is  given  in  the  title  on  the 
title-page,  it  may  be  retained  there  and  the  note  omitted. 

Notes  should  give  as  exact  information  as  the  cataloger's  knowl- 
edge warrants ;  e.  g.  Published  in  England  under  title : ;  Re- 
written and  published  under  title: ;  etc. 

138 


CHANGED  TITLES 


97b(4)-g8 


(4)  Call  numbers.  When  the  different  titles  are  in  the 
library  the  call  number  for  each  is  given  on  its  own  cards  in  the 
usual  place  and  the  call  numbers  for  the  others  are  included  in  the 
note.  When  not  all  the  titles  are  in  the  library  the  call  number 
for  each  which  is  in  the  library  is  given  on  its  own  cards  in  the 
usual  place  but  on  the  reference  cards  for  the  titles  which  are  not 
in  the  library  is  written  in  the  margin  opposite  the  title  to  which 
it  belongs. 

(5)  Tracing.  When  the  different  titles  are  in  the  library 
each  book  is  cataloged  by  itself  and  the  tracing  follows  the  usual 
rules,  except  for  the  addition  of  the  tracing  of  the  notes,  specified 
above    under    "Sample    of   treatment;  three  titles   in   the  library". 

When  not  all  the  titles  are  in  the  library  the  cards  for  those 
missing    (although  in   form  they   are   reference   cards)    are  prac- 
tically added  entries  for  those  in  the  library,  and  since  they  refer 
to  all  the  forms  of  title  which  are  in  the  library  they  should  be 
traced  on  the  back  of  the  main  card  for  each  such  form;  e.  g. 
Extra  card  for  Hildreth 
"     t 
If  more  than  one  of  the  titles  were  not  in  the  library  the  tracing 
should  read,  e.  g. 

2  extra  cards  for  Hildreth 
2     "     t 

98  Translations  under  different  titles.  These  are  in  general 
treated  like  other  changed  titles  but  when  convenient  the  title  of  the 
original  should  be  included  in  the  note ;  e.  g. 


B\3Sr 


eolu 
titl 
(c 


all 


Salzjac,    Honore  de,  1799-1850. 

#,..(The)   alkahest;   or,    The  house  of 
Claeis;  ctr.  by  Katharine  Presoott  T7ormeleyJ( 
Bostl.    Roberts,    1837. 

307p.    19cm.  (Comedy  of  human   life; 

philosophical   studies) 


Translation  of  La  recherche  de   l'ab- 
,    which   is   al3o   translated  under   the 
es:    Balthazar;    or,    Science  and   love 
no.    B198r2)    and  The   alohemist. 


139 


98 


CATALOGING     RULES 


Brs>8< 


...(The)    alkahest;    or,    The  house  of 
Claes.     0     1887. 
Balzko,    Honore  de. 

Translation  by  K. .P.Wormeley,    of   La 
treoherche  de   1'  absolu,    which  is  also 
translated  under   the   titles:    Balthazar; 
or,    Soienoe   and   love    (call  no.    B198r2) 
and   The  alchemist. 


BlSfcr 


31ae 

30lU 


cWormelsy,    Katharine  Presoott3 
1830-1908,  tr. 

3alz|ac,    Honore  de. 

...(The)  alkah?st;  or,  The  house  of 
s.    1887. 


Translation  of  La  recherche  de  1'  ab- 


B\2>fcrZ 


Balzlac,    Iijpnore3  de,  1799-1850. 

Balthazar;   or,    Science  and  love;   tr. 
by  7,'illiam  Robson.  Lond.    Routledge, 

1859. 

170p.    16cm. 

Translation  of  La  recherche  de  1'  ab- 
solu,  which  is  also  translated  under  the 
titles:  The  alkahest;  or,  The  house  of 
Slaels  (call  no.  B198r)  and  The  alchemist, 


BI^StZ 


Balthazar;   or,    Science  and  love. 
1859. 
LZiac,    H,onorej  de. 

Translation  by  William  Robson,    of  La 
recherche  de  l'absolu,    which  is  also 
translated  under   the  titles:   The  alka- 
he3th   or,   The  house  of  Claes   (call  no. 
319ar)    and  The   alchemist. 


140 


TRANSLATIONS    UNDER    DIFFERENT    TITLES 


y8-g8a 


B\3SrZ 


Bali 

b.859 


Rcbson,    William,  1785-1863, 

o,   Htpnorej  ds. 
althazar;   or,    Science  and  love. 


tr, 


Translation  of  La  recherche  de  l'ab- 


30  lu 


On  the  author  and  title  cards  above,  which  are  concerned  primarily  with 
Balzac's  work,  other  translations  are  mentioned  in  the  note,  but  not  on  the 
translator  cards,  since  these  are  designed  to  give  the  work  of  the  transla- 
tors mentioned  in  the  headings  and  are  not  concerned  with  other  transla- 
tions. 


BV32>r 


Clae' 
1859 


3alz!ac,  Honore  de,    1799-1850. 
(The)  alchemist, 

see  his 
...(The)  alkahest;  or,  The  house  of 
3.     1887; 

or  hi3 
Balthazar;  or,  Science  and  love. 


Translations  of  the  same  work:  La 
rechjerche  de  1'  absolu. 


(The)  alchemist. 
Balzac,  Honore  de, 
see  his 
D\(b,or  .     ...(The)  alkahest;  or,  The  house  of 
Clae s.    1387; 
or  his 
D\^?>rZ     (Balthazar;  or,  Science  and  love. 
1859. 

Translations  of  the  same  work:  La 
recherche  ae  l1.  absolu. 


a  Alternative  method.  A  library  having  many  works  of  an 
author,  with  translations  under  different  titles,  might  often  find  it 
convenient  to  have  the  cards  for  all   forms  of  a  work  in  a  single 


141 


g8a-a(i) 


CATALOGING   RULES 


group.  This  may  be  done  by  adding  in  the  upper  right  corner  of 
the  author  card  (either  in  black  or  red)  the  title  of  the  book  in  the 
original,  and  alphabeting,  under  the  author's  name,  by  the  original 
title.  When  this  is  done,  a  reference  card  should  be  made  under 
the  author's  name,  to  be  alphabeted  by  the  title  of  the  special  trans- 
lation ;  e.  g. 


Main  card 
(To  be  arranged  under  Balzac,  according  to  the  original  French  title) 


(La)  recherche  <4e  1'absolu 

ac,    Honcre  de,  1799-1850. 

...(The)    alkahest;    or,    The  house  of 
Claejs;  rtr.  by   Katharine  Prescott  Wormeleyj. 
Bostf.    Roberts,    1367. 

307p,    19om.  (Comedy  of  human   life; 

philosophical   studies) 


soli; 

ti 

(oal 


tie 


Translation  of  La  recherche  de  1'  ab- 
which  is  also  translated  under*  the 
s:  Balthazar;  or,  Science  and  love 
1  no.  3198r2)  and  The  alchemist. 


Reference  card 

(To  be  arranged  under  Balzac,  according  to  its  own  title) 


Bvss- 


3alzjac,    Honors  de,  1799-1S50. 

...(The)   alkahest;   or,    The  house  of 
;e|3;ctr.by  Katharine  Prescott  Vormeley3 

For   full  entry  for   this  book  see  card 
undejr  Balzac,    arranged  by   the   title   of 
the  original  work:    (La)    recherohe  de   l'ab- 
soli*. 


This  reference  card  bears  the  call  number  and  should  be  traced 
on  the  main  card ;  e.  g.  Extra  card  under  Balzac — The  alkahest. 

(1)  Title  card.  The  title  card  would  take  the  regular 
form  as  shown  in  the  first  method,  given  above,  including  the  note 
regarding  the  title  of  the  original  and  the  titles  of  translations. 


142 


TRANSLATIONS    UNDER    DIFFERENT    TITLES 


98a(2) 


(2)  References  for  titles  not  in  library.  If 
this  second  method  is  followed  the  references  for  forms  of  title  not 
in  the  library  may  be  made  on  the  following  plan : 


Under  author 


Balzac,  Honore  de, 
(The)  alchemist. 


La  r 


in 
zao 

work 


or, 

and 
no. 


1799-1850. 


the 


Title  of  one  of  the  translations  of 

eoherche  de  l'absolu. 

Translations  of  this  work  which  are 

library  are  arranged  under  Bal- 
g  name,    by  the  title  of  the  original 
(La)   recherche  de   l'absolu.      The 
librjary  has  the  following:   The  alkahest; 
The  house  of  Claes   (call  no.    B198r) 
Balthazar;   or,    Science  and  love    (call 
B198r2) 


Under  title 


Bais^jac,    Honore  de, 

.tie  of  one  of  the  translations  of 
La  ilecherche  de   1'  absolu, 

(Translations  of  this  work  which  are 
tie  library  are  arranged  under  Bal- 
zac '.a  name,    by   the  title  of   the  original 
workj:    (La)   recherche  de   l'absolu.      The 
library  has   the   following:    The  alkahest; 
or,    The   hou3©   of   Claes    (call   no.    B198r) 
and  Balthazar;    or,    Science   and  love    (call 
no.    B198r3) 


By  using  a  form  of  note  which  brings  at  the  end  the  titles  of 
translations  in  the  library,  additions  of  this  kind  may  readily  he 
made  if  occasion  arises. 

Since  the  call  numbers  for  the  translations  in  the  library  are 
included  in  the  notes,  the  foregoing  cards  are  in  effect  added  en- 
tries and  should  be  traced  on  the  back  of  each  of  the  main  cards 
for  such  translations ;  e.  g. 

Extra  card  under  Balzac— The  alchemist 
"         t      (The  alchemist) 

143 


99 


CATALOGING  RULES 


ANONYMOUS  CLASSICS  AND  SACRED  BOOKS 

99  General  treatment.  See  also  A.  L.  A.  rules,  119-120,  and 
Cutter,  123-126  and  131-132. 

Under  the  term  "anonymous  classics''  are  included  epics,  na- 
tional folk  tales  and  some  other  works  whose  authors  are  unknown 
and  which  have  appeared  under  various  forms  of  title,  either  in  the 
original  or  by  translation  (e.  g.  The  Arabian  nights'  entertainments, 
Tlic  thousand  and  one  nights,  Stories  from  the  Arabian  nights, 
Book  of  the  thousand  and  one  nights,  Tales  from  the  Arabic,  etc.) 
so  that  entry  under  the  first  word  of  the  title  (as  for  the  ordinary 
anonymous  book)  would  result  in  the  scattering  of  editions.  To 
prevent  this,  the  name  by  which,  in  the  cataloger's  judgment,  the 
book  is  best  known,  is  adopted  as  an  author  heading  and  thus 
treated  on  all  cards.  The  Bible  and  similar  sacred  books  are 
cataloged  on  the  same  principle. 

For  books  belonging  to  these  classes  brackets  are  not  used  in 
the  author  headings,  even  though  the  form  does  not  appear  on  the 
title-page. 

Except  for  the  adoption  of  this  substitute  for  an  author  heading 
the  cataloging  does  not  differ  from  previous  work.  The  title  is 
written  as  on  the  title-page,  even  if  the  first  words  are  the  same 
as  the  heading ;  e.  g. 

Main  card 


S3 1 
M57r> 


lishl 

by 

1904 


Nice lungen lied. 

Nibelungenlied;    tr. Into   rhymed  Eng- 
verse,    In   the  metre  of   the  original, 
Gleorge  Henry  Needier.  N.Y.    Holt, 


349p.    20om. 


Translator  card 

(Space  left   for  dates  of  birth  and  death.     In   libraries  not  using  those 
dates   only   one   centimeter   should  be   left) 


lieh 
1904 


$5\  ^esdler,    George  Henry, 

N57n  tr. 

Nibelungenlied. 

Nibelungenlied;  tr, Into  rhymed  Eng- 
verse,  In  the  metre  of  the  originals 


144 


ANONYMOUS   CLASSICS   AND   SACRED    HOOKS  99"99b 

Main  card 


Mabinogion. 

bonder    stories   from   the  Mabinogion; 
by  Edward  Brooks.  Phil.    Perm,    1908. 

338p.    illus.    6pl.    19^ora. 


Title  card 


MM 


Wonder    stories  from  the  Mabinogion. 
1908. 
Mabinogion. 

Editor  card 


33S.2. 


Brooks,   Edward,  1831-  ed, 

[abinogion. 

Wonder   stories  from  the  Mabinogion. 
1908* 


a  Parts  of  anonymous  classics.  If  a  part  of  an  anonymous  clas- 
sic is  published  separately,  the  title  of  the  part  should  he  treated  as 
a  subhead  of  the  main  title,  and  reference  made  from  the  title  of 
the  part  alone;  e.  g.  Aladdin,  published  separately,  should  be 
cataloged  under  the  heading":  Arabian  nights.  Aladdin,  with  a 
reference  from  Aladdin,  on  the  plan  for  cataloging  of  parts  of 
the  Bible,  treated  below. 

b  Selected  list  of  headings.  The  following  list  of  headings  u  ill 
cover  some  of  the  most  important  of  these  works: 


Anglo-Saxon  chronicle 
Arabian   nights 
Avesta 


Domesday  book 
Droplaugarsona  saga 
Edda  Saemundar 


Beowulf 

Edda  Snorra  Sturlusonar 

Bible 

Egils  saga  Skallagrimssonar 

1  Chanson    de    Roland 

Eyrbyggja  saga 

Cid 

Federalist 

Cuchulain 

Frithiofs  saga  hins   Froekna 

'The  full  French  form  is  here  given,  hut  some  libraries  may  prefer  the 
catch  title,  Roland,  as  being  equally  applicable  to  French  and  English  ver- 
sions. 


145 


gcjb-c 


CATALOGING   RULES 


Gesta  Romanorum 

Giolla  an  fhiugha 

Grettis  saga 

Guclrun 

Gunnlaugs  saga  Ormstungn  ok 

Skald-Hrafns 
Heliand 
Hitopadesa 
Kalevala 
Koran 

Kormaks  saga 
Lancelot 
Laxdaela  saga 
Mabinogion 
Mahabharata 


Merlin 

Le  morte  Arthur 

Mother  Goose 

Nibelungenlied 

Njala 

Oberammergau  passion-play 

Clafs  saga  Helga 

Olafs  saga  Tryggvasonar 

Reynard  the  fox 

Sturlunga  saga 

Talmud 

Thorsteins  saga  Vikingssonar 

Vedas 

Volsunga  saga 


c  Bible.  The  treatment  for  the  Bible  is  the  same  in  principle  as 
for  anonymous  classics,  but  as  libraries  are  likely  to  have  many 
editions  and  many  parts  published  separately,  a  more  detailed  head- 
ing is  generally  desirable;  i.  e. 

The  Bible  or  any  part  of  the  Bible,  including  the  Apocrypha, 
should  be  entered  under  the  word  Bible,  with  such  subdivisions  as 
are  necessary ;  e.  g. 

Bible.     English.     1830. 
English.     1870. 
O.  T.     Pentateuch. 
New  Testament.     English.     1896. 
New  Testament.     English.     1904. 
New  Testament.     German. 
N.  T.     Matthew. 
N.  T.     John.     English. 
N.  T.     John.     French. 


Bible. 
Bible. 
Bible. 
Bible. 
Bible. 
Bible. 
Bible. 
Bible. 


The  subdivisions  should  be  carried  out  to  the  specific  part  of  the 
Bible,  the  language  and  the  imprint  date  being  added  in  the  heading 
when  needed  to  distinguish. 

Some  libraries  use  the  language  designation  in  the  heading,  only  for 
foreign  languages. 

In  the  case  of  individual  Gospels  the  word  Gospels  may  be  inserted  in  the 
heading  before  the  name  of  the  book,  but  this  lengthens  the  heading  with- 
out special  corresponding  advantage. 

146 


BIBLE  99c(i)-(5) 

(1)  Bibles  in  two  languages.  For  Bibles  in  two 
languages  both  languages  are  given  in  the  heading,  the  least 
familiar  being  mentioned  first;  e.  g.  Bible.  French  and  English. 
If  neither  of  the  languages  is  English  an  added  entry  should  be 
made  with  the  languages  reversed ;  e.  g.  the  main  entry  under  Bible. 
Latin  and  Italian,  with  an  added  entry  under  Bible.  Italian  and 
Latin,  in  the  author  position,  followed. on  the  next  line  by  a  short 
title,  the  imprint  date  (or  its  substitute)  and  number  of  volumes  if 
more  than  one  (see  samples  9-10  below). 

(2)  Old  Testament  an.d  New  Testament  in 
heading.  In  the  illustrations  shown  above,  Old  Testament  and 
New  Testament  are  written  out  when  those  parts  of  the  Bible  are 
cataloged  as  a  whole,  but  when  a  smaller  division,  e.  g.  a  single 
book,  is  the  distinctive  item,  and  the  Testament  divisions  serve  chiefly 
as  a  convenience  in  filing  the  cards,  they  are  abbreviated  to  O.  T. 
and  X.  T.  both  for  the  purpose  of  shortening  the  heading  and  to 
make  more  prominent  the  distinctive  part. 

On  the  Library  of  Congress  printed  cards  the  abbreviation  O.  T.  or 
N.  T.  is  regularly  used,  even  for  the  entire  text  of  the  Old  Testament  or 
New   Testament. 

(3)  References.    References  are  made  in  "author  - 
from  titles  of  volumes  (when  the  titles  are  of  a  general  character ) 
and  from  names  of  parts  of  the  Bible  to  the  headings  used;  e.  g. 

Holy  Bible,  see 

Bible 

(Die)   Bibel,  see 

Bible.  German 

Isaiah,  Book  of,  see 

Bible.  O.  T.  Isaiah 

or  the  longer  form  of  reference  may  be  used,  as  shown  in  sample 
cards  3  and  6  below. 

(4)  Form  entries.  A  subject  entry  is  not  made  for  text 
of  the  Bible,  but  when  the  text  is  in  a  very  unusual  language  a  form 
entry  (having  in  all  respects  the  appearance  of  a  subject  entry) 
may  be  made  under  the  name  of  the  language,  as  shown  below  in 
sample  card  7  (Coptic  language — Texts). 

(5)  Editor  and  translator  cards.  On  editor  and 
translator  cards  the  full  author  heading  given  on  the  main  card 
might  be  used,  but  the  value  of  the  detailed  heading  is  in  grouping 
and  distinguishing  works  under  the  general  heading  "Bible"  and  for 
the  few  Bible  headings  likely  to  be  found  under  an  individual  editor 

147 


99c(5)-(8) 


CATALOGING   RULES 


or  translator  no  such  purpose  would  generally  be  served.  Therefore 
on  editor  and  translator  cards  for  Biblical  text,  such  subdivisions 
(i.  e.  language  and  date)  as  are  given  beyond  the  part  of  the  Bible 
treated  may,  in  most  cases,  very  satisfactorily  be  omitted. 

(6)  Title  entries.  Title  entries  should  be  made  only  in 
very  rare  cases,  i.  e.  for  individual  titles  likely  to  be  used  only  for 
certain  editions ;  e.  g.  Bay  Psalm  book. 

(7)  Series  cards.  On  such  series  cards  as  that  for  the 
Modern  reader's  Bible  the  titles  of  the  volumes  may  be  omitted 
when  clearly  indicated  by  the  author  headings.  The  latter  need 
not  be  carried  out  beyond  the  part  of  the  Bible  cataloged,  even  if 
more  details  are  given  in  the  heading  on  the  main  card. 

(8)  Capitalization.  No  positive  ruling  on  this  point 
seems  to  be  available,  but  the  following  suggestions1  are  in  line  with 
the  practice  in  general  on  the  Library  of  Congress  cards. 


Bible,  Biblical,  etc. 
the  Holy   Bible 
in   Bible  words 
of  Biblical  terms 
la   Sainte   Bible 
die   Bibel 
la   Sacra  Eibbia 
Biblia  sacra 

a  Biblia  Sagrada  (Portuguese) 
la  Sagrada  Biblia  (Spanish) 
la  Santa  Biblia 

Scriptures,  etc. 
the   Scriptures 
the  Holy  Scriptures 
the  Sacred  Scriptures 
Holy  Scripture  of  the  Old  and  New 

Testaments 
the   canonical   Scriptures 
inspiration   of   Scripture 
the   Scripture  prophecies 
the   Scriptural    references 

Testament 
the    Testament 
the  Old  Testament 
the  New  Testament 
the  Old  and  New  Testaments 
le  Vieux  et  le  Nouveau  Testament 


das  Alte  und  Neue  Testament 
1'  Antico  e  il  Nuovo  Testamento 
Testamentum  Vetus  et  Novum 
Vetus  et  Novum  Testamentum 
o  Velho  e  o  Novo  Testamento 
el  Antiguo  y  el"  Nuevo  Testamcto 

Other  group  headings 
the  Vulgate 
la   Vulgata  latina 
the  Septuagint 
the  Octateuch 
the    Hexateuch 
the  Pentateuch 
the  Gospels 
the    Apocrypha 
the   apocryphal   books 
the    apocryphal    New    Testament 

Separate  books 
the  book  of  Exodus 
first  book  of  the   Kings 
the  books  of  Chronicles 
the  Psalms 
the  book  of  Psalms 
the   Psalter 
the    Bay   Psalm   book 
the  Song  of  Solomon 
tin'   Song     of  songs 


1  Compiled  mainly  by  Miss  Caroline  Wandell. 

148 


BIBLE  9gc(8)-(io)(a) 

the  book  of  Canticles  Acta  apostolorum 

the  book  of  the  prophet  Isaiah  the   Epistle  to  the   Romans 

the  Gospel  of  St  Mark  the  Apocalypse 

the  Acts  of   the  Apostles  the  Revelation 

(9)     Arrangement.     For    arrangement    of    entries    under 
Bible  see  A.  L.  A.  rules,  up.     A  convenient  method  of  indicating 
the  arrangement  is  a  guide  card  with  some  such  statement  as: 
Bible. 

The  arrangement  of  entries  for  text  of  the  Bible  or  any  of 
its  parts  or  for  works  regarding  the  Bible  or  its  parts  follows 
in    general    the    arrangement    of   the    Bible    itself    as    given 
below.     Headings  under  which  entries  have  been  made  are 
indicated  by  a  *. 
This  statement  should  be  followed  by  a  list,  including  the  head- 
ings  Bible,    Old   Testament,   New    Testament,    the    names   of   the 
separate  books  in  Biblical  order,  and  such  additional  group  terms  as 
are  likely  to  be  used,  e.  g.  under  the  Old  Testament:  Historical 
books,  Octateuch,  Hexateuch,  Pentateuch,  Poetical  books,  Prophets, 
Minor  prophets;  and  under  the  New  Testament:  Gospels,  Epistles. 
By  making  this  list  complete  at  first  and  starring  the  divisions 
when  first  used  a  summary  of  the  arrangement  and  also  of  the  head- 
ings  under  which   the   library   has   entries   may   be   shown   at   any 
time  without  rewriting  the  guide  card. 

The  A.  L.  A.  list  of  subject  headings  gives  all  the  groups  of  a  Testament 
before  any  of  the  separate  books  of  that  Testament. 

( 10)  C  o  m  m  entaries. J  When  the  text  of  a  work  is  given 
with  a  commentary,  the  work  is  to  be  cataloged  under  the  name  of 
the  author  of  the  text  and  a  reference  or  an  added  entry  made  under 
the  name  of  the  author  of  the  commentary. 

It  may  occasionally  be  preferable  to  enter  commentaries  published  with 
the  text  under  the  commentator.  Examples  are:  (i)  when  the  typographical 
disposition  of  the  text  clearly  indicates  its  intended  secondary  position,  e.  g. 
in  small  type  at  the  foot  of  the  page,  in  parenthesis,  etc.,  to  elucidate  the 
commentary;  (2)  when  the  text  is  printed  in  fragmentary  form  or  is  dis- 
tributed through  the  commentary  in  such  a  way  that  it  can  not  be  readily 
distinguished  from  it.  A     T       ,         , 

././.../.  rules,  13. 

(a)   With  text.     For  commentaries  with  text  the  main  card  is 

made  under  either  the  author  of  the  text  or  the  author  of  the  com- 


1  Commentaries  may  deal  with  the  writings  of  any  author  and  the  rule 
as  given  is  general  in  its  application,  but  the  topic  is  here  introduced  in  con- 
nection with  the  treatment  of  the  Bible  because  so  large  a  proportion  of 
the  commentaries  in  the  average  library  deal  with  either  the  Bible  or  some 
of    il^   parts. 

149 


99c(l0)(a)-(ll)  CATALOGING    RULES 

mentary,  according  to  the  relative  importance  o  the  text  and  com- 
mentary, as  indicated  in  the  rule  above.  If  of  equal  importance, 
enter  under  the  author  of  the  text. 

When  regarded  as  text  of  the  Bible  and  cataloged  under  "Bible"  as  the 
author,  the  heading  should  be  given  with  the  same  details  (e.  g.  part  of  the 
Bible,  language,  and  date)  as  specified  under  the  general  rule  for  the  catalog- 
ing of  the  Bible. 

Whether  the  main  entry  is  made  under  the  author  of  the  text 
(i.  e.  "Bible")  or  under  the  commentator,  a  subject  entry  should 
be  made  for  the  Bible  or  the  special  part. 

i  The  part  as  subhead.  When  a  subject  entry  is  made  for  a  special 
part  of  the  Bible,  the  part  is  treated  in  the  heading  as  a  subhead  of  "Bible", 
as  in  the  case  of  author  headings. 

2  Indication  of  subject  relation.  "Subject  style"  in  subject  headings 
may  be  regarded  as  sufficient  indication  of  the  subject  relation,  or  a  final 
subhead  may  be  used,  e.  g.  Commentaries;  or  Criticism,  interpretation 
etc  Generally  speaking,  such  a  subhead  would  be  desirable  under  the  Bible 
considered  as  a  whole,  but  in  most  libraries  it  would  not  be  important  in  the 
treatment  of  an  individual  book. 

3  Other  subdivisions.  In  subject  entries,  subdivisions  for  language 
and  date  should  not  be  given  unless  in  some  very  rare  instance  the  criticism 
should  be  for  a  special  edition  or  for  the  Bible  not  merely  as  the  Bible  but 
distinctly  as  the  Bible  in  that  special  language. 

If  the  main  entry  is  made  under  the  name  of  the  author  of  the 
text,  an  added  entry  should  be  made  under  the  commentator, 
designated  as  editor,  but  if  the  main  entry  is  made  under  the  name 
of  the  commentator,  no  added  entry  is  needed  for  the  text  in  its 
author  relation,  as  that  heading  is  covered  by  the  subject  entry.  If 
the  title  of  the  book  does  not  make  it  clear  that  both  text  and  com- 
mentary  are  included,  a  note  should  be  added  giving  the  extra  in- 
formation ;  i.  e.     With  commentary,  or  With  text. 

(b)  Without  text.  For  commentaries  without  the  text  the 
main  entry  is  made  under  the  name  of  the  author  of  the  commen- 
tary, with  a  subject  entry  under  Bible  or  the  special  part  of  the 
Bible  commented  on,  parts  of  the  Bible  being  treated  as  subheads 
(on  the  plan  of  the  author  headings)  with  reference  (in  "author 
style")   from  the  name  of  the  part. 

For  further  suggestions  for  subject  treatment  see  directions  above,  under 
(a)   With  text. 

(11)  Paraphrases.  Paraphrases  are  treated  like  other 
editions  of  text,  except  that  the  word  "Paraphrases"  is  added  in  the 
author  heading,  as  a  subhead,  following  the  designation  of  the 
language  (sample  card  11  below).  An  added  entry  should  be  made 
for  the  person  responsible  for  the  work  as  paraphrase.    This  entry 

150 


BIBLE 


99C 


is  frequently  in  the  form  of  a  translator  card,  but  occasionally  in 
that  of  a  general  secondary,  as  shown  in  sample  card  12  below. 


Sample  cards 

1-3  General  treatment 

/  Main  entry 


220.52. 

^U5 


Biblje.    English.    1841, 

Holy  Bible. . .tr. out  of  the  original 
tongues  and  with  the  former   translations 

ompared  and  revised. . .  Ox,    Univ. 

presjs,    1841. 

1232p.    26jcm, 


2-3  Reference  cards 
2 


Bible 


Holy  Bible, 


see 


(or)  3 


Holy  Bible. 

To  be  found  in  this  catalog  under  the 
heading :  Bible 


4-6  Treatment  including  form  entry  and  translator  card 

4  Main  entry 


225.  i 
T'2.2 


Bib  31 

Job 
tain. 


e.    O.T.   Job.    Coptic   ■  Lsh. 

Ancient  Coptic  version  of  th3  book  of 
the  Just;   tr..,and  ed.by  Henry  Tat- 

Lond,    St raker,    1343. 
182p.    2l£om. 


151 


ggc 


CATALOGING   RULES 

5-6  Reference  cards 
5 


Job,   Book  of, 
IBlblJe.    O.T.    Job 


863 


(or)  6 


Job,  Book  of. 

To  be  found  in  this  catalog  under  the 

heading:  Bible.  O.T.  Job 


7  Form  entry 


223.  \ 
T2_2 


(B 


Job 
tarn. 


COPTIC   LANGUAGE  —  TEXTS. 
ibOJe.    O.T.   Job.    Coptic   and  English. 

Anoient   Coptio  version  of  the  book  of 
the  Just;    tr...and  ed.by  Henry  Tat- 

Lond.    Straker,    1846. 
182p.    21^cm. 


8  Translator  and  editor  card 


223.1 
TZ2 


Bib: 
[Job 


1739-1868, 


tr. 


Tattara,    Kenry, 

and  ed. 
6.    O.T.    Job. 

Ancient  Coptic  version  of  the  book  of 
the  Just.     1846. 


152 


BIBLE 


99C 


9-10  In  two  foreign  languages 

g  Main  entry 


2.20A7 
„S4 


espanc 
confior 

y 

ie 

sd 


exp 


San 


.ito 


umna 


:v.l- 
[V.5- 


Biblje.    Latin  and  Spanish. 

(La)    Sagrada  Biblia;    traducida  al 
ol  da   la  Vulgata  latina,    y  anotada 

me  al   sentido  de  los   santos  padres 
ositores  catolicos,   por   Felipe   Scio 

Miguel...  Barcelona,    Sociedad 

rial   La  Maravilla,    1863-64. 
6v.    illus.   plates,    maps,   plan,    37cm. 


Latin  and  Spanish  in  parallel  col- 


Contents: 


43  Antiguo  Testamento. 
63  Nuevo    C^Te  stamen  to. 


10  Added  entry,  with  languages  reversed;  short  imprint  and  collation 


Z20A1 


3ible 


9Sp 

son 

y 

He 


ornns 
■v.5" 


a  no 
for 

ex? 
Son 


Spanish  and  Latin. 
(La)    Sagrada  Biblia;   traducida  al 
1  de   la  Vulgata  latina,    y  anotada 
me  al   sentido  de   los   santos  padres 
ositores  catolicos,   por  Felipe  Scio 
Miguel.  1863-64.  6v. 


Latin  and  Spanish  in  parallel  ool- 
Contents: 


43  Antiguo   Testamento. 
63   Nuevo  Testamento. 


153 


ggc 


CATALOGING    RULES 


11-12  Paraphrase 
//  Main  entry 


GST 


BibUJe.    N.T.    Gospels.    English.    Paraphrases, 
(The)   good  news  of  a  spiritual  realm; 

oarejohrased  by  Dwight  Goddard.  N.Y. 

Revejll  cc19163 

391o.    194cm, 


Z7.Q> 
G57 


12  General  secondary 


Goddard,   Dwight,  1861- 

Biblje.    N.T.    Gospels. 

(The)   good  news  of  a  spiritual  realm; 
paraphrased  by  Dwight  Goddard.         cCi3i6a 


154 


VOLUMINOUS    AUTHORS 


VOLUMINOUS  AUTHORS 


100  Definition.  This  term  is  adopted  to  designate  authors 
under  whose  names  many  titles  are  entered,  either  for  different 
works  or  for  different  editions  with  different  titles.  A  similarity  in 
nature  to  the  anonymous  clastic  exists  in  the  variety  in  forms  of 
title  for  the  same  work,  which  would  result  in  the  separation  of 
different  editions  of  the  same  work  if,  under  the  author's  name. 
the  alphabetic  arrangement  by  title  was  strictly  followed. 

101  Author  heading.  For  such  authors  it  may  be  a  con- 
venience in  large  catalogs  to  add  as  a  subhead,  in  the  heading  for 
the  main  entry,  the  catch  title  of  the  book;  e.  g.  for  Shakespeare's 
King  Lear,  which  might  appear  under  its  catch  title  or  under  the 
words  "Play  of"  or  "Tragedy  of"  the  various  editions  could  con- 
veniently be  grouped  under  the  heading,  Shakespeare,  William, 
1564-1616.     King  Lear. 

This  treatment  corresponds  to  that  for  separate  parts  of  the 
Bible,  which  are  entered  as  subheads  under  the  latter  heading  (e.  g. 
Bible.  O.  T.  Psalms)  and  follows  the  practice  of  printed  book 
catalogs  of  large  collections,  but  the  catch  title  may,  if  preferred, 
be  given  in  the  upper  right  corner  of  the  card,  as  suggested  for 
translations,  section  98a.  On  the  other  hand  the  preference  of  the 
library  may  be  (in  general)  to  include  translations  also  under  the 
present  treatment,  reserving  the  method  previously  suggested  for 
use  only  when  it  is  desired  to  add  the  original  title  to  cards  already 
made.  The  treatment  previously  given  for  translations  is.  however, 
recommended  to  be  given  preference  for  those  works. 

Shakespeare  is  used  £or  illustration,  as  being  the  writer  under  whosi 
name  the  average  library  would  have  the  most  entries  for  which  this  method 
was  an  advantage,  but  the  treatment  is  adapted  to  any  author  of  whose 
works  the  library  lias  many  titles  and  is  specially  valuable  Eor  authors  whose 
individual  works  have  been  the  subject  of  criticisms  or  commentaries,  as  it 
facilitates  the  arrangement  of  the  subject  entries  immediately  after  the 
works   criticized. 

a  Spacing  in  headings.  When  the  book  title  is  used  as  a  sub- 
head in  the  author  heading  it  is  better  to  leave  bet  ween  the  author's 
name  and  the  dates  of  his  birth  and  death,  only  one  typewriter  space 
instead  of  the  usual  four  spaces  (one  centimeter),  in  order  to  make 
the  heading,  including  the  subhead,  appear  as  a  continuous  item. 

102  Title  entries.  When  the  catch  titles  of  books  are  in- 
cluded in  the  author  heading,  the  title  entries  may  be  provided  for 
in  three  ways : 

155 


X02a-I04  CATALOGING   RULES 

a  By  a  reference  to  the  author  heading  (as  in  the  case  of  books 
of  the  Bible)  e.  g. 

King  Lear,         see 
Shakespeare,   William,     1564-1616.     King  Lear 

b  By  a  separate  title  card  for  each  edition  in  the  library. 

For  inclusion  of  names  of  editors  and  translators  in  title  see  section  37*/. 

c  By  a  title  card  for  one  edition  (generally  the  first  cataloged, 
though  it  may  sometimes  be  desirable  later  to  substitute  another) 
with  a  note  referring  for  other  editions  (when  there  are  others  in 
the  library)  to  the  author  heading  (see  sample  cards  2-3  below). 

1  Editor's  name  in  title.  With  this  third  treatment  it  is  specially 
desirable  to  include  the  editor's  name  on  the  title  card  in  order  that  the 
reader  who  wishes  a  certain  edition  may  know  at  once  whether  the  one 
at  hand  is  the  one  desired  or  whether  it  is  necessary  for  him  to  follow 
up  the  reference. 

2  Full  and  partial  title  cards.  In  large  libraries,  doing  careful  biblio- 
graphic work,  a  card  for  such  works  as  Shakespeare's  separate  plays 
may  be  made  for  the  catch  title,  and  also  a  first  word  title  entry  under 
each  of  the  other  forms  appearing  on  title-pages  of  editions  in  the  library. 
In  the  small,  popular  library  the  catch  title  entry  would  often  be 
sufficient. 

For  class  work  it  is  recommended  that  the  catch  title  and  first  word 
title  entries,  when  different,  both  be  made,  according  to  samples  2-3 
below,  but  the  note  should  not  be  given  unless  more  than  one  edition 
of  the   same   play  is  cataloged. 

103  Catch  title  in  author  item  on  title  and  editor  cards.  On 
the  title  cards  it  is  almost  useless  repetition  to  give  the  catch  title 
in  the  author  item,  and  with  most  editors  the  same  would  be  true. 
If,  however,  the  library  had  many  works  of  the  same  writer,  entered 
under  a  certain  editor,  it  might  be  a  convenience  to  have  in  the 
author  item  on  the  editor  card,  the  catch  title  as  on  the  author  card 
(see  sample  5,  below)  especially  if,  as  in  this  sample,  in  the  real 
title  the  catch  title  was  considerably  hidden  by  an  introductory 
phrase. 

On  these  editor  cards,  as  regularly  on  editor  cards,  the  dates  of  the 
author's  birth    and   death   are   omitted. 

104  Editor  card  in  series  form.  As  an  alternative  to  the  use 
of  the  catch  title  in  the  author  item  on  editor  cards  it  is  suggested 
and  recommended  that  when  the  same  person  has  edited  many  works 
by  the  same  author  an  editor  card  on  the  plan  of  a  series  card  be 
substituted  for  the  separate  editor  cards  for  the  different  works. 
For   such  a   card   the  catch   title  is   recommended   in    place  of  the 

156 


VOLUMINOUS    AUTHORS 


IOI-104 


full  title,  dots  being  used  to  show  the  omission  of  any  introductory 
phrase.  Also,  brackets  should  be  omitted  from  the  names  of  both 
editor  and  author,  since  no  single  title-page  is  being  represented, 
in  those  items.      (  See  sample  card  6,  below.) 


Sample  cards 
1  Main  card 


522.33 
Xlr 


Shaks 


John 


3iC8 


speare, cWilliara3    1564-1616.    King 
John. 
History  of  the   life   and  death  of  King 
ed. ..by  William  J. Rolfe...  N.Y. 

Harpjer,    1380. 

190p.    illua.    17-jkm.-  (English  clas- 


2  Title   card 


S22.33 
Xlr 


History  of  the   life  and   death  of  King 
John;   ed. ..by  William  J. Rolfe. 
1880. 
Shakespeare,  cwilliamj 

For  other  editions   see  entries  under 
beading:   Shakespeare,   William,    1564-1616. 
King  John 


3  Partial   title   card 


82233 

X\T 


Sha 
John 


King  John. 

eare, cWilliam3 
History  of  the  life   and  death  of  Kin( 
ed.. .by  William  J. Rolfe.  1880. 


For  other   editions   see  entries  under 
heading:   Shakespeare,   William,    1564-1616. 
King  John 


157 


I0I-I04  CATALOGING   RULES 

4  Editor  card  without  catch  title  in  author  item 


822. 33 


Rolfe,    William  J(ame8j  1827-1910, 

ed. 
ahakiespeare,  cWilliam3 

History  of   the   life   arid  death  of   King 
John].  1880. 


(or) 
5  Editor  card  with  catch  title  in  author  item 


322.33 
Xtr 


Rolfe,    William  Jcamesj  1837-1910, 

ed. 

ShaWeapeare,  cWilliam3 .    King  John. 

Ki3tory  of  the  life  and  death  of  King 
John.    1830. 


6  Editor  card  in  series  form 


3h 

S22.33  Xtr 
S22..33  P3 
S22.33  S"T 


Rolfe,    William  James, 
ed. 
akjespeare,   William. 


1837-1910, 


...King  John.  1880. 

...Merchant   of  Venice, 
...Hamlet.  c19033 


,-19031 


The  sample  above  shows  the  method  of  giving  class  and  book  number  on 
the  same  line,  in  a  list  of  short  entries.  If  preferred  the  book  number  may 
lie  written  below  the  class  number  as  usual.  If  this  is  done  three  lines 
should  be  allowed  to  an  entry  on  typewritten  cards  (two  lines  on  manuscript 
cards)  in  order  to  have  the  call  numbers  stand  out  distinctly,  except  that 
when  the  call  number  consists  of  only  the  book  number  (i.  e.  in  fiction) 
two  lines  to  an  entry  are  sufficient  on  typewritten  as  well  as  on  manuscript 
cards. 


158 


COLLECTIONS   UNDER  TITLE  105-107 

COLLECTIONS  UNDER  TITLE 

105  Main  entry.  When  articles  written  separately  by  several 
authors  are  published  together  under  a  collective  title  but  there  is 
no  recognized  editor  or  editing  body  or  compiler,  or  if  the  work 
of  the  editor  or  editing  body  seems  to  be  but  slight  and  the  name 
does  not  appear  prominently  in  the  publication,  or  if  there  are 
frequent  changes  of  editor,  the  main  entry  is  made  under  title. 

For  more  detailed  directions,  with  examples,  see  A.  L.  A.  rules,  126. 

These  books  are  not  to  be  confused  with  cases  of  joint  authorship,  where 
the  work  of  each  individual  is  generally  not  specified  and  the  authors  have 
worked  with  a  view  to  a  combined  result. 

a  Form.  In  the  sample  cards  given  below,  two  methods  of  treat- 
ment are  shown.  The  first  corresponds  to  that  used  on  the  Library 
of  Congress  printed  cards,  where  the  title  is  given  on  the  top  line, 
and  "hanging  indention"  has  been  adopted,  i.e.  the  beginning  of  the 
title  is  drawn  out  to  the  first  indention,  and  all  subsequent  lines  of 
the  entry  are  indented  under  it,  beginning  at  the  second  indention 
(except  in  notes,   which  take  the  usual  paragraph  indention). 

The  second  method  corresponds  to  the  treatment  of  the  ordinary 
anonymous  book,  with  author  unknown,  i.  e.  the  title  begins  on  the 
second  line  and  follows  regular  title  indention,  beginning  at  the 
second  indention  and  coming  back  to  the  first  indention  for  subse- 
quent lines. 

If  it  is  thought  advisable,  this  second  method  may  be  slightly  modified 
by  writing  the  title  on  the  top  line,  while  retaining  the  usual  title  indention. 
By  this  means  the  use  of  the  top  line  is  gained  for  these  books  for  which 
no  author  will  ever  be  filled  in,  but  an  exceptional  treatment  is  introduced, 
the  desirability  of  which  seems  questionable  in  view  of  the  comparatively 
small  number  of  books  involved. 

106  Added  entries.  As  in  previous  work,  the  added  entries 
are  (whichever  form  of  main  entry  is  used)  made  by  supplying  on 
the  top  line  the  heading  for  the  special  entry  (subject,  title,  editor 
or  translator  etc.),  the  rest  of  the  entry  following  the  general  form 
of  the  main  entry  except  for  such  difference  in  length  of  entry  as 
is  called  for  by  the  kind  of  card. 

If  the  main  entry  is  given  as  suggested  in  the  note  under  105a  the 
arrangement  on  added  entry  cards  should  be  made  to  conform  to  that  for 
periodicals   (section   1246(2)   below). 

107  Authors'  names  mentioned.  For  such  collective  works 
the  names  of  the  several  authors  may  be  given  in  the  title,  in  a 
note  or  in  contents,  on  the  main  card  or  subject  card  or  both,  ac- 
cording to  the  judgment  of  the  cataloger.    It  is  not  necessary  to  use 

159 


105-107  CATALOGING    RILES 

the  same  form  on  both  main  and  subject  cards,  e.  g.  the  authors' 
names  might  be  given  in  the  title  or  a  note  on  the  main  card  and  in 
contents  on  the  subject  card,  but  the  main  card  and  generally  the 
subject  card  should  give  either  a  complete  or  a  partial  list  of  the 
authors  unless  these  are  very  numerous.  In  the  case  of  a  partial 
list  the  name  of  the  first  author  should  be  mentioned  and  such  others 
as  seem  specially  important,  the  remaining  authors  being  repre- 
sented by  the  phrase  "and  others."' 

If  the  names  of  the  authors  are  given  on  the  title-page  of  the 
book  and  omitted  either  wholly  or  in  part  from  the  title  on  cards 
the  omissions  ( in  exact  work)  should  be  indicated  by  ...  If  the 
phrase  "and  others"  is  supplied  in  the  title  it  should  be  bracketed. 
If  a  partial  list  of  authors  is  given  in  a  note,  the  .  .  .  need  not 
there  be  used  for  the  omissions,  nor  brackets  placed  around  the 
phrase  "and  others." 


Sample  title-page 

BRITON  AND   BOER 

BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  SOUTH 
AFRICAN  QUESTION 


BY 


RIGHT  HON.  JAMES  BRYCE,   M.P. 

SYDNEY  BROOKS;  A  DIPLOMAT 

DR.  F.  V.  ENGELENBURG;   KARL  BLIND 

ANDREW   CARNEGIE;   FRANCIS 

CHARMES;   DEMETRIUS  C.  BOULGER 

.MAX   NORDAU 


Reprinted   by   permission    from 
The   North    American    Review 


NEW   YORK   AND   LONDON 

HARPER  &  BROTHERS  PUBLISHERS 
1900 

160 


COLLECTIONS  UNDER  TITLE 


105-107 


Sample  cards 
(Showing  different  methods  of  treatment  on  main  and  subject  cards) 

1-2  Hanging  indention 

/  Main  entry 


B>3<o 


iriton  and  Boor:   both  sides  o.f  the  South 
African  question j  by  Jamas  Bryoa, 
Sydney  Brooks,  A  diplomat,    F.V.Enga- 
lenburg,   Earl  Blind,   Andrew  Carnegie, 
Francis  Charmes,   Oemetrius  C.BouIgsr, 
Max  Nordau. . .  N.Y.    Harper,    1900 

cc13993 
250p.   plates,  ports,    map,    19em. 

Reprinted  from  the  Worth  American  re- 
view. • 

For  contents   see  entry  under  subject 
beading:   SOUTH  AFRICAN  WAR, 1399-1903,    or 
SOUTH  AFRICAN      ()  REPUBLIC  -   HISTORY,    or 
AFRICA,    SOUTH  -^-^  POLITICS 


2  Subject  entry 
(Contents  given   in   same  order  as  in   book) 


SOUTH  AFRICAN  WAR,  1899- 1902. 
riton  and  Boer:  both  sides  of  the  South 
African  question...    N.Y.  Harper, 
1900  cc18993 
350p.  plates,  ports,  map,  19om. 


view 


Reprinted  from  the   North  American  re- 
Contents: 


Bryoe,   James.      The  historical  causes 
of  the  present  war   in  South  Africa. 

Brooks,    Sydney.      England  and  the 
Transvaal. 


O 


See  next  card 


161 


105-107 


CATALOGING    RULES 


A  vindication  of  the  Boers:  a  rejoin- 
der to  Mr  Sydney  Brooke;  by  a  dip- 
lomat. 

Engelenburg,  F.V.   A  Transvaal  view 
of  the  South  African  question. 

Blind,  Xarl.   The  Transvaal  war  and 
European  opinion. 

Carnegie,  Andrew.   The  South  African 
question. 

Charmes,  Francis.   Will  the  Powers 
intervene  in  the  war? 

Boulger,  D.C.  A  possible  continental 
allianoe  against  England. 

Nordau, Max. (\  Philosophy  and  morals 
of  war.   v_y 


(or) 

3-4  Paragraph  indention 

i  Main   entry,   beginning  on   second  line  as  for   ordinary  anonymous   book 


Briton  and  Boer:   both  sides  of  the 
Soutlh  African  question;  by  James  Bryce, 
Sydney  Brooks,    A  diplomat,    F.V. Engelen- 
burg,   Karl  Blind,    Andrew  Carnegie,    Fran- 
cis Charmes,    Demetrius   C. Boulger,   Max 
Tordau...  N.Y.    Harper,    1900  CC1S993 

250p.   plats3,  ports,    map,    19cm, 

Reprinted  from  the  North  American  re- 
view. 

For  contents  see  entry  under  subject 
beading:  SOUTH  AERICAN  WAR, 1899-1903,  or 
SOUTH  AFRICAN  ()  REPUBLIC  -  HISTORY,  or 
AFRICA,    SOUTH  -^  POLITICS 


162 


COLLECTIONS  UNDER  TITLE 
4  Subject  entry 


105-107 


SOUTH  AFRICAN  WAR,    1899-1902, 

Briton  and  Boer:   both  sides  of  the 
Soutjh  African   question...  N.Y.    Haroer, 

cc13993 
350p.   plates,   ports,    map,    19om. 

Reprinted  from  the   North  American  re- 

• 

Contents: 

Bryce,   James.      The  historical  causes 

of  the  present  war   in  South  Africa. 
Brooks,    Sydney.      En  gland  and  the 

Transvaal/^ 

v-/        See  next  card 


A  vindication  of  the  Boers:  a  rejoin- 
der to  Mr  Sydney  Brooks;  by  a  dip- 
lomat. 

Engelenburg,  F.V.   A  Transvaal  view 
of  the  South  African  question. 

Blind,  Karl.   The  Transvaal  war  and 
European  opinion. 

Carnegie,  Andrew.  The  South  African 
question. 

Charaes,  Francis.  Will  the  Powers 
intervene  in  the  war? 

Boulger,  D.C.   A  possible  continental 
alliance  against  England. 

Nordau,Max, (\  Philosophy  and  morals 
of  war.  ^J 


The  following  is  another  typical  title  of  a  book  calling  for  the 
same  method  of  treatment:  Selections  from  Tennyson,  Dickens, 
Keats,  Lamb,  Wordsivorth,  Byron,  Goldsmith,  Burns,  Sir  Roger  de 
Coverley  papers,  Milton,  Bacon;  with  portraits  and  biographical 
sketches. 


163 


io8-ioga  cataloging   rules 


ANALYTICS 


108  Definitions.  Analytic:  An  added  entry  for  a  distinct 
part  of  a  work  or  collection,  which  may  he  either  a  part  or  the 
whole  of  a  volume  or  volumes,  with  or  without  a  separate  title- 
page.     Dezvey.  Simplified  Library  School  rules,  p.  6. 

Analytical  entry:  The  entry  of  some  part  of  a  book,  or  of 
some  article  contained  in  a  collection  (volume  of  essays,  serial, 
etc.),  including-  a  reference  to  the  publication  which  contains  the 
article  or  work  entered.  A.  L.  A.  rules,  pref.  p.  13. 

109  Scope.  Analytics  are  most  commonly  made  for  authors, 
subjects  and  titles,  but  more  rarely  are  needed  also  for  editors, 
translators,  illustrators,  etc.  Briefly  stated,  analytics  of  any  of  these 
kinds  should  be  made  for  either  entire  volumes  or  parts  of  volumes, 
just  so  far  as  they  are  likely  to  be  called  for  by  users  of  the  library. 
This  is  most  likely  to  be  the  case  when  the  matter  has  at  some 
time-  been  published  separately  or,  for  subject  analytics,  when  the 
subject  matter  is  not  otherwise  covered  in  the  library. 

Cutter,  193-194,  mentions  (among  other  designations  for  analytic  treat- 
ment) ever}'  work  forming  part  of  a  set  (except  sets  of  the  works  of  a 
le  author)  which  fills  a  whole  volume  or  several  volumes,  or  which 
has  a  separate  title-page  and  paging  hut  forms  only  part  of  a  volume,  or 
which,  though  not  separately  paged  or  not  having  a  title-page,  has  heen 
published  separately.  Other  specifications  are  given  below,  under  the  special 
of  analytics. 

A   discussion   of  the  importance  of  analytics,   as  a   means   of   utilizing  to 

the  utmost  the  resources  of  the  library  (specially  the  more  limited  resources 

of  the  small  library),  may  be  found  in  Miss  Hitchler's  Cataloging  for  small 

libraries,  1909,  p.  4,   19-20,  25-27,  or  in  the  revised  edition  of  the  same  book, 

7-2,9,  I52-I53- 

a  Author  analytics.  As  specified  in  Cutter,  igjb-c,  author  analyt- 
ics should  be  made  for  parts  of  works  if  the  parts  have  at  any 
time  been  published  separately  or  if  they  are  treatises  by  noted 
authors  or  noted  treatises  by  authors  otherwise  obscure  or  treatises 
of  more  than  a  certain  number  of  pages,  the  limit  being  fixed  by 
the  individual  library. 

1  "Noted  authors."  The  phrase  "noted  authors"  should  be  inter- 
preted as  including  not  only  authors  who  are  noted  throughout  the 
world  at  large  but  also  those  who  have  a  special  local  interest  to  the 
individual  community. 

2  Number  of  pages.  In  the  question  of  th  limit,  the  larger 
library,  which  has  a  correspondingly  larger  clientele  and  where  a  much 
fuller  representation  of  authors  and  their  works  might  reasonably  be 
looked  for,  would,  generally  speaking,  go  into  the  matter  of  author 
analytics    more    minutely     (i.    e.    would    carry    the    analysis    down    to    a 

164 


analytics  ioga-a(2)(a) 

smaller  number  of  pages)  than  the  small  library,  where  the  same  demand 
for   an    author's    works   would   not   have   the    same    degree   of   justification. 

The  author  for  whom  the  analytic  is  made  may  be  the  same  as 
or  different  from  the  author  of  the  work  as  a  whole. 

(1)  Author  of  the  part  same  as  author  oft  he 
work  as  a  whole.  When  the  author  of  the  distinct  part  is 
the  same  as  the  author  of  the  work  as  a  whole  the  need  for  author 
analytics  is  generally  (perhaps  always)  covered  by  the  phrase  "parts 
at  any  time  published  separately",  but  even  for  these  the  follow- 
ing exceptions  may  be  made.  When  the  author  of  the  part  is  the 
same  as  the  author  of  the  work  as  a  whole  the  author  analytics  need 
not  ordinarily  be  made  (a)  for  the  author's  collected  works  with 
a  general  title,  as  Works  or  Plays,  (b)  for  collections  of  magazine 
stories  etc.  when  republished  in  book  form  under  a  special  title,  (c) 
for  an  author  under  whose  name  the  library  is  likely  to  have  so 
few  entries  that  the  reader  would  probably  look  them  through, 
when  the  title  of  the  part  is  such  as  to  alphabet  in  practically  the 
same  place  as  the  title  of  the  book  as  a  whole. 

Contents.  Whether  author  analytics  are  made  for  such  books  or 
not,  contents  should,  so  far  as  practicable,  be  indicated  in  the  title  or  as 
contents  or  in  a  note,  on  the  main  card. 

(2)  Author  of  the  part  different  from  author 
of  the  work  as  a  whole.  When  the  author  of  the  distinct 
part  is  different  from  the  author  of  the  work  as  a  whole  the  author 
analytic  should  be  made  as  called  for  under  any  of  the  specifica- 
tions given  in  the  general  statement  above  (section  109a),  or, 
briefly  summarized,  an  author  analytic  should  be  made  when  a 
part  of  the  work  is  written  by  a  different  author  from  the  author 
of  the  work  as  a  whole  and  is  likely  to  be  looked  for  under  the 
name  of  its  own  author. 

(a)  Analytics  vs  joint  authors.  Books  calling  for  author  analyt- 
ics are  to  be  distinguished  from  cases  of  joint  authorship;  e.  g. 
analytic  treatment  should  be  used  for  a  publication  having  a  com- 
mon title  for  the  independent  work  of  different  authors  (see  sample 
card  1  below  for  Armstrong)  or  for  a  publication  having,  instead 
of  a  common  title,  the  separate  titles  of  the  distinct  works,  each 
with  it-,  own  author  (sample  3  for  Coleridge)  or  for  a  work  in 
which  is  inserted  a  section  by  another  author  than  the  author  of  the 
work  as  a  whole  (sample  7  for  Keary),  the  distinction  between 
joint  authors  and  analytics  being  as  to  whether  the  authors  worked 
with  a  view  to  producing  the  combined  result  ( i.  e.  joint  authorship  i 
or  whether  works  written  independently  have  been  combined  In  an 

165 


ioga(2)(a)-(4)(a)  CATALOGING  RULES 

editor  or  publisher  or  by  the  author  of  the  inclusive  work    (i.  e. 
analytics). 

(3)  Heading  for  main  entry  when  the  workis 
one  calling  for  analytic  treatment,  (a)  When  the 
work  consists  of  the  independent  writings  of  two  or  three  authors 
and  has  a  collective  title  of  a  general  nature,  c.  g.  Poems  or  Selec- 
tions, the  main  entry  should  be  made  under  the  name  of  the  author 
mentioned  first  on  the  title-page,  with  author  analytics  for  the 
others   (see  sample  cards  1-2  below). 

(b)  When  the  work  consists  of  the  independent  writings  of 
more  than  one  author,  but  instead  of  having  a  collective  title  of 
a  general  nature  has  a  title  consisting  of  the  separate  titles  of  the 
distinct  works  (see  sample  3  below)  the  main  entry  should  be  made 
under  the  name  of  the  first  author,  with  author  analytics  for  the 
others. 

(c)  When  the  work  consists  of  the  independent  writings  of 
two  or  three  authors  but,  instead  of  having,  as  in  (a),  a  collective 
title  of  a  general  nature,  or,  as  in  (&),  a  title  consisting  primarily 
of  the  separate  titles  of  the  distinct  works,  it  has  a  distinctive  title 
for  the  special  book,  adopted  to  cover  its  contents,  as,  Home  build- 
ing and  furnishing;  being  a  combined  new  edition  of  "Model  houses 
for  little  money,"  by  William  L.  Price,  and  "Inside  of  ioo  homes," 
by  W.  M.  Johnson,  the  main  entry  should  be  made  either  under  the 
name  of  the  editor  or  compiler  as  author,  if  there  is  such  editor  or 
compiler  (see  section  60  above),  or  (see  section  105)  under  the 
title,  with  (in  either  case)  author  analytics  as  called  for  by  the 
specifications  in  the  general  statement  (section  109n)  ;  the  main 
entry  for  the  book  cited  above  being  under  the  title  Home  building 
and  furnishing,  with  author  analytics  for  Price  and  Johnson,  also 
one  for  Frank  S.  Guild,  whose  work,  not  appearing  in  the  title, 
should  be  mentioned  on  the  main  card,  in  a  note. 

(d)  When  the  work  consists  of  the  independent  writings  of 
more  than  three  authors  (except  as  provided  for  in  (b)  ),  whether 
it  has  a  collective  title  of  a  general  nature  as  in  (a),  or  a  distinctive 
title  for  the  special  book  as  in  (c),  the  main  entry  should,  as  in  (c), 
be  made  either  under  the  name  of  the  editor  or  compiler  as  author, 
if  there  is  such  editor  or  compiler  (section  60)  or  under  the  title 
(section  105)  with  (in  either  case)  author  analytics  as  called  for 
by  the  specifications  in  the  general  statement   (section   109a). 

(4)  Names  of  authors  in  title,  contents  or 
note,     (a)  In  cases  where  the  main  entry  is  made  under  the  name 

166 


ANALYTICS 

of  the  first  author  the  names  of  all  the  authors  {including  the  first) 
should,  if  given  in  the  title  on  the  title-page,  generally  on  the  cards 
be  retained  in  the  title,  not  inverted,  in  title-page  fulness,  together 
with  the  mention  of  their  works,  in  the  phraseology  of  the  title- 
page.  When  the  names  of  the  authors  do  not  appear  in  the  title 
on  the  cards  those  under  which  analytics  are  to  be  made  should  be 
given  in  contents  or  in  a  note. 

(b)  When  the  main  card  is  made  under  the  name  of  an  editor 
or  compiler  or  under  the  title,  the  names  of  the  individual  authors 
for  whom  analytics  are  to  be  made  should  be  given  in  the  title, 
in  contents  or  in  a  note. 

(5)  Author  of  analytic  same  as  editor  of  the 
book.  When  the  editor  of  a  book  is  also  author  of  a  part  of  the 
book,  his  editor  card  is  generally  regarded  as  covering  the  ground 
sufficiently  to  allow  the  omission  of  the  author  analytic  for  his 
special  part,  but  if  the  part  of  which  he  is  author  has  been  pub- 
lished separately  it  is  sometimes  desirable  to  bring  it  out  as  an 
author  analytic. 

b  Subject  analytics.  Subject  analytics  should  be  made  for  parts 
of  publications  if  the  material  is  of  importance  to  the  library  for 
any  reason.  They  are  much  more  likely  to  be  needed  in  the  small 
library,  where  the  more  limited  resources  make  it  important  to 
utilize  to  the  utmost  such  material  as  is  available,  than  they  are 
in  the  large  library,  which,  with  its  greater  resources,  is  more 
likely  to  be  supplied  with  separate  books  on  the  subject.  (This  is 
the  reverse  of  the  situation  regarding  author  analytics.)  The 
character  of  the  library  and  its  users  also  determines  in  a  measure 
the  character  of  the  subject  analytics  needed;  e.g.  the  special  in- 
terests of  the  locality  and  constituency,  whether  commercial, 
technical,  scientific,  cultural,  etc.  and  whether  the  question  of  the 
historical  side  of  the  subject  will  be  of  interest,  as  shown  by  the 
earlier  literature,  or  merely  the  practical,  up-to-date  side. 

The  policy  to  be  adopted  is  a  question  for  the  individual  library, 
and  the  only  general  principle  which  can  be  laid  down  is  that 
of  putting  to  the  best  and  greatest  service,  with  a  balanced  view 
of  the  needs  and  of  the  time  available,  such  material  as  is  at  hand. 
In  determining  the  library's  policy  the  specifications  mentioned  in 
connection  with  author  analytics  (section  109a)  should  also  be 
taken  into  consideration. 

Subject  to  the  policy  determined  upon  for  the  individual  library, 
subject  analytics  should  be  made  for  parts  of  books  when  the  sub- 
jects of  the  parts  are  different  from  the  subject  of  the  book  as 

167 


iogb-iioa  CATALOGING    RULES 

a  whole,  but  not,  except  in  very  unusual  cases,  when  the  subject 
of  the  part  is  naturally  included  in  the  subject  of  the  whole. 

Subject  treatment  may  occasionally  consist  entirely  of  analytics,  no  general 
subject  card  being  made. 

A  subject  analytic  may  be  by  tbe  author  of  the  book  as  a  whole  or  by  a 
different  author. 

The  subject  heading  (which  docs  not  differ  from  the  ordinary  heading 
on  a  subject  card)  should  be  justified  on  the  analytic  card,  cither  by  the 
title   of  the  analytic  or  by  a  note. 

c  Title  analytics.  These  should,  as  far  as  practicable  (and  sub- 
ject to  the  same  rules  as  title  cards  for  separate  works,  i.e.  when 
the  title  is  not  sufficiently  covered  by  a  subject  or  other  entry) 
be  made  for  all  works  forming  part  of  a  larger  work,  when  likely 
to  be  looked  for  under  their  individual  titles,  whether  they  are 
found  in  a  complete  or  in  a  partial  collection  and  whether  by  the 
author  of  the  main  work  or  by  a  different  author,  except  that 
when  the  title  of  one  of  the  included  works  (generally  the  first) 
furnishes  the  entry  words  for  the  title  of  the  combined  work,  a  title 
card  in  the  ordinary  form  is  made  without  mention  of  the  other 
titles  in  the  book   (see  sample  card  4). 

Title  analytics  occur  most  frequently,  though  not  exclusively,  in  fiction 
and  drama.  They  are  most  often  needed  for  works  which  have  been 
published  cither  entirely  separately  or  in  a  periodical. 

d  Editor  analytics,  etc.  Analytics  for  editors,  translators,  illus- 
trators etc.  are  rarely  needed  but  may  sometimes  be  called  for, 
specially  in  the  case  of  works  which  have  been  published  separately. 
e  Combinations.  Any  or  all  of  these  kinds  of  analytics  (i.  e. 
author,  subject,  title,  editor  etc.)  may  be  made  for  the  same  part 
of  a  book,  but  the  making  of  one  of.  them  does  not  necessarily 
imply  making  the  others,  e.  g.  an  author  analytic  may  be  made 
without  a  corresponding  subject  or  title  analytic,  or  a  subject  or 
title  analytic  may  be  made  without  a  corresponding  author  analytic, 
but  generally  a  title  analytic  would  have  a  corresponding  author 
analytic  if  the  author  was  different  from  that  of  the  main  work. 

110  Method  of  treatment,  a  Division  by  plan  of  paging.  The 
most  convenient  division  for  treatment  is  on  the  line  of  paging. 
The  analytic  part  is  generally  paged  continuously  with  the  rest 
of  the  book  but  occasionally  consists  of  a  separate  group  of  pa 

In  some  libraries,  analytics  for  continuously  paged  parts  intro- 
duce the  reference  to  the  main  work  by  the  word  "See",  as  "See 
his  Parish  problems",  and  hence  are  called  "see  analytics"  ;  while 
analytics  for  separately  paged  parts  introduce  the  reference  by 
the   word   "In",   as   "Tn   his   Auld   king   syne",   and   are   called   "in 

168 


ANALYTICS  lioa-c(2) 

analytics."  The  distinction  is  a  convenient  one  tor  the  catalog- 
ers  in  speaking  of  the  analytics,  but  is  not  evident  to  the  readers 
and  in  the  following  samples  the  word  "In"  has  been  used  for 
both  forms,  as  is  the  practice  of  some  catalogers,  while  others 
may  regularly  use  the  "See."  Anyone  preferring  to  make  the  dis- 
tinction can  easily  adapt  the  sample  cards  by  changing  the  word 
"In"  to  the  word  "See",  on  those  cards  which  represent  continuous 
paging. 

Preface,  introduction  and  appendix  pagings  are  not  generally  regarded 
as  independent  groups.  Analytics  contained  in  these  should  regularly  be 
treated  according  to  the  rules  for  continuous  paging,  even  though  the 
analytic  covers  the  entire  group;  i.  e.  the  pagination  should  he  given  in 
inclusive  form  inside  the  curves  (arabic  numerals  being  used  even  if  roman 
are  used  in  the  book)  and  preface,  introduction  or  appendix  specified;  e.  g. 
pref.  p.1-51,  introd.  p.34-54,   or  app.  p.    [i]-20. 

b  Author's  name.  The  author's  name  takes  the  same  treatment 
for  analytics  as  for  whole  works :  i.  e.  in  author  analytics  the  name 
of  the  author  for  whom  the  analytic  entry  is  made  is  written  on 
the  top  line,  with  regular  author  indention,  in  author  fulness ;  in 
other  analytics  (subject,  title,  editor  etc.)  it  is  written  on  the  line 
below  the  heading,  with  author  indention,  in  secondary  fulness ; 
personal  titles  and  dates  of  birth  and  death  are  used  just  so  far  as 
they  would  be  used  for  whole  books. 

If  the  analytic  has  a  separate  title-page  the  regular  rules  for 
bracketing  the  author's  name  will  hold,  such  parts  being  bracketed, 
in  exact  work,  as  are  not  given  on  the  separate  title-page;  but  if 
the  analytic  has  no  separate  title-page  and  the  author's  name  is 
found  anywhere  in  the  book  (e.  g.  under  the  chapter  heading,  signed 
to  the  chapter,  or  in  the  table  of  contents)  only  such  parts  need 
be  bracketed  as  are  supplied  from  some  other  source  than  the  book 
in  hand. 

c  Title.  (1)  Position.  The  title  of  the  analytic  has  the 
ordinary  title  position. 

(2)  For  m.  When  the  part  of  the  book  for  which  the  analytic 
is  made  has  a  separate  title-page  or  half-title,  the  cataloging  should 
be  done  from  this;  in  other  cases  the  chapter  heading  may  be  used 
or  a  title  may  be  taken  from  the  table  of  contents.  When  it  is 
desirable  to  make  an  analytic  for  several  consecutive  chapters,  it  is 
generally  best  to  give  their  titles,  one  after  another,  separated  by 
semicolons.  When  it  is  desirable  to  make  an  analytic  for  several 
chapters  not  consecutive,  the  titles  may  be  written  in  the  same  way 
as  for  consecutive  chapters  or,  if  preferred,  a  more  specific  treat- 
ment may  be  followed,  and  the  inclusive  paging  covered  by  each 

169 


llOC<2)-h  CATALOGING    RULES 

title  may  be  given  immediately  after  the  title,  separated  from  it  by 
a  comma  and  from  the  following  title  by  a  semicolon. 

(3)  Marks  of  omission.  Omissions  should,  in  exact 
work,  be  indicated  by  .    .    .  as  for  whole  books. 

(4)  Supplied  titles.  Occasionally  it  is  necessary  to 
supply  a  title;  when  this  is  done  the  title  should  be  bracketed. 
Brackets  should  also  be  used  for  supplied  parts  of  titles ;  e.  g. 
Bibliography  tof  manual  training].  (See  also  section  o  below, 
"Short  form  analytics.") 

d  Imprint.  If  the  analytic  part  has  a  separate  title-page  the 
imprint  should  be  given  according  to  the  regular  rules,  so  far  as  the 
information  is  furnished  on  this  title-page,  but  if  this  is  incomplete 
or  if  the  entry  is  made  from  a  half-title  or  one  of  the  other  sources 
mentioned  above  under  c{2)  the  lacking  imprint  information  should 
not  be  supplied. 

e  Collation.  If  the  part  analyzed  is  continuously  paged  with 
the  rest  of  the  book  no  collation  is  given,  but  if  separately  paged,  it 
is  best  to  give  the  full  collation  for  the  part  analyzed,  according 
to  the  regular  rules. 

/  Reference  to  main  work.  One  centimeter  after  the  last  item 
given,  of  those  mentioned  above,  whether  title,  imprint  or  colla- 
tion, add  in  (  )  a  reference  to  the  main  work,  choosing,  accord- 
ing to  whether  the  article  is  continuously  or  independently  paged, 
one  of  the  two  methods  given  below  under  k  "Continuous  paging" 
and  /  "Separate  paging."  (This  rule  applies  to  all  except  title 
analytics.) 

In  title  analytics  use  in  (  )  the  same  form  of  reference  but 
(for  the  sake  of  giving  a  better  appearance  to  the  cards)  begin  it 
on  the  line  below  the  author's  name,  at  the  second  indention,  com- 
ing back  to  the  outer  indention  for  subsequent  lines. 

g  Form  of  analytic  entries.  For  all  information  given  before 
the  curves,  the  analytics,  whether  author,  subject,  title,  or  editor  etc. 
are  the  same  in  form  as  the  entries  for  whole  books,  but  it  must 
be  remembered  that  information  regarding  imprint  and  collation 
is  often  lacking  either  wholly  or  in  part. 

/;  Punctuation  and  spacing.  Items  preceding  the  curves  are 
punctuated  and  spaced  according  to  the  rules  for  cataloging  whole 
books.  Inside  the  curves  the  same  rules  for  punctuation  apply  (ex- 
cept as  indicated  in  section  Gj,  last  statement)  but  for  spacing  one- 
half  a  centimeter  is  substituted  for  the  whole  centimeter  of  the 
general  rules. 

170 


ANALYTICS  Iioi-k(l) 

i  Call  numbers.  Call  numbers  are  written  in  their  usual  place 
but  when  analytic  entries  apply  to  only  part  of  the  volumes  of  a 
set  the  volume  numbers  of  the  volumes  concerned  should  be  added 
below  the  book  number,  as  shown  below  on  sample  card  10. 

Brackets  are  not  to  be  used  for  volume  numbers  in  call  numbers,  even 
when  they  are  used  in  the  collation  (i.  e.  when  they  are  not  furnished  by  the 
volumes  to  which  they  apply). 

;'  Tracing-  ( 1 )  Author  analytics.  Author  analytics  are 
traced  on  the  back  of  the  main  card. 

(2)  Subject,  title  or  editor  analytics.  Analytics 
for  subjects,  titles,  editors  etc.,  which  have  corresponding  author 
analytics,  are  traced  on  the  back  of  these ;  those  which  have  not 
corresponding  author  analytics  are  traced  on  the  back  of  the  main 
card. 

(3)  Form.  When  the  tracing  on  the  back  of  the  main  card 
includes  analytics  it  is  best  to  indicate  these  as  such,  by  writing  in 
curves  the  appropriate  abbreviation,  e.  g.  (auth  an)  or  (subj  an) 
after  the  word  or  words  used  for  the  tracing.  On  the  back  of 
author  analytics  it  is  not  necessary  thus  to  designate  the  tracing, 
as  the  very  fact  that  these  entries  are  traced  on  the  back  of  an 
analytic  implies  that  they  are  in  themselves  analytics. 

Title  analytics.  In  the  case  of  title  analytics  traced  on  the  back 
of  the  main  card  it  is  often  unnecessary  to  specify  the  exact  word  or 
words  under  which  the  entry  is  to  be  made,  such  designations  as  "t  an" 
or  "3  t  an"  being  sufficient  if  it  is  clear  from  the  face  of  the  card  just 
what  the  analytics  would  be.  As,  however,  it  is  not  always  clear,  the 
cataloger  should  decide  each  case  on  its  individual   merits. 

(4)  Separate  record.  In  the  case  of  long  sets  etc.  where 
the  analytics  are  too  numerous  to  be  traced  on  the  back  of  the 
catalog  card  the  work  may  be  there  indicated  by  the  word 
"Analyzed."  The  specific  entries  may  then  be  traced  by  checks  in 
the  volumes  themselves,  but  since  if  the  books  were  lost  the  trac- 
ing also  would  be  lost  a  better  method  is  the  keeping  of  an  official 
list  of  tracings  of  such  analytics. 

k  Continuous  paging.  If  the  article  is  continuously  paged  with 
the  rest  of  the  book  give  in  the  (  )  "In"  (or  "See",  if  the  library 
wishes  to  distinguish  between  "see"  and  "in"  analytics)  followed 
by: 

(1)  Name  of  the  author  of  the  main  work,  inverted,  using 
secondary  fulness  witli  personal  titles  (but  not  dates  of  birth  and 
death)  ;  but  if  the  author  or  authors  of  the  analytic  are  the  same 
as  the  author  or  authors  named  in  the  heading  for  the  main  work 

171 


H0k(l)-(4)  CATALOGING    RULES 

the  possessive  pronoun  his,  her,  its  or  their,  may  be  used  inside 
the  curves  in  the  place  of  the  author's  name  except  when  some 
previous  mention  in  the  entry,  of  another  name,  would  make  the  use 
of  the  possessive  pronoun  ambiguous. 

In  a  case  of  editor  or  compiler  as  author  of  the  main  work  the  abbrevia- 
tion  ed.   or  comp.   should   be   retained   after  the  name  inside   the  curves. 

(2)  On  the  same  line  with  the  author's  name,  at  a  distance  of 
one-half  centimeter  (two  typewriter  .spaces),  a  brief  title  for  the 
book,  such  as  would  in  general  be  given  on  an  editor  card,  using 
(in  exact  cataloging)  .  .  .  for  omissions  at  the  beginning  or  in 
the  midst  of  a  title  but  not  at  the  end. 

(3)  Imprint  date  (or  its  substitute)  for  the  main  work,  written 
one-half  centimeter  after  the  title. 

(4)  Inclusive  paging  for  the  analytic,  written  one-half  centi- 
meter after  the  imprint  date  and  beginning  with  the  number  which 
belongs  to  the  first  page  of  the  analytic,  including  a  separate  title- 
page  or  half-title,  even  if  no  number  is  printed  on  this  page. 
Sometimes  such  a  page  is  inserted  with  no  allowance  made  for 
it  in  the  continuous  paging.  In  these  cases  disregard  this  page 
and  give  the  first  number  of  the  continuous  paging  which  properly 
belongs  with  the  analytic.  If  a  page  number  is  given  on  the  cards 
which  is  not  printed  on  the  page  in  the  book,  it  should,  in  exact 
work,  be  inclosed  in  brackets.  If  an  analytic  applies  to  only  one  of 
the  volumes  of  a  set  include  with  the  statement  of  pagination  a 
statement  of  the  volume,  as  v.2,  p. 41 1-465.  When  an  analytic  is 
in  more  than  one  volume  give,- e.  g.  as  follows: 

v.l,  p. 63-180;  v.2  (Meaning  part  of  v.l  and  the  whole  of  v.2) 
v.l  ;  v.2.  p. 5-70  (Meaning  the  whole  of  v.l  and  part  of  v.2) 
v.l,  p.197-276;  v.2.  p. 3-44  (.Meaning  part  each  of  v.l  and  v.2) 
v.1-2;  v.3,  p.rl]-94  (Meaning  the  whole  of  v. 1-2  and  part  of  v.3) 
v.l,  p. 85-115;  v.2:  v.3,  p. 7-52   (Meaning  part  of  v.l.  the  whole 

of  v.2  and  part  of  v.3  ) 
v.l,    p.71-v.2,    p. 220    (For   part   of   v.l    and   the   whole   or   part 

of  v.2  when  the  volumes  are  paged  continuously) 

i  Library  of  Congress  form  for  paging.     On  the  Library  of  Congress 
cards    the    hill    pagination    is    given    for    both    parts    of    inclusive    paj 
e.  g.  p.41 1-465,  but  in  many  libraries  only  the  last  two  figures  are  used, 
except  when  the  hundreds  change,  e.  g.  p.41 1-65,  but  p.348-416. 

2  Chapters  not  consecutive:  paging.  When  an  analytic  consists  of 
chapters  not  consecutive,  the  different  groups  of  paging  may  (separated 
by  a   comma,  e.   g.  p.46-67,    120  [53,   177-206)    be   given   inside  the  curves,   or 

172 


ANALYTICS 


nok 


as  suggested  above  under  c(2),  each  group  of  paging  may  be  given  after 
its  own  title,  in  which  case  the  paging  inside  the  curves  should  be  omitted. 
(See  sample  cards  12-13.) 

Sample  cards 

(For  libraries  wishing  to  distinguish  between  "see"'  and  "in" 
analytics,  the  word  "See"  should,  on  cards  1-15,  be  substituted  for 
"In,"  at  the  beginning  of  the  reference  inside  the  curves.) 

1-15  Continuous  paging 

1-2  Author  analytic  when  author  of  analytic  is  different  from  author 
given  as  heading  on  main  card,  and  book  has  a  general,  inclusive  title 

I  Main  card 


B2\ 
AT3G 


Armstrong, cJohn3  1709-1779, 

Poetical  works  of  Armstrong,   Dyer  and 
with  memoirs  and  critical  disser- 


en 


Gre 

tations  by  George  Gilfillan. 

Nichol,  1858. 

281p.  2licm. 


Edin. 


2  Author  analytic 

(In  the  heading  on  this  card  the  "John"  is  not  bracketed  because,  while 
not  given  on  the  main  title-page,  it  appears  on  the  half-title-page  from 
which  the  analytic  cataloging  is  done.) 


52.1 
A73<b 


Dyer,   John,  17007-1758. 

Poetical  works.  (In  Armstrong, 

■Johrij.      Poetical  works  of  Armstrong,   Dyer 
and  Green.      1858.      p. 99-230) 


(Similar  analytic  entry  should  be  made  for  Green.) 


173 


nok 


CATALOGING    RULES 


3-6  Author  and  title  analytics  when  author  of  analytic  is  different  from 
author  given  as  heading  on  main  card,  and  titles  are  distinct 

3  Main  card 


B2\ 
CfcS3r 


Coleridge,    Samuel  Taylor,  1772-1834-. 

...Rime  of  the  anoient  mariner,    by 
Samuel  Taylor  Coleridge;  and  Viaion  of 
Sir  Launfal,   by  James  Ruasell  Lowell. 
U.Y.    Harris,    1901  cc18953 

58p.    3  port.    19om. 


4  Title  card 


B2t 


...Rime  of  the  anoient  mariner. 
1901. 
3olejridge,   S:T. 


5  Author  analytic 


82.\ 


Lowell,  James  Russell,    1819-1891. 

Vision  of  Sir  Launfal.    (In  Cole- 
idge,  S:T.   ...Rime  of  the  ancient  mari- 
ner.! 1901.   p.r333-58) 


6  Title  analytic 


&2.\ 


Vision  of  Sir  Launfal. 
Lowell,   J.R. 

(In  Coleridge,   S:T.      ...Rime  of  the 
icilent  mariner.      1901.      p.c333-58) 


174 


ANALYTICS 


nok 


7-9  Author  and  subject  analytics  when  author  of  analytic  is  different 
from  author  of  main  work 

7  Main  card 


545.1 
K24 


dall 


Kearjy,   C^arlesj  Fcranois3         1849-1917. 
Norway  and  the  Norwegians.  N.Y. 

ri]bner,    1893. 

40? p.  maps,  17 ^cra. 


"Wild  flowers  of  Norway",  by  Eva  Tin- 
,  p. 374-394. 


8  Author  analytic  (dates  of  birth  and  death  unknown) 


34$. I 
K24 


C:F. 
p. 3 


Tindall,   Eva.  rm 

ffild  flowers  of  Norway.  (In  Keary, 

Norway  and  the  Norwegians.      1893. 
714-394) 


I 


9  Corresponding  subject  analytic 


S48.1 
K24 


C:F. 
IP 


374 


BOTANY  -   NORWAY. 
Tindall,   Eva. 

Wild  flowers  of  Norway.  (In  Keary, 

Norway  and  the  Norwegians.      1892. 
-394) 


io  Subject  analytic  by  author  of  main  work;  work  in  more  than  one 

volume 


9VT.3 

ClT 


v.Z 


Cook 

(In 
514) 


CANADA  -  DESCRIPTION  AND   TRAVEL. 
,   Joel,  1842-1910. 

Descending  the  river  St   Lawrence, 
his  America.      1900.      v.  2,  p.r397r 


175 


nok 


CATALOGING    RULES 


ii  Subject  analytic  by  author  of  main  work;  consecutive  chapters 


314.2 
B73 


ABERDEEN—  DESCRIPTION. 
Bjpylej,  Hon. Mrs  E.V.C( Gordon )3 

Prey  9tone9  of  Maryculter;  Elrick 
walks;  Garden  of  Ellon  castle.  (In 
ier  beven  gardens  and  a  palace.  1900, 
;?.cll§j-234T 


12-13  Subject  analytic  by  author  of  main  work;  chapters  not  consecutive 

12  Paging  given  in   the   curves 


s\4.5e> 

H*5 


GENOA  —  DESCRIPTION. 
fco-jells,   W:D.  1837-1920. 

Aehore  at   Genoa;   Back  at   Genoa. 
(In  aia  Roman  holidays  and  others.      1908, 
?.35|-c3d:,    272-£2333) 

(or) 
13  Paging  given  after   corresponding   title 


3\4.56 
H$5 


GENOA  -  DESCRIPTION. 

lis,   W:D.  1837-1920. 

Ashore   at   Genoa,   p.25-,363;   Back  at 
irsnoa,   p.272-i2833  (In  his  Roman  holi- 

days  and  others.      1908) 


727; 


14-15  Title  analytic  by  author  of  main  work 

14  Main  card 


James,  Henry,    1843-1916. 

ftspern  papers;   Louisa  Pallant;   The 
aodern  warning.  LoiuL    Macmillan,    1838. 

39 Op.    19cm. 


176 


ANALYTICS 

15  Title  analytic 


nok-1 


T2.7 


Louisa  Pallant. 
ames,    Henry. 

(In  his  Aspern  papers, 
L95) 


1833.      p.c1393- 


l  Separate  paging.  When  an  analytic  is  separately  paged  the 
full  collation  is  given  before  the  curves,  this  detail  constituting  in 
the  items  given  before  the  curves  the  only  difference  between  the 
continuously  paged  and  the  separately  paged  analytic.  The  in- 
formation inside  the  curves  is  the  same  as  for  continuously  paged 
analytics  ("In"  being  used  if  the  distinction  is  made  between  "in" 
and  "see"  analytics)  except  that  the  statement  of  paging  is  omit- 
ted. Instead  is  given  the  volume  or  part  number  if  the  analytic 
occupies  a  whole  volume,  or  a  "part"  of  a  book  consisting  of  num- 
bered parts.  If  neither  of  these  conditions  applies  it  is  generally 
best,  in  order  to  show  in  what  portion  of  the  book  the  analytic 
occurs,  to  call  the  different  groups  of  paging  "parts"  and  supply 
numbering,  e.  g.  tpt  2]  ;  but  if  the  book  already  contains  divisions 
designated  as  "parts"  it  is  sometimes  better  to  indicate  the 
separately  paged  section  as  an  "appendix",  which  is  an  exception 
to  the  ordinary  treatment  of  an  appendix,  which  regards  it  as 
"continuously  paged"  material. 

16-22  Separate  paging 
16-20  Separate  title-page 

16  Author  analytic  in  a  set,  main  entry  for  which  is  under  editor  as  author; 

undated   title-page   for   analytic    (for   treatment   of   dated 

title-page  see  samples  23-25) 


1 31 


£li 
tre. 


Sheridan,  Richard  Brinsley  Sutler, 
1751-1816. 
(The)   rivals:   a  comedy   in  five  acts... 
sTithl  remarks  by  Mrs   Inchbald.  Lond. 

Longman, 


30p,    16x9om.  (In   Inchbald,   Mrs 

th  (Simpson^     ed.      British  thea- 
1808.      v,19,pt   23  ) 


za.be- 


177 


nol 


CATALOGING    RULES 
17  Corresponding  title  analytic 


Sher 

son): 
[Pt3 


(The)  rivals:  a  comedy  in  five  aots. 
Ldan,  R:B.CB.3 

(In  Inchbald,  Mrs  Elizabeth  (Simp- 
sd.   British  theatre.   1808.   v. 19 

) 


18  Main  entry  for  anonymous  book,  showing  two  groups  of  main  paging 


W52. 


voya 

a,nd 

.{iel 


off 


Western  coast  of  Africa:  Journal  of 

ficer  under  Capt.Owen;  Records  of  a 
ge  in  the  ship  Dryad,  in  1830,  1331 
1832,  by  Peter  Leonard.    Phil. 
ke,  1833. 
124,  I77p.  I7ixl0cm. 

ig  Author  analytic 


3\G 
W52 


Dryad 
tion 

tradje 

Mie 


Leonard,  Peter. 

Records  of  a  voyage   to  the  western 
oaajt  of  Afrioa,    in  His  Majesty's  ship 
and  of  the  servioe  on  that  sta- 
for  the  suppression  of  the  slave 
in... 1830,    1831  and  1832.  Phil. 

1833. 
177p.    17-^xlOcm.  (In  Western  coast 

of  Ajfrica.      1833.    cpt   23  ) 


Ike, 


20  Corresponding  subject  analytic 


S\fc 

W52 


soast 
Cryai 
tion 
trade 

idle 


SCAVE  TRADE. 
Leonard,   Peter. 

Records  of  a  voyage   to   the  western 
of  Africa,    in  His  Majesty's  ship 
,   and  of  the   servioe  on   that   sta- 
for  the   suppression  of   the   slave 
,    in. ..1830,    1831  and   1832.  Phil, 

1833. 
177p.    17|-xl0cra.  (In  Western  coast 

Of  Ajfrica.       1833.     ,pt   23  ) 


178 


like, 


ANALYTICS 


nol-m 


21-22  Half-title-page  without  imprint 
21  Author  analytic  in  a  set,  main  entry  for  which  is  under  title 


822.0B 
v.6 


Milton,   John,  1608-1674. 

Samson  Agonistes:   a  tragedy. 

52p.    16jxl0om.  (In  Select  plays 

from  oelebrated  authors.      1802-04.      v.  6 
pt   |33) 


22  Corresponding   title   analytic 


8Z2.08 


Samson  Agonistes:  a  tragedy. 
Milton,   John. 

(In  Seleot  plays  from  celebrated  au- 
thois.      1802-04.      v.  6(pt   33 ) 


m  Both  continuous  and  separate  paging.  Occasionally,  e.  g. 
in  a  series  of  monographs,  each  part  is  paged  separately  but  the 
volume  is  also  paged  continuously.  In  such  cases  the  full  collation 
for  the  analytic  should  be  given  before  the  curves  but  also  the  in- 
clusive paging  inside  the  curves  (unless  the  analytic  occupies  a 
whole  volume)  as  the  part  is  thus  most  easily  found. 

2S~25  Both  continuous  and  separate  paging 
23  Author  analytic  in  a  set  for  which  main  entry  is  made  under  title 


305 
v.3C> 


Kell]y,    Caleb  Guyer,  1887- 

...  French  Protestantism,    1559-1562. 
Bait).   Johns  Hopkins  press,    1918. 

185p.    24om.  (In  Johns  Hopkins  uni- 

versity, studies  in  historical  and  politi- 
sal  science.  1918.  v. 36,  no. 4,  p. (4093- 
593) 


179 


CATALOGING    RULES 
24  Corresponding  subject  analytic 


305 
J&5 

v.36 


Sellhr 

3alt 


HUGUENOTS. 

C.G.  1887- 

... French  Protestantism,    1559-1562. 

.   Johns  Hopkins  press,    1918. 

185p.    24cra.  (In  Johns  Hopkins  uni- 

/ers'ity  st\adies  in  historical  and  politi- 
cal 'science.  1316.  v.  36,  no.  4,  p.  (409j- 
593) 


25  Corresponding  title  analytic 


505 

v.  36 


Kelljy 


in 
1918 


..Frenoh  Protestantism,    1559-1562. 
1918. 
. >    C.G. 

(In  Johns  Hopkins  university  studies 
historical  and  political   science. 
v.36,   no.  4,   p.,4093-593) 


n  Analytic  within  an  analytic.  Sometimes  it  is  desirable  to 
make  an  analytic  within  an  analytic,  e.  g.  for  a  part  of  a  volume 
which  is  itself  a  distinct  work  in  a  set.  It  is  generally  found  most 
satisfactory  to  refer  from  the  last  analytic  to  the  work  with  which 
it  is  most  directly  connected;  with  a  note  in  the  ordinary  form, 
to  indicate  the  relation  to  the  main  work;  e.  g. 

26-27  Analytic  within  an  analytic 
26  Form  recommended  for  general  use 


5\0.fc 


IT. 81 


udldel,    Ulrich,  1510?-?1579. 

(A)  true  and  agreeable  description  of 
some  principal  Indian  lands  and  islands... 
(In  bominguez,  L.L.  ed.  Conquest  of  the 
rivet  Plate,    1535-1555.      1391.      p.cl3-91) 


In   the   Hakluyt    society's  Works,    1891, 


180 


ANALYTICS  Iion-O 

As  shown  in  the  illustration  above,  Schmidel's  work  constitutes 
the  first  part  of  a  volume  edited  by  Dominguez,  a  volume  which 
in  itself  constitutes  v.  81  of  the  Works  of  the  Hakluyt  society. 

Another  method  which  may  be  used  is  the  reference  from  the 
final  analytic  directly  back  to  the  main  work,  paying  no  attention 
to  the  intermediate  work  (see  sample  below)  but  this  method  is 
not  recommended,  as  it  is  the  intermediate  work  with  which  the 
final  analytic  is  more  closely  associated  and  in  which  it  might  be 
printed  in  another  edition  entirely  independent  of  any  connection 
with  what  for  the  edition  in  hand  is  treated  as  the  main  entry. 

2/  Alternative   method;   not   recommended  for  general  use 


5\0.6 
v.8\ 


infidel,   Ulrich,  1510?-?1579. 

(A)   true  and  agreeable  description  of 
somej  prinoipal   Indian  lands  and  islands... 
(In  Hakluyt   society,   London.      Works, 
189:1a     v.  81,  p.cl3-91) 


When  analytics  are  made  for  parts  of  continuations  (e.  g.  periodicals 
or,  as  in  this  case,  society  publications,  which  will  be  discussed  later)  it  is 
customary  and  preferable  to  give  in  the  reference  to  the  main  entry,  merely 
the  date  of  the  special  volume  referred  to,  but  an  alternative  method  is  to 
give  the  date  of  the  first  volume  of  the  set,  followed  by  a  short  dash  and 
a  space,  e.  g.    (In  Hakluyt  society,  London.  Works.   1847-        v.Si.p.fij-c.l). 

o  Short  form  analytics.  When  the  part  of  the  book  for  which 
analytic  entry  is  to  be  made  has  no  separate  title,  or  too  many 
chapter  titles,  and  its  contents  are  sufficiently  well  indicated  by 
the  title  of  the  whole  book  it  is  better  to  use  what  may  be  called 
the  short  form  analytic.  In  this  form,  instead  of  using  for  the 
analytic  a  separate  title  with  a  reference  to  the  main  work,  the 
title  of  the  main  work  only  is  given. 

The  short  form  analytic  is  often  the  best  not  only  when  the 
analytic  has  no  separate  title  or  too  many  chapter  titles  and  the 
contents  are  satisfactorily  covered  by  the  main  title,  but  also  in 
many  cases  when  it  has  a  separate  title  but  one  which  adds  to  the 
main  title  or  subject  heading  no  information  concerning  the  scope 
or  phase  of  the  subject  treated,  so  that  the  employment  of  both 
main  and  analytic  titles  involves  useless   repetition.     These  cases 

181 


no  0-0(2) 


CATALOGING    RULES 


occur  most  often   under  the    names   of  persons   as   subjects    (see 
sample  cards  28-29  below). 

The  short  form  analytic  might  under  some  conditions  be  adopted  for  all 
subject  analytics,  as  the  principal  point  would  be  covered  by  the  fact  that 
the  subject  named  in  the  heading  was  treated  in  a  certain  specified  part  of 
the  book,  but  the  long  form  analytic  is  much  more  satisfactory  if  the 
author  of  the  analytic  is  different  from  the  author  of  the  book  as  a  whole, 
or  if  the  analytic  has  a  distinct  title  which  gives  desirable  information  not 
given  by  the  main  title  of  the  book. 

(1)  Continuous  paging.  In  the  case  of  continuously 
paged  short  form  analytics,  the  main  title  is  followed  after  a  centi- 
meter space  by  the  imprint  date,  and  again  after  a  centimeter  space 
by  inclusive  paging. 

28-29  Long  and  short  form  analytics  contrasted;  continuous  paging 

28  Long  form 


B 

RUSKIN,  JOHN,    1819-1900. 

T3\2r 

Rite 

hie,  A.CI.  .3  (Thackeray)    lady, 

1338-1918. 
John  Ruskin.    (In  her  Records  of 

Tenn 

yson,  Ruskin,  Browning.   1393,  p.c613- 

135) 

(or  better) 
2Q  Short  form 


B 

T3\2r 


RUSKIN,    JOHN,  1319-1900. 

Ritchie,   A. CI.  .3  (Thackeray)  lady, 

1838-1918. 

Records  of  Tennyson,   Ruskin,   Brown- 
ing. 1893.  p.c613-135. 


(2)  Separate  paging.  In  the  case  of  separately  paged 
short  form  analytics  (whether  for  one  or  more  entire  volumes  or 
for  the  separately  paged  part  of  a  volume)  the  title  is  followed  after 
a  centimeter  space  by  the  imprint  date  for  the  whole  work;  then 
on  the  next  line,  at  the  second  indention  (the  regular  position  for 
the  collation),  by  the  number  of  (when  only  one)   the  volume  or 

182 


ANALYTICS  110  o(2)-p(2> 

the  part  comprising  the  analytic,  and  (separated  by  a  comma,  ex- 
cept when  brackets  are  used,  but  with  only  the  single  typewriter 
space  regularly  used  between  items)  the  collation  for  the  analytic,  as 
pt  2,  76p.  illus.  21cm.  If  two  or  more  volumes  or  parts  are  covered 
by  the  analytic  the  inclusive  volumes  or  parts  should  be  given,  as 
v.  2-3 ;  but  the  paging  should  be  omitted  unless  continuous. 

jo  Separate  paging:   short  form 


530 
05\ 


ftSTRONOMT- 

Dlaeked,   Denison,  1791-1859. 

Rudiment 3  of  natural  philosophy  and 
aetrpnoray. . . stereotyped  ed.  1853. 

pt  3,   115p.    illus.    tables,   diagrs. 

15-Job. 


p  Alternative  methods.  (1)  A.  L.  A.  code.  Suggestions  for 
the  adaptation  of  printed  cards  for  analytics  are  included  in  the 
A.  L.  A.  rules,  p.  79-80.  A  slight  variation  would  be  the  omission 
of  the  slanting  line  which,  in  the  sample  shown,  gives  at  first 
the  impression  of  a  canceled  card. 

(2)  New  York  state  library.  The  method  adopted  by 
the  New  York  state  library  for  printed  cards  is  the  insertion  of  the 
page  reference  before  the  printed  entry. 

31-32  New  York  state  library  method  of  adapting  printed 

cards 

31  Title  analytic 


ovt'^'      Herb  moly  and  heartsease,  see  p.£513- 

Eenson,  Arthur  Christopher,  1S62- 

Escape,  and  other  essays,  by  Arthur  Christopher  Bon- 
son  ...     New  York,  The  Century  co.,  1915. 
xviii,  302  p.    20""        $1.50 
Reprinted  in  part  from  Century  magazine  and  Cornhill  magazine. 

Contents.— Escape.— Literature  and  life.— The  new  poets.— Walt  U'hit- 
man.-Charm.-St.n5et.-The  house  of  Pengersick.-Villages.-Dreams  - 
Ilic  visitant.-That  other  one.-Schooldays.-Authorship.-Herb  moly  and 
heartsease.— Behold,  this  dreamer  comcth. 


183 


liop(2)-(3)  CATALOGING    RULES 

32  Subject  analytic 


PHILOSOPHY.  BIBLIOGRAPHY,     see  p. 431-440  in 

101  Perry,  Ralph  Barton,  1S76- 

^"k  The  approach  to  philosophy,  by  Ealph  Barton  Perry 

.  .  .  New  York,  C.  Scribner's  sons,  1905. 

xxiv,  448  p.    19}cm 
Bibliography:  p.  431-440. 


As  shown  in  sample  32,  the  New  York  state  library,  for  the  sake  of 
having  the  use  of  the  full  length  of  the  line,  carries  its  subject  headings 
back  to  the  left  edge  of  the  card. 

(3)  Wisconsin  library  school.  The  Wisconsin  li- 
brary school  rules  give  the  paging  below  the  call  number,  instead  of 
in  the  curves. 


184 


INDEPENDENTS  III-H3 


INDEPENDENTS 


111  Definition.  Books  or  pamphlets  published  separately  and 
afterwards  bound  together,  such  consolidation  not  being  a  part  of 
the  publisher's  work. 

The  phrase  "published  separately",  as  here  used,  refers  to  the  exact 
copies  in  hand,  not  (as  when  used  with  reference  to  analytics)  merely  to 
the  same  material,  at  some  time  published  separately. 

112  Independents  vs  separately  paged  analytics,  a  Analytics. 
The  separately  paged  analytic  is  a  part  of  the  book  as  published 
and  belongs  in  all  copies  of  that  edition. 

b  Independents.  The  independent  is  one  of  two  or  more  publica- 
tions issued  separately,  and  afterwards  bound  together.  Of  such 
a  combination  there  may  be  only  a  single  copy ;  if  there  are  dupli- 
cates each  must  be  prepared  individually. 

c  Distinguishing  marks.  These  may  appear  in  the  book,  showing 
clearly  whether  it  is  a  case  for  analytic  or  independent  treatment, 
but  such  marks  are  sometimes  entirely  lacking  and  the  treatment 
must  be  settled  simply  in  accordance  with  the  cataloger's  judgment. 
In  cases  of  uncertainty  the  independent  is  to  be  preferred. 

(1)  Analytic  treatment.  This  may  be  indicated  in 
various  ways ;  e.  g.  a  title-page  mentioning  both  works,  a  preface  or 
table  of  contents  treating  of  both,  a  cover  title  (but  not  necessarily 
a  binder's  title  or  label)  including  both,  continuous  numbering  of 
signatures,  or  (in  the  case  of  unnumbered  signatures)  the  begin- 
ning of  a  new  group  of  page  numbers  in  the  same  signature  with 
a  previous  group. 

(2)  Independent  treatment.  This  may  sometimes  be 
determined  by  the  cataloger's  knowledge  of  the  previous  history  of 
the  parts,  as,  for  example,  that  the  parts  have  been  combined  by 
the  library  or  by  some  individual,  but  the  decision  often  rests  merely 
on  the  appearance  of  the  book.  A  difference  in  size  or  publisher 
or  a  wide  discrepancy  in  dates  may  serve  as  evidence,  but  frequently 
there  is  no  means  of  actually  establishing  the  facts. 

113  Treatment  of  independents  as  distinguished  from 
analytics.  Catalog  completely,  as  though  an  entirely  separate 
work,  each  part  decided  on  as  an  independent,  but  make  the  follow- 
ing exceptions  in  minor  details. 

185 


H3a-e(i)  CATALOGING    RULES 

a  Size.  Give  for  size,  not  the  size  of  the  cover,  as  in  the  case 
of  separate  books,  but  the  size  of  the  page  of  the  special  work  be- 
ing cataloged. 

As  independents  of  quite  different  sizes  are  sometimes  bound  together 
this  method  gives  a  better  bibliographic  description  than  the  use  of  the 
cover  size.  If  the  difference  between  the  size  of  the  publication  and  the 
size  of  the  cover  is  so  great  as  to  affect  the  place  of  shelving  this  difference 
may  be  indicated  in  a  note;  e.  g.  Covers,  26cm. 

b  Tracing  for  the  volume  as  a  whole.  Consider  the  main  card 
for  one  of  the  independents  (generally  the  first)  as  being  the  main 
card  for  the  volume  and  on  this  give  the  accession  number  of  the 
volume,  the  tracing  for  added  entries  for  that  separate  publication, 
and  the  number  of  other  sets  of  cards  for  the  volume,  specifying 
the  headings  for  the  main  cards  for  the  different  sets  fully  enough 
to  make  it  easy  to  find  them.  If  the  same  heading  is  used  for  more 
than  one  set  the  statements  should  be  combined,  as  "3  sets  under 
Gray,  H.  M.",  or  if  additional  sets  have  the  same  author  heading 
as  the  first,  "2  other  sets  under  Thorpe."  In  case  the  volume 
calls  for  so  many  different  sets  of  cards  that  they  can  not  all  be 
satisfactorily  traced  on  the  main  card  a  separate  official  record  may 
be  kept  (as  suggested  for  the  tracing  of  very  numerous  analytics, 
section  110/(4)  )  referring  to  this  list  in  the  place  for  the  tracing, 
as  "27  other  sets ;  see  official  list". 

c  Tracing  of  added  entries  for  independents  other  than  the  first. 
The  main  card  for  each  of  the  other  independents  takes  the  tracing 
for  its  own  added  entries  but  no  accession  number. 

d  Note  of  contents  on  main  card.  On  the  main  card  for  (gener- 
ally) the  first  independent,  i.  e.  the  card  regarded  as  the  main 
card  for  the  volume,  add  a  note  mentioning  the  other  independents. 

(1)  If  the  volume  contains  only  one  or  two  additional  works 
give  on  the  main  card  the  note  "Bound  with"  (specifying  the 
authors  and  titles  of  the  others)  as,  "Bound  with  the  author's  Auto- 
crat of  the  breakfast  table"  or  "Bound  with  the  Deserted  village,  by 
Oliver  Goldsmith ;  and  Sesame  and  lilies,  by  John  Ruskin".  Some- 
times the  form  of  note  works  out  better  by  the  use  of  the  possessive 
pronoun  or  the  author's  name  in  the  possessive,  as  "his  Autocrat  of 
the  breakfast  table"  or  "John  Ruskin's  Sesame  and  lilies". 

(2)  If  more  than  two  additional  independents  are  included  in 
the  volume,  give  on  the  main  card  a  more  general  note,  as  "Bound 
with  other  pamphlets". 

c  Note  of  contents  on  other  cards.  (1)  When  the  volume  con- 
tains only  two  or  three  independents  give  on  all  cards  for  inde- 

186 


INDEPENDENTS 


113 


pendents  other  than  the  first  a  note  mentioning  the  other  work 
when  only  one  or  the  other  two  when  the  volume  contains  two 
other  works ;  as,  "Bound  with  his  Letters  from  British  settlers,  and 
his  Taxes  on  knowledge."  If  two  titles  are  mentioned  in  the  note 
indicate  the  author,  if  known,  with  each.  Otherwise  it  may  not 
be  clear  whether  they  are  by  the  same  author  or  whether  the  author 
of  one  of  them  is  unknown. 

If  this  note  is  not  given  on  all  cards  for  other  independents  than  the  first, 
the  reader  who,  wishing  one  of  these,  sends  for  the  volume  and  on  opening 
it  sees  a  different  title  may  not  recognize  the  book  as  the  one  called  for. 
For  this  reason  the  first  publication  in  the  book  should  be  named  first. 

(2)  When  the  volume  contains  more  than  three  independents 
give  on  all  cards  for  all  independents  other  than  the  first  a  note 
naming  the  first  with  an  allusion  to  the  others;  as,  "Bound  with 
Lowell's  Vision  of  Sir  Launfal,  and  other  pamphlets". 

1  Main  card 


613.1 


jGrl^com,   John  Hoskins3  1809-1874. 

Uses  and  abuses  of  air.  ..with  remarks 
on  the  ventilation  of  houses. .  .[3d  ed.3 
N.Y.I  Redfield,    1854. 

j252p.    illus.    13  col.pl.    19cm. 

|3ound  with  Punishment,    not  preven- 
tive!,  not   reformatory. 


2  Subject  card 


£13.1 


AIR. 
[Oriajcom,  J:H.3 


on 

N.Y. 


1809-1874. 
Uses  and  abuses  of  air... with  remarks 
ventilation  of  houses. .  .[3d  ed.3 
Redfield,  1854. 
252p.  illus.  12  col.pl.  19cm. 


the 


<o\5.| 


3  Title  card 


Uses  and  abuses  of  air. 
[Gris|com,   J:H.3 

187 


1854. 


H3-H4a  CATALOGING    RULES 

4  Main  card  for  second  pamphlet  (anonymous) 


613.1 


Punishment,   not  preventive,   not   re- 
formatory. No  place,    no  pub.  c18-"3 
36p.    19cm. 

No   title-page. 

Bound  with  J:H. Griscom' s  Uses  and 
abuae3  of  air. 


5  Subject  card  for  same 


613.1 
Gs<b 


PUNISHMENT. 

Punishment,   not  preventive,   not  re- 
formatory. No  place,   no  pub.  c18— 3 
36p.    19cm. 

No  title-page. 

Bound  with  J:H.  C-riscom1  s  Uses  and 
abuses  of  air. 


114  Treatment  of  independents  and  separately  paged  analyt- 
ics in  the  same  way.  Bibliographically  the  independent  and  the 
separately  paged  analytic  are  in  fact  entirely  different  (as  shown 
in  section  l\2a-b),  even  though  in  some  cases  the  appearance  of 
the  volume  is  such  as  to  make  it  impossible  to  pronounce  positively 
to  which  class  it  belongs.  For  the  library  which  aims  at  biblio- 
graphic exactness  the  distinction  should  be  observed,  so  far  as  the 
facts  can  be  ascertained,  but  some  libraries  prefer  to  ignore  the 
distinction  and  in  such  cases  the  works  ma}'  be  treated  either 
as  all  independents  or  as  all  analytics. 

a  Treatment  of  all  as  ■independents.  If  the  treatment  of  all  as 
independents  is  preferred,  for  volumes  which;  strictly  speaking,  con- 
tain separately  paged  analytics,  these  are  cataloged  like  true  in- 
dependents, but  more  frequently  than  with  the  latter  the  imprint 
is  wholly  or  partly  lacking  and  in  such  cases  the  missing  information 
should  be  supplied  from  the  main  title-page;  otherwise  it  would 
not  be  represented  at  all  on  the  cards.  In  exact  cataloging  the 
details  thus  supplied  should  be  bracketed. 

188 


INDEPENDENTS  II4b-b(3>(a) 

b  Treatment  of  all  as  analytics.  If  the  preference  is  to  treat 
all  as  analytics  it  is  recommended  that  for  those  which  are  really 
independents  some  such  method  as  the  following  be  adopted. 

Since  analytic  treatment  presupposes  a  main  entry  for  the  book 
as  a  whole,  it  is  desirable  that  there  be  a  general  title-page,  with 
such  a  collective  title  as  will  best  cover  the  contents  of  the  volume. 
If  the  volume  is  put  together  by  the  library  a  manuscript  title-page 
and  table  of  contents  are  best  prepared  at  that  time  and  bound 
in.  If  the  volume  has  been  bound  up  without  these  it  is  best  to 
supply  them  and  paste  them  in,  though  in  some  libraries  the  catalog- 
ing is  in  such  cases  done  from  the  binder's  title.  If  the  latter  pro- 
cedure is  followed  a  note  should  be  added  to  the  entries  for  the  book 
as  a  whole ;  i.  e.  Cataloged  from  binder's  title. 

(1)  T  i  1 1  e-p  a  ge  s.  It  will  be  found  most  satisfactory  to  have 
the  supplied  title-pages  prepared  on  the  usual  plan  for  printed  title- 
pages  of  books  of  similar  contents,  with  a  collective  title  indicating 
the  scope  of  the  contents  of  the  volume,  the  author's  name  or 
authors'  names,  if  the  publications  are  all  by  the  same  author  or 
joint  authors  (or  several  independent  authors  may  be  named  if  the 
title  is  such  as  to  show  that  their  work  is  independent  and  not  of 
a  joint  author  character)  and  imprint  date  (or  inclusive  dates,  if 
issued  in  different  years).  Place  (or  places)  of  publication  may, 
if  desired,  also  be  used,  but  it  is  not  desirable  that  the  publisher's 
name  be  given  (even  if  the  parts  are  all  from  the  same  publisher), 
since  that  item  would  imply  that  the  volume  was  issued  by  the 
publisher  in  that  combined  form.  Even  the  manuscript  title-page 
would  not  necessarily  correct  that  impression,  since  such  a  title- 
page  might  be  used  to  take  the  place  of  one  which  was  lost. 

(2)  Contents.1  In  the  table  of  contents  the  items  should 
follow  the  order  of  the  arrangement  in  the  volume,  each  item  be- 
ing numbered,  with  a  corresponding  number  placed  on  the  publica- 
tion. Following  this  number  should  be  given  the  name  of  the 
author  (unless  the  contents  are  all  the  work  of  the  same  author  or 
joint  authors)  and  the  title  of  the  separate  publication. 

The  number  of  pages  and  the  imprint  date  may,  if  desired,  be  added 
but  they  arc  not  generally  important  here,  as  they  are  in  each  ease  given 
on  the  catalog  cards  for  the  separate  publication. 

(3)  Cataloging.  (a)  Main  entry.  The  cataloging  should 
be  done  from  the  supplied  title-page,  treating  it  as  though  it  were 

1  The  table  of  contents  is  equally  desirable  if  tbc  volume  is  treated  as 
made  up  of   independents. 

189 


"4b(3)(a)-(c)  CATALOGING    RULES 

the  ordinary  printed  title-page,  except  that  some  such  note  should 
be  added  as,  Manuscript  title-page  supplied. 

Entry  should  be  made  under  the  author's  name  if  the  works 
are  all  of  the  same  authorship ;  otherwise  the  form  for  the  main 
entry  should  be  determined  as  in  section  109a(3).  After  the 
title,  transcribed  according  to  the  usual  rules,  the  place  or  places, 
if  not  more  than  three,  of  publication  may  be  given ;  if  more  than 
three,  the  phrase  "Various  places"  may  be  used.  If  the  contents  of 
the  volume  are  the  output  of  several  publishers  the  phrase  "Various 
publishers"  may  be  given,  but  the  names  of  publishers  should  not 
be  given  since  the  proper  inference  from  the  specification  of  their 
names  would  be  that  they  were  responsible  for  the  volume  as  that 
volume,  when  they  were  merely  responsible  for  its  individual  parts. 
The  extreme  imprint  dates,  in  inclusive  form,  should  be  given,  as 
this  item  would,  specially  on  the  subject  side,  frequently  be  some 
indication  of  the  value  of  the  collection. 

As  in  the  case  of  a  regular  publication  with  several  groups  of 
paging,  these,  if  not  more  than  three,  may  be  specified,  separated 
by  a  comma.  If  there  are  more  than  three,  "v.p."  may  be  used, 
meaning  "various  pagings".  Such  a  statement  regarding  illustra- 
tions should  be  made  as  applies  to  the  volume  as  a  whole,  and  the 
size  given  in  accordance  with  the  size  of  the  covers. 

Contents  should  regularly  be  given. 

(&)  Added  entries  for  the  book  as  a  whole.  When  the  volume 
as  a  whole  deals  with  one  or  more  subjects,  subject  entries  should 
be  made  as  for  other  books.  Other  added  entries  for  the  volume 
as  a  whole  would  seldom  if  ever  be  called  for,  as  in  the  nature  of 
the  case  these  would  ordinarily  apply  merely  to  individual  parts. 

(c) Analytics.  For  the  separate  parts  of  the  volume,  analytic 
entries  should  be  made  to  such  extent  as  is  called  for  in  the  in- 
dividual cases,  but  because  of  the  parts  having  been  published 
separately  the  analytics  should  be  made  with  more  than  usual  liberal- 
ity, specially  the  author  analytics. 

Subject  analytics  are  not  generally  important  if  the  subject  of 
the  separate  part  is  the  same  as  the  subject  of  the  volume  as  a  whole, 
the  contents  statement  on  the  general  subject  card  usually  being 
sufficient,  but  if  the  author  of  the  separate  part  is  an  authority  on 
the  subject  it  may  be  desirable  to  make  a  separate  subject  entry  on 
that  account.  If  the  separate  part  deals  with  a  distinct  topic  it 
should  be  given  a  distinct  subject  entry.  This  applies,  contrary  to 
the  usual  principle,  even  when  the  topic  is  one  which  is  naturally 
included  in  the  broader  subject  of  the  volume  as  a  whole,  just  be- 

190 


INDEPENDENTS  II4b(3)(c)-(e) 

cause  the  part  has  been  published  separately  and  is  therefore  likely 
to  be  looked  for  under  its  specific  subject  designation. 

Analytics  for  titles,  editors  etc.  should  be  made  according  to 
the  general  principles,  with  special  recognition  of  the  fact  that  the 
parts  have  been  separately  published  and  that  consequently  the 
features  of  the  parts  are  more  than  otherwise  likely  to  be  separately 
remembered. 

(d)  Form  of  analytic  entry.  The  analytic  entries  should  take 
the  same  form  as  previously  prescribed  for  separately  paged  analyt- 
ics, with  a  reference  in  (     )  to  the  main  entry  for  the  book. 

(e)  Tracing.  The  entries  should  be  traced,  as  in  the  case  of 
other  separately  paged  analytics. 


191 


115  CATALOGING    RULES 


ADDED  EDITIONS 


115  Definition  of  edition.  The  definition  of  edition  given  in 
the  A.L.  A.  rules,  pref.  p.  14,  "The  whole  number  of  copies  printed 
from  the  same  set  of  types  and  issued  at  the  same  time",  is  sub- 
stantially the  same  as  that  given  by  the  Century,  Standard  and 
Webster,  but  some  such  explanatory  statement  as  the  following, 
which  is  taken  from  Webster,  makes  the  definition  more  directly 
applicable  to  ordinary  cataloging  usage.  To  the  definition  "The 
whole  number  of  copies  of  a  work  printed  and  published  at  one 
time"  is  added  "usually  distinguished  from  an  impression.  In  edi- 
tions after  the  first,  corrections,  additions  or  alterations  of  the  text 
are  made,  or  the  type  reset ;  a  second  or  succeeding  impression  is 
from  the  unaltered  original  plates". 

A  definition  limited  strictly  to  copies  "issued  at  the  same  time" 
must  be  regarded  as  based  wholly  on  the  earlier  method  of  printing 
from  movable  type  and  the  subsequent  distribution  of  the  type,  in- 
volving its  resetting  for  a  reissue,  which  was  therefore  properly  a 
new  edition.  With  the  advances  in  printing,  for  a  large  proportion 
of  the  books  plates  are  made  corresponding  to  the  pages.  These 
plates  are  stored  and  used  for  reprints  which,  corresponding  exactly 
to  the  original,  are  not  properly  editions,  as  brought  out  in  the  sup- 
plementary statement  in  Webster.  Such  reprints  may  be  designated 
as  different  impressions,  issues,  reissues  or  thousands,  but  these 
distinctions  are  of  value  only  for  minute  bibliographic  descriptions 
and  are  generally  disregarded  in  library  cataloging.  In  many  cases, 
however,  such  reprints  appear  as  numbered  "editions",  but  as  it 
is  often  impracticable  to  distinguish  between  such  reprints  and 
really  new  editions  it  is  best  to  accept  for  these  the  publishers'  term. 

In  Cutter,  p.  19,  is  the  following:  "Edition,  a  number  of  copies 
of  a  book,  published  at  the  same  time  and  in  the  same  form.  A 
later  publication  of  the  same  book  unchanged  is  sometimes  styled 
a  different  edition,  sometimes  a  new  issue,  sometimes  a  different 
thousand."  The  phrase  "in  the  same  form",  is  an  important  sup- 
plement to  the  phrase  "at  the  same  time",  as  a  large  paper  or 
some  other  special  edition  might  be  "printed  from  the  same  set 
of  types  and  issued  at  the  same  time". 

For  cataloging  purposes  different  editions  are  those  which  are 
subject  to  some  difference  in  the  description  on  the  cards,  even 
though  this  difference  is  nothing  more  than  the  imprint  date. 

Importance  of  indicating  edition.  The  importance  of  noting  the  edition 
is  stated  by  Cutter   (rule  255)   as  follows:  "The  specification  of  edition  is 

192 


ADDED  EDITIONS  "5""7 

necessary,  (i)  for  the  student,  who  often  wants  a  particular  edition  and 
cares  no  more  for  another  than  he  would  for  an  entirely  different  work, 
(2)  in  the  library  service,  to  prevent  the  rejection  of  works  which  are  not 
really  duplicates.  And  the  number  of  the  edition  is  a  fact  in  the  literary 
history  of  the  author  worth  preserving  under  his  name;  under  the  subject 
it  is  some  guarantee  for  the  repute,  if  not  for  the  value,  of  the  work." 

a  Editions  vs  copies.  Exact  duplicates  are  called  copies  and  this 
term  is,  according'  to  the  policy  of  the  library,  extended  to  include 
varying  degrees  of  duplication,  many  libraries  using  the  term  to 
cover,  in  fiction,  entirely  different  editions  unless  the  number  of 
volumes  differs  or  there  is  some  variation  in  the  division  into 
volumes  or  there  is  some  special  reason  for  distinguishing  a  certain 
edition,  as  in  the  case  of  specially  fine  illustrations  or  of  an  edition 
sufficiently  well  known  to  be  called  for  in  preference  to  others. 
Under  this  plan  for  the  treatment  of  fiction  the  entire  statement  of 
imprint  and  collation  is  omitted,  except  the  number  of  volumes 
when  more  than  one.  When  the  distinguishing  feature  consists  of 
the  illustrations  or  editor  etc.  it  may  be  best  brought  out  in  a  note. 

For  a  fuller  discussion  of  the  treatment  of  fiction  see  Appendix  1. 

116  Definition  of  added  edition.  As  defined  in  Cutter,  p.  13, 
an  added  edition  is  "another  edition  of  a  work  already  in  the  cata- 
log." 

117  Treatment  of  added  editions.  When  an  edition  is  added 
to  the  library  it  is  customary,  when  practicable,  to  add  the  catalog 
entry  to  the  cards  already  made,  thus  procuring  the  double  ad- 
vantage of  economy  of  labor  and  a  compact  presentation  of  the 
entries  to  the  eye  of  the  reader. 

When  an  edition  is  to  be  added  to  cards  already  made  the  extra 
entry  should  be  made  on  all  cards  to  which  it  applies,  according 
to  directions  a-h  given  below,  subject  to  such  variations  in  fulness 
of  entry  as  are  called  for  by  the  different  kinds  of  cards.  It  is  bet- 
ter to  omit  a  line  between  entries  when  there  is  room,  except  on 
series  cards,  where  the  regular  rule  for  arrangement  in  series  should 
be  followed. 

An  exception  to  the  general  method  for  adding  editions  must  frequently 
be  made  on  series  cards;  i.  e.  if  the  work  to  which  an  edition  is  to  be  added 
is  the  latest  entered  on  the  series  card  the  regular  rule  for  added  editions 
is  followed,  but  if,  on  the  series  card,  entries  for  other  works  follow  the 
original  entry  for  the  work  in  question,  it  is  generally  best  to  make,  on  the 
series  card,  the  entry  for  the  added  edition  as  an  entirely  distinct  entry,  fol- 
lowing those  already  made. 

For  the  entry  of  added  editions  on  the  author  card  only,  see  Cutter,  179, 
but  notice  that  the  illustrations  are  for  very  special  cases. 

193 


II7a-b(3)  CATALOGING     RULES 

a  Author's  name.  Indicate  the  repetition  of  the  author's  name 
by  a  dash  about  one  centimeter  long,  beginning  at  the  outer  inden- 
tion, at  the  height  of  the  top  of  lower  case  letters,  on  manuscript 
cards.  On  typewritten  cards  the  dash  should  be  used  if  there  is 
one  on  the  machine;  otherwise  the  hyphen,  not  the  underline. 

No  account  need  be  taken  of  the  point  if  one  edition  is  published  under 
the  author's  name  and  one  anonymously,  nor  of  a  different  fulness  of 
author's  name  on  different  title-pages. 

b  Title.  Indicate  the  repetition  of  the  title  by  the  word  Same 
(underlined)  to  represent  either  the  whole  title  or  merely  the  title 
proper,  according  to  the  correspondence  between  the  two  title-pages. 
Write  this  word  after  the  dash,  at  the  distance  of  the  ordinary 
space  between  words,  on  either  manuscript  or  typewritten  cards. 

By  the  "title  proper"  is  here  meant  that  part  of  the  title  which  precedes 
the  statement  of  edition. 

In  some  libraries,  instead  of  the  word  Same  a  second  dash  is  used,  one 
centimeter  in  length,  following  the  dash  representing  the  author's  name,  at 
a  distance  of  one  typewriter  space. 

(1)  Titles  wholly  or  partly  identical.  If  the 
whole  title  is  identical  the  word  Same  is  sufficient  to  indicate  the  repe- 
tition, but  if  only  the  title  proper  is  identical,  some  variation  occurring 
in  the  statement  of  edition,  the  word  Same  should  be  used  to  repre- 
sent only  the  title  proper  and  the  statement  of  edition  should  be 
written  out  in  the  same  fulness  as  would  be  used  if  the  entry  stood 
alone  on  the  card,  the  semicolon  being  used  to  separate  this  state- 
ment from  the  word  Same,  as  though,  instead  of  the  latter,  the 
title  was  written  out. 

(2)  Longer  entries  added  to  shorter.  If  the 
original  entry  contains  no  statement  of  the  edition  and  the  second 
entry  contains  such  a  statement,  the  second  may  be  added  to  the 
first,  with  the  supplementary  information  added,  but  if  the  earlier 
entry  has  a  statement  of  edition  and  the  later  entry  has  no  such 
statement  the  later  entry  should  not  be  added  to  the  earlier  and 
longer  entry,  as  the  word  Same  would  in  this  case  imply  the  repeti- 
tion of  the  entire  previous  title. 

A  longer  title  proper  may  be  added  to  a  shorter  by  adding, 
after  the  word  Same,  the  supplementary  information  (unless  this 
would  result  in  awkward  phraseology)  or  by  the  use  of     .     .     . 

(3)  More  than  two  editions.  When  two  editions  are 
already  given  on  the  card,  if  the  first  entry  has  no  statement  of  edi- 
tion and  the  second  has  such  a  statement,  subsequent  editions  lack- 
ing such  a  statement  should  not  be  added  as  they  would  be  likely 
to  be  understood  as  corresponding  to  the  second  entry,  but  if  the 

194 


ADDED  EDITIONS  II7b(3>-d 

first  entry  has  no  statement  of  edition  and  the  second  and  following 
entries  have  such  a  statement,  in  order  to  avoid  any  possible  mis- 
understanding on  the  part  of  the  reader,  it  is  safest  to  write  out 
the  statement  of  edition  with  each,  even  though  the  wording  is 
exactly  the  same. 

(4)  Different  editors.  Although  the  rule  for  adding 
editions  to  a  card  when  there  is  a  variation  in  the  statement  of 
edition,  would  allow  on  the  same  card  the  combination  of  editions 
by  different  editors,  this  would  not  generally  be  advisable,  as  the 
library  which  would  have  editions  by  different  editors  might  also 
have  extra  editions  by  the  same  editor  and  it  would  therefore  be 
better  to  give  separate  cards  to  editions  by  different  editors. 

(5)  Slight  variations  in  title.  In  libraries  doing 
minute  bibliographic  work  it  would  be  undesirable  to  allow  even 
very  slight  variations  to  pass  under  the  word  Same,  but  for  most 
libraries  serving  mainly  a  miscellaneous  public  it  would  not  be  im- 
portant to  observe  such  variations,  e.  g.  French  revolution  in  1848 
and  French  revolution  of  1848,  or  the  omission  in  a  later  entry  of 
a  subtitle  or  alternative  title.  When  ...  are  used  in  the  earlier 
entry  to  indicate  omissions,  they  may  be  disregarded  in  applying 
the  word  Same,  considering  this  as  covering  only  the  actual  writ- 
ten words.  Correspondingly  ...  to  indicate  the  series  note  etc. 
at  the  head  of  the  title-page  for  the  additional  entry  need  not  be 
used  before  the  word  Same. 

When  different  editions  are  being  cataloged  at  the  same  time,  occasionally 
the  titles  may  be  shortened  with  special  reference  to  agreement  in  the 
catalog   entries,   provided   that   nothing  very   important   is   thereby   omitted. 

c  Imprint,  collation  and  series  note.  On  the  main  card  and  sub- 
ject cards  write,  in  the  regular  full  form  for  such  cards,  the  imprint, 
one  centimeter  (four  typewriter  spaces)  after  the  title,  and  on  the 
following  line,  in  their  regular  position,  the  full  collation  and  the 
series  note. 

On  the  other  cards  (title,  editor,  etc.)  write  the  imprint  date 
(or  its  substitute)  one  centimeter  after  the  title,  and  on  the  same- 
line,  again  at  the  distance  of  one  centimeter,  the  number  of  volumes 
if  more  than  one. 

These  details  are  given  with  each  entry,  even  if  they  are  identical 
with  those  in  the  edition  previously  cataloged. 

d  Notes.  Notes  should  be  given  with  each  entry  as  applicable, 
except  that  notes  given  with  the  first  entry  may  be  referred  to  in 
the  later  entries  if  they  are  equally  applicable  to  these  and  ap- 
preciable space  is  thereby  saved;  as,  "For  notes  of  biography  and 

195 


H7d-h  CATALOGING    RULES 

bibliography  see  entry  above"  or  "Contents  as  in  entry  above 
except  for  the  addition  of  the  following:"  (giving  supplementary 
items). 

Occasionally,  if  thought  important  for  the  sake  of  distinguishing 
editions  (for  example,  two  of  the  same  date)  such  notes  may  be 
added  on  short-entry  cards  (e.  g.  title  or  editor)  as  would  not 
ordinarily  be  given ;  as  "London  ed."  and  "New  York  ed."  or  the 
series  note  may  be  given  after  the  imprint  and  collation  or  the  name 
of  the  edition  may  be  given  in  the  title. 

e  Treatment  of  author's  name  and  of  title  on  main  vs  secondary 
cards.  The  indication  of  the  author's  name  by  a  dash,  followed  by 
the  word  Same,  representing  the  title,  is  common  to  all  cards,  no 
attempt  being  made  to  indicate  a  repetition  of  the  heading  for  sub- 
ject or  editor  cards,  etc. 

(1)  Title  cards.  On  the  title  card  this  arrangement  re- 
verses the  regular  order  for  title  cards  but  the  reader  will  not 
analyze  this  detail  and  the  opposite  arrangement,  though  more 
logical,  would,  by  its  appearance,  be  confusing. 

f  Order  of  entries.  The  later  edition  would  naturally  follow  an 
earlier,  but  if  the  later  one  was  cataloged  before  the  earlier  one 
came  to  hand  the  earlier  would  be  added  to  the  later  except  when 
some  difference  in  title  made  this  undesirable.  When  different  edi- 
tions are  being  cataloged  at  the  same  time,  if  the  later  edition  has 
the  shorter  title  it  is  sometimes  desirable  for  that  reason  to  give 
it  the  first  place  on  the  card,  regardless  of  the  date.  Differences  in 
imprint,  collation  or  series  need  not  be  considered  in  the  order  of 
entries. 

g  Call  numbers.  The  call  number  for  each  edition  is  given  at 
the  left  edge  of  the  card,  opposite  its  own  entry. 

h  Accession  numbers.  Accession  numbers  for  all  editions  cata- 
loged should  be  given  on  the  back  of  the  main  card  and  should  be 
distinguished;  as, 

1124    ed.  7  1848  Edin. 

or  or 

1956    "     9  1865  Lond. 

While  some  distinguishing  mark  should  be  given  with  the  acces- 
sion number  for  each  edition,  the  different  editions  on  a  card  do  not 
always  lend  themselves  to  the  same  treatment,  e.  g.  the  number  of 
the  edition  may  be  given  with  one  edition  and  a  publisher  or  series 
note  with  another. 

196 


ADDED  EDITIONS 

i  Author  card 


"7 


2se> 

H22 


livered 
1899 
dere 
&  N. 


H22& 


Harnaok,   Adolf,  1851- 

What  la  Christianity?   16  lectures  de- 

in  the  University  of  Berlin... 
-1900;   tr...by  Thomas -Bailey  Saun- 
3d  and  rev.ed.  Lond*   Williams 

1904cc,013 
306p.    19om.  (Crown  theological  li- 

brary) 


Same ;   2d  ed.rev.  N.'Y,  Putnam 


•1910,cioi3 

333p.    19om. 
brarjy) 


(Crown  theological  li- 


2  Subject  card 


233 
H22 


233 
422a 


Harnaok 


er 


liv 

1899 

ders 

&  N. 


brary) 


CHRISTIANITY. 

,   Adolf,  1851- 

What  is  Christianity?   16  lectures  de- 
ed in   the  University  of  Berlin. . . 
-1900;   tr...by  Thomas  Bailey  Saun- 
3d  and  rev.ed.  Lond,    Williams 

1904cc'01a 
306p.    19om.  (Crown  theological  11- 


Same;   2d  ed.rev. 
191<&,c,01a 

322p.    19cm. 
braiy) 


!*.Y.   Putnam 
(Crown  theological  li- 


7 


197 


ii7 


CATALOGING    RULES 


3  Translator  card 

The  entries  on  cards  3-4  are  designed  to  represent  a  case  where  il 
was  desirable,  on  making  the  second  entry,  to  distinguish  the  editions 
in  some  other  way  than  by  the  date.  The  edition  first  cataloged  was 
the  third,  while  the  added  edition  was  the  second,  but  the  third  edition 
was  published  in  1904,  while  the  copy  in  hand  of  the  second  edition,  as 
shown  on  the  back  of  the  title-page,  was  reprinted  in  1910,  from  an 
earlier  issue,  so  that  the  use  of  the  dates  would,  by  itself,  be  misleading. 
Consequently  on  the  short-entry  cards  a  note  of  the  edition  was  added 
to  the  entry  previously  made,  and  a  statement  of  the  edition  included  in 
the  title  for  the  added  entry,  in  order  to  show  the  actual  relation  of 
the  two  editions. 


1V5 

H22 

2^ 
H22a 

Ham 

Saunders,   Thomas  Bailey, 

tr. 
aok,   Adolf. 
What  is  Christianity? 

3d  ed. 

■  Same;   2d  ed.         r1910i 

1860- 
1904. 

4  Title  card 


1233 
tt22 


253 
H22a 


hat   is  Christianity? 
rlarnlaok,   Adolf. 


3d  ed. 

Same;    2d  ed,         c1910j 


1904, 


198 


INDEXES,    KEYS,    SUPPLEMENTS,    ATLASES,    PORTFOLIOS 


Il8 


INDEXES,  KEYS,  SUPPLEMENTS,  ATLASES  AND 

PORTFOLIOS 

118  Treated  like  added  editions.  a  Indexes  and  keys.  Sep- 
arately published  indexes  and  keys  are  to  be  treated  like  added 
editions,  with  the  dash  to  represent  the  original  author,  and  the 
word  Same  the  original  title,  these  being  followed  (generally  after 
a  comma)  by  the  additional  title  of  the  index  or  key,  including 
the  name  of  the  editor  or  compiler,  for  whom  an  added  entry  should 
be  made. 

b  Supplements.  Supplements  should  be  treated  in  the  same 
way  unless  so  distinct  as  to  fall  under  A.  L.  A.  rules,  14,  namely: 
Enter  a  continuation  which  is  in  the  form  of  an  independent  work 
with  separate  title,  whether  printed  with  the  original  or  not,  under 
the  name  of  its  own  author,  with  a  reference  from  the  author  of 
the  original  work.     (For  illustrations  see  A.  L.  A.  rules.) 

c  Atlases  and  portfolios.  An  atlas  or  portfolio,  which  has  a 
title  differing  from  that  of  the  main  work,  or  which  has  a  special 
editor  or  compiler,  may,  if  desired,  be  treated  like  a  supplement, 
as  an  alternative  to  the  method  suggested  in  15^(2)  and  \6e. 

Index,  with  main  entry  under  author 


KG4- 


KG4- 
v.o 


lein,    JiUliua,    Lcscpoldj  1810-187  6. 

Gescnichte  des  drama's.  Lpz.    Wei- 

gel,    1865-76. 

13v.in   15,    21cm. 


Same,  Register-band.  ..  bearb.  von  The- 
odor  Ebner.   "  Lpz.  Weigel,  1886. 
128p.  21om. 


v.O 


Ebner,  Theodor,    1856- 

3lQ«     J.L. 

Geaohiohte  des  drama's,   Register- 
band.  1886. 


ed. 


199 


"8  CATALOGING     RULES 

Index  and  supplement,  with  main  entry  under  title 
Hanging  indention 


032 
<*E5 


032. 

q,E5 
ru     v.o 


032. 
E5 


I 


v.  25-25 


Encyclopaedia  britannica;   a  dictionary  of 
arts,    sciences  arid  general  literature; 

9th  ed.'        Edin.    Black,    1875-S9. 
24v.    illus.   plates    (partly  col.), 
maps,  plans,    diagrs.    38-Joa. 

Samej.,    Index  to;   with  list  of   contributors 
and  key  to   their  initials.  Edin. 

Black,    18S9, 
499p.    28 Jem. 


Same);   New  American  supplement. ..  ed.  under 
...supervision  of  Day  Otis  Kellogg.., 
N.Y.   Werner/"^)  1900. 
5v.    illus.   V_y  ports,    maps,    37jca. 


03Z 

a  Es        Ency- 

1J      V.25-2T' 


Kellogg,    Day  Otis,  ed, 

clopaedia  britannica;    New  American 
supplement.  1900.  5v. 


(or) 


200 


INDEXES,    KEYS,    SUPPLEMENTS,   ATLASES,    PORTFOLIOS  n8 

Paragraph  indention;  treatment  as  for  anonymous  book 


032 


032 

q,L5 

0^2 

Q,E5 

Ml       v.  2.5-2 


under 
e 


2°  Kellogg 


Encyclopaedia  britannioa:   a  diction- 
siry  of  arts, ' scienoes  and  general  litera- 
ture!; 9th  ed.  Edin.    Black,    1875-89. 

24v.    illus.   platee   (partly  col.), 
aaps,   plans,   diagrs.    28|cm. 

Same,    Index  to;   with  li9t  of  cont rib- 
Ed  in, 


ators  and  key  to   their   initials. 
Black,    1889. 

499p.    28jcm. 


Same ;  New  American   supplement. .. eo. 

3 


r... super-    (\  vision  of  Day  Otis 
ogg. ..  v-^N.Y.   Werner.   1900. 


5v.    illus.   ports.   map3,    27-^cm. 


032 
%E5 


v.^5-^ 


Kellogg,   Day  Otis, 


ed. 


can 


Encyclopaedia  britannioa;   New  Ameri- 
supplement.  1900.  5v. 


201 


II9-I2I  CATALOGING     RULES 


PERIODICALS 

119  Definitions.  The  following  definitions  are  taken  from  the 
A.  L.  A.  rules,  pref.  p.  15-16. 

Periodical:  A  publication  intended  to  appear  in  successive 
numbers  or  parts  at  more  or  less  regular  intervals  and,  as  a  rule, 
for  an  indefinite  time.  Each  part  properly  contains  matter  on  a 
variety  of  topics,  generally  by  several  contributors. 

Newspapers,  and  the  Memoirs,  Proceedings,  Journals,  etc.  of  societies  are 
not  considered  regular  periodicals  under  the  rules. 

Serial:  A  publication  issued  in  successive  parts,  usually  at 
regular  intervals,  and,  as  a  rule,  intended  to  be  continued  indefinitely. 
Serials  include  periodicals,  annuals  (reports,  year-books,  etc.)  and 
memoirs,  proceedings  and  transactions  of  societies. 

120  General  treatment.  The  directions  given  below,  based  on 
A.  L.  A.  rules,  121,  are  designed  to  cover  the  main  features  of  the 
cataloging  of  periodicals.  More  detailed  specifications,  showing 
the  practice  of  the  catalog  division  of  the  Library  of  Congress, 
are  to  be  found  in  its  Guide  to  the  cataloguing  of  periodicals,  pre- 
pared by  Mary  Wilson  MacNair,  1918,  with  which  the  following 
directions  are  for  the  most  part  in  accord,  but  some  slight  differences 
have  here  been  adopted,  with  a  view  to  briefer  forms  or  because 
some  variation  seemed  better  adapted  to  manuscript  or  typewritten 
cards.  Tor  the  cataloger  in  whose  work  periodicals  constitute  an 
important  feature  the  Guide  mentioned  above  corresponds  to  those 
books  which  in  general  parlance  '"no  gentleman's  library  should 
be  without". 

121  Form  entry-  In  Cutter,  192,  it  is  suggested  that  "form 
entry"  be  made  under  Periodicals,  or  under  English  periodicals, 
French  periodicals,  etc.,  but  the  infrequency  with  which  the  users 
of  most  libraries  care  to  know  all  the  periodicals  in  a  library 
makes  this  policy  very  questionable  as  a  general  practice. 

In  a  small  library  a  list  of  the  periodicals  may  be  bulletined 
and  a  reference  to  this  made  in  the  catalog  under  the  heading 
Periodicals.  In  a  large  library  a  more  practical  method  would 
be  a  general  reference;  as, 


202 


PERIODICALS 


I2i-I24a(l) 


PERIODICALS. 

For  general  periodicals   3ee  their 
ie|s;   as,    Century  magazine 

For  periodicals  on  a  special  subject 
3e e  name  of   that   subject,    subhead  PERI- 
ODICALS;  as,    EDUCATION-  PERIODICALS 


122  Fulness  of  description.  The  many  variations  liable  to 
occur  among  the  different  volumes  of  a  serial  set  make  it  im- 
practicable to  give  as  minute  bibliographic  descriptions  for  pe- 
riodicals as  for  books  in  general,  while  the  wide  distribution  of 
periodicals  makes  their  contents  and  character  more  generally 
known  than  is  the  case  with  other  works,  and  a  full  and  exact  de- 
scription consequently  less  important. 

123  Groups.  Periodicals  may,  for  cataloging,  be  divided  into 
three  groups : 

a  Those  which  have  ceased  publication  and  of  which  the  library 
has  complete  sets 

For  these  the  cataloging  follows  the  same  general  plan  as  for  other 
books  in  several  volumes,  but  certain  exceptions  are  made  to  correspond 
to  the  treatment  required  for  current  periodicals  and  incomplete  sets, 
as  specified  below. 

b  Those  which  are  still  being  published,  and  of  which  the  library 
sets  are  complete  to  date 

c  Those  of  which  the  library  sets  are  incomplete,  either  period- 
icals which  have  ceased  publication  or  those  which  are  still  being 
published 

124  Complete  finished  sets,  a  Main  entry.  Make  the  main 
entry  under  the  title. 

(1)  Position.  Begin  on  the  top  line,  using  either  (a)  hang- 
ing indention,  following  the  form  given  on  the  Library  of  Congress 
cards,  or  (b)  paragraph  indention,  in  accordance  with  general 
earlier  usage. 

If  hanging  indention  is  used  begin  the  title  at  the  outer  indention, 
with  inner  indention  for  all  subsequent  lines  of  the  entry. 

If  paragraph  indention  is  preferred  begin  the  title  at  the  second 
indention,  coming  back  to  the  outer  indention  for  subsequent  lines 
of  title  and  imprint. 


203 


I24a(i)-(2)(c)  CATALOGING     RULES 

This  second  form,  using  regular  title  indention,  corresponds  for  the 
main  entry  to  the  treatment  of  anonymous  books  with  author  unknown, 
except  that  the  entry  begins  on  the  top  line,  a  divergence  justified  by  the 
fact  that  for  periodicals  not  only  will  no  author's  name  ever  be  filled  in, 
but  periodicals  constitute  a  large  class  of  publications  and  it  seems 
undesirable  to  lose  needlessly  the  use  of  the  top  line  for  so  many  entries. 

(2)  Titl  e.  As  variations  are  likely  to  occur  on  the  title-pages 
of  different  volumes  it  simplifies  the  cataloging  to  include  on  the 
cards  for  all  periodicals  only  those  parts  of  the  title  which  are 
really  important,  either  as  standing  out  prominently  in  the  title 
proper  or  as  showing  the  scope  of  the  work.  The  latter  point  may 
often  be  covered  by  a  condensation  of  the  descriptive  part  of  the 
title. 

With  complete,  finished  sets  the  cataloger  has  before  him  all  the 
title-page  variations  which  must  be  taken  into  account,  and,  with  this 
definite  knowledge  of  the  facts,  can  shorten  the  title  more  to  his  satis- 
faction than  when  dealing  with  possibilities,  but  it  is  convenient  to 
have  the  same  general  rules  cover,  as  far  as  possible,  both  finished  and 
unfinished  sets,  and  it  is  with  this  in  mind  that  these  directions  have 
been  prepared.  As  a  general  principle,  omissions  from  the  title  should 
be  made  as  freely  as  may  be  done  without  the  loss  of  any  information 
which  is  of  real  value  as  a  part  of  the  title. 

(a)  Frequency  of  publication.  When  the  frequency  of  publica- 
tion is  given  as  an  integral  part  of  the  title  proper  (e.  g.  Quarterly 
journal  of  economics,  or  Atlantic  monthly)  and  not  merely  as  a 
descriptive  term,  it  is  necessary  to  retain  it,  but  otherwise  it  is  better 
to  omit  it  from  the  title  and  give  it  in  a  note,  as  this  is  a  detail 
very  liable  to  change.  When  there  is  a  change  in  the  frequency  of 
publication  of  a  periodical  which  includes  this  as  an  integral  part 
of  the  title,  the  case  comes  under  the  treatment  for  "Changed  titles", 
given  below,  as  section  131. 

(b)  Editors.  For  editors  also  it  is  better  to  omit  the  names  from 
the  title  and  give  in  a  note  instead. 

(c)  Dates  covered  by  volumes.  It  is  well  to  give  in  the  title 
on  the  cards  for  periodicals  which  have  ceased  publication  and  of 
which  the  library  sets  are  complete,  the  inclusive  dates  covered 
from  beginning  to  end  of  publication,  supplying  these  dates  in 
brackets  when  not  given  on  the  title-page.  If  dates  are  given  on 
either  the  first  or  last  volume  and  not  on  the  other  the  missing  date 
should  be  supplied  in  brackets.  If  the  dates  used  do  not  coincide 
with  the  beginning  and  end  of  the  years  it  is  desirable  to  include 
the  names  of  the  months  in  this  title-date  statement,  bracketing  if 
not  given  on  the  title-page. 

204 


PERIODICALS  1243(2)  (d)-(4)  (a) 

(d)  Abbreviations  for  months.  For  names  of  months  the  com- 
mon abbreviations  should  be  used. 

O)  Information  supplied  or  omitted.  If  information  is  actually 
supplied  in  the  title,  e.  g.  the  name  of  the  month,  it  should  be 
bracketed,  but,  in  view  of  possible  variations  on  title-pages,  the  .  . . 
need  not  be  used  to  indicate  omissions. 

(3)  Imprint.  Give  place  and  publisher  as  usual,  if  they 
remain  unchanged  throughout  the  set. 

(a)  Place  changed.  Changes  in  place  of  publication  are  less 
frequent  than  changes  in  publisher,  for  which  directions  are  given 
below  under  "(b)  Publisher  changed",  which  rules  may  be  adapted, 
as  far  as  needed,  to  changes  in  place. 

(b)  Publisher  changed.  When  a  set  is  published  by  a  firm  which 
has  changed  its  name,  the  name  may  be  given  as  in  the  first  volume, 
followed  by  [etc.]  or  if  there  has  been  only  one  change  of  name, 
both  forms  may  be  given,  as  "Jansen,  McClurg  &  co.  (later  A.  C. 
McClurg  &  co.)" 

When  a  set  has  had  two  publishers,  both  names  may  be  given,  as 
for  Galaxy:  "W.  C.  &  F.  P.  Church,  1866-68;  Sheldon  &  co. 
1868-70,"  or  the  first  or  the  more  important  may  be  given  in  the 
imprint,  and  the  other  mentioned  in  a  note. 

If  desired  this  method  may  be  extended  to  include  more  than  two 
publishers  in  the  imprint. 

When  a  set  has  had  several  publishers,  the  first  or  most  important 
may  be  given  in  the  imprint  and  a  note  added  "Several  changes 
of  publisher,"  or  the  variant  publishers  may  be  specified  in  the  note. 

(c)  Imprint  dates.  Imprint  dates  and  copyright  dates  are  to 
be  given  for  finished,  complete  sets,  as  for  any  other  set  of  books ; 
i.  e.  the  first  and  last  dates  should  be  given,  connected  by  a  dash. 
When  neither  imprint  nor  copyright  dates  are  given,  dates  are  to  be 
supplied  in  brackets,  in  agreement  with  the  publication  of  the  end 
of  the  first  and  last  volumes. 

(4)  Collation.  The  collation  is  given  in  its  regular  place, 
on  the  line  below  the  imprint,  at  the  second  indention. 

(0)  Volumes.  For  a  finished  periodical  of  which  the  library 
has  a  complete  set  the  statement  of  volumes  is  given  in  the  same 
form  as  for  any  other  work ;  e.  g.  27v.  or  18v.  in  36. 

If  the  periodical  ceased  publication  with  the  first  volume,  the 
volume  number  may  be  given,  followed  by  the  number  of  pages.; 
e.  g.  v.l,  461  p. 

205 


I24a(4)(b)-(5)(c)  CATALOGING    RULES 

(b)  Illustrations.  Illustrations  are  indicated  only  when  the 
magazine  is  generally  illustrated.  Kinds  of  illustrations  need  not 
ordinarily  be  distinguished,  all  being  included  under  the  term  "illus". 

Exceptions  may  in  rare  instances  be  made  where  the  distinct  kind  is 
important  as  such,  e.  g.  the  plates  in  some  specially  fine  scientific  or  art 
periodical,  or  the  maps  in  a  geographic  magazine. 

(c)  Size.  If  the  volumes  of  a  set  are  all  of  the  same  size,  this 
may  be  given  as  usual,  e.  g.  26cm. ;  but  if  there  have  been  variations 
it  is  better  to  give  extreme  sizes  only,  e.  g.  26-30cm.,  unless  there 
has  been  but  one  change,  in  which  case  a  more  specific  statement 
may  be  made,  e.  g.  v.  1-7,  24cm.;  v.8-19,  27cm.;  or,  for  a  noncontin- 
uous  variation,  28cm.  (v. 3,  7-10,  29cm.) 

For  many  libraries  it  will  be  more  practical  to  omit  the  size  entirely 
for  periodicals,  even  if  used  for  other  books. 

(5)  Notes.  (a)  Order  of  arrangement.  The  following 
order  is  prescribed  by  A.  L.  A.  rules,  121:  (i)  frequency  of  pub- 
lication; (?)   important  variations  of  title;  (3)   successive  editors; 

(4)  important  changes  of  place  of  publication  and  of  publisher; 

(5)  indexes,  supplements  etc.  unless  entered  separately. 

1  Frequency  of  publication.  The  frequency  of  publication  should 
always  be  given  in  a  note  except  when  retained  in  the  title. 

2  Variations  in  title.  Where  "important  variations"  are  indicated  above, 
the  Library  of  Congress  phrase  "Title  varies"  or  "Title  varies  slightly"  may 
be  used  to   cover  minor  changes. 

3  End  of  publication.  In  addition  to  the  items  specified  above,  for 
finished  periodicals  (generally  after  all  other  notes)  should  be  mentioned 
the  discontinuance,  e.  g.  "Publication  suspended" 1  (with  the  date)  or 
"Merged  in"  or  "Incorporated  with"  or  "Superseded  by"  (with  the  name 
of  the  other  periodical  and  the  date).  In  notes  referring  to  another 
periodical  in  the  library  the  call  number  of  the  periodical  referred  to  should 
be  included  with  the  title. 

(b)  Indention.  Regular  paragraph  indention  is  generally  used 
but  in  some  cases,  if  the  information  runs  over  the  line,  a  further 
deep  indention  may  be  employed  to  allow  the  use  of  ditto  marks 
for  the  phrase  common  to  the  group,  thereby  making  these  notes 
stand  out  clearly  as  a  group  (see  sample  card  7  below). 

(c )  Items  combined.  Occasionally  some  of  the  conditions  noted 
occur  simultaneously ;  e.  g.  changes  of  title,  editor,  place  of  pub- 


1  The  phrase  "Publication  suspended"  is  recommended  in  preference  to 
"Discontinued"  or  "Ceased  publication"  as  being  better  fitted  to  the  case  if 
the  publication  is  after  an  interval  resumed,  the  note  being,  under  those 
circumstances,  amplified  by  adding  a  dash  and  the  year  (or  the  month  and 
year)   immediately  preceding  the  resumption  of  publication. 

206 


PERIODICALS  l24a(5)(c)-(7) 

lication  and  publisher.     In  such  cases  the  facts  may,  when  thought 
advisable,  be  combined  in  a  single  note. 

(6)  Indexes,  (a)  Separate  entry.  Though  provision  is 
made  under  "notes"  for  "indexes,  supplements  etc.  unless  entered 
separately",  it  is  generally  best  when  an  index  covers  more  than 
one  volume  to  enter  it  separately,  after  such  other  notes  as  are  in- 
dicated above,  following  the.  plan  for  added  editions.  This  holds  true, 
even  if  the  index,  instead  of  occupying  an  entire  unnumbered 
volume,  as  is  generally  the  case,  occupies  either  a  volume  regularly 
numbered  in  the  set  or  only  part  of  a  volume. 

(b)  Method.  Use  the  word  Same  to  represent  the  title  of 
the  periodical,  as  is  done  for  titles  in  the  case  of  added  editions. 
Then,  after  a  comma,  give  the  title  of  the  index,  with  (for  an  index 
occupying  a  separate  volume)  full  imprint  and  full  collation,  ac- 
cording to  the  rules  for  any  other  separate  work,  using  (in  exact 
work)  ...  and  brackets  according  to  regular  rules.  For  an  index 
occupying  only  part  of  a  volume  use  a  brief  analytic  form,  as  shown 
in  sample  1  below.  The  name  of  the  periodical,  being  represented 
by  the  word  Same,  need  not  generally  be  repeated  in  the  title  of  the 
index.  This  omission  need  not  be  indicated  by  . .  .  unless  the 
phrasing  seems  less  awkward  with  these  than  with  what  would 
otherwise  be  used  to  represent  the  inverted  arrangement,  e.  g. 
"Same,  General  index  to;  from  the  20th  to  the  40th  volumes"  or 
"Same,  General  index  . . .  from  the  20th  to  the  40th  volumes". 

^  Successive  indexes  follow  one  another  like  different  added 
editions,  the  notes  about  any  individual  index  following  that  indi- 
vidual entry. 

Indexes  printed  elsewhere.  If  an  index  to  a  set  or  a  part  of  a  set  is 
known  to  have  appeared  elsewhere,  it  should,  if  in  the  library,  be  cataloged 
with  the  other  indexes  to  the  set,  in  the  regular  place  called  for  by  the 
volumes  covered.  If  it  is  not  in  the  library,  as  definite  information  as  is 
available  regarding  it  should  be  given  in  a  note  in  the  place  for  the  index. 

The  call  number  for  the  index,  including  the  volume  number, 
is  written  in  the  margin,  opposite  the  index  entry,  as  for  an  added 
edition. 

(7)  Supplements.  For  a  supplement  consisting  of  a 
monograph,  the  main  entry  is  made  under  the  author  of  the  mono- 
graph, with  the  title  of  the  periodical  given  as  a  series  note  and  with 
an  added  entry  under  the  title  of  the  periodical  in  the  form  of  a 
series  card. 

For  illustrations  see  the  Library  of  Congress'  Guide  to  the  cataloguing  of 
Periodicals. 

207 


I24a(7)-b(3)(b)  CATALOGING    RULES 

For  supplements  not  consisting  of  monographs  it  is  generally 
sufficient  (when  they  are  important  enough  to  call  for  any  notice) 
to  mention  them  in  notes  on  the  main  card  for  the  periodical,  with- 
out making  separate  entries. 

b  Added  entries  for  subjects,  editors  etc.  (1)  Importanc  e. 
Subject  cards  should  be  made  for  periodicals,  as  for  other  publica- 
tions, when  they  deal  with  a  distinct  subject. 

Editor  cards  are  of  little  value  except  in  the  library  which 
attempts  to  keep  a  complete  record  of  what  it  has  of  the  person's 
literary  work,  or  in  cases  where  the  editor's  name  is  prominently 
associated  with  the  periodical. 

When  the  periodical  is  the  organ  of  a  society  or  other  body  an 
entry  is  generally  made  under  the  name  of  the  body,  in  the  form  of 
a  general  secondary  entry,  a  note  being  given  on  both  the  main 
card  and  the  general  secondary  card,  to  show  the  relation. 

(2)  Position.  Writing  the  heading  for  the  subject,  editor 
etc.  in  its  regular  place  on  the  top  line  at  the  second  indention, 
begin  the  title  of  the  periodical  on  the  following  line  at  the  outer 
indention.  If  hanging  indention  is  used  on  the  main  card,  it  is 
also  used  correspondingly  on  the  secondary  cards.  If,  on  the  main 
card,  paragraph  indention  is  used,  on  the  secondary  cards  the  first 
line  of  the  title  is,  like  the  subsequent  lines,  drawn  back  to  the 
first  indention,  which  is  at  variance  with  the  form  on  the  main  card, 
but  which  has  the  double  advantage  of  bringing  the  title  into  a  more 
prominent  position  than  if  it  had  the  same  indention  as  the  heading 
and  of  avoiding  the  awkward  appearance  which  results  from  having 
the  heading  and  the  item  on  the  following  line  begin  at  the  same 
indention. 

The  alternative  to  this  second  form,  covering  the  same  points,  would  be 
the  omission  of  one  line  after  the  heading,  with  the  second  indention  for 
the  title  entry,  but  this  results  in  dropping  the  entry  one  line  and  the  advan- 
tages seem  to  be  greater  with  the  method  outlined  above. 

(3)  For  m.  (a)  Subject  cards.  The  title,  imprint,  collation, 
notes  and  indexes  are  given  on  the  subject  cards  for  finished 
complete  sets  as  on  the  main  card,  subject  to  such  differences  in 
title  and  notes  as  might  occur  with  other  books. 

(b)  Editor  cards.  Give  the  editor's  name  according  to  the  usual 
rules,  bracketing  such  parts  as  do  not  appear  on  the  title-pages. 

Variations  on  title-pages.  If  variations  occur  on  different  title-pages 
do  not  bracket  parts  which  occur  on  any  of  the  title-pages. 

Use  a  short  title,  inclusive  imprint  dates  for  volumes  covered  by 
the  editorship  represented  by  the  card,   and  the   inclusive  volume 

208 


PERIODICALS  i24b(3)(b)-l27 

numbers,  as  v.  1-9,  unless  the  editorship  covers  the  entire  set,  when, 
instead  of  inclusive  volume  numbers,  the  total  number  of  volumes 
is  given,  as  9v. 

Editorship  not  continuous.  If  the  editorship  was  not  continuous,  e.  g. 
if  the  editor's  work  was  for  v.7-12  and  18-24,  give  only  the  extremes  of 
the  imprint  dates  but  an  exact  statement  of  the  volumes,  using  the  inclusive 
form  for  the  separate  groups,  e.  g.  1892-1900.   v.7-12,  18-24. 

(c)  General  secondary  cards.  Follow  in  general  the  same  plan 
as  for  editor  cards,  in  (b)  above,  but  include  in  the  title  or  in  a 
note  such  additional  information  as  may  be  needed  to  account  for 
the  special  entry. 

125  Call  numbers.  Call  numbers  should  be  given  in  their 
usual  place,  for  all  entries,  and  when  applying  to  only  part  of  a 
set,  as  for  the  editor  of  part  of  a  set,  the  inclusive  volume  numbers 
for  the  exact  volumes  covered  should  be  included  in  the  call 
number. 

This  rule  for  the  inclusion  of  volume  numbers  should  not,  on  the  ground 
that  the  library  has  only  part  of  the  volumes,  be  applied  on  main  cards  and 
subject  cards  for  incomplete  sets  (section  129  below),  or  on  other  cards  for 
incomplete  sets  when  all  the  volumes  which  are  in  the  library  are  included 
in  the  entry. 

a  Brackets.  Brackets  are  not  to  be  used  for  volume  numbers 
in  call  numbers,  even  when  they  are  used  in  the  collation  (i.  e.  when 
they  are  not  furnished  by  the  volumes  to  which  they  apply). 

126  Accession  numbers.  For  a  periodical  which  ceased  pub- 
lication after  a  fewr  volumes  the  accession  numbers  may  be  given 
in  their  usual  place,  followed  by  the  volume  numbers. 

For  a  set  where  there  are  many  accession  numbers,  instead 
of  specifying  these  numbers  it  is  better  to  write  in  their  place 
"See  shelflist." 

127  Capitalization.    For  capitalization  follow  A.L.A.  rules,  r?2. 


209 


124-127 


CATALOGING    RULES 


Sample  cards 

1-4  Complete  finished  set;  hanging  indention 
1  Alain  card 


3G0.5 
C47 


Charjities  review,    Nov.  1891-Feb.  1901. 

N.Y.   Charity  organization  society  of 
the  city  of  New  York  c1392-19013 
lOv.    illu3.    33-24cra. 

Monthly . 

v.1-5  ed.by  J:H. Finley. 
v.  3     "   J :H. Finley  and  P.L.Ford, 
v.  6-7  -  n   F:H. Wines. 
v.  8-10   n   H.S.Brown. 
v.1-5,  organ  of  the  Charity  organi- 
society  of  the  city  of  New  *York; 
organ  of  the  National  conference  of 

O 

V_y  See  next   card 


zatipn 
<r.5, 


3G0.5 

ahar 

3 
ities  and  correction. 

C47 

v.8-10  published  by  Charities  review. 
Publication   suspended  July  1896-Feb. 

1897 

Absorbed  Lend  a  hand   (360.5  L56)    in 

Mar. 

1897. 

Merged  in  Charities   (360.5  C472")    in 

lax. 

1901. 

3G0.5 
C47 

Same 

,    Index,   v.1-10.          (In  v. 10,  p. 601- 
615) 

v.  10 

Index  for  v. 1-8  appeared  in  v. 8, 

d.56 

9-- 580;    for    f)v.l-9  in  v.  9,  p.582- 

595. 

V_> 

210 


PERIODICALS 


124-127 


2  Subject  card 


3Q>0.5 
C47 


CHARITIES  -  PERIODICALS. 
Charities  review,    Nov.  1891-Feb. 1901. 

M.Y.    Charity  organization  society  of 
the  city  of  New  York  c1892-19013 
lOv.    illue.    33-24cm. 

Monthly. 

v. 1-5  ed.by  J:H.  Finley. 
v,3  "       J :H. Finley  and  P.L.Ford. 

v.6-7        "        F:H.  Wines. 
v.8-10      "        H.S.Brown. 
v.1-5,    organ  of  the  Charity  organi-' 
zation  sooiety  of  the  city  of  New  York: 

O 

^S  See  next  card 


C47 


3GG.5 
C47 


V.  10 


v.5,    organ  of   the  National  conference  of 
charities  and  correction. 

v.8-10  published  by  Charities  review. 

Publication   suspended  July  1896-Feb. 


189? 

tfar. 


Absorbed  Lend  a  hand   (360.5  L56)    in 
1897. 

Merged  in   Charities   (360.5  C472)    in 
?'ar.  1901. 


Same 


,    Index,  y.1-10. 
S15) 


(In  v.10,   p. 601- 


Index  for 
0. 5^9-580;    for 
595. 


Ov.1-3  appeared  in. v. 8, 
v.1-9   in  v.9,   p.532- 


3  Editor  card 


3G0.5 
C47 

v.  1-5 


cFinley,  John  Hu3ton3  1863- 

ed. 
Chaijities  review.         c1892-9  63         v.1-5, 


(Similar  cards  should  be  made  for  Paul  Leicester  Ford,   for  v.3;   for 
Frederick  Howard  Wines,  for  v.6-7;  and  for  Herbert  S.  Brown,  for  v.8-10.) 


211 


124-127 


CATALOGING     RULES 
4  General  secondary  card 


3Q>O.S  Icharity  organization  society  of   the 

C47  oity  of  Hew  York. 

v.l-5  Charjities  review.         c1892-963  v.  1-5. 

Through  the  first  five  volumes  the 
Charities  review  was  the  organ  of  this 
society. 


(A   similar  card   should   be   made   for  National   conference  of  charities 
and  correction,   for  v.5.) 

(or) 
5-6    Complete    finished    set;   paragraph   indention 

5  Main  card 


3G0.5 
C4! 


za 
V.5, 


Charities  review,  Nov. 1891-Feb. 1901. 
N.Y.  Charity  organization  society  of  the 

city]  of  :Jew  York  c189£-1901j 
lOv.    illus.    23-24cm. 

Llonthly. 

v.l-5  ed.by  JrH.Finley. 
v.  3     "   JrH.Finley  and  P.L.Ford. 
v.6-7   n   F:H.  Wines. 
v.8-10   ■   H.S.Brown. 
v.l-5,  organ  of  the  Charity  organi- 
;i|on  sooiety  of  the  oity  of  New  York; 
organ  of  the  National  conference  of 


See  next  card 


(Extension  card  same  as    for  sample  I  above) 


212 


PERIODICALS 
6  Subject  card 


i24-i28a(2)(a) 


5^0.5 

IC4-7 


CHARITIES-  PERIODICALS. 
Charities  review,    Nov. 1891-Feb. 1901. 
N.Y.    Charity  organization   society  of   the 
city  of  New  York  c1392-19013 

lOv.  illus.  23-24cm. 

Monthly. 

7.1-5  ed.by  J:H.Flnley. 
v.3     "   J iH.Finley  and  P.L.Ford. 
v.  6-7   n   F:H. Wines, 
v.3-10   n   H.S.Brown. 
v. 1-5,  organ  of  the  Charity  organi- 
zation society  of  the  city  of  New  York; 

v_y        See  next  card 


(Extension  card  same  as  for  sample  2  above) 
Editor  cards  and  general  secondary  cards 

(Editor  cards  and  general  secondary  cards  would  in  this  case  be  identical 
with  the  editor  and  general  secondary  cards  for  hanging  indention  (see 
cards  3-4  above),  but  if  the  entry  for  the  periodical  ran  over  the  line  it 
would  with  hanging  indention  follow  the  indention  given  for  the  subject 
in  sample  card  2,  while  for  paragraph  indention  it  would  follow  that  shown 
in  sample  card  6.) 

128  Complete  current  sets,  a  Main  entry.  The  treatment  of 
periodicals  still  being  published,  of  which  the  library  sets  are  com- 
plete to  date,  follows  in  general  the  same  plan  as  for  complete 
finished  sets,  but  calls  for  the  following  variations. 

(1)  Title.  While  the  cataloger  of  the  complete  finished  set 
has  at  hand  all  the  variations  to  be  considered  the  cataloger  of  the 
current  publication  must  consider  also  the  possibilities  of  future 
changes  and  be  specially  on  guard  against  retaining  unimportant 
phrases. 

(a)  Dates  covered.  In  the  title  should  be  given  in  ink  the  date 
of  the  beginning  of  the  first  volume,  followed  by  a  dash  and,  in 
pencil,  the  date  of  the  end  of  the  latest  volume  cataloged. 

When  a  periodical  ceases  publication  the  final  date  should  be  filled 
in,  in  ink. 

(2)  Imprint,  (a)  Place  and  publisher.  Place  and  publisher, 
as  long  as  unchanged,  are  given  as  usual.  In  the  case  of  a  change 
in  place  or  publisher  the  first  or  most  important  may  be  used,  but 


213 


I28a(2)(a)-(3)(c)  CATALOGING    RULES 

if  the  current  place  or  publisher  is  not  the  one  given  in  the  imprint 
it  should  be  furnished  in  a  note  (added  to  any  statement  which  is 
made  regarding  earlier  changes  of  place  or  publisher)  with  the 
date  from  which  it  was  connected  with  the  publication ;  e.  g.  "Pub- 
lished in  Boston,  1899-date"  ;  or  "Published  by  the  International 
magazine  company,  1897-datc" ;  or  "Published  in  Chicago  by  Field, 
Brown  &  co.  June  1903-date'' ;  the  word  "date"  being  written  in 
pencil.  In  case  of  further  change,  such  a  statement  as  any  of  those 
given  above  should  be  closed  by  substituting  for  the  penciled  word 
"date"  the  actual  date  in  ink,  and  the  note  extended  by  an  additional 
corresponding  statement  giving  the  later  information. 

(b)  Date.  The  imprint  date  (and  copyright  date,  if  different) 
for  the  first  volume  may  be  given  in  ink,  followed  by  a  dash  and, 
in  pencil,  the  imprint  date  of  the  latest  volume  cataloged. 

i  Copyright  dates.  A  copyright  date  in  addition  to  this  penciled 
imprint  date  is  best  omitted,  as  its  value  is  too  slight  to  warrant  its  change 
with  each  successive  change  of  imprint,  but  the  final  imprint  date  should  be 
given  in  ink  if  the  periodical  ceases  publication,  and  the  final  copyright  date 
may  then  be  added. 

2  Omission  of  imprint  dates.  Since  dates  are  given  in  the  title  they 
may  be  omitted  from  the  imprint  if  desired,  thus  lessening  the  number  of 
items  to  be  changed. 

(3)  Collation,  (a)  Volumes.  The  statement  of  volumes 
should  be  given  in  inclusive  form,  e.  g.  v.1-24.  If  in  the  individual 
library  it  is  considered  of  sufficient  importance  that  the  volume 
statement  for  a  periodical  originally  cataloged  as  current  should, 
in  case  of  discontinuance,  take  the  regular  form  (e.  g.  27v.)  the 
original  inclusive  statement  should  be  entirely  in  pencil  in  order 
to  render  the  change  easier,  but  if  that  feature  is  not  specially 
desired  the  first  part  of  the  statement  (i.  e.  "v.l-")  may  be  given 
in  ink,  and  merely  the  volume  number  following  the  dash  be  given 
in  pencil,  this  being  the  part  subject  to  continual  change. 

If  the  second  method  is  followed  the  final  volume  number  should,  in 
case  the  publication  of  the  periodical  is  suspended,  also  then  be  given  in  ink. 

(b)  Illustrations.  For  illustrations  the  same  rules  apply  as 
for  complete  finished  sets,  section  \24a(4)(b)  above. 

(c)  Size.  In  view  of  the  liability  to  changes  in  size  it  is 
recommended  that  this  item  (if  given  at  all)  be  in  pencil,  even  if 
at  the  time  of  the  original  cataloging  there  has  been  no  variation ; 
also  that  in  case  of  variation,  only  the  extremes  be  given  (e.  g.  26- 
^ocm.)  without  attempting  a  specification  of  volumes  except  when 

214 


PERIODICALS  l28a(3)(c)-b(3) 

the  change  of  size  is  such  as  to  divide  the  set  on  the  shelves  (e.  g. 
v.1-8,  22cm.;  v.p-17,  28cm.)  In  such  an  instance  as  the  latter  the 
first  part  of  the  statement  may  be  given  in  ink. 

(4)  Notes.  For  notes  the  same  general  rules  should  be  fol- 
lowed as  for  complete  finished  sets  (section  124a(5)  above)  but  to 
allow  for  adding  information  of  the  same  kind  as  already  presented 
in  any  note  (i.  e.  frequency  of  publication,  names  of  editors,  changes 
in  title,  place  or  publisher,  etc.)  it  is  advisable  to  leave  space.  In 
general  it  would  be  better  to  give,  of  the  notes,  only  the  frequency 
of  publication  on  the  first  card.  If  the  other  notes  are  begun  on  a 
second  card  and  two  lines  or  more  are  left  between  the  kinds,  the 
number  being  determined  by  the  nature  of  the  individual  case  and 
the  judgment  of  the  cataloger,  the  rewriting  of  the  cards  may  often 
be  long  deferred.  The  numbering  of  the  cards  (at  the  top)  should 
preferably  be  in  pencil  to  permit  the  intercalation  of  cards  if 
desirable. 

(5)  Indexes.  Indexes  should  (in  the  same  form  as  for 
complete  finished  sets,  section  124a(6)  above)  be  cataloged  on 
a  separate  card,  to  be  filed  after  the  cards  for  miscellaneous  notes. 

b  Added  entries  for  subjects,  editors  etc.  (1)  Importance 
and  position.  For  importance  and  position  of  entry  see  sec- 
tion 124&(l)-(2)  above. 

(2)  Subject.  For  subject  cards  the  entries  may  be  made  to 
correspond  in  full  to  the  main  card,  involving  alteration  with  each 
added  volume  or,  if  it  is  felt  that  this  change  on  the  subject  cards, 
in  addition  to  the  main  cards,  involves  too  great  an  expenditure  of 
time,  a  reference  method  of  treatment  may  be  substituted  as  fol- 
lows :  Under  the  subject  heading,  give  a  short  title  and,  in  place  of 
the  other  facts  given  on  the  main  card,  write  or  stamp  the  note 
(omitting  one  line  after  the  title)  "For  full  statement  of  volumes  in 
library  see  card  beginning"  (adding  the  entry  words  for  the  main 
card,  making  the  reference  full  enough  for  identification  to  be 
reasonably  sure  and  easy). 

(3)  Editor  cards,  general  secondary  cards 
etc.  Editor  cards,  general  secondary  cards  etc.  would  in  cases 
where  the  person's  or  institution's  relation  to  the  periodical  had 
ceased,  be  treated  as  complete  (as  in  sample  cards  3-4  above).  In 
cases  where  the  relation  is  still  current  the  imprint  date  and  volume 


215 


I28b(3)-e  CATALOGING    RULES 

number  for  the  first  volume  concerned  should  be  given  in  ink1  and 
the  corresponding  imprint  date  and  volume  number  of  the  latest 
volume  cataloged  be  given  in  pencil  or,  if  preferred,  in  order  to 
save  repeated  changes,  instead  of  the  imprint  date  and  volume 
number  of  the  latest  volume,  the  word  "date"  (in  pencil)  may  be 
substituted  for  each  of  these  items,  a  change  being  made  only  when 
the  person's  or  institution's  relation  to  the  periodical  ceases,  the 
statements  then  being  closed  by  exact  statements  of  the  facts. 

Relation  not  continuous.  For  treatment  when  the  relation  of  the 
person  or  institution  has  not  been  continuous  see  note  under  124^(3)  (b). 

(a)  Brackets.  If,  at  the  time  of  the  original  cataloging,  parts 
of  the  editor's  name  did  not  appear  on  any  of  the  title-pages  at 
hand  and  were  therefore  bracketed  it  is  not  important  that  the 
brackets  be  removed  if  they  appear  on  later  title-pages. 

c  Call  numbers.    When  volume  numbers  for  the  latest  volumes 
of  a  current  set  are  to  be  indicated  in  the  call  number,  write  the 
number  of  the  first  volume  concerned,   followed  by  a  dash,  e.  g. 
051 
L25 

v.23- 

See  also  section  125  above. 

d  Accession  numbers.  For  a  current  set,  instead  of  specifying 
the  accession  numbers  it  is  better  to  write  in  their  place  "See 
shelflist". 

e  Periodical  no  longer  received.  If  the  library  is  no  longer 
receiving  a  periodical  still  being  published  and  previously  cataloged 
as  complete  it  is  unnecessary  to  change  the  cards  (except  for  such 
statements  as  may,  e.  g.  for  editors,  be  made  to  "date")  since 
where  the  exact  dates  and  volume  numbers  of  the  volumes  cataloged 
are  given  the  essential  facts  appear.  If,  after  an  interval,  the 
periodical  is  again  received,  it  may  then  be  cataloged  according  to 
section  129. 


1  When  the  statement  begins  with  v.i,  if  it  is  thought  important  that 
in  case  the  person's  or  institution's  relation  to  the  periodical  should  cover 
the  entire  existence  of  the  periodical  the  volume  statement  should  take  the 
regular  form,  e.  g.  yv.  instead  of  v.1-7,  the  "v.i"  should  be  given  in 
pencil,  but  (specially  in  the  case  of  persons)  this  would  happen  with  such 
comparative  in  frequency  as  to  be  hardly  worth  considering. 


216 


PERIODICALS 


128 


Sample  cards 

7-1 1  Complete   current   set;  hanging  indention 

7  Main  card 


005 


Engl* 


sh  historical  revise,    1886-  \9Y^. 
Lond.    Longmans,    1886-  13^ 
v.l-  S43   25^  e^. 

(Quarterly. 


o 


See  next  card 


305 
^5 


v.  1-5  ed.by  Handell  Creighton. 
v. 6     H   Mandell  Creighton,  S:R. 
Gardiner  and  R.L.Poole. 
S:R. Gardiner  and  R.L. 

Poole. 
R.L.Poole. 


v.7-16     " 
7.17-tUsL" 


o 


See  next  oard 


217 


128 


CATALOGING     RULES 


305 
^     v.O, 

0.E5 

Same 

3 

,    General   index. .  .v.  1-20,    1586-1905... 
Lond.    Longmans,    1906. 
59p.    25-^-cm. 

,   v. 21-30,    1906-1915...          Lond.  Long- 
mans,   1916. 
75p.    25-^om. 

Same 

8  Subject  card 


505 
.E5 


HISTORY  -  PERIODICALS. 
English  historical  review. 

For  full  statement  of  volumes  in  li- 
brary see  card  beginning:  English  histor- 
ical review 


9-11  Editor   cards 


P£5 
5 

v.l-fc 


* 


Creighton,  Mandell, 
1843-1901,    ed. 
English  historical  review. 
v.1-6. 


bp   of  London, 
1886-91. 


305 


% 


£5 


v.O, 


"»«En 


Gardiner,    Samuel  Rrawson3        1829-1902, 
ed. 

gljish  historical  review.  1891-1901. 

hr.6-16. 


<b05 
^E5 


v.6- 


Poole,    Reginald  L^ane^  1857- 

3d. 

Engllish  historical  review.  1891- cucAjl.. 

v.  6-dsJLsL. 


218 


PERIODICALS 


128 


(or) 
12-16  Complete  current  set;  paragraph  indention 

12  Main  card 


SO  5 

Load 

English  historical  review,  1886-  13 IB. 
.  Longmans,  1886-  \°)l$. 
v.l-  34-,  2.5^ oyvx. 

Quarterly. 

V-^        See  next  card 

(Extension  cards  2-3  same  as  for  sample  7  above) 
13  Subject  card 


HISTORY  -  PERIODICALS, 
ah  historical  review. 

For  fall  statement   of  volumes  in  li- 
see  card  beginning:   English  hi3tor- 
review 


14-16  Editor  cards 


Creighton,    Mandell,  bp  of  London, 

1843-1901,  ed. 

ish  historical   review.  1886-91. 

6. 


219 


i28-i2ga(2) 


CATALOGING     RULES 


305 
E5 


I 


Gardiner,    Samuel  R,a77Son3       1829-1903, 
ed. 

v-6-,6Engll3h  historical  review.    1891-1901. 
vr.  6-16. 


305 


v.fe- 


Poole,   Reginald  Lrane3 
ed. 

Sngllish  historical  review. 
v»  6-^qJCsl. 


1857- 

1891-cWx. 


129  Incomplete  sets,  a  Main  entry.  (1)  Sets  slightly 
incomplete.  When  sets  are  only  slightly  incomplete  they 
may  be  cataloged  like  those  which  are  complete  (either  finished 
or  current  publications,  as  the  case  may  be)  except  for  the  fol- 
lowing details : 

(a)  Note  for  missing  parts.  The  missing  parts  should  be  ac- 
counted for  by  a  qualifying  penciled  note;  e.  g. 

Lacks : 


v.4  Jan.-June  1894 

v.9-10  July  1896-June  1897 

the  word  "Lacks"  being  written  two  lines  below  the  collation  at 
the  second  indention,  and  the  missing  parts  of  the  set  noted  in  a 
columned  statement  below,  beginning  at  the  first  indention. 

The  note  of  missing  volumes  (including  the  word  "Lacks")  should  be 
made  in  pencil,  in  order  that  the  record  may  be  more  easily  changed  or 
entirely  erased,  as  called  for  by  a  possible  gradual  completion  of  the  set. 

(b)  v.l  wanting.  If  v.l  is  wanting  it  is  better  to  substitute  in 
pencil  for  the  details  applicable  to  v.l  the  corresponding  details  for 
the  earliest  volume  cataloged;  i.  e.  in  the  title  the  date  of  the 
beginning  of  that  volume  and  in  the  imprint  and  collation  its  im- 
print date  and  volume  number,  the  inclusive  form  being  used  for 
the  volumes  in  the  collation,  even  if  the  periodical  has  ceased  pub- 
lication and  the  library  set  is  (except  for  v.l)  complete;  e.  g.  (in 
pencil)   v.2-14. 

(2)  Sets  decidedly  incomplete.  When  sets  are 
so  far  incomplete  that  the  methods  described  above  would  result  in 


220 


PERIODICALS  I2ga(2)-(2)(d) 

complicated  or  absurdly  contradictory  entries  the  situation  may  be 
simplified  by  the  use  of  a  "Library  has"  note  (see  (d)  below)  and 
by  the  omission  from  the  title,  imprint  and  collation,  of  the  title 
dates,  imprint  dates  and  volume  numbers,  the  necessary  information 
on  these  points  being  included  more  conveniently  and  satisfactorily 
in  the  "Library  has"  note. 

(a)  Place  and  publisher.  The  infinite  variety  of  possibilities 
in  dealing  with  incomplete  sets  makes  it  impractical  to  lay  down 
definite  rules  for  the  treatment  of  place  and  publisher.  From  a 
study  of  the  points  covered  in  sections  124a(3)  (a)-(b)  and  128a 
(2)  (a)  and  by  combining  the  points  most  suitable  for  the  work 
immediately  in  hand  that  method  should  be  worked  out  in  each 
individual  case  which  best  meets  that  special  need. 

(b)  Illustrations.  With  the  omission  of  the  volume  statement 
from  the  collation,  the  illustrations  (see  section  124a(4)  (b)  above) 
if  mentioned  become  the  first  item  in  the  group  and  as  such  should 
begin  with  a  capital. 

(c)  Size.     See  128a(3)(c). 

(d)  "Library  has"  statement.  On  the  main  card  for  a  set  so 
broken  that  in  the  cataloged  judgment  a  detailed  statement  of 
volumes  is   desirable  the   following  form  is   recommended: 

On  the  second  line  below  the  collation,  if  any  is  given  (otherwise 
on  the  second  below  the  imprint),  write  or  stamp  the  words 
"Library  has"  at  the  second  indention.  Follow  this  phrase  by  a 
columned  statement  of  the  volumes  actually  in  the  library,  giving, 
in  inclusive  form,  a  continuous  run  of  volume  numbers,  in  a  single 
block  (except  in  certain  of  those  instances  where  there  is  more 
than  one  series1  of  volume  numbers ;  see  paragraph  4  of  fine  print 
below),  followed  in  each  case  by  the  dates  covered  (using  title 
dates,  not  imprint  dates),  including  the  months,  unless  the  indi- 
vidual volume  corresponds  to  the  entire  calendar  year;  e.  g. 
v.i-2   Jan.-Dcc.  1892 

v.6-14   July  1894-Dec  1898 

v.  17-21    Jan.  ipoo-June  ip02 
v.25-46     Jan.   ipo.f-Dec.  igi.j 

» As  defined  in  A.  L.  A.  rules,  pref.  p.  16,  series,  paragraph  5:  Several 
successive  volumes  of  a  periodical  or  other  serial  publication  numbered 
separately  in  order  to  distinguish  them  from  preceding  or  following  volumes 
of  the  same  publication,  e.g.     Notes  and  queries,  1st  series,  2d  scries,  etc. 

221 


I2ga(2)(d)  CATALOGING     RULES 

More  than  one  series.  When  a  periodical  has  been  published  in  more 
than  one  series  give:  (i)  the  volume  numbers  actually  used  (generally  the 
continuous  voluming  of  the  set)  ;  (2)  in  curves,  the  designation  of  the 
special  series,  with  its  own  volume  numbers;  as  (ser.2,  v.1-10)  or  (new 
ser.  v.1-10)   or   (old  ser.  v.34-43)  ;    (3)   the  period  covered. 

As  the  term  "new  series"  may  be  used  on  the  title-page  for  more  than  one 
series  of  the  same  periodical  it  is  better  to  give  the  number  of  the  series 
when  known. 

If  the  periodical  index  used  in  the  library  refers  to  the  volume  numbers 
of  a  series  later  than  the  first,  adapt  the  cataloging  of  the  special  periodical 
to  the  usage  of  the  index;  e.  g.  v.1-10  (old  ser.v.34-43)  Jan.  1892-Dec.  1896. 

When  more  than  one  series  is  to  be  recorded  a  break  should  be  made 
in  the  enumeration  of  volumes  between  the  different  series,  even  though  there 
is  at  that  point  no  gap  in  the  library  set;  e.g. 

v.6-10  (2d  ser.  sv.)  May  1870-Oct.  1872 

v.11-19  (3d  ser.  v.1-9)  Nov.  1872-Apr.  1877 

In  this  illustration  the  volumes  in  the  2d  series  are  given  in  the  form 
"5v.",  because  they  constitute  the  whole  of  the  2d  series,  as  shown  by  the 
subsequent  statement,  in  which  the  following  volume  begins  the  3d  series. 
In  the  3d  series,  however,  v.  1-9  are  given  in  inclusive  form  because  the  3d 
series  continues  (or,  so  far  as  the  cataloger  knows,  may  continue)  beyond 
that  point. 

The  volume  groups  should  be  written  in  a  column,  beginning 
at  the  first  indention,  except  that  when  the  volumes  have  been  pub- 
lished in  only  one  series  and  the  enumeration  consists  merely  of 
these  volume  numbers,  followed  by  the  years,  a  second  column  can 
generally  be  given  on  the  card. 

Write  the  entire  enumeration  (except  for  v.l  or,  in  cases  where 
the  special  conditions  seem  to  justify  it,  the  final  volumes)  in  pencil, 
in  order  to  facilitate  changes  as  volumes  are  added ;  also  where 
several  volumes  are  missing,  leave  space  between  groups  according 
to  judgment,  as  volumes  coming  in  may  not  be  continuous  with 
either  the  preceding  or  the  following  group.  If  the  library  has 
v.l  or  v.2  begin  the  enumeration  on  the  line  below  "Library  has", 
writing  v.l  in  ink  but  v.2  in  pencil,  that  it  may  be  readily  changed 
to  v.l  when  the  latter  is  obtained. 

In  making  a  reasonably  satisfactory  allowance  of  space  for  missing 
volumes,  so  many  degrees  must  be  considered  as  to  the  extent  of  the  gap 
and  the  prospects  involved  in  regard  to  its  being  filled  that  decisions  must 
depend  much  more  on  the  judgment  of  the  individual  cataloger  than  on  any 
definite  rule. 

The  "Library  has"  statement  should,  as  being  of  the  greatest 
interest  to  the  reader,  precede  all  other  notes,  and  may  ordinarily 
begin  on  the  first  card,  two  lines  below  the  collation,  if  any  is  given, 

222 


PERIODICALS  I2ga(2)(d)-b(i) 

otherwise  two  lines  below  the  imprint.  If,  however,  the  title, 
imprint  and  collation  for  the  periodical  occupy  so  much  'of  the  first 
card  as  to  leave  no  room  for  the  enumeration  of  volumes,  the 
phrase  "Library  has"  should  be  carried  over  to  the  next  card. 
If  there  would  be  room  for  one  item  of  the  enumeration  and  there 
is  a  gap  at  the  beginning  of  the  set  this  item  may  be  given  in  pencil 
on  the  line  below  "Library  has"  and  an  extra  card  inserted  as 
needed,  before  the  next  item  originally  given,  to  provide  for  the 
filling  of  the  gap  fragmentarily. 

O)  Miscellaneous  notes.  Unless  when  the  cataloging  is  first 
done  the  library  has  the  final  volume  of  the  set  and  it  is  reasonably 
certain  that  the  entry  for  this  will  not  need  to  be  shifted  to  provide 
for  insertions,  no  other  notes  should  be  given  on  the  same  card 
with  the  "Library  has"  statement,  the  remainder  of  the  card  being 
left  blank  for  additional  items  of  the  enumeration. 

As  in  the  case  of  complete  current  sets  (section  128a  (4)  above) 
it  is  advisable  that,  as  determined  by  the  condition  of  the  periodical 
in  hand  and  the  cataloger's  judgment,  space  be  left  between  the 
various  kinds  of  notes,  i.  e.  frequency  of  publication,  editors,  changes 
in  title,  place  or  publisher,  etc.  to  permit  of  additions  to  the  special 
kind  of  information.  Preferably  also  space  should  sometimes  be 
left  betw.een  notes  of  the  same  kind  and  the  cards  should  be  num- 
bered in  pencil. 

(/)  Indexes.  Indexes  covering  two  or  more  volumes  should 
be  cataloged,  in  the  form  for  added  editions,  on  a  separate  card 
afto  the  miscellaneous  notes  (as  in  section  128a(5)  above)  and 
if  it  is  known  or  supposed  from  gaps  in  the  volumes  covered  that 
there  are  gaps  in  the  series  of  indexes,  suitable  space  should  be 
left  for  inserting  the  entries  wanting. 

(g)  Completion  of  sets.  When  a  set  for  which  the  "Library 
has  statement  has  been  used  becomes  complete,  the  entry  should 
be  rewritten  in  the  form  for  a  complete  finished  set  (section  124 
above,  a  note  of  the  discontinuance  being  added  if  not  already  given) 
or  in  the  form  for  a  complete  current  set  (section  128),  as  the  case 
may  be.  The  miscellaneous  notes  provided  for  above  under  (e) 
may  be  either  retained  in  their  original  form  or,  when  it  seems 
best  in  an  individual  case,  rewritten  with  a  view  to  condensation. 

b  Added  entries  for  subjects,  editors  etc.  ( 1 )  Importance 
and  position.  For  importance  and  position  of  entry  see  sec- 
tion 124ft (l)-(2)  above. 

223 


I2gb(2)-C  CATALOGING    RULES 

(2)  Subject.  For  subject  cards  the  entries  may,  as  in  section 
12Sfr(2)  above,  include  full  details  or  be  made  in  the  form  of  refer- 
ences to  the  main  entry. 

(3)  Editor  cards,  general  secondary  cards 
etc.  Editor  cards,  general  secondary  cards  etc.  would  in  general 
be  treated  like  corresponding  cards  for  complete  current  sets  (section 
128^(3)  above)  but  in  the  case  of  missing  volumes  in  the  period 
covered  by  the  entry  the  exact  facts  as  applicable  to  the  volumes  in 
hand  should  be  given  in  the  collation,  the  record  of  the  volumes 
preceding  and  following  the  gap  being  in  pencil,  except  that  if  it 
were  positively  known  that  the  gap  was  bridged  by  the  entry  the 
volumes  might  be  recorded  in  the  permanent  ink  form  and  a  penciled 
note  made  of  those  missing. 

If,  because  of  breaks  in  the  set  of  volumes,  the  beginning  or 
end  of  the  editorship  or  general  secondary  relation  is  uncertain, 
the  doubtful  date  and  volume  number  should  be  given  in  pencil. 
If  the  card  includes  the  current  volume  of  the  periodical,  instead  of 
the  date  and  number  of  the  latest  volume  the  word  "date"  may  be 
given  in  pencil;  as,  "1899-date.  v.25-date" ;  to  avoid  changing 
with  each  successive  volume,  but  using  the  pencil  to  allow  for  change 
when  the  editorship  or  general  secondary  relation  ceases. 

The  form  "-date"  should  not  be  used  unless  the  periodical  is  being  cur- 
rently received. 

c  Call  numbers  and  accession  numbers.  For  call  numbers  and 
accession  numbers  the  same  directions  apply  as  for  complete  current 
sets,  sections  \28c-d  above. 


224 


PERIODICALS 


129 


Sample  cards 
17-18  Incomplete  set;  hanging  indention 

17  Main  card 


360.5 
L_56 


Lend   a  hand.  Boat.    Lend  a  hand  pub. 


\l.  2L- 


V.I5 


Library  has: 


Y**' 


\^h~l'  S)*^.  V&^>S> 


»8       <WW\&35-  ^A.\S37 

o 


See  next  card 


3G0.5 
L56 


Feb. 
in  1 


Monthly. 

V.  2.-2.,  \5-l8    ed.by  E:E.Hale. 

Merged  In  Charities  review  (360.5  04?) 
Mar. 1897. 


Subject  card 

(For  form  for  subject  card  see  sample  8  above) 

18  Editor  card 


360.5 

Lse> 


Lend 


Sale,   Edward  E<veretta  1832-1909, 


a  hand.         J&&7-97,  v.2-3;15"\S. 


225 


129-130 


CATALOGING    RULES 


(or) 
19-20  Incomplete  set;  paragraph  indention 
19  Main  card 


L56 

pub. 

Lend  a  hand.          Boat.    Lend  a  hand 

30. 

V.2-; 

Library  has: 

i     <\a~v.\*a7-SWl&2>& 

V15- 

v^                 See  next  oard 

(Extension  card  same  as  for  sample  17  above) 

Subject  card 

(For  form  for  subject  card  see  sample  13  above) 

20  Editor  card 


L.5G 


Hale,   Edward  Ecverett3  1823-1909, 

ed.  , 

tend  a  hand.  J&S7-3T,         v.  £-3,  15- \8. 


(See  note  on  editor  cards  and  general  secondary  cards,  under  samples  for  a 
complete  finished  set,  paragraph  indention,  p.  213) 

130  Added  entries  for  partial  titles.  When  a  partial  title  card 
is  needed  for  a  periodical,  begin  the  partial  title  on  the  top  line, 
with  either  hanging  indention  or  paragraph  indention,  whichever  is 
used  on  the  main  card. 

Instead  of  writing  the  full  title  in  its  regular  place,  fill  out  the 
reference  to  the  full  title,  as  suggested  for  subject  cards  (section 
1286(2)  above)  e.  g. 


226 


PERIODICALS  130-13IC 

21  Partial  title  card;  hanging  indention 


C12. 


Columbian  magazine. 


brar 
lady 


For  full  statement  of  volumes  in  li« 
y  see  card  beginning:    Columbian 
3  and  gentleman's  magazine 


Paragraph  indention.  If  paragraph  indention  is  used  on  the  main  card, 
on  the  partial  title  card  the  entry  words  should  begin  at  the  second  indention, 
coming  back  to  the  outer  indention  if  the  title  runs  over  the  line. 

131  Changed  titles,  a  Decided  changes.  When  a  periodical 
makes  a  decided  change  in  its  name  some  libraries  catalog  under 
each  title  the  volumes  thus  published,  some  libraries  catalog  the 
whole  set  under  the  earliest  title  with  either  added  entries  or  ref- 
erences under  later  titles,  some  libraries  (see  Library  of  Congress 
practice,  A.  L.  A.  rides,  p.  37)  catalog  the  whole  set  under  the 
latest  title,  with  added  entries  or  references  under  earlier  titles, 
while  others  catalog  the  whole  set  under  what  was  the  latest  title 
at  the  time  the  periodical  was  originally  cataloged,  with  added 
entries  or  references  under  both  earlier  and  later  forms.  With  any 
of  these  treatments  notes  should  be  used  freely  to  show  connection 

with  earlier  and  later  forms  (e.  g.  "Preceded  by "  or  "Continued 

as ")  and  the  call  number  of  a  periodical  mentioned  in  a  note 

or  reference  should  (if  different  from  the  call  number  for  the  entry 
in  hand)  be  given  with  its  title. 

It  is  recommended  that  as  a  general  practice  the  entry  for  the 
whole  set  be  made  under  the  latest  title,  according  to  the  Library 
of  Congress  usage,  with  added  entries  (or  occasionally  references) 
under  the  earlier  titles. 

b  Slight  changes.  Very  slight  changes  which  will  not  affect 
the  position  of  the  card  in  the  catalog  and  are  not  likely  to  create 
any  difficulty  in  the  matter  of  identity  may  be  disregarded  except 
for  a  note  on  the  main  card  :  "Title  varies"  or  "Title  varies  slightly". 

c  Editor  cards,  general  secondary  cards  etc.  When  an  editor 
card  or  a  general  secondary  card  is  made  for  a  periodical  which  has 
changed  its  title,  it  is  better  to  use  on  that  card  the  title  under  which 
the  periodical  was  published  during  the  time  of  that  special  editor- 
ship or  general  secondary  relation,  but  if  this  extended  over  the 
change  of  name  the  title  covering  the  longer  period  of  the  relation- 

227 


1310132a  CATALOGING     RULES 

ship  (or  the  current  title  if  included  under  it)  would  be  preferable. 
In  all  cases  where  the  relationship  covered  more  than  one  title,  and 
in  many  other  cases  (e.  g".  a  periodical  much  better  known  under  a 
different  form  of  title)  notes  should  be  added  referring  to  the  other 
form  or  forms. 

132  "Merged  in"  or  "Incorporated  with".  Frequently  one  pe- 
riodical is  combined  with  another.  Such  periodicals  may  all  be 
regarded  as  either  "merged  in"  or  "incorporated  with"  the  other 
periodical,  or  a  distinction  may  be  drawn  between  the  two  phrases, 
"merged  in"  being  used  for  a  periodical  which  seems  at  once  to 
lose  its  identity,  "incorporated  with"  when  for  a  time  after  the 
combination  both  periodicals  seem  to  retain  a  clearly  defined  exist- 
ence, as  in  the  preservation  of  both  names,  e.  g.  Academy  and 
Literature.  The  distinction  in  the  phrase  would  be  observed  only 
in  the  notes,  the  treatment  of  the  periodicals  being  the  same ;  i.  e. 
the  periodical  "merged  in"  or  "incorporated  with"  the  other  would 
be  cataloged  as  a  finished  publication,  taking  into  consideration 
whether  or  not  the  library  set  was  complete.  At  the  end  of  the 
notes  the  final  step  would  be  recorded ;  as,  under  Literature:  "In- 
corporated with  the  Academy  (052  qA16)  Jan.  18,  1902." 

On  the  card  for  the  periodical  in  which  the  other  was  merged  or 
with  which  it  was  incorporated,  a  note  should  be  made  of  this  fact; 
as,  under  Academy,  a  note:  "Literature  (052  qL7)  was  incorporated 
with  the  Academy,  Jan.  18,  1902." 

a  Method  of  presentation.  The  following  chart  is  based  on  the 
method  used  by  Miss  Caroline  Wandell  in  her  course  in  cataloging 
at  the  Syracuse  university  library  school,  to  show  the  changes  in 
the  life  of  a  serial,  and  may  be  an  aid  to  many  who  find  it  difficult 
to  grasp  the  occasionally  complicated  relations  of  some  of  our 
periodicals. 


228 


PERIODICALS 


I32a-I33 


Chicago 

Commons. 


v.YT 

Af. 


yy.  m  o  T>  S 


May 


10  v. 

Oct.  1^)05 


L^^A  a  ha*Q — L&v; 


v.l 


f  Feb.  ^"7 


CbarVUesl  review.  IOv. 
Feb. 
\Soi 


Nov.l**\  'Swr 


■Chan 


t'vfeS 


Chari- 
-biesjaviA 
the  Com 


v.\  Mar. 

Dec.\WT    VbO\ 


Nov. 
1*2)05 


frurve' 


v.2.7. 
Ap.^OS 


As  shown  above,  Lend  a  hand,  which  began  in  Jan.  1886,  was 
in  Mar.  1897  merged  in  Charities  review.  Charities  revieiv,  which 
began  in  Nov.  1891,  was  in  Mar.  1901  merged  in  Charities.  The 
Chicago  commons,  which  began  in  Ap.  1896,  at  the  beginning  of 
its  second  volume,  May  1897,  changed  its  name  to  the  Commons; 
in  Nov.  1905  it  was  incorporated  with  Charities,  which  had  begun 
in  Dec.  1897,  and  the  title  from  Nov.  1905  to  Mar.  1909  read 
Charities  and  the  Commons.  In  Ap.  1909,  with  v.22,  this  title  was 
changed  to  the  Survey. 

133  New  York  state  library  method.  In  the  New  York 
state  library,  all  serial  publications,  finished  or  current,  complete  or 
incomplete,  are  cataloged  on  large  sheets,  23x29cm.,  to  which, 
from  the  main  catalog,  references  merely  are  made  from  the  head- 
ing for  the  main  entry  and  (when  needed)  from  headings  for 
subjects  and  general  secondary  entries ;  entries  for  editors  only 
(and  analytics,  when  needed)   being  given  in  the  main  catalog. 

In  the  upper  left  corner  of  the  sheet  is  outlined  a  card,  on  which 
is  written  the  general  entry  for  the  periodical,  i.  e.  title,  imprint, 
collation  and  miscellaneous  notes.  The  remainder  of  the  sheet  is 
ruled  in  six  columns,  allowing  for  the  enumeration  of  about  150 
items,  if  brief.  When  the  periodical  runs  over  to  additional  sheets 
a  larger  number  of  items  may  be  recorded  on  these,  since  the 
greater  part  of  the  space  outlined  for  the  card  is  available  for  the 
"Library  has"  enumeration,  only  so  much  of  it  being  otherwise 
used  as  is  needed  for  a  very  brief  identification  entry. 


229 


133  CATALOGING    RULES 

In  the  enumeration  of  volumes  each  bound  piece  is  recorded 
separately,  the  entry  for  periodicals  consisting  ordinarily  of  only 
the  volume  number,  with  the  corresponding  dates.  When,  how- 
ever, fuller  information  is  desirable,  a  longer  entry  is  made;  e.  g. 
in  the  case  of  a  serial  of  monographic  nature,  as  the  Johns  Hop- 
kins university  studies  in  historical  and  political  science,  for  which 
the  contents  of  each  volume  are  given.  This  method,  obviously 
demanding  a  much  greater  expenditure  of  time  than  that  recom- 
mended above  in  sections  124-129  (since  each  volume  added  to  the 
library  is  added  separately  to  the  sheets)  offers  as  its  compensating 
advantage  the  more  exact  and  detailed  information. 


230 


ALMANACS  AND  YEARBOOKS  I34-I34b 


ALMANACS  AND  YEARBOOKS 

134  Treatment.  Almanacs  and  yearbooks  are  to  be  cataloged 
in  general  like  periodicals  (see  A.  L.  A.  rules,  123),  except  that 
yearbooks  of  societies  etc.  are  given  corporate  entry  (section  136 
below). 

a  Place.  The  separate  name  of  the  place  may  be  omitted  from 
the  imprint  when  included  in  the  name  of  the  publisher;  as, 
Brooklyn  daily  eagle. 

b  Volumes.  Such  phrases  as  "annual  issue/'  "10th  edition"  etc. 
are  often  used  with  the  meaning  of  volume  and  may  be  regarded 
as  synonymous  with  that  term,  being  used  without  brackets  when 
the  fact  is  taken  from  the  title-page  of  the  special  volume  to  which 
the  number  belongs.  Sometimes  the  information  to  the  effect  that 
the  issue  in  hand  is  a  first  or  second  volume,  etc.  is  given  in  some 
such  place  as  the  preface  or  cover  and  in  such  cases  the  volume 
number  is  to  be  given  in  brackets.  When  nothing  corresponding  to 
a  volume  number  is  given,  years  may  be  used  alone. 


231 


135  CATALOGING    RULES 


DIRECTORIES 


135  Treatment.  Follow  A.  L.  A.  rules,  125,  which  reads  as  fol- 
lows :  Enter  a  directory  published  periodically  under  the  first  word 
of  the  title  not  an  article,  a  serial  number,  or  the  initial1  of  a 
compiler  or  publisher.  Enter  a  non-periodical  directory  under  the 
name  of  the  compiler  if  mentioned  on  the  title-page.  If  no  com- 
piler is  mentioned  enter  under  the  first  word  of  the  title.  Make 
added  entries  or  references  as  follows:  (a)  Under  the  name  of 
the  place2  in  the  case  of  a  town,  city,  county,  or  state  directory;  (b) 
under  the  compiler  of  a  directory  published  periodically,  and  under 
the  publisher  provided  his  name  appears  as  a  part  of  the  title. 

When  subject  entries  are  not  made,  some  libraries  enter  local  directories 
under  such  form  of  the  title  as  will  make  the  name  of  the  place  the  entry 
word. 

The  added  entry  under  the  compiler  of  periodical  directories  is  often 
unimportant  and  may  be  omitted  by  most  libraries. 

For  treatment  of  such  phrases  as  "annual  issue,"  "10th  edition" 
etc.  see  under  "Almanacs,"  section  134. 


1  If  the  title  of  a  directory  begins  with  the  initial  of  the  name  of  a 
publisher  or  compiler,  enter  under  the  surname  of  the  publisher  or 
compiler,  e.  g.,  R.  L.  Polk  &  co.'s  city  of  Superior  directory,  under  Polk, 
R.L.,  &  co. 

2  In  dictionary  catalogs  which  make  a  subject  entry  under  the  name  of 
the  place,  subheading  Directories,  this  added  entry  or  reference  is  of  course 
omitted. 


212 


CORPORATE  ENTRIES  136-138 


CORPORATE  ENTRIES 


136  Corporate  vs  personal  authors.  The  essential  difference 
between  corporate  entries  and  the  main  part  of  the  entries  pre- 
viously treated  is  the  use  of  the  name  of  a  corporate  body  instead 
of  the  name  of  a  person  as  the  author  of  the  work. 

_  137  Definitions.  Author:  (a)  The  writer  of  a  book,  as  dis- 
tinguished from  translator,  editor,  etc.  (b)  In  a  broader  sense, 
the  maker  of  the  book  or  the  person  or  body  immediately  responsible 
for  its  existence.  Thus,  a  person  who  collects  and  puts  together 
the  writings  of  several  authors  (compiler  or  editor)  may  be  said 
to  be  the  author  of  a  collection.  Corporate  bodies  may  be  considered 
the  authors  of  publications  issued  in  their  name  or  by  their  authority 
A.  L.  A.  rules,  pref.  p.  13. 

Author  entry:  An  entry  of  a  work  in  a  catalog  under  its 
author's  name  as  heading,  whether  this  be  a  main  or  an  added 
heading.  The  author  heading  may  consist  of  a  personal  or  a 
corporate  name  or  some  substitute  for  it,  e.  g.  initials,  pseudonym, 
etc.   A.  L.  A.  rules,  pref.  p.  13. 

Corporate:  Of  or  relating  to  any  body  of  persons  or  individuals 
united  in  a  company  or  community.     Century  dictionary. 

(  Corporate  entry:  Entry  under  the  names  of  bodies  or  organiza- 
tions for  works  published  in  their  name  or  by  their  authority. 
A.  L.  A.  rules,  pref.  p.  14. 

138  Form  of  entry.  The  sections  below  aim  to  treat  of  corpo- 
rate entries  in  a  very  general  way  only.  Detailed  instructions  for 
the  choice  of  headings  for  various  kinds  of  corporate  bodies  are 
given  in  the  A.  L.  A.  rules,  p.  17-33.  More  extensive  directions 
are  to  be  found  in  the  following  publication,  issued  by  the  Library 
of  Congress:  Guide  to  the  cataloguing  of  the  serial  publications  of 
societies  and  institutions,  compiled  and  edited  by  Harriet  Wheeler 
Pierson,  1919.  While  this  is  based  on  the  A.  L.  A.  rules,  the  addi- 
tional rules  which  it  contains  for  the  selection  of  headings,  the 
careful  details  as  to  form  of  entry,  and  the  numerous  and  full  'illus- 
trations make  it  of  exceeding  value  to  the  cataloger  of  the  average 
miscellaneous  collection  and  invaluable  to  the  cataloger  whose  work 
includes  any  great  amount  of  material  in  the  special  field  which  it 
covers. 

For  a  discussion  of  the  use  of  corporate  headings  see  Cutter,  from  the 
bottom  of  p.  39,  through  rule  45  on  p.  41. 


233 


I39-I42  CATALOGING    RULES 

139  Complete  works  vs  serials.  Corporate  entries  fall  into 
two  important  divisions:  complete  works  and  serials  (see  defini- 
tion of  Serial,  section  119  above). 

a  Complete  works.  Complete  works  follow  the  general  rules  for 
the  ordinary  books. 

b  Serials.  Serials,  i.  e.  transactions,  proceedings  etc.  are,  except 
for  the  use  of  the  author  heading,  treated  like  periodicals. 

140  Reports.  Reports  form  an  important  part  of  the  publica- 
tions of  corporate  bodies  and  may  fall  into  either  of  the  two 
divisions: 

a  Complete  works.  In  this  division  belong  the  completed  reports 
of  special  investigations,  etc. 

b  Serials.  In  this  division  belong  all  reports  which  may  be 
expected  to  continue  indefinitely,  as  annual  or  biennial  reports. 

Generally  it  is  easily  determined  to  which  class  a  report  belongs, 
but  occasionally  reports  appear  which  do  not  show  whether  or 
not  they  are  to  be  continued  and  in  such  cases  the  cataloger  must 
depend  upon  his  own  judgment,  aided  by  such  information  as  he 
may  be  able  to  obtain  from  outside  sources. 

141  Author  retained  in  title.  When  the  title  of  the  book 
differs  in  character  from  those  ordinarily  used  for  society  publica- 
tions it  is  often  necessary  to  include  in  the  title  on  the  cards  the 
whole  or  part  of  the  name  of  the  society  or  institution,  in  order 
to  show  the  relation  between  the  author  heading  and  the  title, 
e.  g.  "Lectures  delivered  under  the  auspices  of  the  . . .  society". 
As  in  the  case  of  personal  authors,  the  . .  .  need  not  be  used  to 
indicate  the  complete  omission  of  the  author  heading  but  should, 
in  exact  work,  be  used  to  indicate  the  shortening  of  the  designation, 
as  shown  above. 

142  Publisher.  As  the  corporate  author  is  generally  also  the 
publisher  this  point  may  be  assumed  and  the  publisher's  name 
omitted  from  the  imprint  except  when  it  is  different  from  the  main 
author  heading.  A  printer's  name  in  the  publisher's  place  on  the 
title-page  is  to  be  used  only  in  case  of  special  doubt.  The  argu- 
ment is  specially  strong  in  favor  of  the  author  as  publisher,  in  the 
case  of  serials,  where  the  printer  is  likely  to  change  from  year 
to  year. 

When  thought  best  the  name  of  the  society  or  institution  may 
be  given  as  publisher.    In  such  cases  it  is  to  be  written  either  in 

234 


CORPORATE  ENTRIES  142.144b 

its  regular  form;  as,  "Univ.  of  Illinois";  or  transposed;  as, 
"Illinois  univ."  even  though  the  author  form  would  be  "Illinois. 
University";  or  such  a  phrase  as  "[Pub.  by  the  society]"  or  "[Pub. 
by  the  university]"  may  be  substituted. 

143  Spacing  in  headings.    Subheads  in  corporate  headings  are 

to  be  set  off  by  a  period  and  one  space. 

In  some  libraries  they  are  distinguished  by  the  use  of  a  dash  instead 
of  a  period,  or  by  underlining. 

144  Brackets,  a  Variation  from  title-page.  Brackets  are  not 
to  be  used  in  corporate  headings  to  show  variation  from  the  form 
given  on  the  title-page,  as  such  variation  becomes  necessary  in  a 
large  proportion  of  cases  in  order  to  procure  any  approach  to 
uniformity  in  method. 

b  Matter  supplied.  Occasionally  to  distinguish  corporate  bodies 
or  to  define  their  character,  it  is  desirable  to  supply  a  word  which 
does  not  properly  belong  to  the  corporate  name.  Such  supplied 
matter  should  be  bracketed;  as,  St  Peter's  [Episcopal]  church. 


235 


I45"I47  CATALOGING    RULES 


GOVERNMENT  DOCUMENTS 

145  Government  documents  vs  society  publications.  In  the 
matter  of  cataloging,  government  documents  fall  into  the  general 
class  of  the  publications  of  corporate  bodies.  The  principal  points 
in  which  they  differ  from  society  publications,  etc.  is  the  much 
more  general  need  for  subheads  in  the  author  headings,  and  the 
liability  of  departments  to  change  their  names,  of  bureaus  to 
change  their  departmental  relations  and  of  serial  publications  to 
change  their  forms  or  titles  or  to  be  transferred  from  one  depart- 
ment to  another. 

146  Change  in  author  or  title.  In  the  case  of  a  change  in 
author  or  title  the  entire  series  may,  as  with  periodicals,  be 
entered  under  one  form  with  a  reference  from  the  others,  or  the 
publications  appearing  under  each  form  may  be  cataloged  under 
that  form,  with  notes  showing  the  relations  to  earlier  and  later 
forms.  The  latter  method  is  generally  the  simpler  and  also  seems 
the  fairer  in  the  case  of  independent  commissions  which  have 
become  subordinate  bureaus,  or  for  publications  which  have  been 
transferred  from  one  bureau  to  another- 

147  Reference  list. 

A.  L.  A.  rules,  p. 17-21. 

American  library  association.  Papers  and  proceedings, 
1903,  25:176-189;  1908,  30:382-406;  1909,  31:313-329- 

Clarke,  E.  E.  Guide  to  the  use  of  United  States  govern- 
ment publications.  Bost.  F.  W.  Faxon  co.  1919. 
(Useful  reference  ser.) 

Reviewed  by  J.  I.  Wyer,  in  Library  journal,  Aug.  1918,  43:623-625,  and 
by  F.   R.   Curtis,  in  Public  libraries,  Nov.   1918,  23 :42c;. 

Cutter,  p.39-43. 

Everhart,   Elfrida.     Handbook   of  United   States   public 
documents.    N.Y.    II.  W.  Wilson  co.  1910. 
Reviewed  by  J.  I.  Wyer,  in  Library  journal,  May  1910,  35:221. 

Guerrier,     Edith.       Federal     executive     departments    as 

sources  of  information  for  libraries.     Wash.  Govt  print. 

off.    1919.      (U.S.    Education   bureau.      Bulletin,    1919, 

no.  74) 
Hasse,  A.   R-     United   States   government  publications. 

Bost.  Library  Bureau,   1902-03.     pt   1-2. 

236 


GOVERNMENT  DOCUMENTS  I47-I48a 

Swanton,  W.  I.  Guide  to  United  States  government 
publications.  Wash.  Govt  print,  off.  1918.  (U.S.  Edu- 
cation bureau.  Bulletin,  1918,  no.  2) 

U.S.  Documents,  Supt  of.  Author  headings  for  United 
States  public  documents,  as  used  in  the  official  cata- 
logues of  the  superintendent  of  documents;  3d  ed. 
Wash.  Govt  print,  off.     1915.     (Bulletin  18) 

Wyer,  J.  I.  United  States  government  documents.  Alb. 
N.Y.  State  education  dept,  1906.  (New  York  (State). 
State  library.     Library  School   [bulletin]   21) 

U.S.  government  documents  in  small  libraries ; 

4th  ed.  rev.  Chic.  Amer.  lib.  assn,  1914.  (American 
library  association.  Publishing  board.  Library  hand- 
book, no.  7) 

148  Author  heading.  In  general  follow  A.  L.  A.  rules,  p.  17- 
21,  but  for  subheads  the  inverted  form  used  by  the  superintendent 
of  documents  has  great  advantages. 

a  Inverted  vs  uninverted  forms}  For  the  cataloger  it  may  seem 
much  easier  to  take  a  form  exactly  as  it  stands,  and  for  printed 
cards  which  are  to  be  distributed  broadcast  to  libraries,  among 
which  some  will  prefer  the  uninverted  and  some  the  inverted  form, 
the  uninverted  may  have  sufficient  justification  in  being  of  the  two 
the  more  easily  adapted  to  the  other  usage,  but  for  those  libraries 
which  catalog  merely  for  their  own  constituencies  the  inverted  form, 
which  brings  into  prominence  the  significant  word  of  the  heading, 
has  much  to  recommend  it. 

It  is  unreasonable  to  demand  of  readers  in  general  that  they 
know  whether  an  official  body  is  a  department,  a  division,  a  bureau 
or  a  commission,  having  a  name  which  begins  with  this  generic 
term,  or  whether  the  name  actually  does  begin  with  the  generic 
term,  e.  g.  whether  it  reads  "Department  of  health"  or  "Health 
department,"  specially  since  one  state  or  city  may  use  one  of  the 
forms  and  the  next  state  or  city  use  the  other.  Even  under  the 
same  main  heading  there  may  be  no  consistency  ;  e.  g.  under  United 
States  is  found  on  the  Library  of  Congress  cards  "Dept  of  agri- 
culture", but  "Treasury  dept".  Under  these  circumstances  shall 
the  reader  look  first  for  "Dept  of  war"  or  "War  dept"?  and  though 
the  cataloger's  problem  seems  to  be  solved  by  the  rule  to  use  the 
direct  form,  not  even  this  is  really  the  case,  for  the  question  may 


1  For   further  discussions  see   Reference  list    (section   147). 

237 


I48a-I50  CATALOGING    RULES 

arise,  "What  is  the  direct  form  ?"  Instances  of  this  difficulty  appear 
in  the  examples  shown  above,  for  while  the  Library  of  Congress 
uses  on  its  cards  "Treasury  dept"  and  "War  dept",  in  some  of  the 
government  publications  cited  in  section  147  the  forms  "Department 
of  the  treasury"  and  "Department  of  war"  are  given.  Certainly  in 
such  cases  it  would  be  quite  as  easy  for  the  cataloger  to  follow  the 
rule  to  give  precedence  to  the  significant  word  of  the  subhead,  and 
even  if  the  situation  is  relieved  as  much  as  possible  for  the  reader  by 
filing  under  the  significant  word,  the  consultation  of  the  catalog  of 
any  large  collection  will  still  be  made  sufficiently  difficult  by  headings 
for  committees,  commissions,  etc.  in  which  there  is  no  distinctly 
outstanding  word  and  which  must  therefore  be  arranged  according 
to  their  direct  form. 

If  the  inverted  heading  is  adopted  for  use  on  manuscript  cards, 
it  is  still  possible  to  combine  with  these  cards  the  printed  cards 
with  uninverted  headings,  by  indicating  in  some  way  on  the  latter 
(e.  g.  by  underlining  the  first  letter)  the  word  by  which  the  filing  is 
to  be  done. 

149  Main  entry.  When  a  series  of  department  publications 
is  kept  together  as  a  set,  the  main  entry  should  be  made  under 
the  name  of  the  department,  with  analytics  (when  important)  for 
the  authors  and  subjects  of  the  individual  volumes  (unless  for  this 
feature  the  library  prefers  to  depend  on  the  printed  indexes  to 
government  documents),  but  if  the  volumes  are  scattered  on  the 
shelves,  according  to  their  subject  matter,  they  should  be  treated 
as  separate  works,  in  many  cases  having  the  main  entry  under  a 
personal  author.  If  the  second  method  is  followed,  series  notes 
should  be  used  to  show  the  relation  to  the  department,  and  a  series 
card  may  be  made,  if  considered  sufficiently  important. 

a  Title  entry  as  main  entry.  Some  publications,  e.  g.  the 
Farmers'  bulletins,  are  so  well  known  by  their  titles  that  the  most 
satisfactory  treatment  may  be  to  make  the  main  entry  under  the 
title,  with  a  general  secondary  entry  under  the  department  or  bureau 
issuing  the  publication. 

150  General  secondary  entries.  Except  when  an  added  entry 
heading  is  for  a  subject  or  can  be  clearly  defined  (e.  g.  ed.  or 
comp.)  or  is  for  an  analytic,  the  general  secondary  form  usually 
covers  the  situation  best,  and  should  be  used  freely  to  provide  for 
various  points  of  view  on  the  part  of  the  searcher.  It  is  specially 
important  in  cases  where  there  is  uncertainty  as  to  the  heading 

238 


GOVERNMENT  DOCUMENTS 


150151b 


which,  out  of  two  or  more,  should  be  selected  for  the  main  entry; 
e.  g.  in  the  case  of  a  report,  whether  it  should  be  regarded  as  the 
work  of  the  office  from  which  it  comes  or  of  the  person  by  whom 
it  is  made,  a  general  secondary  entry  being  in  such  a  case  made 
under  the  heading  not  chosen  for  the  main  entry. 

151  References.  Since  there  is  often  much  uncertainty  as  to  the 
form  of  heading  under  which  a  book  will  be  looked  for  in  the 
catalog,  references  should  be  made  very  liberally. 

a  From  names  of  departments  etc.  Reference  should  always  be 
made  from  the  name  of  a  department  to  any  of  its  bureaus  under 
the  names  of  which  works  have  been  entered,  and  often  reference 
should  be  made  from  the  name  of  the  department  or  bureau  with- 
out the  name  of  the  country,  e.  g. 

rost-office  department,  see 

U.S.  Post-office  dept 

Longer  forms  for  this  and  the  following  references  may,  if  preferred,  be 
made  on  the  analogy  of  the  "see"  and  "see  also"  subject  references  used 
by  the  Wisconsin  library  school,  as  shown  on  samples  in  section  30  above. 

Occasionally  notes  should  be  added  to   reference  cards,  e.   g. 


U.S.  Fish  and  fisheries  commission, 
see  also 
U.S.  Fisheries  bureau 

In  July  1903  the  commission  became 
the  Fisheries  bureau,  under  the  direction 
of  the  Ccmmeroe  and  labor  department. 


b  From  chiefs  of  departments.  If  an  individual  has  become 
well-known  as  the  chief  of  a  department  it  is  often  desirable  to  refer 
from  his  name  to  the  official  heading,  e.  g. 

Harris,   William  Torrey,     1835-1909,   see  also 
U.S.  Education  bureau 
In  other  cases,  editor,  compiler  or  general  secondary  cards  are 
to  be  preferred  for  the  individual. 


239 


i5ic 


CATALOGING    RULES 


c  From  magistrates.  For  kings,  governors,  mayors,  prelates 
etc.  whose  official  publications  seem  to  carry  a  greater  degree  of 
personal  responsibility  than  the  average  official  publication,  a  more 
definite  form  of  reference  may  be  used,  e.  g. 


Cleveland,    Grover, 
pres.U.S. 


Buffjalo 
Jew 
U.S. 
U.S. 


1837-1908, 


For  official  papers   see 
Mayor 

York   (State).    Governor 
President,    1885-1689 
President,    1893-?897 


(Cleveland) 
(Cleve 


land) 


In  the  case  of  governors'  and  mayors'  messages,  etc.  if  they 
follow  a  uniform  plan  and  the  dates  and  personal  name  are  not 
included  in  the  heading,  the  main  card  is  generally  best  made 
(whether  the  set  is  complete  or  incomplete)  in  the  "Library  has" 
form,  listing  the  messages  etc.  by  dates,  followed  by  the  name  of 
the  individual  officer,  in  subject  fulness  unless  some  other  form  is 
more  familiar,  and  either  inverted  or  uninverted,  according  to  the 
preference  of  the  cataloger,  e.  g. 


3533741 
N5 

New 
L883 

York  (State).   Governor. 
Publio  papers.         Alb. 
23-23^  <^. 

Library  has: 

Flower, 
R.P. 

Blaok,  F.S. 

1893 

-84  Cleveland,            1897-98 
Grover 

o 

(Except  for  the  date  for  Gov.  Flower,  which  might  call  for  change,  the 
entries  have  been  made  in  ink,  since  shifting  entries  would  involve  so  much 
change  that  it  would  be  preferable  to  rewrite  the  entire  card  if  additional 
space  is  needed.) 

240 


GOVERNMENT  DOCUMENTS 


I5IC-I53 


Occasionally  for  the  state  or  city  in  which  the  library-  is  located  the  head- 
ing may  cover  sufficient  material  to  warrant  its  being  carried  out  on  the 
plan  for  U.S.  President,  shown  above;  as,  New  York  (State).  Governor, 
1883-1885  (Cleveland),  by  which  all  publications  of  the  same  official  would 
be  brought  together. 

152  Subject  entry  vs  reference.  A  subject  entry  for  each 
official  publication  (unless  of  too  general  a  character,  e.  g.  the 
president's  message)  is  the  most  satisfactory,  but  a  device  by  which 
time  may  be  saved  in  some  cases  is  the  reference  from  subject 
heading  to  author  heading.  The  greatest  value  of  such  a  reference 
is  in  the  case  of  a  department  which  issues  many  publications 
falling  into  the  same  general  subject,  e.  g.  if  individual  subject 
entry  for  the  publications  of  the  United  States  department  of 
agriculture  would  require  many  cards  under  the  subject  heading 
Agriculture — U.S.  it  would  be  a  decided  saving  to  refer,  i.  e. 
Agriculture— U.S.  see  also 

U.S.  Agriculture  dept 

If  such  a  reference  is  made  for  an  individual  work  instead  of 
for  the  department  publications  in  general,  the  reference  should 
include  the  title  of  the  work  referred  to,  but  generally  in  such  cases 
it  would  be  preferable  to  make  the  added  entry  and  include  the 
title  in  the  "For  full  statement"  note  on  subject  cards,  e.  g. 


331 


ABOR  AND  LABORING  CLASSES  —  KANSAS. 
Kanaka.  Labor  and  indu8try  bureau. 
Annual  report. 

For  full  statement  of  volumes  in  li- 
brary see  card  beginning:  Kaneaa.  Labor 
and  industry  bureau  (followed  by  the 
title:  Annual  report) 


153  "Library  has"  statement.  This  statement  may,  as  noted 
in  section  151(c),  include  the  name  of  the  official  for  the  year,  and 
may  be  used  for  complete  as  well  as  for  incomplete  sets.  In  certain 
cases,  the  titles  of  the  separate  volumes  may  well  be  given,  the 


241 


153-155 


CATALOGING     RULES 


statement  being  in  the  nature  of  contents.  This  last  suggestion 
applies  particularly  to  annual  reports  which  specialize  yearly  on 
separate  subjects,  and  to  sets  of  monographs,  etc.;  e.  g. 


ssee.  Geologioal  survey. 
Bulletin.    Nashville. 
Illus.  map3,  2.*ic/m.. 

Library  has: 


Drainage  reclamation  in  Tennessee. 

IS  10. 
iPO-fl4|  Administrative  report,  1910.   1911. 
[Tio^S  Clay  deposits  of  west  Tennessee ;   by 

IT.  A.  Nelson.     1911. 


O 


Gee  next  card 


(See  first  note  below  card  under  151c) 

154  Indexed  sets.  In  some  cases  consolidated  indexes  have 
been  published,  which  should  be  either  noted  or  fully  cataloged,  in 
preference  to  the  "Library  has"  statement ;  e.  g.  for  the  Farmers' 
bulletin,  indexes  covering  bulletins  1-250  (1889-1906),  1-500  (1889- 
1912)  and  1-1000  (1889-1918)  have  been  issued  as  separate  vol- 
umes and  should  be  thus  cataloged,  while  current  numbers,  begin- 
ning with  no.  500  in  1912,  are  recorded  in  the  Readers'  guide  to 
periodical  literature.  The  advantage  of  giving  such  information 
instead  of  listing  more  than  a  thousand  numbers  is  too  obvious  to 
call  for  comment. 

155  Analytics.  Analytics  for  completed  publications  do  not 
differ  from  ordinary  analytics.  An  analytic,  when  complete  in 
itself  but  published  in  a  serial,  would  generally  take  the  regular 
form  for  an  analytic,  the  imprint  date  inside  the  (  )  being  preferably 
given  in  ink  for  the  distinct  volume  or  volumes  in  which  the  analytic 
is  contained,  rather  than  in  a  form  designed  to  bring  out  the  serial 
character  of  the  set. 

Exception:  In  the  case  of  annual  reports,  etc.  where  the  title  date  is  an 
important  point,  it  is  better  to  use,  in  the  analytic  reference,  the  title  date 
instead  of  the  imprint  date,  e.  g.  "In  its  Annual  report  for  1003.  p.  64-97," 
rather  than  "In  its  Annual  report.  1904.  p.  64-97"  or  "In  its  Annual 
report  for  1903.  1904.  p.  64-97." 

242 


GOVERNMENT  DOCUMENTS 


155-156 


If  the  report  of  a  department  or  official  is  regularly  published 
with  that  of  another  department  or  official,  the  first  in  the  volumes 
would  naturally  be  given  the  main  entry,  and  an  author  analytic  or 
reference  made  for  the  second.  If  the  analytic  form  is  used  the 
items  inside  the  (  )  would  consist  merely  of  author  and  title, 
no  account  being  taken  of  dates  and  volume  numbers,  e.  g. 


352.(^79 1  bamdje 
C\7 


Town. 


n,   Ariz.    Public  library. 
Annual  report.  (In  Camden,   Ariz, 

officers.      Annual  report) 


10.I 
^0.0 


Library  has: 

-904-QxJuppjl\305 


■4 


Vh 


90(b"QAAyYVJL    130& 


If  the  reference  is  preferred  it  would  take  some  such  form  as 


552.0731 


rl7 


laaden,  Ariz.  Public  library, 

Annual  report, 
see 
lamdjen,  Ariz,  Town  officers. 

Annual  report. 


The  report  of  the  library  is  regular- 
published  with  that  of  the  town  offi- 


sera 


Of  the  two  forms  the  analytic  is  to  be  preferred,  since  it  gives 
more  information,  takes  no  longer  than  the  reference,  except  for 
the  additional  record  of  the  new  report,  year  by  year,  and  is  more 
readily  adapted  to  a  change  in  the  manner  of  publication,  e.  g.  issued 
independently. 

156  Publisher.  When  names  of  printers  are  given  in  the  pub- 
lisher's place  on  the  title-page  of  official  publications  the  pub- 
lisher may  be  omitted  in  accordance  with  section  142  above,  or 
such  a  phrase  may  be  used  as  "[Pub.  by  the  state]"  or  "[Pub.  by  the 
city]". 

For  works  actually  published  by  the  United  States  govern- 
ment, the  form  "Wash.  Govt  print,  off."  is  the  regular  form  to  be 

243 


156-157  CATALOGING   RULES 

used,  but  occasionally  a  United  States  document  comes  to  hand 
which  is  the  output  of  an  independent  publisher,  in  which  case 
the  special  publisher  should  be  given. 

157  Series  notes.  For  documents  which  are  published  as  a 
part  of  the  congressional  set,  and  as  such  bear  the  congressional 
serial  number,  the  following  illustrations  show  the  form  of  series 
note  used  on  the  Library  of  Congress  cards : 

(U.S.  53d  Cong.,  1st  sess.  House.  Ex.  doc.  36) 
(U.S.  53d  Cong.,  3d  sess.  Senate.  Misc.  doc.  5) 
(U.S.     54th   Cong.,  2d  sess.     House.     Rept.   123) 


244 


MISCELLANEOUS    PRINTED    MATERIAL 


i58a-b(i) 


MISCELLANEOUS  PRINTED  MATERIAL 

158  Series  cards  for  addresses,  bulletins,  society  publications, 
etc.  a  Addresses.  In  some  libraries  it  may  seem  desirable  to  make 
an  added  entry  for  a  society  before  which  an  address  has  been 
delivered.  Such  entries  are  made  in  the  form  of  a  series  card, 
giving  the  name  of  the  society  as  the  author  of  the  series,  and  the 
word  Addresses  (bracketed  in  exact  work,  if  supplied)  as  the  title. 
The  separate  addresses  are  then  listed  in  regular  series  form,  e.  g. 


Buffalo  historical  society. 
[Addresses^ 

542.74-73    Hill,  H:W.    Development  of  Consti- 
H55         tutional  law  in  Mew  York  state. 

1896. 

557.4197  Hayes,    G:E:  Geology  of  Buffalo. 

H4\  1869. 

373.3544  Bryant,    W:C.  Captain  Brant  and 

B3I  the  Old  King,  1889. 


b  Bulletins,  society  publications,  etc.  Similar  cards  may  be  made 
for  bulletins,  society  publications,  etc.  when  the  library  scatters  them 
as  separate  works  instead  of  treating  them  as  a  set.  In  this  case 
the  title  of  the  series  represents  a  recognized  continuation  of  works 
and  should  be  bracketed  if  not  given  on  the  works  themselves, 
as  in  the  case  of  some  societies  which  give  no  general  title  but 
merely  their  own  names  with  perhaps  the  addition  of  a  volume 
number.  For  such  works  the  title  [Publications]  is  generally  the 
best  one  to  supply. 

(1)  Volume  n  u  m  b  e  r  s.  For  bulletins,  society  trans- 
actions, etc.  the  volume  number  is  more  important  than  for  the 
ordinary  series  and  should  be  retained  in  cataloging. 


\50 
LB14- 


ihlc=igo.    University. 

Contributions   to  philosophy. 

7.3,io.l  Hoore,    A.W.  The   functional 

versus   the  representational  theories 
o£  knowledge   in  Looks'  a  Essay. 

1902. 


245 


I58b(2)-I59a  CATALOGING    RULES 

(2)  Heading.  In  some  cases  it  is  doubtful  whether  it  is 
better  to  enter  a  series  heading  as  a  single  title  phrase,  or  as  author 
and  title,  e.  g. 

Columbia  university  studies  in  history,  economics 
and  public  law. 
or 
Columbia  university.     Political  science  faculty. 
Studies  in  history,  economics  and  public 
law. 
Some  libraries   prefer  one   form   and   some   the   other,   and  it 
makes  little  difference  which  form  is  chosen  provided  reference  is 
made  from  the  other  form,  e.  g. 

Columbia  university  studies  in  history, 
economics  and  public  law  see 

Columbia  university.    Political  science  faculty. 
Studies  in  history,  economics  and  public 
law. 

159  Extracts  and  separates,  a  Extracts  (collections)  from 
periodicals.  Enter  a  collection  of  extracts  from  a  periodical  under 
the  name  of  the  periodical  provided  this  appears  in  the  title  of  the 
collection.  Make  added  entries  under  the  title  of  the  collection  and 
the  name  of  the  collector.  If  the  periodical  is  not  named  in  the 
title  enter  under  the  collector  (under  title  if  anonymous).  Give  the 
name  of  the  periodical  in  a  note,  and  make  a  reference  or  an  added 
entry  under  it.    A.  L.  A.  rules,  122. 

If  the  name  of  the  periodical  is  used  as  the  main  entry,  indent 
like  an  author  heading,  e.  g. 


£>G3Z     [Blackwood's  Edinburgh  magazine. 

Tales   from   "Blackwood".  Edin, 

Blacjkwood,    1359-61. 
IBv.in    6,    17cm. 


but  if  the  name  of  the  periodical  is  used  as  an  added  entry,  make 
this  card  in  the  form  of  a  general  secondary.  If  the  main  card 
is  made  under  the  name  of  the  collector  the  general  secondary 
would  take  the  usual  form,  but  if  the  main  entry  is  under  the 
title  (section  105)  it  is  better  on  the  added  entry  card  to  indent  as 


246 


MISCELLANEOUS    PRINTED   MATERIAL 


1 59a- 1 60 


for  added  entries  for  periodicals  (section  1246(2)  )  to  avoid  a 
confusing  repetition  of  the  same  indention  on  perhaps  three  lines; 
i.  e.  heading,  title  and  note;  e.  g. 


M\£2> 


Putnam' a'  monthly, 
tfaga  stories.  1867. 

Reprinted  from  Putnam's  monthly. 


(rather  than) 


Ml&o1  |Putnam's  monthly. 

Uaga  stories.  1867. 

Reprinted  from  Putnam's  monthly. 


b  Separates.  The  work  of  a  single  author  republished  from  a 
periodical  (a  separate)  will  not  ordinarily  require  a  reference  or 
an  added  entry  under  the  name  of  the  periodical.  A.  L.  A.  rules, 
122,  note. 

The  same  rule  applies  to  the  reprint  of  a  single  article  from 
society  transactions,  a  collection,  etc.  In  such  cases  the  source  should 
generally  be  given  in  a  note,  e.  g.  "Reprinted  from  the  American 
chemical  journal,  Jan.  1908,  v.39,  no.l".  If  the  original  paging  is 
given  in  the  reprint,  this  should  be  retained  in  the  cataloging,  e.  g. 
p. [23J-78,  not  [56] p. 

160  Selections  from  a  single  work  of  an  author.  When  a 
selection  from  a  single  work  of  an  author  is  published  separately 
under  a  new  title,  catalog  fully  like  a  new  work.  Information 
concerning  the  original  work  should  be  included  in  the  new  title 
or  in  a  note. 

Make  an  added  author  entry  for  the  original  work  if  many 
titles  are  likely  to  occur  under  the  author's  name,  or  if  the  new 
work  is  of  value  under  the  original  title.  Add  the  word  "selec- 
tions" to  the  original  title  (unless  some  more  definite  information 
is  at  hand,  e.  g.  "part  1")  and  follow  it  by  the  title  of  the  selec- 
tion.    Omit  brackets  for  this  added  title,  since  the  entry  as  a  whole 

247 


i6o 


CATALOGING     RULES 


is  supplied.  For  the  imprint,  give  only  the  imprint  date  of  the 
selection.  Omit  the  collation  except  the  number  of  volumes  if 
more  than  one,  giving  it,  in  such  cases,  one  centimeter  after  the 
imprint  date,  as  on  other  short-entry  cards.  Make  added  title 
entry  when  desirable. 

i  Main  card 


D54-M 


Dickens,    Charles,  1813-1870. 

Little  Nell j   from  the  Old  curiosity 
shop  j  abridged  for  use   in  schools. 
Bost.   Educ.pub.co.  cc18943 

236p.    13om.  (Toung  folks'   library 

of  choice   literature) 


2  Title  card 


D5W 


Little  Nell j  from  the  Old  curiosity 
shop.    cc18943 

Dickjens,  Charles. 


3  Extra  author  card 


f 


le 


D54-$£  Diokens,  Charles,    1813-1870. 
Old  curiosity  shop:  select! 


Nell. 


ity  shop 
18943 


;ions:    Llt- 


4  Extra  title  card 


DS4&X,  I        bid  curiosity  shop:    selections. 
Dickens,    Charles. 

Little   Nell J   from  the  Old  ouribsity 

shop[7         CC1S943 


If  it  is  preferred  that  the  author  card  for  the  selection  be  filed  with 
those  for  the  original  work,  this  may  be  done  on  the  plan  for  the  treatment 
suggested  for  translations,  in  section  98a,  the  author  card  for  the  selection 
being  filed  immediately  after  the  author  cards  for  editions  of  the  complete 
work. 


248 


MISCELLANEOUS    PRINTED    MATERIAL 


i6ia-b 


161  Criticism,  a  General  criticism.  For  general  criticism  of 
an  author's  works  (unless  colored  cards  are  used)  the  subject  card 
does  not  differ  from  the  ordinary  subject  card,  the  subject  heading 
consisting  of  merely  the  name  (with  such  titles  and  dates  as  would 
be  used  in  an  author  heading)  of  the  author  criticized. 

b  Special  criticism.  If  in  the  case  of  a  single  work  the  title  of 
the  work  is  included  in  the  heading  on  the  author  cards,  as  sug- 
gested for  Shakespeare  (section  101),  a  criticism  of  the  work  takes 
for  the  subject  card  the  same  heading  (written  in  red,  or  in  black 
capitals)  beginning  at  the  second  indention. 

For  a  criticism  of  a  work,  the  title  of  which  is  not  used  in  the 
author  heading  for  the  text,  write  the  name  of  the  author  criticized 
on  the  top  line  (in  author  fulness,  with  personal  titles,  and  dates 
of  birth  and  death),  beginning  at  the  second  vertical  line,  as  in  the 
ordinary  subject  heading,  but  if  the  name  runs  over  the  line  indent 
the  subsequent  lines  one  centimeter  instead  of  one-half  centimeter 
to  the  right  of  the  second  vertical  line,  in  order  that  the  title  of  the 
work  criticized  may  be  more  distinct. 

On  the  line  below  the  author's  name  write  the  title  of  the  work- 
criticized,  beginning  one-half  centimeter  (two  typewriter  spaces) 
to  the  right  of  the  second  vertical  line.  If  the  title  runs  over  the 
line  begin  subsequent  lines  at  the  second  vertical  line. 

_  Beginning  with  the  name  of  the  author  of  the  criticism  the  entry 
is  in  the  usual  form  for  a  subject  card;  e.  g. 


the 
1766) 


PHILLIPS,    THOUAS,  1708-1774. 

HISTORY  OF  THE   LIFE   OF  REGINALD 
IP0LE. 
Ridley,    Glocester,  1702-1774. 

Review  of  Mr  Phillips's  History  of 
life  of... Pole...  Lon,d.    Clarke, 


374p.    tab.    20cm. 


In  filing  cards,  the  criticism  of  an  individual  work  is  placed  immediately 
after  the  entry  for  the  work  itself. 


249 


i6ib-c 


CATALOGING     RULES 


If  the  special  book  criticized  is  not  evident  from  the  title  of  the 
criticism  a  note  should  be  added  to  the  main  card  for  the  criticism, 
identifying  the  book  criticized,  e.g. 


3\7.2.3 
F34 


rhomjas,   J.  J. 

Froudaoity:   West   Indian  fables  by 
Anthony  Froule,  Phil.    Gebbie, 


Jamejs 
1890 


3Slp.    19^cm. 

Critioism  of   "The  English  in  the 
Indies". 


West 


This  note  may  be  omitted  from  the  subject  cards  if  the  subject 
heading  (which  includes  the  title  of  the  original  book)  and  the 
title  of  the  criticism,  taken  together,  furnish  sufficient  clue  to  the 
relation  of  the  two  works,  e.  g. 


317.29  tFROUDE.    JAMES  ANTHONY,  1818-1894. 

F34-  (THE).   ENGLISH  IN  THE   WEST   INDIES. 

Thomas,   J.J. 

Froudacity:   West   Indian  fables  by... 
Froude.         Phil.    Gebbie,    1890. 
261p.    19jora. 


c  Colored  cards.    Colored  cards  may  be  used  for  criticism,  having 
at  the  top  an  introductory  phrase,  e.  g.  on  yellow  cards : 


5\7.29 
F34- 


For  criticism  of 

FROUDE,    JAMES  ANTHONY,  1819-1894. 

(THE)    ENGLISH  IN  THE  WEST   INDIES, 

9ee 
Thomas,  J.J. 

Froudacity:  West  Indian  fables  by... 
Froule.    Phil.  Gebbie,  1890. 

S61p.  19-tcra. 


Notice  that  with  this  form  of  card  the  word  "see"  is  used  after  the  sub- 
ject heading  (which  is  followed  by  a  comma)  to  bring  about  a  grammatical 
construction. 

Similar  colored  cards  "For  bibliography  of   (blue  cards)  and 
"For  biography  of"  (green  cards)  may  be  had  for  those  subjects. 

250 


MISCELLANEOUS    PRINTED    MATERIAL 


162 


162  Dramatizations,  parodies,  etc.  The  following  rule  for 
"dramatizations"  is  that  of  the  Library  of  Congress: 

Enter  dramatizations  of  novels,  legends  and  the  like,  under  the 
playwright,  with  added  entry,  or  in  special  cases  a  reference,  under 
the  author  of  the  original  work.  The  added  entry  should  give  the 
author,  followed  by  a  brief  title,  and  is  to  be  arranged  after  all 
editions  and  translations  of  the  original  work. 

Dramatization 
Main   entry 


ten 

K4Z 


Kest 


by 

tferr 


er,   Paul,  1870- 

When  knighthood  was   in  flower:    a  play 
dramatized  by  Paul  Kester  from  the  novel 
i?„rle3  Major.         cl^i&napolis?   Bobbs- 
ill?    c19063 
223p.    SO^om. 


Ch; 


Added  entry  for  author  of  original  zvork 


K42 


tfajor,    Charles,  1856-1913. 

When  knighthood  was   in  flower. 
Kester,   Paul. 

When  knighthood  was   in  flower:    a  play 
dramatized  by  Paul  Xe3ter   from  the  novel 
by  Charles  Major.         cc190  63 


The  same  method  may  be  used  for  a  parody  or  any  other  work 
based  on  another;  e.  g. 

Parody 

Added  entry  for  author  parodied 


%\1 

H54- 


Stevenson,    Robert   Louis,  1850-1894 

Child's   garden  of  verses. 
•fjord,    Oliver. 
Kitten's   garden  of  verses.  1911. 


251 


i62-i63b 


CATALOGING     RULES 


Typical  illustration  of  one  book  based  on  another 

Added  entry  for  original  author 


L43 


3ray,  [Asa^     1810-1888. 

Lessons  In  botany  and  vegetable 
physiology, 
Leavitt.  R.  C-. 

Dutllnea  of  botany,  for  the  high 
school  laboratory  and  classroom;  based 
ay's  Lessons  in  botany.    rlSOlj 


on 


Gin 


As  shown  in  the  samples  above,  the  heading  for  the  original 
work  takes  the  same  form  as  with  special  criticism,  except  that  it  is 
written  in  black  capitals  and  lower  case,  as  for  an  author  heading, 
instead  of  in  red  ink  or  black  all  capitals,  as  for  a  subject.  Also, 
as  in  the  case  of  special  criticism,  the  relation  of  the  two  books 
should  be  shown  in  the  title  or  in  a  note,  but  the  imprint  and 
collation,  given  in  full  on  the  criticism  card  for  an  author  criticized, 
because  this  is  a  subject  card,  are  given  in  short  form  (i.  e.  the 
imprint  date  and  the  number  of  volumes  when  more  than  one)  on 
the  card  for  the  author  of  the  original  work  on  which  another  is 
based. 

163  Attributed  author,  a  Doubtful  authorship.  In  a  case  of 
doubtful  authorship,  if  a  work  is  attributed  to  a  special  writer  it 
should  be  cataloged  under  his  name,  with  (on  all  cards  where  the 
point  is  of  interest)  a  note  showing  the  doubt,  e.  g.  Attributed  to 
Shakespeare. 

If  preferred,  the  phrase  "attributed  author"  may  be  added  at  the  end 
of  the  author  heading,  but  this  plan  would  suggest  a  separate  alphabet  for 
the  works  attributed  to  an  author,  to  be  arranged  after  his  acknowledged 
works,  and  therefore  it  seems  better  to  recognize  the  doubt  only  in  a  note. 

If  there  is  a  reasonable  degree  of  doubt  as  to  the  actual  authorship  and 
the  book  is  attributed  to  more  than  one  author,  make  the  main  entry  under 
the  one  for  whom  there  is  the  strongest  evidence,  with  references  from  the 
others  (on  the  plan  prescribed  in  b  Mistaken  authorship),  citing  in  the  notes 
on  the  reference  cards  the  best  authorities  on  which  the  references  are  based. 

b  Mistaken  authorship.  Occasionally  it  is  found  that  a  book 
published    anonymously   has   been   credited    to   the    wrong    author. 


252 


MISCELLANEOUS    PRINTED    MATERIAL 


16311-164 


This  difficulty  may  be  met  by  cataloging  the  book  regularly  under 
its  proved  author,  with  a  reference  from  the  attributed  author,  e.  g. 


917.7 
G4* 


[Oilman,  Chandler  Robbina:    1303-1365. 

Life  on  the  Lakes;  being  tales  and 
sketches  collected  during  a  trip  to  the 
pictured  rocks  of  Lake  Superior,  by  the 
Etuthcr  of  "Legends  of  a  log  cabin". 
N.Y.  Dearborn,  1836. 

3v.  30cm. 

Erroneously  attributed  to  Margaret 
Fuller,  marcheaa  d'0Q3oli. 


5177 

G-4S 


Ossoli,  Margaret  Fuller, 
1310-1850. 
Life  on  the  Lakes. 


to  the 
entry- 
uncle? 
Grllraan 


m&rchesa  d', 


1836. 


This  book  was  mistakenly  attributed 
author  named  above.   Its  full 
will  be  found  in  this  catalog 
the  heading  for  its  actual  author: 
,  Chandler  Robbins,  1802-1865. 


In  some  form  the  note  of  attributed  authorship  should  be  given  on  most, 
perhaps  all,  of  the  cards. 

c  Erroneously  listed.  Instances  also  come  to  hand  where  the 
identity  of  a  book  is  completely  concealed  by  the  publisher's  form 
of  listing.  To  guard  against  ordering  duplicates  these  cases  may 
be  treated  similarly  to  those  of  mistaken  authorship,  referring  from 
the  form  of  entry  given  on  the  publisher's  list  to  the  author  and 
title  used  in  cataloging,  with  an  explanatory  note  on  both  main 
and  reference  cards,  e.  g.     Listed  by  the  publisher  as  

d  Call  numbers  and  tracing.  For  the  classes  of  books  mentioned 
in  b-c  the  card  for  the  attributed  author  is  chiefly  in  the  nature  of 
a  reference  card,  but  being  for  an  individual  book  should  bear  the 
call  number,  as  shown  on  the  card  for  Ossoli,  and  should,  on  the 
main  card,  be  traced  as  an  added  entry,  e.  g.  "extra  cd  for  Ossoli." 

164  Analytics  in  series  form.  Some  documents,  e.  g.  the 
Declaration   of  independence   and    the    Constitution,   are   found   in 

253 


164-1650 


CATALOGING  RULES 


many  places  and  it  is  convenient  to  have  a  record  of  these,  though 
it  may  not  seem  worth  while  to  make  a  separate  card  for  each. 
This  difficulty  may  be  met  by  a  form  resembling  a  series  card,  e.  g. 


U.S. 


375 
WTO 


Constitution. 


Text  of   the   Constitution  may  be   found 
t|he  following  books: 

Fiske,    John.  History  of  the  United 

States  for   schools.  1894. 

p.,419,-436.. 
Montgomery,    D:H:  ..  .Leading  facts 

of  American  hi3tory.  1899. 

app.p.6-18. 

165  Pamphlets.  While  the  ideal  method  might  be  to  catalog 
pamphlets  with  the  same  fulness  as  bound  works,  this  is  a  point 
on  which  most  libraries  feel  that  they  can  and  must  economize. 
If  a  separate  catalog  of  pamphlets  is  kept  a  much  simpler  form 
may  be  adopted  than  is  used  for  books,  but  if  with  a  view  to  the 
greater  convenience  in  use  the  cards  for  pamphlets  are  filed  in  the 
general  catalog  they  should  certainly  conform  in  the  matter  of 
the  headings,  but  beyond  that  point  simpler  methods  might  be 
permitted. 

a  Collections.  For  treatment  when  two  or  more  pamphlets  are 
bound  together  see  sections  113-114. 

b  Separately  bound.  It  is  natural  to  give  to  the  pamphlet 
separately  bound  as  exact  treatment  as  to  other  books,  but  the 
importance  of  this  is  open  to  question.  As  comparatively  few 
pamphlets  appear  in  different  editions,  the  question  of  identity,  even 
for  minute  bibliographic  work,  does  not  often  rise,  and  following 
the  author's  name  the  remainder  of  the  entry  might  often  be  cut 
down  to  a  brief  title,  imprint  date  and  main  paging,  except  in  the 
case  of  oversized  pamphlets  or  articles  issued  in  a  series  (generally 
in  the  case  of  pamphlets,  an  official  series),  when  these  items  also 
should  be  noted.  Added  entries  and  references  should  be  made 
as  far  as  needed  to  insure  the  ready  finding  of  the  publication. 

c  Unbound.  In  dealing  with  unbound  pamphlets  there  are  wide 
variations  in  practice:  (1)  entries  may  be  made  under  author,  title 
and  subject,  as  for  bound  volumes;  (2)   under  author  only,  with  a 


254 


MISCELLANEOUS  PRINTED  MATERIAL  165C-166 

view  to  finding  a  special  pamphlet  and  avoiding  the  accumulation 
of  duplicates,  with  reliance  on  the  subject  arrangement  on  the 
shelves,  to  meet  the  calls  from  the  subject  side;  (3)  under  subject 
only,  ignoring  the  possibilities  of  a  call  from  the  author  side  and 
probabilities  of  duplication;  (4)  a  partial  combination  of  the  last 
two  methods,  making  entry  under  author's  name,  but  under  the 
subject  heading,  a  reference  to  the  shelves;  (5)  a  reference  to  the 
shelves  from  both  author  and  subject;  (6)  a  selection  from  the 
various  methods,  making  sometimes  an  author  entry,  sometimes  a 
subject  entry  and  sometimes  both,  according  to  the  apparent  merits 
of  the  individual  case,  allowing  also  for  a  certain  portion  of  pam- 
phlets which  it  seems  desirable  to  keep  and  which,  nevertheless,  do 
not  seem  to  warrant  the  expenditure  of  time  for  even  the  simplest 
cataloging,  and  which  are  therefore  disposed  of  by  determining 
the  classification  and  sending  them,  without  further  consideration, 
to  be  shelved  or  filed  with  other  material  on  the  same  subject. 

As  in  the  case  of  separately  bound  pamphlets,  such  added 
entries  and  references  should  be  made  as  are  needed  to  insure  the 
ready  finding  of  the  pamphlet  from  the  basis  on  which  it  is  treated. 

166  Clippings.  For  a  volume  of  clippings,  catalog  in  regular 
form,  supplying  (as  far  as  practicable)  the  various  details,  from 
the  book  in  hand.  In  exact  cataloging,  if  the  volume  has  a  manu- 
script title-page  the  use  of  dots  and  brackets  should  follow  the 
regular  rules,  if  there  is  no  title-page  this  fact  should  be  men- 
tioned in  a  note  and  brackets  may  be  omitted  in  the  entry. 

If  the  volume  includes  the  writings  of  several  authors  the 
main  entry  should  be  made  under  the  title,  as  in  section  105. 

If  the  pages  or  leaves  are  not  numbered  and  are  too  numerous 
to  count  write  Unp.  in  the  place  for  pages. 

Make  a  note  showing  the  character  of  the  book.  Include  in 
the  note  the  name  and  date  of  the  source  or  sources,  if  evident 
and  not  too  numerous ;  e.  g.  Mounted  newspaper  clippings  from 
the  Boston  transcript,  Jan.  11-May  16,  1910. 


255 


166-167 


CATALOGING     RULES 


Huntl,  Anna  Dorothea. 

Miscellaneous  writings, 
18791-30. 

21  f.    19  om. 


No  plaoe, 


No  title-page. 

Mounted  newspaper  clippings,    vith 
authlor's  autograph. 


167  Maps.  Enter  maps  under  the  cartographer  [map  maker]. 
If  the  name  of  the  cartographer  is  not  found,  enter  under  the 
publisher.    A.  L.  A.  rules,  6. 

The  title,  imprint  and  collation  follow,  as  far  as  practicable,  the 
rules  for  cataloging  books,  but  in  the  collation  the  size  should  be 
given  for  maps  cataloged  separately,  even  if  the  library  does  not 
make  a  practice  of  doing  this  for  books.  In  measuring  a  map, 
give  the  height  by  the  length,  taking  the  outside  ruling  of  the  map, 
nut  the  measurements  of  the  paper  on  which  it  is  printed.  If  the 
map  is  folded  in  covers  for  shelving  as  a  book,  the  full  measure- 
ment of  the  map  may  be  followed  in  curves  by  the  word  "folded" 
and  the  cover  measurement  as  for  the  ordinary  book,  e.  g.  65x100cm. 
(folded,  24cm.) 

The  scale  of  the  map  should  be  given  in  a  note. 

An  inset  map  (i.  e.  a  map  within  a  map,  often  in  one  corner  of 
the  larger  map)  should  be  mentioned  in  a  note  and,  if  important, 
cataloged  separately,  the  phrase  "Inset  on"  being  used  instead  of  the 
word  "In"  to  introduce  the  analytic  reference  to  the  main  entry 
(to  show  that  the  inset  map  appears  on  the  face  of  the  larger  map). 

Further  suggestions  as  to  the  cataloging  of  maps  and  atlases 
may  be  found  in  Notes  on  the  cataloging,  care  and  classification  of 
maps  and  atlases,  by  Philip  Lee  Phillips,  published  by  the  Library 
of  Congress  in   1915. 

Samples  of  main  cards 


3\2.74"T53stodiard,   Seneca,   RcOft 

S&<o  Lfap  of   the  Adirondack  'Tilcernesaj   3d 

rev.ed.  N.Y.    Neumn,    1882. 

33jx68 Jem. (folded,    18om. ) 

Scale,    1/4  inch  to    the  mile. 


256 


MISCELLANEOUS   PRINTED   MATERIAL 


167-168 


5\2.74753; 
N53 


lew 


Oii 


adj 
3ial 

3  tat 
1893 

33ck 


York  (State).    Fisheries,    game  and 

forest   commission, 

Map  of  the  Adirondack  forest  and  the 

"ning  territory;  comp.from  the  offi- 

map3  and  field  notes  on  file  in  the 

e  departments  at  Albany,    N.Y.  Alb. 


2  sheets,   92xl49icm. (in  portfolio, 
Scale,    J   inch  to  the  mile. 


S\2.747 
R\3 


Ran:* 
of   I' 


,    KoNally  &   co. 

New  railroad,    county  and  township  map 

ew  York. . .  Chic. c1888. 

77x84cm. (folded,    17om. ) 


Scale  l/ll   inch  to  the  mile. 
Cover   title:   Map  accompanying  Legis- 
lative manual,    1388. 


168  Printed  forms.  Material  which  it  seems  inadvisable  to 
catalog  piece  by  piece  may  be  made  available  through  a  quick 
method  of  referring  from  headings  filled  in  at  the  top  of  printed 
forms.  Suggestions  as  to  some  of  the  possibilities  in  this  direc- 
tion are  shown  in  the  following  illustrations,  which  are  used  in 
the  library  science  and  alumni  collections  of  the  New  York  state 
library  school. 


Class  no.  The     library  has  material  on  this  subject  in  the 

collections  starred  below : 

Minor  material:  extracts,  clippings  etc. 

Blanks  and  forms 

Bookplates 

Pictures  and  plans 

Library  museum 


257 


168  CATALOGING    RULES 


Under  this  name  will  also  be  found  uncataloged 
material  as  starred  below : 

In  Alumni  collection 

Minor  writings 
Biography 

Family 
Book  reviews,  notices  etc. 


In  separate  files 
Portraits  etc. 
Bookplates 


Buildings 

The  following  library  buildings  were  planned 
by  the  librarian  named  above  or  were  erected  while 
he  was  chief  librarian.  Those  starred  are  repre- 
sented in  the  file  of  pictures  and  plans  of  library 
buildings. 


The  same  principle  is  in  some  libraries  also  used  with  books, 
as  a  short  cut  from  the  catalog  to  the  shelves,  and  is  provided  for 
through  some  such  phrasing  as: 

General  books  treating  of  this  subject  are  classified  and  shelved 
in  For  a  card  list  of  these  books  see  the  official  shelflist. 

Other  suggestive  forms  used  where  appropriate  and  where  ap- 
plicable often  enough  to  make  the  printed  form  an  economy  are: 

A  recent  catalog  or  calendar  of  this  institution  will  be  found 
in  the  collection  of  college  catalogs  in  Alcove  A. 


258 


MISCELLANEOUS  PRINTED  MATERIAL  l68 

Pamphlets  belonging  under  this  head  but  not  cataloged  on  the 
subject  cards,  will  be  found  in  bound  volumes  numbered 

For  references  on  this  subject  consult  also  attendant  in  the 
department. 

Books  by  this  author  will  be  found  in  this  catalog  under  the 
heading 

Books  in  this  series  will  be  found  in  this  catalog  under  the 
heading 

To  be  found  in  this  catalog  under 

Material  on  this  subject  will  also  be  found  under 

For  popular  treatises  see 

For  scholarly  or  exhaustive  treatises  see 

Obituary  or  biographical  notice  in 

If  instead  of  a  mere  heading  of  one  or  two  lines,  to  be  written 
in  at  the  top  of  the  card,  the  printed  phrase  implies  the  entry  for 
a  book,  the  phrase  should  be  printed  far  enough  down  on  the  card 
to  allow  for  an  entry  of  average  length.  Examples  of  such  phrases 
are: 

For  other  editions  see  entries  under  heading 

For  full  statement  of  volumes  in  library  see  card  beginning 


259 


I6g-I70b  CATALOGING     RULES 


ART  OBJECTS,  NATURAL  HISTORY  SPECIMENS 
AND  MISCELLANEOUS  OBJECTS 

169  Purpose  of  the  chapter.  Through  the  kindness  of  Mr 
Henry  \V.  Kent,  secretary,  and  Miss  Margaret  Gash,  cataloger,  of 
the  Metropolitan  museum  of  art,  in  New  York  city,  the  author 
was  enabled  to  study  the  cataloging  forms  used  in  connection  with 
that  great  collection.  The  statements  here  made  are  not  to  be 
regarded  as  any  attempt  to  describe  the  methods  practised  at  the 
Museum  or  to  lay  down  rules  for  the  treatment  of  any  extensive 
collection,  which  to  be  done  satisfactorily  should  be  in  the  hands 
of  one  who  is  not  only  a  cataloger  but  also  an  expert  in  the  special 
subject  illustrated  by  the  articles  to  be  described.  The  following 
suggestions  are  merely  set  forth  with  a  view  to  providing  for  the 
cataloger  who  is  not  an  art  connoisseur,  a  scientist  or  an  antiquarian 
a  practicable  method  of  dealing  (in  a  way  which  will  be  reasonably 
satisfactory  to  the  average  sight  seer  or  casual  student)  with  such 
art  objects,  natural  history  specimens  and  miscellaneous  curiosities 
as  frequently  come  in  large  or  small  numbers  into  the  care  of  the 
library. 

170  Catalog  entries.  Certain  features  of  the  mechanical  makeup 
of  a  book  are  practically  universal  and  this  fact  makes  it  feasible 
to  lay  down  definite  rules  for  book  cataloging,  with  relation  to  the 
main  details.  In  regard  to  art  objects,  natural  curiosities,  etc.  the 
range  is  infinite;  (1)  as  to  the  character  of  the  objects  themselves, 
and  (2)  as  to  the  variations  among  the  objects  of  a  special  class. 
However,  a  few  general  principles  can  be  set  forth. 

a  Main  entry.  Corresponding  to  the  author  of  a  book,  the 
painter,  the  sculptor,  the  manufacturer  of  a  piece  of  silver,  etc. 
stands  in  the  character  of  creator  (i.  e.  author)  and  should,  if 
known,  be  accorded  the  same  treatment.  If  the  maker  is  unknown 
the  work  in  hand  is  analogous  to  the  anonymous  book,  and  if  it 
has  a  recognized  name  the  main  entry  should  be  made  under  that, 
on  the  analogy  of  main  entry  under  title  for  an  anonymous  book 
with  author  unknown.  In  cases  where  neither  author  nor  title 
entry  is  applicable  the  subject  card  should  be  treated  as  the  main 
entry. 

b  Title.  With  the  book  the  first  place  is  accorded  to  the  author 
if  known,  whether  his  name  appears  in  the  book  or  not,  but  the 
second  consideration,  the  title,  is  taken  (with  an  occasional  excep- 

260 


ART   OBJECTS,    NATURAL    HISTORY    SPECIMENS,    ETC.  J7°b 

tion,  where  the  title-page  is  lacking)  from  the  title-page  of  the 
book  itself.  At  this  point,  in  the  cataloging  of  objects  other  than 
books,  the  cataloger  must,  for  the  most  part,  branch  out  for  him- 
self, though  for  pictures  and  pieces  of  sculpture  there  are  often 
recognized  names  which  correspond  exactly  to  the  titles  of  books, 
and  for  cataloging  purposes  may  be  thus  treated.  With  other 
objects  a  new  difficulty  rises.  With  the  book  the  words  of  the 
title  are  generally  furnished ;  with  these  other  objects  something 
corresponding  to  a  title  must  be  supplied  and  this  is  the  test  of 
the  cataloger's  knowledge  regarding  the  object,  and  of  his  ability 
to  express  himself  clearly  and  as  briefly  as  possible  without  omit- 
ting desirable   information. 

So  far  as  a  librarian's  knowledge  goes,  the  questions  brought 
into  a  library  presuppose  on  the  part  of  the  public  a  sublime 
confidence  in  the  librarian's  omniscience,  but  if  any  librarian  shares 
this  confidence  in  himself,  it  might  be  well,  applying  the  principle 
to  the  subject  now  in  hand,  for  him  to  visit  a  few  of  the  widely 
varied  collections  in  such  an  institution  as  the  Metropolitan  museum, 
write  the  best  cataloging  description  which  he  can  of  an  object,  and 
then  compare  it  with  the  label  which  has  been  prepared  in  the 
Museum  by  an  expert  in  that  special  branch  of  art.  Not  that 
these  labels,  even  though  furnished  by  connoisseurs,  are  uniformly 
complete  in  the  matter  of  desirable  information !  In  many  cases 
this  information  has  as  yet  not  been  uncovered,  but  by  comparison 
of  similar  objects  and  by  patient  research  it  slowly  unfolds  and 
much  as  the  curator  may  regret  that  he  can  not  furnish  complete 
information  at  once  he  is  forced  to  content  himself  with  giving 
to  the  public  such  information  as  is  at  the  time  available.1 

So  with  our  omniscient  librarian !  His  problem  is  different 
from  that  of  the  great  museum  which  aims  to  furnish  information 
to  the  collector  and  the  special  student  of  the  subject,  and  which 
must,  therefore,  just  as  far  as  its  resources  permit,  have  at  its 
command  the  services  of  experts  in  its  own  lines.  While  the  librarian 
may  not  be  equal  to  furnishing  information  to  the  specialist,  it  may 
reasonably  be  assumed  that  he  is  possessed  of  or  can  avail  himself 
of  more  knowledge  than  that  of  the  average  sight  seer,  regarding 
the  miscellaneous  objects  which  may  have  accumulated  in  the  library, 
either  by  purchase  or   (more  likely)    by  gift.     As  the  best  titles 


1  The  Metropolitan  museum,  in  order  to  secure  uniformity  in  the  use 
of  terms,  maintains  a  "glossary,"  arranged  by  broad  subjects  and  by  the 
names  of  objects,  which  serves  as  a  guide  in  selecting   from  synonyms. 

261 


I70b-d  CATALOGING    RULES 

(unless  intended  to  pique  the  curiosity,  as  often  in  cases  of  fiction) 
designate  at  once  the  character  of  the  work,  so  the  object  without  a 
title  should  be  at  once  designated  by  its  class  name,  as  tapestry, 
bowl,  medal,  netsuke,  etc.,  except  when  the  main  entry  is  made 
under  this  term  as  a  subject  heading.  In  the  case  of  zoological 
or  botanical  objects  the  scientific  name  may  well  be  added  in  curves 
after  the  popular  form,  in  addition  to  the  always  important  reference 
cards.  Then,  corresponding  to  the  subtitle  or  alternative  title, 
should  follow  such  description  as  may  advantageously  be  given  in 
a  catalog  entry.  If  the  main  card  is  made  under  the  subject  heading 
the  description  should  be  so  phrased  as  to  furnish  by  itself  a  satis- 
factory title. 

c  Use  of  photography.  In  the  Metropolitan  museum  it  is  the 
plan  to  present  on  the  back  of  the  catalog  card  a  photograph  of  the 
article.  This  obviates  the  necessity  of  mentioning  such  details  as 
can  be  presented  more  clearly  in  photographic  form  than  in  words. 
It  might  be  noted  here  that  the  catalog  of  the  Metropolitan  museum 
is,  as  at  present  prepared,  for  official  use  only;  for  public  use  it 
would  clearly  be  an  advantage  to  have  the  photographic  representa- 
tion given,  not  on  the  back  of  the  catalog  entry,  but  on  a  second 
card,  unless  there  was  room  on  the  face  of  the  first  card.  The 
very  obvious  and  serious  objection  to  this  would  be  the  practical 
doubling  of  the  space  required  for  the  catalog  entries,  since  on  a 
large  proportion  of  the  cards  the  length  of  the  description  and  the 
size  of  the  photograph  would  necessitate  the  second  card.  How- 
ever, for  the  library  cataloging  of  museum  material  this  objection 
would  hardly  apply;  (1)  because  the  articles  would  in  most  libra- 
ries not  be  numerous  enough  to  make  the  second  card  a  serious 
matter  and  (2)  (and  more  important)  because  probably  few  li- 
braries would  undertake  the  photographic  system,  no  matter  how 
thoroughly  they  recognized  the  desirability  of  the  results,  although 
it  would  seem  that  if  there  was  a  considerable  number  of  objects  to 
be  photographed  at  a  single  visit  of  the  photographer  it  might  be 
entirely  practicable,  or  the  amateur  photography  of  a  member  of 
the  library  staff  might  offer  a  satisfactory  means  of  obtaining  the 
results. 

d  Details  to  be  noted.  In  the  absence  of  the  photograph  a  fuller 
verbal  description  would  be  needed  to  visualize  the  object  to  the 
consulter  of  the  catalog,  and  should,  for  art  objects,  include,  so 
far  as  possible  and  appropriate,  mention  of  the  design,  color,  size, 
material  and  process.     As  a  note  it  would  often  be  of  interest  to 

262 


ART  OBJECTS,   NATURAL  HISTORY  SPECIMENS,  ETC.      I7°d-I74 

have  the  source  mentioned,  i.  e.  the  donor,  or  the  vendor  or  the 
collection  from  which  or  the  funds  with  which  a  purchase  was 
made.  If  the  catalog  was  simply  for  official  use  the  inclusion  of  the 
cost  also  would,  as  a  matter  of  convenience,  be  desirable. 

171  Value  of  special  catalog.  The  value  of  a  catalog  for 
public  use  may  be  questioned.  The  answer  depends  largely  on  the 
size  of  the  collection.  If  there  are  not  more  than  a  dozen  or  so 
objects  and  they  are  all  kept  together  in  a  conspicuous  place  and 
plainly  labeled,  a  special  public  catalog  for  them  would  probably 
be  little  used,  as  the  label  should  contain  practically  the  same 
information  and  the  sight  seer  would  much  prefer  to  consult  a 
label  close  to  the  object  than  a  catalog  entry  some  distance  away. 
If  on  the  other  hand  the  objects  were  numerous  and  specially  if 
they  were  somewhat  scattered  the  value  of  the  catalog  would  be 
correspondingly  increased.  If  no  public  catalog  is  made  the  same 
considerations  would  apply  to  the  desirability  of  an  official  catalog ; 
for  a  very  small  collection  the  accession  record  might  be  sufficient, 
while  for  larger  collections  a  catalog  in  another  form  would  become 
increasingly  important. 

172  Inclusion  of  entries  in  main  catalog.  Another  question 
is  the  advisability  of  including  the  entries  in  the  general  catalog 
of  books.  In  a  library  the  use  of  the  books  is  the  chief  consideration 
and  it  is  naturally  from  this  side  that  information  is  first  sought. 
If  with  the  entries  for  books  there  could  be  included  entries  for 
illustrative  objects  also  it  would  undoubtedly  add  greatly  to  the 
use  of  the  latter,  specially  in  the  case  of  a  collection  too  small  to 
form  an  important  feature  in  itself,  while  in  the  case  of  either  a 
small  or  a  large  collection  this  method  of  procedure  would  add 
decidedly  to  the  usefulness  of  available  resources,  both  books  and 
illustrative  objects;  e.  g.  where  a  library  and  a  museum  were  closely 
associated  the  reader  who  was  looking  for  information  regarding 
the  bear  or  the  fox  might  be  interested  to  know  that  the  museum 
contained  family  groups  of  these  animals,  and  in  a  library  which 
itself  contained  -  the  specimens  such  references  would  be  of  even 
greater  service. 

173  Reading  lists.  A  converse  feature  of  the  work  and  one  in 
a  line  with  much  which  is  already  done  would  be  the  posting  of 
reading  lists  pertaining  to  the  subject  of  the  object  or  special  group. 

174  Photograph  collection.  The  miscellaneous  art  and  natural 
history  objects,  etc.  are  more  likely,  as  already  stated,  to  be  gifts, 

263 


174  CATALOGING     RULES 

and  are  also  likely  to  be  a  very  incidental  feature  in  the  library 
work,  but  one  class  of  property,  which  is  very  closely  allied  to 
books  and  can  be  acquired  at  a  moderate  cost,  is  that  of  photographs, 
and  these  can  be  made  very  useful. 

For  the  main  entry  the  heading-  should  be  the  same  as  for  the 
original  of  the  object  photographed,  i.  e.  the  name  of  the  painter, 
the  sculptor,  etc.  when  known  otherwise,  the  title  or  subject,  as 
suggested  above,  in  170a.  For  the  title  see  suggestions  in  \70b. 
In  the  imprint  the  photographer  may  be  regarded  as  corresponding 
to  the  publisher  of  a  book,  and  following  the  name  of  the  place 
where  his  studio  is  located  his  name  should  be  given.  This  detail 
is  in  many  instances  decidedly  valuable,  as  a  guaranty  of  quality ; 
e.  g.  Alinari,  the  great  Florentine  photographer,  or  Braun,  the 
producer  par  excellence  of  carbon  photographs.  The  date,  likewise, 
should  be  included,  as  nearly  as  possible,  as  depicting  the  object  or 
scene  at  a  given  time,  since  this  is  a  detail  which,  under  certain 
conditions,  may  be  exceedingly  important ;  e.  g.  photographs  of  many 
parts  of  Europe,  taken  in  1910  would  have  little  resemblance  to 
those  taken  ten  years  later.  For  the  collation  the  size  should  be 
given,  height  by  width,  as  for  maps  (section  167). 

Photographic  material  offers  a  wide  range  for  subject  treatment, 
to  be  developed  in  accordance  with  the  working  resources  of  the 
library,  namely  the  time  which  could  be  devoted  to  such  work  and 
the  use  which  could  be  made  of  it. 

In  the  branch  of  description,  entry  under  place  might  be  made 
not  only  for  natural  scenery,  such  as  rivers  and  mountains,  but 
also  for  typical  views,  e.  g.  farm  houses  or  scenes  from  peasant 
life,  and  for  noted  buildings,  such  as  cathedrals  or  chateaux.  The 
buildings  might  also  to  advantage  be  brought  out  not  only  under 
their  own  names  but  under  the  class  of  objects,  as  "Cathedrals"  or 
"Chateaux",  unless  the  pictures  were  numerous  enough  to  warrant 
a  reference  from  these  terms. 

Portraits  naturally  have  subject  entry  under  the  name  of  the 
individual  represented,  but  another  subject  which  would  not  so 
readily  occur  to  the  cataloger  of  the  portraits  but  which  has  in 
some  cases  been  brought  out  by  the  Metropolitan  museum  is  that 
of  costume,  and  the  frequency  with  which  illustrations  of  the 
costume  of  different  countries,  periods  and  classes  of  society  are 
requested  in  library  work  and  the  difficulty  in  meeting  the  requests 
give  emphasis  to  this  special  entry.  A  note  referring  to  the  A.  L.  A. 
Portrait  index  may.  when  applicable,  be  advantageously  added  to 

264 


ART  OBJECTS,  NATURAL  HISTORY  SPECIMENS,  ETC.         ^lA'1!^ 

the  personal  subject  card;  e.  g.  "For  additional  portrait  or  portraits 
see  A.  L.  A.  portrait  index  (769  A51)".  For  this  note,  which  would 
probably  be  often  needed,  it  is  recommended  that  a  rubber  stamp 
or  a  printed  form  be  used. 

Representations  of  battles  and  other  noted  events,  e.g.  the  Land- 
ing of  Columbus  and  the  Signing  of  the  Declaration  of  independ- 
ence, could  be  used  to  add  interest  to  the  work  of  history  classes, 
while  other  types  of  entry  could  be  similarly  developed  in  accord- 
ance with  the  judgment  of  the  librarian  as  to  their  usefulness  in 
school  or  study  club  courses  or  in  connection  with  other  local 
interests. 

Catalog  entries  for  paintings,  sculptures  etc.  should  include  a 
note  of  the  gallery  or  collection  in  which  the  original  is  to  be  found, 
and  an  added  entry  should  be  made  under  the  name  of  the  gallery 
or  collection.  Title  entries  should  also  be  made  as  in  the  case  of 
books.  If  desired,  form  entries  may  be  made  under  such  headings 
as  "Paintings"  and  "Architecture". 

175  Lantern  slides.  Material  closely  allied  to  the  photographic 
is  that  consisting  of  lantern  slides,  but  this  would  find  place  in  a 
much  smaller  number  of  libraries  and  so  far  as  catalog  entries 
are  concerned  would  admit  of  similar  treatment,  so  that  it  requires 
no  special  separate  consideration.  One  innovation,  however,  from 
the  standpoint  of  a  catalog,  should  be  noted  in  the  work  of  the 
Metropolitan  museum.  The  catalog  entry,  which  has  the  same 
information  as  the  label  on  the  slide  itself,  is  filed  in  front  of  the 
slide,  so  that  the  user  of  the  collection  has  before  him  either  the 
slide  itself,  or,  if  that  has  been  lent,  the  catalog  entry,  together 
with  (on  an  additional  card)  an  indication  of  the  borrower.  Thus 
in  a  single  file  is  the  collection  of  slides  themselves,  the  catalog  and 
the  loan  record,  but  as  the  arrangement  is  one  of  broad  classifica- 
tion the  file  can  be  used  only  by  one  familiar  with  its  plan  or  with 
the  assistance  of  such  a  person.  This  difficulty,  however,  might 
very  satisfactorily  be  met  by  a  catalog  containing  duplicates  of 
the  cards  in  the  consolidated  file,  and  also  added  entries. 

176  Form  of  special  catalog.  So  far  as  entries  in  the  main 
catalog  are  concerned  the  general  plan  is  at  once  determined  by 
the  plan  of  the  main  catalog,  presumably  the  dictionary,  but  if  a 
separate  catalog  is  to  be  maintained  the  question  rises  as  to  its  form 
and  the  dictionary  plan  seems  of  very  dubious  desirability  for  the 
purpose.  The  student  of  a  special  collection  would  probably  in  a 
much  larger  proportion  of  cases  than  with  the  general  reader  in  a 

265 


170-176 


CATALOGING     RULES 


public  library  be  studying  on  broad  lines,  i.  e.  broad  lines  as  related 
to  the  general  range  of  the  subject,  and  for  that  reason  a  classed 
catalog  would  be  desirable,  but  the  question  then  rises  as  to  the 
special  form  to  be  adopted. 

"Classification  systems",  as  the  term  is  applied  in  library  science, 
are  systems  for  the  classification  of  books,  generally  with  a  view 
to  arrangement  on  the  shelves.  As  the  wide  diversity  in  shape  and 
size  of  museum  objects  and  the  considerations  to  be  taken  into 
account  for  display  purposes  would  interfere  to  a  very  great  extent 
with  the  application  of  any  book  classification  for  purposes  of 
arrangement,  a  catalog  of  museum  objects  prepared  on  the  plan  of 
any  of  these  systems  could  not  bear  the  same  relation  to  the  objects 
cataloged  as  in  the  case  of  a  catalog  of  books  and  therefore  would 
at  the  outset  lose  an  important  feature  of  its  value.  An  alternative 
system  of  cataloging,  favorably  regarded  at  the  Metropolitan 
museum,  is  the  alphabetico-classed,  which  may  be  briefly  described 
as  a  system  in  which  subject  entries,  instead  of  being  made  under 
the  specific  topic,  as  in  the  dictionary  catalog,  are  made  under 
subject  headings  consisting  of  broad  classes,  subdivided  and  sub- 
subdivided  as  far  as  may  be  necessary  to  bring  out  the  distinct  topic, 
and  arranged  alphabetically  by  the  headings,  first  by  the  broad 
class  and  further  by  the  subdivisions  and  sub-subdivisions.  In  a 
catalog  of  this  kind  the  authors,  titles,  subject  headings  and  refer- 
ences may  be  combined  in  a  single  alphabetic  arrangement,  thereby 
obtaining  one  of  the  greatest  advantages  of  the  dictionary  catalog, 
while  the  advantage  of  the  classed  catalog,  i.  e.  the  grouping  of 
allied  material  on  a  broad  basis  instead  of  scattering  it  under  specific 
headings,  may  be  obtained  through  the  exercise  of  the  cataloger's 
judgment. 

Sample  cards 


Chokjuan,    16th  century. 

Trained  falcon  on  perch. 
69-|x54^cm. 


screen 


Painted  on  paper;   one  part  of  sixfold 


Llark:   two   stamps. 
Gift   in  memory  of  Charles   Stevrart 
(Smith,    1914. 


266 


ART  OBJECTS,  NATURAL  HISTORY  SPECIMENS,   ETC.  170-177 


COSTUME  -  CHINESE. 

Robe;  red  silk,  embroidered  in  bright 
colore  and  tinsel;  chrysanthemum  design. 

Bequest  of  Edward  C. Moore,  1891. 


30m; 


LACQUER  -   CHINESE  -   MID-16TH  CENTURY. 

Tray,   shaped  like  a  six-petaled  bios- 
red  lacquer. 
18cm. 

Bequest  of  Edward  C.Moore,    1891. 


the 


POTTERY  -  JAPANESE  -  19TH  CENTURY.  ■ 

Porcelain  teapot;  globular,  with  high 
flaring  lip;  coated  with  a  mottled  brown 
glaze,  with  runs  of  a  darker  brown. 

10cm. 


Mark:  two  characters  on  foot. 

Bought  at  the  Farrer  sale,  1907,  from 

Rogers  fund. 


177  Prints  and  Music.  It  was  the  intention  to  include  also 
some  suggestions  on  the  cataloging  of  prints,  but  the  appointment 
of  a  special  A.  L.  A.  subcommittee  to  deal  with  this  topic  made  it 
seem  advisable  to  defer  such  publication  till  the  committee's  decisions 
were  announced.  On  similar  grounds  a  chapter  on  music  which 
it  was  planned  that  this  edition  of  the  rules  should  include  has  been 
omitted. 


267 


CATALOGING     RULES 
APPENDIX    1 

FICTION  AND  OTHER  FORMS  OF  LITERATURE 

Fiction.  It  is  not  generally  regarded  as  desirable  for  most 
public  libraries  to  catalog  fiction  with  the  same  degree  of  detail 
used  for  other  works.  Ordinarily  the  reader  cares  only  to  obtain 
the  special  story  and  (assuming  that  the  library  furnishes  none 
but  reasonably  good  editions,  i.  e.  fairly  well  printed  and  bound) 
is  not  concerned  with  the  exact  form  in  which  the  volume  is  given 
him.  It  is  therefore  recommended  that  for  American  and  English 
fiction  the  catalog  entries  consist  of  only  the  author  and  title  proper 
(omitting  information  regarding  illustrators  etc.),  the  number  of 
volumes  when  more  than  one,  and  the  call  number  (generally  merely 
the  Cutter  number)  if  this  is  used  for  fiction.  (Many  libraries  use 
for  fiction  no  call  number  at  all.)  With  this  method  it  is  possible 
to  use  the  same  catalog  card  for  numerous  editions  in  which  the 
variations  are  merely  in  the  form  of  the  book.  i.  e.  name  of 
publisher,  date  of  publication,  number  of  pages,  etc.,  and  to  replace 
wornout  copies  without  altering  the  card. 

The  number  of  volumes  when  more  than  one  is  the  only  item 
of  collation  which  is  noted,  as  being  the  only  one  in  which  the 
average  reader  is  likely  to  be  interested.  Works  of  which  the 
library  has  different  editions  in  varying  numbers  of  volumes  may 
be  cataloged  as  though  the  one-volume  copies  constituted  one  edi- 
tion ;  the  two-volume  copies,  another  edition ;  the  three-volume 
copies,  another;  etc.;  unless,  for  example,  the  two-volume  copies 
break  at  different  points  in  the  story. 

Translations  of  foreign  fiction  (when  regarded  as  merely  a  part 
of  the  fiction  collection,  not  as  illustrations  of  foreign  literature) 
should  be  cataloged  on  the  same  plan,  except  that  in  order  to 
separate  the  work  of  different  translators  it  is  desirable  to  include 
the  translator's  name  in  the  title.  This  point  is  particularly  im- 
portant in  connection  with  the  writings  of  specially  prominent 
authors,  e.  g.  Hugo  and  Balzac,  whose  works  have  been  presented 
through  the  medium  of  numerous  translators. 

In  the  case  of  an  edition  of  a  book  (whether  American  or 
English  or  in  translation)  specially  notable  for  its  illustrations  or 
for  some  other  feature  on  account  of  which  the  library  wishes  to 
keep  it  distinct,  the  special  information  may  be  either  included  in 
the  title  or  brought  out  in  a  note,  and,  like  a  copy  in  a  different 

26S 


FICTION  AND  OTHER  FORMS  OF  LITERATURE 

number  of  volumes,  the  book  may  be  cataloged  as  a  distinct  edition, 
being,  according  to  the  policy  of  the  individual  library,  separated 
from  the  other  editions  by  a  distinct  call  number  or  other  location 
mark. 

Other  forms  of  literature.  In  some  libraries  (specially  the 
smaller  ones)  it  may  be  found  sufficient  to  use  for  poetry,  drama, 
miscellaneous  collections  of  essays,  etc.  the  method  recommended 
above  for  fiction,  namely  to  give  no  imprint  and  only  short  collation 
and  any  other  existing  differences  are  unimportant,  to  regard  as 
and  any  other  existing  differences  are  unimportant,  to  regard  as 
merely  different  copies  those  which  are,  strictly  speaking,  different 
editions. 


269 


CATALOGING     RL'LES 

APPENDIX  2 

BIOGRAPHY 

In  general  the  treatment  of  biography  does  not  differ  from  that 
of  other  books,  the  main  card  being  made  under  the  author's  name, 
with  a  subject  card  under  the  appropriate  subject  heading,  in  this 
case  the  name  of  the  person  written  about,  with  title  cards,  editor 
cards,  etc.  as  needed.  In  the  title,  however,  it  is  more  than  usually 
probable  that  phrases  descriptive  of  the  author  should  be  retained, 
this  being  specially  true  of  phrases  expressing  relationship,  i.  e. 
"by  his  wife",  "by  his  son",  etc.  since  thereby  is  indicated  the 
author's  ground  for  knowing  his  subject. 

Autobiography.  In  theory,  autobiography  does  not  differ 
from  other  biography.  The  fact  that  it  has  an  author  and  also  a 
subject  is  not  altered  by  the  fact  that  the  author  and  the  subject 
are  the  same ;  consequently,  as  a  matter  of  general  principle,  two 
cards  should  be  made,  one  under  the  name  of  the  author  of  the 
work  and  the  other  under  the  same  name  in  the  relation  of  subject. 
Beginners  in  cataloging,  however,  display  a  strong  aversion  to 
making  subject  cards  for  works  of  this  character,  on  the  ground 
that  the  two  cards  will  stand  close  together  and  that  the  second 
card  is  therefore  superfluous.  Practically  the  question  is  one  to  be 
determined  by  the  individual  library  and  in  some  cases,  further,  by 
the  individual  book. 

In  class  work,  where  the  number  of  books  cataloged  is  really 
very  small,  the  objection  advanced  above  is,  on  its  face,  plausible, 
but  when  it  comes  to  the  cataloging  of  an  actual  library  the  case 
is  very  different.  In  a  small  library  an  autobiography  which 
represented  the  entire  literary  work  of  its  author  might  often  be 
satisfactorily  represented  by  an  author  card  only,  as  this  would 
probably  be  noticed  by  the  reader,  even  though  it  was  followed  by 
a  considerable  number  of  cards  representing  works  about  the  person, 
written  by  others,  though  the  smaller  the  number  of  cards  under 
the  name  the  greater  the  probability  that  the  author  card  would 
be  noticed.  Perhaps  no  better  illustration  of  the  other  side  of  the 
case  can  be  given  than  Theodore  Roosevelt,  under  whose  name 
among  the  author  cards  of  the  Library  of  Congress  are  to  be  found 
about  ninety  different  titles,  a  considerable  number  of  which  may 
reasonably  be  expected  to  appear  in  the  catalog  of  even  a  moderate- 

270 


BIOGRAPHY 

sized  library,  with  perhaps  a  group  of  cards  representing  his  work 
as  editor  etc.,  and  finally  the  steadily  increasing  number  of  works 
about  him,  which  should  also  be  well  represented  in  a  general 
collection.  In  this  case  it  would  be  desirable  for  even  the  small 
library  to  have  subject  as  well  as  author  cards  for  his  Autobiography 
and  his  Letters  to  his  children,  since  otherwise  the  reader  who  was 
looking  for  works  about  him  would  be  very  likely  to  overlook  these 
books. 

Between  the  two  extremes  noted  above  is  to  be  found  every 
degree,  while  the  question  of  the  policy  to  be  pursued  is  still  further 
complicated  by  the  size  of  the  cataloging  staff.  In  the  large  library, 
with  a  considerable  number  of  catalogers  with  the  inevitable  vary- 
ing degrees  of  judgment,  it  will  probably  be  both  safer  and  cheaper 
(taking  into  account  the  time  necessary  to  investigate  individual 
cases)  to  have  the  rule  to  make  subject  cards  for  ail  cases  of  auto- 
biography. In  the  small  library  such  a  rule  would  be  less  important 
since  it  would  in  a  far  greater  degree  be  feasible  with  the  smaller 
number  of  books  to  decide  each  case  on  its  individual  merits,  the 
time  needed  for  investigation  would  be  much  lessened,  the  smaller 
catalog  would  decrease  the  danger  of  losing  sight  of  the  auto- 
biography from  its  subject  side  if  only  the  author  card  were  made, 
and  a  force  of  only  one  or  two  catalogers  should  be  able  to  maintain 
a  fair  degree  of  uniformity  of  judgment.  For  class  work  it  is 
better  to  establish  the  practice  of  making  the  subject  cards. 

Letters.  The  collected  letters  of  a  person  are,  when  of  a  per- 
sonal nature,  dealing  to  a  considerable  extent  with  his  own  doings 
and  opinions,  regarded  as  autobiography,  and  should  be  accorded 
a  subject  card  as  well  as  an  author  card  under  the  name  of  the 
writer,  as  indicated  above  for  other  autobiographies. 

Life  and  letters.    A  very  perplexing  class  of  books  consists  of 

those  which  bear  some  such  title  as  "Life  and  letters  of ; 

written  and  edited  by  ".    The  question  immediately  rises  as 

to  whether  to  regard  as  the  author  of  the  book  the  author  of  the 
life  or  the  writer  of  the  letters,  and  the  answer  must  be  determined 
in  each  case  individually,  the  only  practicable  general  rule  being 
to  regard  as  the  author  of  the  book  the  author  of  the  predominant 
feature ;  that  is,  if  the  letters  constitute  the  main  part  of  the  book 
and  the  so-called  "life"  consists  chiefly  of  a  running  narrative  which 
welds  the  letters  into  a  continuous  whole,  the  work  should  be 
regarded  as  autobiography,  with  both  author  and  subject  cards 
made  for  the  writer  of  the  letters  and  an  editor  card  for  the  writer 

271 


CATALOGING  RULES 

of  the  "life",  but  if  the  work  is  mainly  that  of  the  writer  of  the 
"life"  it  should  be  treated  as  ordinary  biography,  the  writer  of  the 
life  being  regarded  as  author  of  the  book  and  the  other  person 
merely  as  the  subject. 

Correspondence.  A  volume  of  correspondence,  consisting  mainly 
of  letters  written  by  one  person,  with  merely  occasional  letters  from 
various  other  sources  scattered  through,  should  be  regarded  as  the 
work  of  the  first  writer,  no  attention  being  paid  to  the  others,  but 
correspondence  between  two  or  three  persons,  in  which  the  part  of 
the  various  participants  is  fairly  well-balanced,  should  be  treated  as 
a  case  of  joint  authorship.  Whether  considered  as  the  work  of  one 
author  or  of  joint  authors  the  book  should  be  regarded  as  auto- 
biography if  the  letters  are  of  a  personal  nature  and  chiefly  of 
interest  in  connection  with  the  writer's  life.  In  the  case  of  joint 
authors  this  treatment  would  call  for  a  subject  card  as  well  as  an 
author  card  under  the  name  of  each  participant  in  the  cor- 
respondence. 


272 


AUTHORITY   LIST 

APPENDIX  3 
AUTHORITY  LIST 

Based  on  directions  given  by  Miss  Mary  E.  Hyde,  in  the  cataloging  course 
in  the  New  York  state  library  school 

Scope.  This  list,  consisting  of  "authority  slips",  constitutes 
a  separate  file  for  official  use  and  includes  all  personal  and  corporate 
names  used  as  headings  in  the  catalog  (whether  as  author  or  in 
some  added  entry  relation,  i.e.  editor,  translator,  general  secondary, 
etc.  or  subject),  the  names  of  anonymous  classics  and  sacred  books 
(these  being  used  as  substitutes  for  author  headings),  the  titles 
of  anonymous  books  (author  unknown)  and  the  headings  for  series 
cards.  (It  may,  if  desired,  also  include  such  headings  as  by  their 
nature  could  be  used  only  as  subjects,  or  these  may  preferably  be 
kept  in  a  separate  file.)  References  also  are  included. 

Purpose.  The  slips  are  made  in  connection  with  the  first 
book  (and  the  first  only)  for  which  the  heading  is  used,  the  pur- 
pose being  to  have  at  hand  for  the  convenience  of  the  cataloger  a 
record  of  the  forms  adopted  for  use  in  the  public  catalog.  To 
serve  this  purpose  it  is  necessary  that  the  headings  on  the  slips 
should  show  exactly  the  form  used  in  the  heading  on  the  catalog 
cards,  i.e.  fulness,  capitalization,  punctuation  and  spacing.  Head- 
ings for  personal  names  should  include  whatever  titles  and  dis 
tinguishing  marks  are  used  on  the  catalog  cards,  e.g.  Mrs,  bart, 
bp,  etc.  and  dates  of  birth  and  death,  but  not  terms  which  show 
merely  the  relation  of  the  person  to  the  individual  book,  e.g.  ed., 
tr.,  etc.  nor  brackets  around  parts  of  name  supplied,  since  the  head- 
ing on  the  authority  slip  should  show  the  form  of  name  to  be  used 
in  the  heading  on  any  catalog  card  as  needed,  without  regard  to 
the  person's  relation  to  the  individual  book  or  to  the  form  in  which 
the  name  appears  on  an  individual  title-page. 

Value.  The  value  of  the  authority  list  will  vary  greatly  in 
different  libraries.  In  the  Library  of  Congress,  whose  own  work 
is  the  authority  preeminent  for  most  of  the  cataloging  of  Amer- 
ican libraries,  it  must  be  regarded  as  indispensable,  while  such 
other  libraries  as  buy  a  large  proportion  of  books  for  which  Library 
of  Congress  cards  are  not  available  will  also  find  it  a  very  valuable 
tool. 

For  such  libraries,  however,  as  add  mainly  current  publications 

273 


CATALOGING    RULES 

and  do  most  of  their  cataloging  by  means  of  Library  of  Congress 
cards,  those  cards  are,  as  they  pass  through  the  cataloger's  hands, 
all  the  authority  needed,  and  any  variation  from  cards  for  the 
same  person,  previously  received  from  the  Library  of  Congress, 
(e.g.  the  addition  of  the  date  of  the  author's  death)  should  be 
detected  and  reported  by  the  person  who  files  the  cards  in  the 
catalog.  For  the  comparatively  few  books  received  by  the  average 
library  for  which  Library  of  Congress  cards  are  not  available  a 
separate  list  may  be  desirable,  in  proportion  to  the  size  of  the 
library  and  the  number  of  such  additions.  Consultation  of  the 
official  catalog  (if  one  is  kept)  or  of  the  public  catalog  will  serve 
to  show  whether  the  library  already  has  other  books  by  the  same 
author,  cataloged  by  the  Library  of  Congress,  in  which  case  authority 
slips  need  not  be  made.  If  it  is  decided  that  in  the  individual 
library  the  character  of  the  work  warrants  such  a  list,  the  following 
suggestions  may  be  of  service. 

Form  of  entry,  a  Heading  for  either  main  or  added  entry. 
Write  the  name,  in  the  exact  form  to  be  used  on  the  catalog  cards, 
with  titles  and  other  distinguishing  marks,  including  dates  of  birth 
and  death,  on  the  top  line  of  the  slip,  at  the  outer  edge,  spaced  as 
on  catalog  cards.  If  the  heading  runs  over  the  line,  indent  to  the 
outer  vertical  rule. 

This  change  from  cataloging  indention  is  recommended  to  economize 
space,  by  using  the  left  margin,  which  would  otherwise  be  unused,  since 
call  numbers  are  not  given  on  authority  slips. 

b  Title  and  imprint.  On  a  slip  made  for  the  author  of  a  book, 
give  on  the  line  following  the  heading  the  title  of  the  first  book 
cataloged  under  his  name,  in  brief  form  but  including  the  first 
words,  except  for  such  omissions  as  would  be  made  on  catalog 
cards.  Begin  at  the  first  vertical  rule ;  if  necessary  to  run  over  the 
line,  indent  the  latter  part  to  the  second  vertical  rule.  After  the 
title  give  the  imprint  date  or  its  substitute,  in  the  form  given  on 
the  catalog  cards.  Copyright  date  need  not  be  given  in  addition 
to  imprint  date,  unless  widely  different. 

c  Details  for  added  entry  slips.  On  slips  made  for  added  entries, 
i.e.  editors,  translators,  general  secondaries,  etc.  and  persons  or 
corporate  bodies  as  subjects,  give  on  the  line  following  the  head- 
ing (beginning  at  the  outer  vertical  rule,  and  if  the  matter  runs 
over  the  line,  indenting  the  latter  part  to  the  inner  vertical  rule) 
the  author's  name  inverted,  following  the  surname  by  the  given 
names,  in  either  author  or  secondary  fulness,  or  by  initials,  as  seems 

274 


AUTHORITY   LIST 

in  the  individual  case  desirable  for  the  easy  identification  of  the 
author.  After  his  name,  on  the  same  line  give  the  title  of  the  book 
and  the  date,  in  accordance  with  the  directions  above  for  the  slips 
for  authors.  On  these  slips  for  added  entries,  prefix  to  the  author's 
name,  at  the  left  of  the  outer  vertical  rule,  the  abbreviation  indicat- 
ing the  relation  to  the  book  being  cataloged,  of  the  person  named 
in  the  heading  for  the  slip;  e.g.  ed.,  gen.  2d,  subj.,  etc. 

d  Citations.  Omitting  one  line  and  beginning  at  the  outer 
vertical  rule,  give,  one  below  another,  the  reference  works  con- 
sulted, in  the  order  of  consultation.  For  much-used  reference 
works  very  brief  abbreviations  may  be  used,  e.g.  L.C.  for  Library 
of  Congress  cards,  B.M.  for  British  museum  catalog,  Al.  for  Alli- 
bone's  Critical  dictionary  of  British  and  American  authors,  Al.  sup. 
for  the  supplement,  W.w.  for  Who's  who,  etc.  For  works  like 
Who's  who,  and  the  United  States  catalog,  the  dates  of  the  special 
volumes  consulted  should  be  given  in  the  citation.  Information 
regarding  an  author  is  often  found  in  a  biographical  preface  to 
the  book  being  cataloged.  In  such  cases  the  authority  may  be  cited 
as  Bk  (meaning  "book")  followed  by  the  page  citation.  A  key  to 
the  abbreviations  used  for  reference  sources  should  be  placed  at 
the  beginning  of  the  file  of  slips. 

Knowledge  of  reference  material  and  good  judgment  in  selecting  the 
reference  books,  with  a  view  to  their  reliability  and  the  probability  of  their 
furnishing  the  information  for  the  special  case,  will  at  this  point  be  of 
inestimable  value  in  facilitating  the  cataloger's  work.  The  number  of 
authorities  to  be  consulted  in  any  individual  case  depends  on  the  reliability 
of  the  authorities  and  the  completeness  of  the  information  found.  When 
contradictory  information  is  found  in  two  or  more  authorities  it  may  be 
necessary  to  consult  a  larger  number  in  order  to  determine  the  weight  of 
evidence.  In  the  case  of  names  difficult  to  find  and  therefore  probably 
those  of  obscure  persons  it  is  not  generally  worth  while  to  make  extended 
search.  Care  must  be  taken  not  to  confuse  writers  of  the  same  name,  and 
in  this  connection  the  title  of  the  book  and  the  date  of  printing  are  often 
of  great  importance. 

If  the  name  sought  is  found  in  the  authority  consulted,  prefix 
a  check  (i.e.V)  to  the  citation  of  the  authority  (see  samples  below V 
If  the  name  sought  and  also  the  title  of  the  book  in  hand  are 
found  prefix  to  the  citation  two  checks  (i.e.VV)-  If  the  name  is 
not  found  in  the  authority  consulted  prefix  to  the  citation  a  superior 
0  (i.e.  °).  If  the  dates  accepted  for  use  in  the  heading  ate  found 
in  the  authority  cited,  write  "d"  after  the  V  or  V  V-  If  variations 
(in  either  the  name  or  dates)  from  the  form  of  heading  adopted 
are  found  in  any  autTiority  this  variation  should  be  shown  in  curves 
after  that  citation. 

275 


CATALOGING     RULES 

In  order  that  all  variations  may  be  recorded  without  referring  again  to 
the  authorities,  complete  and  exact  notes  should,  at  the  time  of  the  original 
consultation,  be  made  of  such  information  given  as  would  be  used  in  the 
heading,  e.g.  the  exact  form  of  name  found  in  the  authority  and  the  dates 
of  birth  and  death. 

For  the  sake  of  brevity  in  the  record  of  variations,  such  part  of 
the  name  as  is  identical  with  the  corresponding  part  given  in  the 
heading  on  the  slip  may  be  indicated  by  the  initial  of  that  part  of 
the  name,  followed  by  three  dashes,  as  shown  in  the  sample  for  La 
Tour  de  Varan. 

If  citations  either  with  or  without  variants  run  over  the  line  the 
latter  part  should  be  indented  to  the  inner  vertical  rule. 

e  Reference  tracing.  If  references  from  other  forms  of  name, 
pseudonyms,  etc.  are  to  be  made,  indicate  them  near  the  bottom 
of  the  slip,  preceded  by  "s"  in  curves,  omitting  when  possible  at 
least  one  line  after  the  citations.  Write  the  names  from  which 
reference  is  to  be  made  fully  enough  for  easy  identification  of  the 
slips,  but  when  parts  of  the  reference  are  identical  with  parts  of 
the  heading  of  the  slip  in  hand,  these  parts  may,  if  needed  at  all, 
generally  be  indicated  by  the  initial  letter  followed  by  three  type- 
writer dashes,  e.g.  a  reference  from  Matthews,  Brander,  to  Mat- 
thews, James  Brander,  may  be  indicated  by  (s)  M ,  Brander. 

/  Reference  slips.  In  making  reference  slips,  follow  the  simple 
"see"  form  of  reference  given  for  catalog  cards. 

g  Societies,  institutions  etc.  In  general  the  authority  slips  for 
corporate  bodies  contain  merely  the  heading  used.  Occasionally 
extra  information  is  added  below ;  e.g.  date  of  founding,  date  of 
incorporation,  changes  of  name,  amalgamation  with  other  bodies, 
etc.  If  this  information  is  not  readily  located  it  is  well  to  cite  the 
exact  reference. 

h  Anonymous  classics  and  Sacred  books.  Generally  for  head- 
ings of  this  character  nothing  but  the  heading  need  be  given  on 
the  slip,  but  where  there  is  known  to  be  diversity  of  practice  it 
may  be  found  of  advantage  to  give  the  authority  for  the  heading 
used  (as  on  the  slips  for  personal  names),  also  the  variants  with 
their  own  authorities.  References  from  variants  should  be  indicated, 
as  on  personal  slips;  e.g.  from  Alkoran  to  Koran. 

i  Anonymous  booh  (author  unknown).  Begin  the  title  on  the 
top  line  of  the  slip,  at  the  outer  edge  of  the  card,  as  in  the  heading 
for  personal  names.  After  the  title  give  the  date  used  on  the 
catalog  cards.     Cite,  as  for  other  slips,  the  authorities  consulted 

276 


AUTHORITY   LIST 

in  searching  for  the  author's  name,  in  order  that  it  may  be  shown 
that  no  probable  source  of  information  has  been  overlooked. 

/  Series  headings.  On  slips  made  for  the  headings  for  series 
cards,  no  authorities  are  cited,  as  the  heading  is  regularly  taken 
from  the  book  itself.  Entries  on  these  slips  therefore  consist 
merely  of  the  form  of  heading  used,  with  tracing  for  references 
from  any  other  forms  under  which  the  series  may  be  known. 

k  Signature.  The  signature  of  the  cataloger  making  the  slip 
should  be  given  in  the  upper  right  corner.  If  regarded  of  value 
the  date  may  be  given  after  the  signature,  also  the  reviser's  sig- 
nature if  the  slips  are  revised. 

Corrections  and  additions.  When  a  mistake  is  discovered 
on  an  authority  slip,  or  additional  information  is  called  for  (e.g. 
the  date  of  death),  the  correction  or  addition,  with  the  correspond- 
ing citation,  should  be  indicated  in  some  clearly  distinguishable  man- 
ner (e.g.  red  ink)  and  the  signature  of  the  person  making  the 
correction  or  addition  should  be  added  in  the  same  distinguishable 
manner  below  the  original  signature,  also  the  date  if  dates  are  used 
with  original  signatures. 


Sample  slips 
Author  slip 


La  Tour 


de 

1364 

Ssaai 


vv 


Tout 


a)   La 
s)    Var^n 


Varan,   Jean  Antolne  de, 


1798?-     *a 


our  la  formation  d'une   biblio- 
thoque   forezienne,  1864 


B.M.    (La  T de   V ,    J. A.    de) 

Lar.    (La  Tour*- Varan,   J A de) 

La  grande 


-Varan 


o 


77 


CATALOGING    RULES 
Editor  slip 


Dalaunaly,    Henri,  abbe. 

ed.pouc^uet,   J.  Oeuvre. 


o 

v   V 


Lar. 

La 

Bib. 


1863-67 


2& 


grande 

aat. 


Subject  headings  list.  In  many  libraries  the  list  of  subject 
headings  and  references  used  in  the  catalog  is  kept  by  checking 
whichever  of  the  printed  lists  is  taken  as  a  basis  of  work,  either 
the  Library  of  Congress  subject  headings  or  the  A.L.A.  list,  and 
inserting  on  the  pages  any  needed  additional  headings.  Other 
libraries  prefer  to  keep  the  list  on  slips  and  for  this  plan  the  forms 
given  below  are  recommended.  These  slips  are  usually  best  kept 
in  a  separate  file  but  may,  if  preferred,  be  included  with  the  slips 
in  the  general  authority  list. 

a  Color.  If  desired,  red  ink  or  black  capitals  may  be  used, 
corresponding  to  the  headings  on  the  catalog  cards,  but  red  ink 
is  less  easy  to  read  than  black  and  is  more  likely  to  fade,  and 
capitals  are  less  easy  to  read  than  lower  case,  while  there  is  not 
in  a  purely  official  list  of  headings  the  same  importance  in  dis- 
tinguishing conspicuously  between  author  and  subject  headings  as 
in  a  public  catalog,  where  there  may  be  large  blocks  of  cards  under 
a  single  heading  and  in  some  cases  blocks  of  both  author  and 
subject  cards  under  the  same  name.  If  the  subject  list  is  kept 
separate  there  is  even  less  reason  for  the  use  of  a  distinctive  style. 
It  is  recommended  that  no  such  distinction  be  attempted,  but  the 
ordinary  style  of  writing  used,  as  shown  in  the  samples  below. 

b  Form  of  entry.  Write  the  subject  heading  in  the  exact  form 
which  is  to  be  used  on  the  catalog  cards,  on  the  top  line  of  the  slip, 
beginning  at  the  extreme  left  edge,  thus  gaining  the  use  of  the 
entire  length  of  the  line.  If  the  heading  runs  over  the  line  begin 
subsequent  lines  at  the  outer  vertical  rule.  For  countries  and 
cities  slips  need  not  be  made  to  record  the  use  of  the  ordinary 
subdivisions  (e.g.  Venice — Description)  nor  for  other  subjects  the 
use  of  the  general  form  divisions  (e.g.  Economics — Bibliography). 

Omitting  one  line  after  the  heading  and  beginning  at  the  inner 
vertical  rule  write  "Refer  from",  and  on  the  lines  immediately  fol- 
lowing and  beginning  at  the  outer  vertical  rule,  list  on  separate 


278 


AUTHORITY   LIST 

lines  the  headings  from  which  references  are  made.  If  they  run 
over  the  line  indent  to  the  inner  vertical  rule.  To  distinguish 
between  "see"  and  "see  also"  references,  for  "see"  references  write 
"s"  in  curves,  at  the  left  of  the  heading  from  which  reference  is 
made;  headings  not  preceded  by  (s)  are  to  be  understood  as  rep- 
resenting "see  also"  references.  A  note  explaining  this  method  of 
distinguishing  should  be  placed  at  the  beginning  of  the  file. 


Samples 


Manner 3 


(3) 


l:l 


and 


3iv 

Fo 

Oust 

/Vroh 

Ethn 

Rite 

Cere 

Soc 

Soc 

St bib a 


customs. 

Refer  from 
ikization 


lklore 

Dras 

3ology 

Dlogy 

3  and.  ceremonies 

monies 
ial  life   and  customs 
iology 


Customs,  see 

wlannsrs  and  customs 


Civilization,  see  also 

iiannsrs  and  customs 


c  Authority  citations.  There  is  wide  divergence  of  opinion 
among  catalogers  as  to  the  advantage  of  noting  on  these  slips  the 
source  from  which  the  heading  is  taken,  either  in  all  cases  or  when 
it  is  some  other  than  the  source  on  which  the  list  is  based.  When 
the  source  of  information  is  given  it  may,  if  there  is  room,  be  added 
in  brackets  on  the  same  line  with  the  heading,  at  the  end  of  the 
line,  or,  if  there  is  not  room  on  the  same  line,  the  source,  written 
in  brackets,  may,  so  far  as  is  necessary,  be  carried  over  to  the 
following  line,  indented  as  though  it  were  a  continuation  of  the 
heading  itself,  i.e.  hanging  indention. 

279 


CATALOGING    RULES 

APPENDIX  4 
GUIDES 

Definition  and  purpose.  A  guide  card,  as  defined  in  Moth's 
Glossary  of  library  terms,  is  "A  card  with  projecting  and  suitably- 
labeled  edge,  inserted  in  a  catalog,  to  facilitate  the  finding  of 
entries". 

It  is  at  best  a  trying  task  to  turn  over  card  after  card  to  find  a 
desired  heading  or  entry,  and  a  well-planned  system  of  guides, 
which  (with  their  lettered  "tabs"  projecting  far  enough  above  the 
regular  catalog  cards  to  allow  for  one  line  of  lettering)  are  in- 
serted before  the  first  card  beginning  in  the  same  way  (thereby 
directing  the  eye  at  once  to  approximately  the  desired  point)  im- 
measurably relieves  the  situation. 

Styles  of  guides.  Guides  may  be  obtained  from  one  or  an- 
other of  the  library  supply  houses1,  with  the  "tab"  (i.e.  projecting 
edge)  covering  either  the  entire  length  of  the  card,  or  one  half,  one 
third,  one  fourth  or  one  fifth  the  length,  and  known  as  wholes  (or 
singles),  halves,  thirds,  fourths  or  fifths.  With  halves  the  tab  may 
be  used  at  either  the  left  or  the  right  of  the  catalog  tray,  the  thirds 
are  so  cut  that  the  tabs  may  appear  at  the  left,  the  center  or  the 
right,  the  fourths  at  the  first,  second,  third  or  fourth  quarter,  and 
the  fifths  at  the  first,  second,  third,  fourth  or  fifth  section  or  position 
of  the  card.     Other  cuts  may  be  had  to  order,  e.g.  center  halves. 

These  guide  cards  are  furnished  on  heavy  stock,  in  white,  buff, 
salmon  and  blue.  The  buff,  salmon  and  blue,  in  halves,  thirds  and 
fifths,  are  the  styles  most  commonly  employed.  The  whole  cuts  are 
little  used,  being  chiefly  appropriate  for  main  headings  and  seldom 
needed  for  these,  since  main  headings  are  seldom  long.  The  whole 
cut  may,  however,  sometimes  be  used  to  advantage,  for  even  a 
short  main  heading  (either  author  or  subject),  if  this  introduces 
so  long  a  series  of  entries  as  to  justify  special  treatment.  A  greater 
variety  of  the  shorter  guides  may  then  be  used,  if  needed  to  bring 
out  various  grades  of  subdivision.  Fourths,  being  intermediate 
between  thirds  and  fifths,  do  not  differ  enough  from  either  to  be 
very  distinctive. 


1  Detailed  information  as  to  which  of  the  houses  furnishes  which  of  the 
supplies  mentioned,  with  prices  and  many  helpful  suggestions  as  to  use,  are 
to  he  found  in  the  catalogs  of  the  various  houses. 

280 


GUIDES 


/         TMrda  V_ jL. 


/      Fourths  \ X, X _k 


Wholes  (or  singles) 


Center  halves 


Side  halves 


Fifths 


IX        K        X      \ 


O 


Systems  of  guiding.  Owing  to  the  wide  differences  in  the 
contents  of  different  catalogs  no  very  definite  rules  can  be  laid 
down  for  developing  a  system  of  guides,  but  the  following  sugges- 
tions are  offered  with  a  view  to  their  application  or  modification  to 
fit  the  individual  need. 

One  plan  which  has  met  with  decided  favor,  specially  because 
it  never  breaks  down,  is  as  follows:  Using  buff  guides,  the  first 
fifth  (counting  from  the  left)  is  lettered  with  the  first  letter  or  the 
first  two  letters  of  the  entry  word,  the  second  fifth  carries  the 

281 


CATALOGING    RULES 

lettering  to  the  first  three  letters,  and  the  third  fifth  to  the  first  four 
letters,  while  beyond  that  the  righthand  half  is  used  and  takes  all 
longer  combinations.     If  desired,  for  headings  including  subdivi- 
sions, for  the  sake  of  emphasizing  the  idea  of  subdivision,  guides 
of  a  different  color  (e.g.  salmon  or  blue)  may  be  used  for  the  sub- 
divisions.   Of  the  two  colors  the  lettering  shows  better  on  the  salmon. 
For  subdivided  headings  it  may  sometimes  be  clearer  to  users  of 
the  catalog  if  the  main  heading  as  well  as  the  subdivision  is  given 
on  the  guide,  even  though  it  may  often  be  necessary  in  such  cases 
to  use  an  abbreviated  form  for  the  main  heading.     In  some  cases, 
however,  a  block  of  cards  under  a  single  heading  may  be  so  great  as 
to  need  subdivision  by  some  device  which  is  not  strictly  a  part  of 
the  heading;  e.g.   under  a  subject  heading  where   the  cards  are 
alphabeted  by  the  authors'  names  the  block  may  be  broken  up  by 
guides  showing  the  initial  letters  of  the  names,  or  if  the  cards  (as 
frequently  in  such  subjects  as  science  and  the  industrial  arts)  are 
arranged  by  dates,  the  inclusive  dates  of  the  cards  within  the  group 
may  be  given.     In  cases  of  this  kind  the  subdivision  is  merely  a 
subdivision  of  the  block  of  cards,  not  a  subdivision  of  the  subject 
itself,  and  the  subject  heading  should  not  be  repeated  on  these  final 
guides;  therefore  short  tabs  (or  cuts,  as  they  are  often  called)  may 
be  used,  fifths  for  initial  letter  and  either  fifths  or  thirds  for  inclusive 
dates.     If  desired,  in  order  to  make  the  subdivision  more  distinct, 
salmon  or  blue  guides  may  be  used  instead  of  buff.     Occasionally 
also  a  genuine  subdivision  of  a  heading  may  be  used  alone  on  a 
short   guide,    e.g.   with   Bible.    N.T.    Matthew.   French,   the   fourth 
part  is  the  language  designation  and  because  it  could  not  possibly 
be  used  alone  as  a  heading  it  is  not  likely  to  be  confusing  to  the 
reader  if  written  alone.     There  are  also  many  other  headings  in 
which  the  main  division  stands  out  so  distinctly  and  the  subheads 
are  so  obviously  subordinate   features  that  repetition  of  the  main 
heading  is  superfluous. 

Another  plan  would  be  to  use  for  the  main  headings  the  left- 
hand  thirds,  for  the  first  subdivisions  the  center  thirds  and  for  the 
second  subdivisions  the  righthand  halves.  While  it  seems  illogical 
to  introduce  halves  as  subordinate  to  thirds,  the  procedure  has  a 
practical  value  in  furnishing  for  the  longer  heading  involved  if  the 
main  heading  is  combined  with  two  subdivisions  a  longer  tab  on 
which  to  write.  When  desirable  to  introduce  third  and  fourth  sub- 
divisions (which  are  rare)  it  could  be  done  by  the  use  of  righthand 
thirds  and  fifths,  following  the  half.    To  show  the  beginning  of  each 

282 


GUIDES 


letter  of  the  alphabet  or  the  beginning  of  a  new  combination  of  let- 
ters, which  would  often  not  correspond  with  the  main  headings 
used,  first-position  fifths,  preferably  salmon  or  blue,  may  be  in- 
serted among  the  main  guides. 

A  third  system  is  that  of  using  lefthand  halves  for  authors,  and 
righthand  halves  for  subjects,  while  thirds  and  fifths  may  be  intro- 
duced, if  thought  advisable,  for  subdivisions.  The  difference 
between  author  and  subject  guides  may  be  further  emphasized,  if 
desired,  by  the  use  of  different  colors,  e.g.  buff  for  authors  and 
salmon  for  subjects. 

Innumerable  other  systems  might  be  worked  out,  and  a  variation 
may  occasionally  be  introduced  into  a  general  system,  e.g.  under 
the  name  of  an  author  or  subject  where  there  is  an  extensive 
collection  of  entries,  an  entirely  separate  and  independent  system 
may  be  used. 

Printed  guides.  From  the  library  supply  houses  sets  of 
printed  guides  are  obtainable,  designed  to  meet  varying  needs. 
Among  these  may  be  mentioned  the  A-Z  sets  ranging  from  5  to 
1200  cards.  A  library  catalog  small  enough  to  be  satisfied  with 
guides  on  which  the  alphabet  was  divided  among  only  5  cards  is 
almost  inconceivable,  but  the  set  of  25  cards,  in  which  the  division 
is  practically  one  letter  of  the  alphabet  to  a  guide,  is  often  useful, 
and  the  larger  sets  allow  for  more  minute  subdivisions  for  a  catalog 
where  the  adoption  of  such  a  method  is  preferred  to  the  working 
out  of  a  system  providing  for  full  actual  headings. 

In  place  of  25  A-Z  guides,  cut  as  fifths  or  thirds,  the  alphabetic  division 
by  authors  under  a  subject  heading  may  be  obtained  by  means  of  what 
are  called  "tab  card  guides"  or  "auxiliary  guides".  There  are  printed  sets 
of  these,  with  short  tabs  each  covering  1/20  of  the  card,  dividing  the  alphabet 
into  20  parts  and  running  from  left  to  right  in  one  continuous  A-Z  series. 

Printed  guides  intended  for  a  general  miscellaneous  dictionary 
catalog  are  available  in  sets  of  500,  of  1000,  of  3000  and  of 
5000  cards,  printed  on  halves,  and  similar  cards  can  be  selected  as 
needed  from  a  collection  of  1295  subjects,  printed  on  center-cut 
cards.  Sets  are  also  made  up  for  special  kinds  of  catalogs;  e.g. 
children's  catalogs,  school  library  catalogs.  Library  of  Congress 
depository  catalogs,  law  library  catalogs  (authors  and  subjects)  and 
European  war  headings.  Guides  may  likewise  be  obtained,  printed 
to  order. 

Obviously  the  use  of  these  sets  (except  the  simple  A-Z  divisions) 
determines   the   system    for   the   catalog   where    used.      Additional 

283 


CATALOGING     RULES 

headings  may,  of  course,  be  inserted  by  means  of  hand-lettered 
guides,  and  while  these  destroy  the  symmetry  of  the  arrangement 
that  feature  is  a  minor  consideration  as  compared  with  the  increased 
usableness  of  the  catalog.  When  the  inserted  guides  are  for  sub- 
divisions, if  it  is  desired  to  emphasize  the  idea  of  subdivision,  guides 
of  a  different  color  but  of  the  same  length  of  cut  may  be  used ;  e.g. 
back  of  a  buff  half-cut,  subdivisions  might  be  shown  on  salmon  or 
blue  half-cuts. 

Guides  bearing  additional  directions  and  information.     One 

very  useful  printed  guide  bears  on  its  full-length  tab  the  words 
"How  to  use  this  catalog",  while  lower  down  on  the  guide  are  given 
specific  directions.  A  "collateral  reference  guide"  has  a  blank  tab, 
on  which  is  to  be  written  the  desired  heading,  while  below  is 
printed  a  reference  to  special  shelves,  files  and  collections,  where 
additional  material  on  the  subject  may  be  found. 

The  lower  part  of  the  guide  may  also  be  used  for  other  kinds  of 
information  or  direction;  e.g.  the  plan  of  arrangement  of  entries 
when  differing  from  the  usual,  as,  for  certain  subjects,  the  inverse 
chronologic ;  information  about  personal  authors,  as,  changed  names 
or  pseudonyms ;  for  societies  the  date  of  incorporation,  changes  of 
name,  etc. ;  information  regarding  the  scope  of  a  heading  of  little- 
known  limitations,  as,  for  the  heading  "Northwest.  Canadian",  the 
explanation  "Covering  territory  west  and  northwest  of  Ontario, 
and  not  limited  to  any  one  province  or  territory" ;  or  to  distinguish 
between  the  use  of  headings  of  similar  nature.  Guides  may  also, 
if  preferred,  be  used  instead  of  the  regular  catalog  cards  for  the 
general  references,  such  as  are  indicated  in  section  30b,  and  for 
some  of  the  printed  forms  suggested  in  section  168.  This  use  of 
the  guide  card  is,  however,  open  to  this  objection:  the  reader  wish- 
ing information  on  the  subject  indicated  on  the  tab  is  very  likely 
to  tip  the  guide  forward,  together  with  the  cards  which  immediately 
precede  it,  and  thus  fail  to  see  at  all  anything  written  below  the 
tab.  It  is  therefore  advised  that  instead  of  writing  the  statements 
or  directions  on  the  guide  they  be  written  on  a  catalog  card  filed 
immediately  after  the  guide.  By  this  policy  the  general  references 
would  be  filed  before  the  entries  instead  of  after,  as  recommended 
in  section  35,  but  the  general  references,  being  fuller  in  form,  are 
less  likely  than  are  the  specific  references  to  send  the  reader  away 
from  the  subject  of  which  he  is  actually  in  search.  Consequently 
that  objection  has  for  the  general  references  far  less  weight  and 
these  may  very  reasonably  be  placed  before  the  entries,  with  the 

284 


GUIDES 

specific  references  still  kept  at  the  end.  For  the  purpose  of  making 
these  reference  or  additional  information  cards  more  conspicuous, 
colored  cards  may  be  used,  preferably  buff  or  salmon. 

For  the  "How  to  use  this  catalog"  guides  the  reason  against 
employing  the  lower  part  of  the  card  for  printed  or  written  infor- 
mation does  not  hold,  since  in  this  case  the  phrase  is  calculated  to 
call  attention  to  the  guide  itself,  not  to  the  material  behind  it. 

Protected  tabs.  As  the  tabs  on  the  guide  cards  receive  the 
hardest  wear  of  any  part  of  the  catalog,  they  soon,  unless  specially 
protected,  are  soiled,  frayed  or  broken,  and  thus  become  a  "blot  on 
the  face  of  the  [catalog]  landscape"  and  of  gradually  diminishing 
usefulness  until  they  must  finally  be  replaced.  The  most  common 
method  of  protection  is  by  covering  the  tab  with  celluloid.  Through 
a  transparent  coating  of  this  the  printed  tab  is  perfectly  clear,  while 
the  celluloid  offers  an  effective  defense  against  dirt  and  wear. 
The  greater  original  cost  of  the  celluloid  guides  is  probably  much 
more  than  offset  by  their  greater  wearing  qualities.  Nearly  all  the 
printed  guides  are  furnished  with  the  celluloid  covering,  though  a 
few  may  be  obtained  without.  Celluloided  blank  guides  also  may 
be  had,  of  two  kinds,  one  with  the  tabs  covered  with  opaque 
celluloid,  on  which  the  heading  is  to  be  written,  and  the  other  with 
the  tabs  covered  with  the  transparent  celluloid  in  such  a  manner  as 
to  allow  a  lettered  label  to  be  slipped  between  the  tab  and  its 
protective  cover.  Still  a  third  form  is  a  transparent  celluloid  holder, 
which  is  fastened  to  the  guide  and  into  which  the  label  may  be 
slipped.  While  these  celluloided  blank  guides  could  be  used  for  the 
complete  guiding  of  a  catalog  their  greatest  use  is  for  the  insertion 
of  headings  in  a  system  of  printed  guides. 

Several  metal  label  holders  have  also  been  devised,  some  of 
which  are  fastened  to  the  guide  in  a  fixed  position,  while  others 
may  be  moved,  but  these  holders  are  very  aggressive  in  their 
appearance  and  for  library  catalogs  the  celluloided  forms  are  recom- 
mended  in   preference. 

Lettering.  The  printed  guides,  like  printed  catalog  cards, 
have  the  advantage  of  perfect  uniformity  in  lettering,  but  even 
where  they  are  used  it  is  almost  inevitable  that  hand-lettering  should 
also  enter  in,  to  provide  for  the  additional  headings  sooner  or  later 
needed.  This  hand-lettering,  whether  for  the  entire  guiding  of  the 
catalog  or  merely  for  inserts,  should  be  done  in  the  disjoined  (or 
printing)  hand  and  as  legibly  and  neatly  as  possible,  the  word  or 
phrase  being  set  high   enough   on   the  tab  to   escape  entirely  any 

285 


CATALOGING    RULES 

obstruction  from  the  card  in  front.     India  ink  should  preferably  be 
used. 

Frequency  of  guides.  By  some  it  is  advised  that  guides  be 
inserted  about  every  25  cards,  by  others  that  they  appear  at  distances 
of  not  more  than  an  inch.  For  an  individual  library  using  very 
heavy  cards  the  inch  plan  might  be  satisfactory,  but  as  a  rule  for 
general  application,  covering  cards  of  different  weights,  the  25-card 
rule  seems  better.  Guides  should  be  close  enough  together  to 
show  very  nearly  the  position  of  the  desired  entry,  but  sufficiently 
separated  to  stand  out  distinctly.  Every  important  author  and 
subject  should  be  brought  out,  and  when  many  entries  are  made 
under  the  name  of  a  single  author  the  titles  should  be  indicated, 
either  by  a  guide  for  each  title  or  by  one  for  each  of  the  most 
important. 

Guides  cut  in  halves  or  thirds  placed  at  different  positions  across 
the  tray  have  this  advantage,  that  those  in  the  first,  the  second  or 
the  third  position  are  more  widely  separated  and  can  therefore  be 
more  easily  seen  than  when  they  all  stand  in  the  same  position,  one 
directly  behind  the  other.  To  offset  this  is  the  greater  ease  with 
which  the  eye  runs  down  a  single  row  of  guides  instead  of  zig- 
zagging across  the  tray  or  running  first  down  one  row  of  guides 
and  then  down  another.  Opinions  will  differ  as  to  which  is  pref- 
erable. 

One  or  two  of  the  "How  to  use  this  catalog"  guides  should  be 
placed  in  every  drawer  in  a  conspicuous  position. 

Because  of  the  special  difficulty  in  finding  material  under  headings  which 
include  official  subdivisions  it  was  advocated  by  Mr  Cutter  that  for  those 
countries  and  cities  under  the  name  of  which  many  cards  were  filed  a  guide 
should  be  inserted  for  every  department  and  every  subject  division,  even 
if  there  was  only  one  card  under  that  heading.  Wherever  this  policy  would 
result  in  bringing  the  guides  so  close  together  as  to  obscure  each  other  a 
wooden  block  about  four  millimeters  thick  was  to  be  used  to  set  off  the 
later  guide  till  enough  cards  accumulated  under  the  previous  heading  to 
make  the  separation  between  the  guides  clear.  //  the  branches  of  govern- 
ment and  the  works  about  a  country  are  alphabete.d  as  separate  groups  (it 
is  recommended  that  they  be  arranged  in  a  single  alphabet)  each  group 
should  be  preceded  by  a  guide  of  distinctive  color,  with  a  distinguishing 
phrase;  e.g.  "U.S.  Branches  of  government,"  and  "U.S.  Works  about." 

Uses  other  than  for  dictionary  catalogs.  The  foregoing 
statements  have  been  prepared  with  special  reference  to  the  guiding 
of  a  dictionary  catalog,  but  there  are  numerous  other  ways  in  which 
those  guides  already  mentioned  or  similar  ones  may  be  used.  Some 
of  them  are  as  follows;  for  the  classed  catalog  and  the  shelflist, 

286 


GUIDES 

guides  containing  the  classification  symbol  and  its  corresponding 
phrase  (for  the  Decimal  classification,  printed  guides  are  available 
for  the  first  100  divisions)  ;  for  the  charging  tray,  printed  guides 
can  be  obtained  for  100  of  the  most  used  Decimal  classification 
numbers  (for  the  use  of  libraries  where  the  book  record  is  thus 
kept),  for  some  of  the  needed  miscellaneous  loan  records  (e.g. 
"Overdue",  "Reserved",  "Lost"),  also  A-Z  and  1-31  sets;  for 
records  of  various  kinds  there  are  printed  sets  for  days  of  the  week, 
names  of  the  months,  states,  counties  and  cities.  Guides,  both 
blank  and  printed,  are  to  be  had  not  only  in  sizes  for  the  usual  card 
records  of  a  library,  but  also  in  larger  sizes,  including  those  for 
vertical  files. 

Labeling  trays.    The  labels  on  catalog  trays  are  not  what  are 
generally  meant  by  "guides"  but  they  are  none  the  less  very  im- 
portant guides  to  the  use  of  the  catalog.     The  trays  containing 
the  catalog  should  each  bear  a  label  covering  the  contents  of  that 
tray,  and  further  than  that  they  should  be  labeled  in  such  a  way  as 
to  cover  not  only  the  actual  contents  of  each  tray  but  sometimes 
more,  so  as  to  present  an  unbroken  series  of  combinations  from 
A  to  Z  or  001  to  999,  etc. ;  e.g.  if  the  cards  in  one  tray  include  entries 
from  Am  through  Ap  and  there  are  no  entries  for  Aq  but  the  next 
tray  contains  those  for  Ar  and  As  there  should  be  no  gap  in  the  label- 
ing; the  labels  should  read  Am-Aq  and  Ar-As,  showing  that  if 
there  were  any  entries  under  Aq  they  would  be  in  the  first  of  the 
two  trays.     This  principle  should  be  carried  out,  even  if  it  results  in 
impossible  combinations,  e.g.  Bz.     Impossible  combinations  should 
be  given  as  the  second  (and  therefore  less  conspicuous)  part  of  the 
label  rather  than  the  first ;  e.g.  B-Bk  and  Bl-Bq,  not  B-Bj  and  Bk-Bo. 
However  many  letters  may  be  needed  on  the  label  to  show  the 
dividing  line  between  the  trays  the  sequence  of  combinations  should 
be  continuous  and  exact ;  for  example,  the  entries  beginning  with 
Bro  may  be  partly  in  one  tray  and  partly  in  another,  in  which  case 
the  labels  should  read,  e.g.  Bl-Broj  and  Brok-Cam,  not  Bl-Br  and 
Br-Ca.     (In  this  illustration  the  "Bl"  marks  the  tray  in  which  the 
first  entry  under  "Bl"  is  filed.) 

The  lettering  on  the  labels  should  be  as  neat  and  distinct  as 
possible.  It  may  be  done  either  by  hand  with  India  ink  (using  the 
disjoined  or  printing  hand)  or  by  means  of  the  Willson  letters. 
To  prevent  the  labels  from  becoming  soiled  they  should  be  covered 
by  strips  of  celluloid. 

In  addition  to  the  labels  showing  the  contents  of  the  trays  it 
is  a  very  great  help  in  keeping  the  trays  in  order  to  have  them 

287 


CATALOGING     RULES 

consecutively  numbered.     For  this  the  Willson  figures  are  recom- 
mended. 

If  the  catalog  consists  of  different  parts,  e.g.  if  the  subjects 
are  kept  separate  from  the  authors  and  titles  (for  a  public  dictionary 
catalog  this  is  not  advisable)  labels  of  different  colors  will  be  a 
valuable  additional  aid  in  correct  placing. 


288 


LISTS   OF   ARTICLES   AND   ABBREVIATIONS 

APPENDIX  5 

LISTS  OF  ARTICLES  AND  ABBREVIATIONS 

The    following  lists,   already   given   in   the   body   of   the   book,   are   here 
repeated   for  greater  convenience  in   reference. 

Articles  in  various  languages 

The  following  list  of  articles  to  be  disregarded  in  alphabeting, 
when  appearing  at  the  beginning  of  titles,  is  taken  from  the  Library 
of  Congress  rules. 

English:  the,  a,  an 

Danish,  Norwegian,  Swedish:  den,  det,  de,  en,  et,  ett 

Dutch:  de,  het,  't,  een,  eene 

French:  le,  la,  1',  les,  un,  une 

German:   der    (when    representing   the   masculine   nominative), 

die,  das,  ein,  eine 
Hungarian:  az,  a,  egy 

Italian:  il,  lo,  i,  gli,  gT,  la,  le,  1',  uno,  un,  una,  un' 
Norwegian:   (see  above  under  Danish) 
Portuguese:  o,  a,  os,  as,  um,  uraa 
Spanish:  el,  lo,  la,  los,  las,  un,  una 
Swedish:  (see  above  under  Danish) 

The  Arabic  article  al  (or  the  assimilated  forms  ad-,  ar-,  as-,  at-, 
az-,  if  used)  though  joined  by  a  hyphen  to  the  name  or  word  fol- 
lowing (al-Ghazzali,  Al-mostatraf)  is  to  be  disregarded  in  alpha- 
beting. 

In  Hebrew  disregard  ha,  he  (Ha-sefer,  He-harim)  ;  in  Yiddish, 
der,  di,  dos. 

Article  vs  numeral  adjective.  In  cases  where  the  form  of  the 
article  is  the  same  as  that  of  the  numeral  adjective  "one"  (e.g.  the  French 
"un"  and  "une")  care  should  be  taken  to  distinguish  the  use,  as  the  numeral 
adjective  should  not  be  disregarded  in  alphabeting. 


289 


CATALOGING     RULES 


Colon  abbreviations  for  forenames 

Taken    from    Cutter,    p.  161 ;    to    be    used    only    where    initials 
would  otherwise  be  used. 


Men 


A: 

Augustus 

B: 

Benjamin 

C: 

Charles 

D: 

David 

E: 

Edward 

F: 

Frederick,   Frederic 

G: 

George 

H: 

Henry 

I: 

Isaac 

J: 

John 

K: 

Karl 

L: 

Louis,  Lewis 

*M: 

Matthew 

N: 

Nicholas 

O: 

Otto 

P: 

Peter 

R: 

Richard 

S: 

Samuel 

T: 

Thomas 

»U: 

Uriah 

V: 

Victor 

W: 

William 

X: 

Xavier 

Z: 

Zachary 

Women 


A.. 

Anna 

B. . 

Beatrice 

C. 

Charlotte 

D. . 

Delia 

E. . 

Elizabeth 

F. . 

Fanny,  Fannie 

G.. 

Grace 

H. . 

Helen 

L. 

Isabella 

J-. 

Jane 

K.. 

Katharine,  Katt 

L. . 

Louise,  Louisa 

M. . 

Mary 

N. . 

Nancy 

O. . 

Olivia 

P.. 

Pauline 

R. . 

Rebecca 

S. . 

Sarah 

T. . 

Theresa 

U.. 

Ursula 

v.. 

Victoria 

w.. 

Wilhelmina 

z. . 

Zenobia 

Where  :  and  . .  are  used  for  English  forms  of  the  names,  for  the 
German  forms  the  ;  and  . ,  may  be  used,  and  i  and  , .  for  the 
French ;  e.g.  J :  John,     J ;  Johann,     J  \  Jean. 


1  In  the  list  as  originally  compiled  by  Mr  Cutter  and  printed  in  the 
Library  journal,  July  1877,  1 :405-4o6,  M :  and  U :  were  used  for  Mark  and 
Ulrich,  and  in  the  list  as  later  printed  in  various  places  the  colon  abbrevia- 
tions have  been  retained  for  those  names. 


290 


LISTS   OF  ARTICLES  AND   ABBREVIATIONS 


Personal  titles 

The  following  list  shows  certain  of  the  most  used  titles  (some 
used  regularly,  others  when  needed  to  distinguish)  and  whether 
prefixed  or  affixed,  also  whether  written  with  capitals.  Titles  affixed 
are  separated  from  the  name  by  a  comma  (unless  the  name  ends  in 
an  abbreviation,  calling  for  a  period,  or  unless  it  ends  with  a 
bracket  or  curve)  and  preferably  by  one  centimeter  space  in  hand- 
writing or  by  four  typewriter  spaces.  Brackets  are  to  be  used 
around  such  parts  of  the  actual  name  as  do  not  appear  on  the 
title-page,  but  not  around  these  titles,  considered  by  themselves. 
(See  also  page  12,  section  6d.) 


Prefixed 

in  headings 

Affixed  in  headings 

Adm. 

abbe 

Capt. 

abp 

Gen. 

(for   all 

military    officers 

bart  (and  all  hereditary  titles) 

with  a  title  including  General) 

bp 

Hon. 

card. 

Mme 

D.D. 

Maj. 

jr 

Mrs 

M.D. 

Rabbi 

pope 

Rev. 

pres.  U.  S.   (and  corresponding 

Sir 

titles  for  foreign  rulers) 
St 

For  the  use  and  position  of  the  titles  "Lady"  and  "Lord"  see 
Cutter,  214  and  216.  When  used  as  affixes  they  are  not  to  be 
capitalized. 

Roman  numerals  are  to  be  used  after  names  of  rulers  and  popes 
in  headings. 


291 


CATALOGING     RILES 


Places  of  publication 

Taken  chiefly  from  Dewey,  Library  School  rules 

Use  the  fuller  forms  in  cataloging;  the  shorter  forms  are  given 
only  for  use  in  accession  and  other  official  records.  Use  for  all 
languages  when  the  equivalent  name  contains  these  letters.  Use  also 
the  common  abbreviations  for  the  states. 


Albany 

Alb. 

London 

Loud,  or  L. 

Amsterdam 

Amst. 

Lugduni  Bata- 

Baltimore 

Bait. 

vorum 

Lug.  Bat. 

Berlin 

Ber. 

Milano 

Mil. 

Boston 

Bost.  or  B. 

Milwaukee 

Milw. 

Braunschweig 

Brns. 

Munchen 

Miin. 

Cambridge 

Camb.  or  Cb. 

New  Orleans 

N.O. 

Chicago 

Chic,  or  Ch. 

New  York 

N.Y. 

Cincinnati 

Cin. 

Oxford 

Ox. 

Copenhagen 

Copng. 

Paris 

Par.  or  P. 

Dublin 

Dub. 

Philadelphia 

Phil,  or  Ph. 

Edinburgh 

Edin.  or  Ed. 

St  Louis 

StL. 

England 

Eng. 

St  Petersburg 

St  Pet.  or  St  P 

Firenze 

Fir. 

San  Francisco 

San  Fran,  or 

Glasgow 

Glasg.  or  Gl. 

S.  F. 

Gottingen 

Got.     . 

Stuttgart 

Stut. 

Kj^benhavn 

Kjdb. 

United  States 

u.  s. 

Leipzig 

Lpz. 

Venice 

Ven.  or  V. 

Leyden 

Ley. 

\Yashington 

Wash,  or  W. 

292 


INDEX 


References   are   to   section   numbers,   except  that    for   sample   cards   and 
appendixes,  page  numbers  are  given.     S.C.  means  sample  cards. 


Abbreviations,  5 

authors'    forenames,   226 

colon     abbreviations     for     fore- 
names,    list,    22&3,p.20X> 

editions,    13c 

place  of  publication,  146(1)^.292 

punctuation,  66,/ 

subject   headings,    5a 

used   in    tracing,    256 
Accents  for  French  and  Greek  words, 

13k 
Accession  number,   17 

added  editions,  117/2 
Added   editions,    115    S.C. p. 197-98 

accession  numbers,   117/1 

author   card,    117   S.C.p.197 

call  number,   117(7 

collation,    117c 

dash  for  author's  name,  117a 

definition,    116 

edition,   statement  of,    117b 

editor    cards,    1172 

fiction,   1150 

imprint,   117c 

later    and    earlier,    arrangement, 
117/ 

more  than  two,   1170(3) 

notes,    1 17c? 

series  note,  117c 

spacing,    117b, c 

subject    cards,    117?   S.C.p.197 

title,    repetition,    how    indicated, 
117b 

title,   variations   in,    1176(5) 

title  card,    117^   S.C.p.198 

translator  card,  S.C.p.198 
Added    entry,    definition,    19 
Added   entry  cards 

anonymous    books,   926  (2), c 

collections   under  title,    106 

editor,   compiler,   translator,   etc., 
40,63    S.C.p.59-61,84 

editor  of  series,  72 

government   documents,    151 

independents,  1146(3)  (6) 

initials,    books    published    under, 
93b 

joint  authors,  54  S.C.p.73,74,76 

pencil     notes     for     incomplete 
works,  83 

periodicals 

complete   finished   sets,    1246 
complete  current  sets,  1286 
incomplete    sets,    1296 


pseudonym,  86^ 

sacred  books,  99^(5) 

tracing,   256 
Addresses,    series   cards,    158 
Almanacs,    134 
Alternative    title,    376,95a    note 

article  not  omitted,   13^(1) 

capitalization,  3a 

definition,    11 

on   title   card,   376 

punctuation,  6/ 

See    also    Partial    title 
Analytical    entry,   definition,    108 
Analytics,    10S   S.C.P.173-S4 

A.L.A.   code,    iwp(i) 

author,    109   S.C.p.173-79 

author's   name,   1106 

call  number,  not 

collation,    uo<? 

combinations,    109? 

compared  with  independents,  112, 
114 

editor,  109c? 

for     several     chapters,     iioc(2), 
fe(4)2 

form  of  entries,  nog 

government   documents,    155 

illustrators,    109c? 

imprint,   nod 

"in   analytics",    noa 

independents,    ir46(3)(r) 

method   of  treatment,   no 

New  York  state   library  method, 
nop  (2) 

paging,    noa,f,k,l,m,o 
inclusive,   no&(4) 

printed   cards,    nop 

punctuation,    noli 

reference  to  main  work,  110/ 

"see  analytics",    noa 

separately  paged,  treated  like  in- 
dependents,   1 146 
vs  independents,  112 

series  form,  164 

short  form,  noo 

spacing,  no/t 

subject,   109,1096   S.C.P.175-S4 

title,  1  ioc,/ 

title   cards,    109c   S.C.p.174-83 

tracing,  1 10/ 

translators,    109a' 

treatment     of     independents     as 
distinguished  from,  113 


CATALOGING  RULES 


Analytics    (continued) 

vs    joint    authors,    1090(2)  (a) 
volumes,   statement    of,    110^(4) 
inclusion  in  call  number,  noi 
Wisconsin  library  school  method, 

iio/>(3) 

within   an   analytic,    lion 
Annual  reports,  140 

analytics,   i$5note 

omission  from  title,   136 
Annuals,    119,134,1396 

See  also   Periodicals 
Anonymous  books,  92 

credited  to  wrong  author,  163& 

definition,   91 
Anonymous  classics,  99  S.C.p. 144-45 

brackets  not  used,  6d,99 
Arabic  figures,  4 

for  dates,  14c 

in  the  title,  13/ 

page  references  in  notes,  4gnote 

paging,  15* 

paging  of  analytics,   uoa  note 

volumes,  15a"  (2) 
Arrangement    of    cards,    routine    of 

work,  80 
Art  objects,  169-77 
Article 

disregarded    in    alphabeting,    i$e 

in   the  midst   of  a  title,   13^(1)2 
inclosed  in  curves,  132 (2) 
initial,      omission      of      English 

article,  136,2(1) 
retained    in    foreign    languages, 

13*0)  .     ■. 

vs  numeral  adjective,   132(3) 
Articles    in    various    languages,    list 

of    i3*(3).P-289 
Associations,  see  Societies 

Asterisks,  books  published  under,  93, 

940 
Atlases,    118,   167 

size,  150(2) 
Attributed  author,   163 
Author 

definition,  137 

joint,   see  Joint  authors 

selections    from    a    single    work 
published  separately,  160 

voluminous,   100  S.C.p.  157-58 
Author  analytics,   109   S.C.p.173-79 

tracing,  110/ 
Author  cards,  10  S.C.p.16,17 

compiler  as  author,  60 

contents,   74 

contents     in    incomplete    worKS, 
84c 

editor  as  author,  60 

editor's  and  translator's  name  in 
title,  1323 

indention,  12a* 

series  note,  69 


simplified  form,    10 

translator   as   author,   60 

See  also  Main  cards 
Author  entry,  definition,    11,137 
Author  style,  use  of  term,  216  note, 31 
Author's   name,    i2,6mote 

analytics,  nob,f 

editor  cards,  42b 

integral  part  of  title,  13/ 

omission  from  title,   13b 

omission  from  title  requires  use 
of   pronoun,   13/1 

reference  from  shorter  form  to 
full  name,  590 

secondary   fulness,   226 

spacing,  2/ 

subject  entries,  22b 

in  title,  fulness,  130 

on    title   cards,    370 

variant  spellings,   references,  5Qt 

See  also  Corporate  entry;  Name 
references 
Authority   list,    p. 273-79 
Autobiography,  p.270 

Bible,   99c   S.C.p.151-54 
Bibliographies,    compiler,   60 

colored   cards,    161  c 
Binders,  added  entry  for,  44 
Binder's   titles,   96   S.C.p.133 
Biographees   names,   fulness  in  title, 

Biographies,   individual 
colored  cards,  161  c 
no  title  card  in  certain  cases,  880 
series,    726(5) 
Biography,   treatment,  p.270-72 
Bishop,   William    Warner,   Value   of 
a    knowledge    of    cataloging,    p.5-7 
Body  as  author,  136 
"Bound  with"  note,   1130V 
Brackets,  6d,hj 

additions  to  book  title,  13/1 
analytics,   noc(4),i 
author's   names,    1261 

analytics,   1106 
authors  of  anonymous  books,  920 
dates,    142(4) 

for  periodicals,   1240(2)  (c) 
edition,  statement  of,  1322 
editor    cards,     periodicals,     1286 

(3) (a) 
name  of  state,  146(2) 
not  used  in  certain  cases,  6o* 
anonymous  classics,  6d,99 
call  numbers,  volumes,   1250 
corporate  headings,  6d,i44 
editor    and    author,    volumi- 
nous   authors,  104 
heading  on  series  card,  72a 
(8) 


294 


INDEX 


periodicals,  volume  numbers, 

in   call   numbers,    125a 
personal   titles,    1261 
references,   57 
sacred  books,  6d,99 
series,  68 
titles,   general,  6d 
page   numbers    supplied,    15c (1), 

(3), (6),  nofc(4) 
place   of    publication,    146(4) 
public   library  and  small   library 
usage,  6d2 
Bulletins,  series   cards,    1586 
Bureaus,    publications,    145 

Call    numbers,    16 

added  editions,    117 g 
analytics,   1101 
changed  titles,  976(4) 
editor  cards,  42^ 
not  given  on  reference  cards,  34 
subject  cards,  24 
title  cards,  37/j 
Capitalization,   3 
Bible,  99^(8) 
title,  13m 
Cards,  arrangement,  routine  of  work, 

8a 
Cataloging,  value  of  a  knowledge  of, 

by  W.  W.  Bishop,  p.5-7 
Catch  titles,  95,101,102,103 
Changed  names,  references,  59/1 
Changed   titles,  97 

periodicals,    131 
Checks,  title-page,   136  note 
Class  work,  8 
Clippings,  166 
Collation,  15 

added  editions,  117c 

analytics,  noe 

definition,    11 

editor   cards,    42c? 

joint  author  cards,  540(5) 

periodicals 

complete   finished   sets,   124a 

(4) 
complete   current    sets,    128a 
(3) 
position,   156 
spacing,    \c,2m 
subject  cards,  24 
title  cards,   2>7f 
Collections 

compiler,  editor  or  translator  as 

author,    60 
from  periodicals,   1090(0,1590 
under  title,   105 
Colon,  6g 

Colon    abbreviations   for    forenames, 

22&3,p.290 

Colophon  date,  definition,   11 


Colored  cards  for  criticism,  etc.,  161c 

Columns,    15^(8) 

Comma,  6g  note,6j,i2bi 

Commentaries,  99c (10) 

Compiler,    defined,  38 

Compiler  as   author,   60   S.C.p.83,84 

joint    compilers,   64 
Compiler  cards,  40,60 

government   documents,    1516 
Compound  surnames,  592 
Contents,  73  S.C.p.98, 100-4 

collected  works,  1090(1 ) 

incomplete  works,  84  S.C.p.108-9 

independents,    1146(2) 

substitutes   for,  80 
Continuations,    1396 

See  also   Periodicals 
Copies,   115a 

Copyright  date,   14^(4), (5) 

definition,   11 

not  given  on  title  cards,  tfe 
Corporate,    definition,    137 
Corporate  bodies,  names  in  title,  13a 
Corporate  entry,   136 

brackets  not  used  in  heading,  6d, 
144 

definition,  137 

joint   authorship,    540(1)36 
Correspondence,  54o(i),p.272 
Countries,  official  publications,  145 
Cover  titles,  96  S.C.p.133 
Criticism,   161 

Cross  references,  see  References 
Curves 

analytics,  reference  to  main  work, 
110/ 

brackets   on   title-page,   6a*i 

double  punctuation,  6/ 

initial  article,  13^(2) 

maiden  name  of  married  women, 
120,2264 

series  note,  69 
Cyclopedias 

contents  in  incomplete  works,  84 

editor,  60 

Dash,  author's  name,  added  edition, 
1 1 70 

subject   heading,  210" 
Date,  14c 

copyright,   14c  (4),  (5) 

definition,   11 

editor  cards,  42a* 

false,  14^(2) 

imprint,   definition,   ir 

inclusive,  i4c(3),(4),(5).37* 

no  date,  14c (4) 

other  than  of  Christian  era,   14c 
(1) 


295 


CATALOGING  RULES 


Date  (continued) 
periodicals 

complete  finished  sets,  124a 

(2)(<r),(3)00 

complete   current   sets,   128a 

(l)(0),(2)(6) 

spacing,  2m 

title  cards,  yje 
Dates  of  birth  and  death,  2262,61  note 

not    used    on    short-entry    cards, 
379  note 

spacing,  1262 
Definitions,  11,15/(2) 
Departments,    publications,    145 
Diagrams,   15/(1)   footnote  5 

definition,    15/(2) 
Dictionaries,   compiler,   60 
Directories,   135 
Documents,   145 

Dots,  see  Omissions  from  title;  Spell- 
ing 
Double  punctuation,  6lij 
Doubtful  authorship,   16.3a 
Dramatizations,  162 
Duplicates,  115a 

Edition 

brackets,  13^2 
definition,  115 
different   editions  represented  in 

the  same  set,  13C5 
statement  of,  6h,J?,c 
See  also  Added  editions 
Editor 

as  author,  60  S.C.p.S3 

defined,  38 

different     editors     for     different 

volumes,   13C4 
fulness  of  name  in  title,  13*7 
joint  editors  as  authors,  64 
periodicals,   name  given   in  note, 

1240(2)  (b), 728^(4) 
title  includes  name  of,  13^3 
on   title   cards,   37a* 
Editor  analytics,   logd 

tracing,   110/(2) 
Editor  cards,  40  S.C.p.59,60 
added  editions,  W]c 
anonymous  books,  920(2) 
Bible,    0Qf(5)    S.C.p.152 
changed  titles,  97b (2) r 
for  editor  who  is  author  of  part 

of  book,  1090(5) 
government  documents,  151& 
periodicals 

complete    finished    sets,    124& 

S.C.p.211 
complete    current    sets,    1286 

(3) 
incomplete  sets,  1296(3) 
periodicals    with     changed     title, 

131c 
series   form,    104 


tracing,   256 

two  or  more  editors,  41 
voluminous   author,    103,104   S.C. 
p.158 
Editor  of  a  series,  68,  72a 

reference    from,    J2a,c    S.C.p.88 
Encyclopedias,   see  Cyclopedias 
Entry,    defined,    11,26 

See    also    Added    entry    cards; 
Analytics  ;  Author  cards  ;  Cor- 
porate    entry;      Main     cards; 
Series    cards;    Subject    cards; 
Title  cards 
Exclamation   point,  6/ 
Explanatory  titles,  punctuation,  6g 
Extension  cards,  7 
Extracts   from  periodicals,  159 

Facsimile,    15/(1) 
definition,    15/(2) 

Family  name  of  nobleman,  2264 
reference  from,  59a  S.C.p.8o 
See  also  Surnames 

Fiction 

cataloging,   p.268-69 

added  editions,  115a 
call   number,    16b  note 

Figures,  see  Numerals 

Foreign    names    with    prefixes,    ref- 
erences,  5Q& 

Forenames 

colon     abbreviations     for,     2263, 

p.290 
secondary  fulness,  22& 
unused,  reference  from,  59/ 
variant   spellings,   references,   591 
See   also   Name   references 

Forenames    in    title 
fulness,  i^g 
not  shortened  for  the  subject  of 

a  book,  T3# 
omission  in  certain  cases,  13*7 

Form,    definition,    15/(2) 

Form   entries,    Bible,  99^(4) 

Genealogies,  compiler,  60 
General    references 
filing,  35 

prefixes,   59k   S.C. p. 80 
subject,   30a (3), 306    S.C.p.50 
General     secondary    cards,     45     S.C. 
p.65,66 
extracts  and  separates,  159 
government  documents,  150 
periodicals 

complete   finished   sets,    124& 

(3)(c)  S.C.p.212 
complete    current    sets,    128b 

incomplete  sets,   1290(3) 
periodicals    with    changed    title, 
131c 


296 


INDEX 


German    modified    vowels,    137-597 
Government    departments,    joint    au- 
thorship,  540(1)36 
Government  documents,   145 
Governors,  official   publications,    151c 
Groups,    spacing,    ic,2in,r 

Guides,  p.280 

bearing      additional       directions 

and  information,  p.284 
frequency  of,  p.286 
lettering,  p.285 
printed,   p. 283 
protected  tabs,  p.285 
styles,    p.280 

systems    of    guiding,    p.281 
umlaut    names,    59&    note 


uses    other    than 
catalogs,  p.286 


for    dictionary 


p.161 
etc., 


Half-titles,  96  S.C.p.133 
Handwritten   cards,    I 
Hanging  indention 
definition,    105a 

periodicals,      1240(1),  124ft  (2),  130 
sample  cards 

collections  under  title, 
indexes,     supplements, 

p.  200 
periodicals 

complete,  p.210-11 
current,    p.217-18 
incomplete,    p. 225 
Heading,    definition,    II 
Headings 

inverted,    punctuation,    6/ 
spacing,  2)1 

See  also  Author  cards ;  Period- 
icals; Subject  cards 
Honorary  titles,  see  Titles  of  honor 

Illustrations,   15/ 

colored,    15/(6) 

definition,    15/(2) 

few,    15/(4) 

mention  in  title,  15/(3) 

number,   15/(5) 
Illustrator,  analytics,  logd 
Illustrator  cards,  43 
Impression,  defined,   115 
Imprint,    T4 

added  editions,   117c 

analytics,    nod 

definition,  11 

editor    cards,   42c? 

joint    author   cards,   540(5) 

periodicals 

complete  finished  sets, 

(3) 

complete   current   sets,    1280 
(2) 

punctuation,  6;' 

spacing,    ir,2m,i4 


124a 


subject  cards,  24 
title  cards,  372 
Imprint   date,   definition,    11 

Sec  also  Date 
"In  analytics",  1100 
Incomplete  works,   81    S.C.p.108-9 
Indention,    \2dn0te 
analytics,    \\db,j 
author's  name,    120" 

on   subject   cards,   22a 
changed  titles,   976(1)  (o) 
collections  under  title,   105a 
contents   notes,   78 
editor  cards,  42a 
joint   authors,    540(1) 
notes,  52 

partial  title  card,  956 
periodicals,    124a 
reference   cards,   300(2) 

editor  of  series,  72a  note 
series  card,  720(2)63 
subject  heading,  21c 
title,    130,23 
title  cards,  370,(7 
Independents,   111-14  S.C.p.187-88 
Indexed  sets,  government  documents, 

154 
Indexes,    n8  S.C.p.199-200 
periodicals 

complete  finished  sets,  1240 

(6) 
complete  current   sets,    1280 

(5) 
incomplete    sets,    1290(2)  (/) 
Initials,  entry  under,  I2C.93  S.C.p.i22- 

24,126-30 
Initials     of     authors,     see     Author's 

name 
Institution   as   author,    136 
Inverted   headings,   punctuation,  6/ 

Joint   authors,    54    S.C.p. 72-76 

definition,   53 
spacing,  2/7 
Joint    compilers    or   editors,   41 
as   authors,   64    S.C.p.83 


Keys,  118 

Kings,  see 


Rulers 


Labeling  trays,   p. 287 

Lantern    slides,    175 

Leaves,  15^  (7) 

I  .etters,   treatment,  p.271 

Library  hand,    10 

"Library    has"    statement 

government  documents,  151^,153 
periodicals,   1200(2)  (d) 

Life    and    letters,    treatment,    p.271 

Magazines,   see    Periodicals 


297 


CATALOGING  RULES 


Maiden  name,  120,2264 

form  of  name  in  contents,  75 
references,  592,d  S.C.p.8o 

Alain  cards 

anonymous  works,  92 
collections   under   title,   107 
compiler,  editor  or  translator  as 

author,  60 
contents,  74,84c 
independents,    113,1146(3) 
joint    authors,    54 
periodicals 

complete    finished   sets,    124a 

S.C.p.  210-13 
complete  current  sets,    128a 
incomplete    sets,    129a 
pseudonyms,   86 
series   note,    69 
title    includes    name    of    editors, 

etc.,  1323 
tracing  on  back  of  card,  25  S.C. 

p.46 
See  also  Author  cards 
Alain    entry,    definition,     II 
Afap,    definition,    15/(2) 
Afaps,    15/(1)  footnote    4,167 
Alarried  women,  120,2264 

form  of  name  in  contents,  75 
references,   592,0*  S.C.p.80,81 
Afayors,  official  publications,  151c 
Afemoirs,    119 

Aliscellaneous   objects,    169-76 
Afodified  vowels,   13/ 

references,    59/    S.C.p.79,81 
Mottoes,   omission   of,    136 
Aluseum  material,  cataloging,   169-77 
Afusic,   15/(7),  177 

Name   references.   56   S.C.p. 79-81 
changed  titles,  976(1)  (a) 
color  in,   31 

editor   of   series,   72a,c   S.C. p. 88 
fulness  of   forms,  32 
initials,  932(2), (3) 
joint   authors,   540(1)3 
pseudonyms,   87   S.C.p.l  15-16 
Names  of  persons 

author     fulness     for    all     names 
holding  first  position  on  card, 
61  note 
form,   in  contents,   75 
fulness  in  title,  13.0 

joint   author  cards,   540(3) 
secondary  or  subject  fulness,  226 
See   also  Author's  name ;    Fore- 
names;  Alarried  women;  Sur- 
names 
Natural  history  specimens,   169-76 
Newspapers,   not   considered   period- 
icals,   119 


Nicknames,  90 

Noblemen,  2264 

references,  590,6  S.C.p.8o 
titles  given  in  contents,  75 

Notes 

added    editions,    1170* 
changed  titles,  976(3) 
contents,  74 
editor  of  periodicals,  1240(2)  (6), 

1280(4) 
indention,    52 
miscellaneous,   47 
periodicals 

complete  finished  sets,  1240 

(5) 
complete  current   sets,   1280 

(4) 
incomplete   sets,    1290(2)  (e) 
order  of,  1240(5) 
series,  65 
Numeral  adjectives  vs  article,  132(3) 
Numerals,  4 

in  the  title,  13/ 

names    of    rulers    and    popes    in 

headings,  4,1261 
paging  of   analytics,    noanote 

Official    publications,    145 
Omissions    from   title,    136 

added   editions,    1176(2), (5) 
analytics,   1102(3),  £(2) 
binder's  titles,  etc.,  966 
indicated  by  ... ,  62,130" 
editor  cards,  42c 
joint   author    cards,    540(3)2 
title    cards,    37c 
partial  title  cards,  956 

Paged  continuously,   152(10) 
Paging,   152 

analytics,  iioo ,/ '  ,k ,1  ,m ,0 
inclusive,    110^(4) 

inclusive,   152(5) 

numbering  omitted,   152(9) 
Paintings,    catalog   entries    for,    169- 

76 
Pamphlets,  165 

bound   together,    1 1  r 
Paraphrases,  992(11) 
Parentheses,  see  Curves 
Parodies,  162 
Partial  title,  95  S.C.p.131-32 

periodicals,   130 

voluminous    authors,    10222    S.C. 

p.157 

Pen  names,  parts  of  real  names,  89 

See  also   Pseudonyms 
Pencil 

incomplete  works,  82,83 


298 


INDEX 


periodicals 

dates     for,     1280(1)  (a), (2) 
(0,6) 
on  editor  cards  and  gen- 
eral   secondary    cards, 
I28&(3),I2Q&(3) 

incomplete   sets,   1290(2)  (d) 
missing  parts,   1290(1)  (a) 
numbering    of    cards,     129a- 
(2)(*) 

size  of,    1280(3)  (c) 
volumes   of,    1280(3) 

on  editor  cards  and  gen- 
eral   secondary    cards, 
1286(3), 1296(3) 
Penmanship,   la 
Periodicals,  119  S.C.p.210-27 

abbreviations       for      names      of 

months,   1240(2)  (d) 
accession  numbers,   126, 1280",  129c 
added    entries    for    partial   titles, 

130 
added  entries  for  subject,  editor, 
etc. 

complete   finished    sets,    1246 

S.C.p.21 1,213 
complete  current  sets,   1286 
incomplete    sets,    1296 
call   number,    125, 128c,  129c 
capitalization,    127 
changed  titles,   131 
collation 

complete  finished  sets,   124a 

(4) 
complete  current  sets,    1280- 
(3) 
complete   current    sets,    128 
complete  finished  sets,  123,124 
completion  of   sets,   1290(2)  (g) 
dates  covered 

complete  finished  sets,   124a 

(2)(0 

complete  current  sets,    i2Sa 

(0(a) 
incomplete  sets,   1290(1) 
dates,   imprint 

complete  finished  sets,   1240  . 

(3)(0 
complete  current   sets,    12S0 
(2) (b) 
definition,   119 
editor  cards 

complete    finished    sets,    1246 

S.C.p.211 
complete  current  sets,    1286 

(3) 
incomplete   sets,    t2q(6) (3) 
editor  cards,  changed  titles,   /31c 
editors,   name   in   note 

complete  finished  sets,   1240 

(2)  (b) 
complete  current   sets,    i2Sa 

(4) 
incomplete    sets,   1290(2)  (e) 


extracts,    159 

frequency    of    publication,     1240 

(2)(o),(5)(o)i 
general  secondary  cards 

complete  finished  sets,   1246 

(3)(0   S.C.p.212 
complete  current  sets,   1286 

(3) 
incomplete    sets,    1296(3) 
hanging  indention,   see   Hanging 

indention 
illustrations 

complete  finished  sets,  124a 

(4)  (b) 
complete  current  sets,    i2Sa 

(3)  (b) 
incomplete  sets,    1290(2)  (6) 
imprint 

complete  finished  sets,   124a 

(3) 
complete  current  sets,    128a 
(2) 
incomplete  sets,   129 
indention,   124a 
indexes 

complete  finished  sets,  124a- 

(6) 
complete  current  sets,    i2Sa 

(5) 
incomplete  sets,  1290(2)/ 
"Library    has"    statement,    129a 

(2)  (rf) 
main   entry 

complete  finished  sets,  124a 

S.C.p.210-13 
complete  current  sets,    128a 
incomplete  sets,   129a 
"merged     in"     or     "incorporated 

with",    132 
no    longer    received,     I2S<? 
notes 

complete  finished  sets,   124a 

(5) 
complete  current  sets,    i2Sa 

.    (4) 

incomplete    sets,    1290(2)  (e) 
omissions  from  title,  1240(2)  (e) 
partial    titles,    130 
pencil  notes,   see  Pencil,  period- 
icals 
place  of  publication 

complete  finished  sets,   124a 

(3)  (a) 
complete  current   sets,    i2Sa 

(2) 
incomplete   sets,    1290(2)  (o) 
publishers 

complete    finished    sets,    1240 

(3)  (a)  (6) 
complete   current  sets,   1280 

(2)(o) 
incomplete   sets,    1290(2)  (a) 
scries,   more  than  one,    1290(2) 
(d) 


299 


CATALOGING  RULES 


Periodicals  (continued) 
size 

complete  finished  sets,   124a 

(4)(<0 

complete  current   sets,    128a 

(3)(0 
incomplete    sets,    1290(2)  (c) 
supplements,    1240(7) 
title 

complete  finished  sets,  1240 

(2) 
complete  current  sets,    12S0 

(1) 
treatment,    120 

New     York      state      library 
method,     133 

volume   numbers 

complete   finished   sets,   124a 

(4)  (a) 
complete   current   sets,    i2So 

(3) 

volumes,    inclusion   in   call   num- 
ber,   125,128c 
Periods,   6b,j,13m 

Personal   titles,   sec   Titles   of   honor 
Persons,    names    of,    sec    Names    of 

persons 
Photograph  collection,   174 
Place   of   publication,    146 

abbreviations,    146(1),   p. 292 
different     volumes     in     different 

places,    146(7) 
foreign,    146(3) 
more  than  one,  146(6) 
not  given,  146(4) 
periodicals 

complete  finished  sets,  124a 

(3) (a) 
complete   current   sets,    12S0 

(2) 
incomplete    sets,    1200(2)  (a) 
place-name     followed    by     state, 

14H2) 
spacing,  2;;; 
Plan  of  work,  suggested,  Sa 
Plans,    15/(1) footnote   5 

definition,  15/(2) 
Plates,   \$f(\) footnote  2 

definition,   15/(2) 
Popes,  numerals  used  after  names  of, 

4,1261  note,\T,l 
Portfolios 

size,    15.0(2) 
treatment,    118 
Portraits,    15/(1) footnote  3 
definition,   15/(2) 
treatment,    171 
Preface  date,   definition,    n 
Prefixes,    surnames    with,     59ft    S.C 

p.8o 
Prelates,   official   publications,    151c 
Printed  cards,  analytics,   no/> 
Printed    forms,    168 


I   Printer,  definition,  11 
Prints,    177 

Proceedings  of  societies  and  institu- 
tions,   119,1396 
Professional     titles,     see    Titles     of 

honor 
Pseudonym  reference,  changed  titles, 

976 
Pseudonyms,  86   S.C.p.l  11,113-16 

definition,   85 
Public  documents,    145 
Publication,    place    of,    146 

abbreviations,    146(1),    p.292 
different     volumes     in     different 

places,   146(7) 
foreign,    146(3) 
more  than  one,  146(6) 
not  given,  146(4) 
place-name     followed    by    state, 

146(2) 
spacing,   2m 
Publishers,    11,146 

added  entry  for,  44 

corporate   entries,    142 

foreign,   146(5)2 

government    documents,    156 

lists,   146(5)1 

more  than  one,  146(6) 

more  than  one  in  the  same  place, 

146(0) 
more  than  one  place  for  the  same, 

14K8) 
name,    146(5) 
names  in  language  of  title-page, 

146 
of   periodicals 

complete  finished  sets,   124a 

(3) («)(*) 

complete   current   sets,    128a 
(2)(o) 

incomplete    sets,    1290(2)  (a) 
spacing.  2m 
Punctuation,   6 
analytics,  iio/t 
contents,    79 
imprint,    6f 

joint   author  cards,   540(1)2 
series,   720(8) 
title,    13m 

Question  mark,  6/ 
Quotation    marks,    6cJ 
Rare  books,   titles  of,   1364 
Reading   lists,    art   objects,    173 
References 

Bible,  99c  (3) 

color   of   ink    for,   31 

defined,  26 

editor    of    series,    72a,c 

filing,   35 

government    documents,    151,152 

subject  heading  to  author  head- 
ing.  33,152 


300 


INDEX 


title  of  series  to  author,  720(5) 
title  of  series  to  editor,  720" (2) 
tracing,  for  titles  not  in  library, 

080(2) 
translations  under  diffeient  titles, 

980(2) 
See     also     General     references; 
Name  references;  Subject  ref- 
erences 
Reporters  of  trials,  added  entry  for, 

44 
Reports,    119,140 

analytics,    i55no/c 
Reprints,  115,159k 
Revision  marks,  8c 
Roman  numerals,  4,1201 
Rubber  stamps,  74,77 
Rulers 

numerals  used  after  names  of,  4, 
i2binote,Jsl 

official  publications,  151c 
Running  titles,  96 

Sacred  books,  99 

brackets    not    used    in    headings, 
6^,99 
Sculpture,  catalog  entries  for,  169-77 

Secondary    cards,    see    Added    entry 

cards,  General  secondary  cards 
Secondary  entry,  defined,  19 
Secondary   fulness,   220 
"See  analytics",   noo 
"See"  references,  28  S.C.p.48 
"See  also"   references,  29  S.C.p.49 

filing,  35 
Selections  from  a  single  work  of  an 

author,    160 
Semicolon,  6f,i 
Separates,   159 

Sequels   and    supplements,   50,118 
Serial   number,   omission   from   title, 

I3& 
Serials 

definition,  119 

treatment,    New    York    state    li- 
brary method,  133 

See  also  Periodicals 
Series,    definition,   65 
Series  cards,   71   S.C.p.SS-89,93-96 

added    editions,    117 

addresses,  bulletins,  society  pub- 
lications, etc.,  158 

Bible,    99^(7) 

series    by    one     author,     720(5) 
S.C.p.96 
Series  entry,  definition,  70 
Series  form  for  analytics,  164 

editor   card,    104 
Series   notes,  65 

added  editions.  117c 


brackets   not   used,  68 
documents,    157 
spacing,    ic,2in 
Signature,    cataloger's    18 
Simpler  cataloging,    io,22bi.   S.   C. 

p.  17,  39-40,  57,  60-61,  65-66 
Size,  I5£ 

independents,    1130 
omission  of,  l$g  note 
periodicals 

complete  finished  sets,  124a 

(4)(c) 
complete   current   sets,    128a 

(3)(0 

Sobriquets,    00 
Societies 

as  authors,  136 

joint  authorship,  540(1)30 

names   in   title,    13*7 

proceedings,    1396 

publications,  series  cards,  1586 
Sovereigns 

numerals    used    after   names   of, 
4,12^1710/^,13/ 

official  publications,  151c 
Spacing 

added   editions,   uyb,c 

analytics,   no/z 

author  headings,  2J,g,\2b\ 

collation,    ic,2in 

contents,  7$note 

dates  of  birth  and  death,  1202 

handwritten   cards,   \b,c,d 

headings,     voluminous     authors, 
ioia 

imprint,   ic,2m,i4 

initials,  12c 

series   cards,   720(4)    note 

subject  heading,  210* 

typewritten  cards,  2 
Special  catalog,  museum  objects 

form   of,    176 

value,  171 
Specific  references,  30a 

filing,  35 
Spelling 

errors,  how  indicated,  13* 

forenames    or    surnames,    refer- 
ences   from    variant    spellings, 
59* 
Stamps,  74,  77 
State    publications,    145 
Subheads,     Government     documents, 

inversion,   148 
Subject  analytics,  100,1090  S.C.  p.175- 
84 

tracing,   110/(2) 
Subject   card   and   title   card,    choice 

between,   36 
Subject  cards,   19  S.C.p.38-40 

added    editions,    117c   S.C.p.197 

anonymous  books,  920(2) 

changed   titles,  070(2)0 

collections  under  title.  T07 


301 


CATALOGING  RULES 


Subject  cards  (continued) 

contents,    74 

contents  in  incomplete  works,  84c 

criticism,    161 

editor's  and  translator's  name  in 
title,   13^3 

government  documents,  152 

joint    authors,    S.C.p.73-76 

periodicals 

complete   finished    sets,    124b 

S.C.p.21 1,213 
complete    current    sets,    1286 

(2) 
incomplete  sets,  1296(2) 

series  note,  69 

tracing,    25ft 
Subject   fulness,   226 
Subject  headings,   21 

abbreviations,  5a 

books  on,  210 

choice  of,  21a 

color,   21b 

list,  21a  note, 34,^.278 

position,  21c 

punctuation,  2id 

spacing,  21  d 
Subject    references,    26    S.C.p.48,49 

color  of  ink  used  for,  31 

filing,  35 

general  references,  30& 

list,  34 

tracing,  34 
Subject  style,  21b  note, 31 
Subtitle,  376,95a  note 

definition,  11 

punctuation,  60 
Supplements,   50,118    S.C.p.200 

periodicals,  1240(7) 
Surnames 

compound,    59^ 

variant  spellings,  references,  59/ 

with  prefixes,  references,  59^ 

See  also  Author's  name ;  Married 
women 

Table,    definition,    15/(2) 
Tables,    15/(1) footnote   5 
Three  dots,  see  Omissions  from  title 
Title,    13 

abbreviations    not    used   in,   56 

added  editions,  117& 

additions  in  brackets,   13A 

additions  in  language  of,  13/t 

alternative,   see   Alternative    title 

analytics,   1  roc,/ 

anonymous    books,    920(1  ),b(l), 
.(3) 

binder's,  96 

changed,  97 

periodicals,    131 

collections  under,   105 

copied    exactly    from    title-page, 
13b 


cover,  96 

definition,   11 

editor  cards,  42c 

editors'   names  included  in,   13^3 

explanatory,  punctuation,  6a 

fulness    of    names    in,    13a 

half,  96 

in  more  than  one  language,  13&2 

indention,    120,23 

joint  author  card,  54a (3), (4) 

omissions    from,    see    Omissions 

from   title 
partial,   95,i02r2 

periodicals,    130 
running,    96 
should  begin  with  first  words  of 

printed    title,    13& 
single  phrase  or  combination  of 

phrases,    13m 
spacing,   ic,2i 
spelling,  131 
subject   cards,   23 
translation,    376 
translations  under  different  titles, 

98 
translators'    names    included    in, 

13^3 
Title   card   and   subject  card,   choice 

between,   36 
Title  cards,  36  S.C.p.57 
added  editions,   ii7e 
analytics,   109c  S.C.p. 174-83 

tracing,   110/(2), (3) 
anonymous  books,  92a (2), 6(5) 
Bible,  99<:(6) 
binder's   titles,   966 
changed  titles,  970 
periodicals,    131 
cover  titles,  960 
half   titles,  960 
indention,  37a,g 

initials,  asterisks,  etc.,  books  pub- 
lished under,  936,94a (2), 6 (3) 
partial  title,  95,i02C2 

periodicals,  130 
pseudonyms,      books      published 

under,  88  S.C.p.i  13-14 
running  titles,  966 
translations  under  different  titles, 

980(1) 
voluminous     authors,     102     S.C. 

p.157 

Title   entry 

defined,  36 

government  documents,  1400 
as  main  entry,   149a 

periodicals,  124 
Title  of  series,  reference  to  author, 

72a($)note 
Title-page 

definition,  11 

more  than  one,  13&2 


302 


INDEX 


Title-page  checks,  13b  footnote 
series  entries,  J2e 

Title-pages 

in  foreign   languages,    1363 
of    different    volumes,    varying, 
1301 

Title   reference,  changed   titles,  97& 

(i)(6) 

Titles  of   honor,    I2b,6itwte 

abbreviations,    1261 

author  of  series,  720(3),  (5) 

author's   name,   analytics,   110& 

editor  of  series,  720(3) 

joint  authors,  540(1) 

list,    p.291 

omission   in   contents,   75 

omission   in   title,    13& 

pseudonyms,   86b,c 

punctuation,    12&1 

spacing,  2(7,1261 
Titles  of  noblemen 

brackets  not  used  for,  6d 

given  in  contents,  75 

reference  from  and  to,   59   S.C. 
p.8o 
Titles  of  rare  books,   13&4 
Tracing,    25   S.C.p.46 

analytics,  110/ 

changed  titles,  97&(s) 

changed  titles,   notes,   976 

general  secondary  entries,  46 

independents,  1136,1146(3)  (e) 

partial    titles,   95c 

references,  34 

references    for  titles   not   in   li- 
brary, 980(2) 

routine,  80 

series  cards,  references,  72^(2) 

series  entries,  72d(i) 
Transactions  of  societies  and  institu- 
tions,   119,139ft 
Translation,      statement      regarding, 

punctuation,   6h 
Translations,    title,    37ft 
Translations    under    different    titles, 
98    S.C.p.  139-43 


Translator 

as  author,  60 

fulness  of  name  in  title,  130 

on  title  cards,  370* 

title  includes  name  of,   13^:3 
Translator  cards,  40  S.C.p.6o 

analytics,   logd 

Bible,  99c (5)    S.C.p.152 

changed  title,  976(2)  (c) 

tracing,    256 

Trays,  catalog,  labels  on,  p. 287 
Typewritten   cards,   2 

Umlaut,    13/.59/   S.C.p.79,81 

Various      pagings,      independents, 

"4K3) 
Volumes,   150"  (2) 

analytics,    110^(4) 

inclusion    in    call    numbers, 
1 1  Oi 
annuals,   1346 
bulletins,     society     transactions, 

1586(1) 
definition,   I5d(i) 
editor  cards,  420* 
incomplete  sets,  82 
paged  continuously,  15^(10) 
periodicals 

complete  current  sets,   1280 

(3)  (a) 
complete  finished  sets,  124a 

(4) (a) 
inclusion  in  call  number,  125, 
128c 
litle  cards,   37/ 
Voluminous   authors,    100   S.C.p. 157- 

58 
Vowels,  modified,   137,59;  S.C.p.79,81 

Women,      married,      see     Married 
women 

Writing,   10 

Year-books,   119,    134 


303 


°[' 


SOUTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 

405  Hilgard  Avenue,  Los  Angeles,  CA  90024-1388 

Return  this  material  to  the  library 

from  which  it  was  borrowed. 


..^SOUTHERN  REGIONAL 


LIBRARY  FACILITY 


D     000  341  113 


